User Guide

  
  User Guide

Table of contents
1 User Guide. Introduction ................................................................................................. 28
1.1 General Information ..................................................................................................................... 28
1.2 Purpose of the Document............................................................................................................. 28
1.3 Purpose and functionality of Axxon Next .................................................................................... 28
2 Software Lifecycle Policy................................................................................................. 30
2.1 Software Lifecycle Phases ............................................................................................................ 30
2.2 Software Technical Support......................................................................................................... 30
2.3 Standard Period for Release of Software Updates ..................................................................... 30
2.4 Licensing Policy with Regard to Software Updates  ................................................................... 30
3 Description of the Software Package.............................................................................. 31
3.1 Basic principles of building a security system based on the Axxon Next software package .... 31
3.2 Axxon Next features: reference information................................................................................ 31
3.2.1 Micromodule architecture............................................................................................................................ 31
3.2.2 Support for IP cameras................................................................................................................................. 32
3.2.3 Support for analog cameras in Axxon Next ................................................................................................. 32
3.2.4 Video and Audio Detection Tools ................................................................................................................. 32
3.2.5 Video archive ................................................................................................................................................. 33
3.2.6 Interactive 3D Map ........................................................................................................................................ 33
3.2.7 User Interface ................................................................................................................................................ 33
3.2.8 Face Recognition........................................................................................................................................... 34
3.2.9 NumberPlate Recognition ............................................................................................................................ 34
3.2.10 Receiving Events from External Systems..................................................................................................... 34
3.3 Functions of the Distributed Security System ............................................................................. 34
3.4 Network Topologies of the Axxon Next Software Package......................................................... 35
3.5 Specifications of the Axxon Next Software Package................................................................... 35
3.6 Implementation Requirements for the Axxon Next Software Package ..................................... 36
3.6.1 Limitations of the Axxon Next Software Package ....................................................................................... 36
3.6.2 Operating system requirements .................................................................................................................. 38
3.6.3 Disk storage subsystem requirements......................................................................................................... 39
3.6.3.1 General requirements................................................................................................................................... 40
3.6.3.2 Storage requirements................................................................................................................................... 40
3.6.3.2.1 Minimum requirements ................................................................................................................................ 40

 –  2
  User Guide

3.6.3.2.2 Size of archives.............................................................................................................................................. 40

3.6.3.2.3 Database of the system log .......................................................................................................................... 41
3.6.3.2.4 Object trajectory database  .......................................................................................................................... 41
3.6.3.2.5 Self-diagnostics service ................................................................................................................................ 42
3.6.4 Hardware requirements ............................................................................................................................... 42
3.6.4.1 General hardware requirements.................................................................................................................. 42
3.6.4.1.1 Minimal RAM requirements .......................................................................................................................... 42
3.6.4.1.2 Minimum and recommended requirements for graphics cards ................................................................ 42
3.6.4.2 Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation............................................................................. 43
3.6.4.3 Hardware requirements for GPU based video decoding ............................................................................ 44
3.6.4.4 Hardware requirements for Licence plate recognition (RR)....................................................................... 44
3.6.4.5 Hardware requirements for face detection ................................................................................................. 44
3.6.4.6 Hardware requirements for Licence plate recognition (VT) ....................................................................... 45
3.6.5 TCP/IP Network Bandwidth Requirements ................................................................................................. 45
3.6.6 BIOS configuration requirements ................................................................................................................ 45
3.6.7 Running Axxon Next VMS in Virtual Machines ............................................................................................. 45
3.7 Interface of the Axxon Next Software Package ........................................................................... 46
3.8 Ports used by the Axxon Next Software Package........................................................................ 47
3.9 Requirements for Personnel Quantity and Qualifications.......................................................... 47
4 Installing the Axxon Next Software Package .................................................................. 49
4.1 Installing equipment..................................................................................................................... 49
4.1.1 Types of Devices Used .................................................................................................................................. 49
4.1.2 Connecting IP Devices .................................................................................................................................. 49
4.1.3 Configuring IP Devices in Windows .............................................................................................................. 50
4.1.4 Video capture cards pins .............................................................................................................................. 50
4.1.4.1 WS-216 video capture card pins................................................................................................................... 50
4.2 Installation the Axxon Next Software Package ........................................................................... 51
4.2.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................................... 51
4.2.2 Installing DetectorPack add-ons.................................................................................................................. 62
4.2.3 Repairing Installation ................................................................................................................................... 63
4.2.4 Removal......................................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2.5 Update ........................................................................................................................................................... 67
4.2.6 Silent install (Quiet Mode) ............................................................................................................................ 68
4.2.7 Updating Drivers Pack .................................................................................................................................. 71
4.2.8 Automatic update of a remote Client .......................................................................................................... 72

 –  3
  User Guide

5 Licensing of the software product .................................................................................. 74

5.1 Axxon Next license types .............................................................................................................. 74
5.2 Licensing methods........................................................................................................................ 77
5.3 Product Activation Utility ............................................................................................................. 77
5.4 License Activation ......................................................................................................................... 79
6 Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package ........................................... 80
6.1 Startup........................................................................................................................................... 80
6.1.1 Starting a Server............................................................................................................................................ 80
6.1.2 Starting an Axxon Next Client....................................................................................................................... 80
6.1.3 Running multiple Axxon Next Clients........................................................................................................... 84
6.1.4 Axxon Next in demo mode............................................................................................................................ 84
6.1.5 Automatic Start of the Client........................................................................................................................ 85
6.2 Shutdown ...................................................................................................................................... 85
6.2.1 Shutting down an Axxon Next Client............................................................................................................ 85
6.2.2 Shutting down a Server ................................................................................................................................ 86
6.3 Automatic Server restart .............................................................................................................. 86
6.4 Switching Users Quickly ............................................................................................................... 86
6.5 Cross-System Client ...................................................................................................................... 87
6.6 Connecting LDAP users................................................................................................................. 88
6.7 Connecting to Another Server Quickly......................................................................................... 88
7 Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package ...................................................... 90
7.1 General information on system configuration ............................................................................ 90
7.1.1 System configuration: stages ....................................................................................................................... 90
7.1.2 Applying and resetting settings.................................................................................................................... 90
7.1.3 Display of parameters in interface ............................................................................................................... 91
7.1.4 System objects .............................................................................................................................................. 91
7.1.5 Object search ................................................................................................................................................ 92
7.2 Hardware configuration ............................................................................................................... 93
7.2.1 Configuring Axxon domains ......................................................................................................................... 93
7.2.1.1 Axxon-domain object.................................................................................................................................... 94
7.2.1.2 Axxon Domain operations ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2.1.2.1 Creating a new domain................................................................................................................................. 95
7.2.1.2.2 Adding a Server to an existing Axxon Domain ............................................................................................. 95
7.2.1.2.3 Removing a Server from an Axxon Domain ................................................................................................. 97

 –  4
  User Guide

7.2.1.3 Cases of Axxon Domain configuration ......................................................................................................... 97

7.2.2 Adding and removing IP devices .................................................................................................................. 99
7.2.2.1 Bulk creation of IP devices ......................................................................................................................... 103
7.2.3 Configuring System Objects for Devices .................................................................................................... 104
7.2.3.1 The Server Object........................................................................................................................................ 104
7.2.3.1.1 Configuring the web server ........................................................................................................................ 105
7.2.3.1.2 Configuring an RTSP Server ....................................................................................................................... 106
7.2.3.2 The Video Camera Object ........................................................................................................................... 107
7.2.3.2.1 Restoring default camera settings ............................................................................................................. 111
7.2.3.2.2 Mass configuration...................................................................................................................................... 111
7.2.3.2.3 Configuring an Adaptive Video Stream...................................................................................................... 112
7.2.3.2.4 Configuring fisheye cameras ...................................................................................................................... 113
7.2.3.2.5 Connecting and configuring cameras over standard protocols............................................................... 114
7.2.3.2.5.1 Notes on configuring video cameras connected via ONVIF......................................................................................... 114
7.2.3.2.5.2 Configuring connection of video cameras via RTSP .................................................................................................... 116
7.2.3.2.5.3 Connecting cameras via the GB/T28181 protocol........................................................................................................ 117
7.2.3.2.5.4 Generic Drivers (General device, generic)..................................................................................................................... 127
7.2.3.2.5.5 Connecting and setting up devices with FFmpeg driver.............................................................................................. 128
7.2.3.2.6 Configuring connection of video cameras with dynamic IP addresses ................................................... 134
7.2.3.2.7 Configuring virtual video cameras ............................................................................................................. 134
7.2.3.2.8 Privacy mask settings ................................................................................................................................. 135
7.2.3.2.9 Putting a text over the camera window..................................................................................................... 136
7.2.3.3 The IP Server Object.................................................................................................................................... 138
7.2.3.3.1 Configuring Virtual IP Servers..................................................................................................................... 139
7.2.3.4 The Microphone Object .............................................................................................................................. 140
7.2.3.5 The PTZ Object............................................................................................................................................ 141
7.2.3.5.1 Configure HTTP-CGI commands to control Wash&Wiper ......................................................................... 142
7.2.3.6 The Channel object ..................................................................................................................................... 143
7.2.3.7 The Input Object ......................................................................................................................................... 143
7.2.3.7.1 Configure Virtual Inputs.............................................................................................................................. 144
7.2.3.8 The Output Object ...................................................................................................................................... 145
7.2.3.9 The Speaker Object..................................................................................................................................... 147
7.2.3.9.1 Creating and Configuring an Object........................................................................................................... 148
7.2.3.9.2 Configuring a Speaker Object..................................................................................................................... 149
7.2.3.9.3 Checking Audio Notification....................................................................................................................... 150

 –  5
  User Guide

7.2.3.10 The Embedded Storage object................................................................................................................... 150

7.2.4 Particulars of Configuration of Devices ..................................................................................................... 151
7.2.4.1 AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS Sensor-Relay cards................................................................................................. 151
7.2.4.1.1 Connecting AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS Sensor-Relay cards............................................................................. 151
7.2.4.1.2 Electrical and technical specifications of AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS devices ................................................ 153
7.2.4.1.3 Special features of configuring AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS card in Axxon Next .............................................. 154
7.2.4.2 Axis IP Devices ............................................................................................................................................. 154
7.2.4.2.1 Serial number check ................................................................................................................................... 154
7.2.4.2.2 Bonjour function ......................................................................................................................................... 154
7.2.4.2.3 Video streams.............................................................................................................................................. 155
7.2.4.3 CCTV Keyboards .......................................................................................................................................... 155
7.2.4.3.1 General Information about CCTV Keyboards ............................................................................................ 155
7.2.4.3.2 Axis T8310 specific configuration features ................................................................................................ 156
7.2.4.3.2.1 Setting up on a Server.................................................................................................................................................... 156
7.2.4.3.2.2 Setting up on a Client..................................................................................................................................................... 156
7.2.4.3.3 Hikvision DS-1100KI specific configuration features ................................................................................ 156
7.2.4.3.4 UNIVIEW KB-1100 specific configuration features .................................................................................... 157
7.2.4.3.4.1 General description of the UNIVIEW KB-1100 PTZ control device............................................................................... 157
7.2.4.3.4.2 Configuring a remote control before adding it to Axxon Next..................................................................................... 158
7.2.4.3.4.3 Configuring  UNIVIEW KB-1100 in Axxon Next .............................................................................................................. 158
7.2.4.3.5 Hikvision DS-1200KI specific configuration features ................................................................................ 159
7.2.4.3.5.1 Configuring the Hikvision DS-1200KI control device before adding it to Axxon Next ................................................ 159
7.2.4.3.5.2 Features of the Hikvision DS-1200KI control device operation in Axxon Next ........................................................... 160
7.2.4.3.6 Dahua DH-NKB1000 specific configuration features ................................................................................ 160
7.2.4.3.6.1 Keyboard operating modes........................................................................................................................................... 160
7.2.4.3.6.2 Specific OS settings........................................................................................................................................................ 161
7.2.4.3.6.3 Specific Axxon Next settings.......................................................................................................................................... 161
7.2.4.4 CH VM-Desktop USB multifunction controller........................................................................................... 161
7.2.4.5 Configuring Vivotek Panoramic PTZ .......................................................................................................... 161
7.2.4.6 Video capture cards .................................................................................................................................... 161
7.2.4.6.1 WS-216 video capture cards ....................................................................................................................... 161
7.2.4.6.2 YUAN PD652 cards....................................................................................................................................... 162
7.2.4.7 Joysticks ...................................................................................................................................................... 163
7.2.4.8 Sony IP Devices ........................................................................................................................................... 163
7.2.4.9 Setting up Tibbo relay/loop boards........................................................................................................... 163
7.2.5 Configuring object tracking........................................................................................................................ 166

 –  6
  User Guide

7.2.5.1 Configuring Tag & Track Lite ...................................................................................................................... 166

7.2.5.2 Configuring Tag & Track Pro....................................................................................................................... 166
7.2.5.2.1 Camera requirements for Tag & Track Pro ................................................................................................ 166
7.2.5.2.2 Configuring Smooth Motion for PTZ cameras ........................................................................................... 166
7.2.5.2.3 Linking panoramic cameras to a PTZ camera........................................................................................... 167
7.2.5.2.4 Mapping PTZ positions to panoramic field of view (calibration) ............................................................. 167
7.2.5.2.5 Setting PTZ mode for Tag & Track Pro....................................................................................................... 169
7.2.6 Receiving Events from External Systems................................................................................................... 169
7.2.6.1 Event Source Object.................................................................................................................................... 169
7.2.6.2 Configuring POS devices............................................................................................................................. 170
7.2.6.2.1 Connecting POS devices ............................................................................................................................. 170
7.2.6.2.2 Configuring titles view ................................................................................................................................ 170
7.2.6.2.3 Configuring receipt beginning / end .......................................................................................................... 172
7.2.6.2.4 Configuring keywords................................................................................................................................. 173
7.2.6.2.5 Importing parcers ....................................................................................................................................... 174
7.2.6.3 Receiving Intellect Events........................................................................................................................... 175
7.2.6.4 Configuring Receiving Events from CommaxComplexServer .................................................................. 176
7.2.6.4.1 Configuring CommaxComplexServer via Event Source............................................................................ 176
7.2.6.4.2 Configuring CommaxComplexServer via virtual IP server........................................................................ 177
7.2.7 Configuring video camera groups.............................................................................................................. 178
7.2.7.1 Procedure for configuring video camera groups ...................................................................................... 179
7.2.7.2 Creating a Group object.............................................................................................................................. 179
7.2.7.3 Adding video cameras created in the system to Group objects ............................................................... 180
7.2.7.4 Creating a system of groups and subgroups ............................................................................................. 181
7.2.7.5 Managing Group and Video camera objects.............................................................................................. 181
7.2.8 Autocopy data from local to centralized servers ...................................................................................... 183
7.3 Configuring Archives ................................................................................................................... 185
7.3.1 General information of configuring archives............................................................................................. 185
7.3.2 General information of SolidStore file system .......................................................................................... 186
7.3.3 Creating archives ........................................................................................................................................ 186
7.3.3.1 Creating a local archive .............................................................................................................................. 186
7.3.3.2 Creating a network archive ........................................................................................................................ 188
7.3.3.3 Creating an archive based on existing archive volumes........................................................................... 190
7.3.4 Binding a camera to an archive.................................................................................................................. 191
7.3.5 Setting the default archive ......................................................................................................................... 193

 –  7
  User Guide

7.3.6 Configuring data replication ...................................................................................................................... 194

7.3.7 Configuring access restrictions to older footage ...................................................................................... 195
7.3.8 How to preserve Video Footage continuity after replacing a video source ............................................. 195
7.3.9 Protecting video footage from FIFO overwriting....................................................................................... 196
7.3.9.1 Setting up a macro for automatic copying of protected records............................................................. 196
7.3.9.2 Setting up record protection...................................................................................................................... 197
7.3.10 Increasing capacity of an archive volume ................................................................................................. 198
7.3.10.1 Increasing capacity of an archive volume as a partition .......................................................................... 198
7.3.10.2 Increasing capacity of an archive volume as a file.................................................................................... 199
7.3.11 Editing archives........................................................................................................................................... 199
7.3.12 Deleting and formatting archive volumes ................................................................................................. 199
7.3.13 Deleting archives......................................................................................................................................... 200
7.3.14 View information about the size of archives and Server disk space. ....................................................... 201
7.3.15 Saving the archive when replacing a video source ................................................................................... 202
7.4 Configuring detection tools........................................................................................................ 202
7.4.1 General Information on Configuring Detection......................................................................................... 202
7.4.2 General information on metadata ............................................................................................................. 204
7.4.3 General information on Neural Analytics .................................................................................................. 205
7.4.3.1 Requirements to data collection for neural network training.................................................................. 205
7.4.4 Detection tools implementation on processors........................................................................................ 206
7.4.5 Creating Detection Tools ............................................................................................................................ 207
7.4.6 VMD (video motion detection).................................................................................................................... 209
7.4.6.1 Video requirements for VMD....................................................................................................................... 209
7.4.6.2 VMD features and specifications ................................................................................................................ 210
7.4.6.3 Configuring VMD.......................................................................................................................................... 210
7.4.7 Service Video Detection Tools.................................................................................................................... 212
7.4.7.1 Functions of Service Video Detection Tools .............................................................................................. 212
7.4.7.2 Video Requirements for Service Video Detection Tools............................................................................ 213
7.4.7.3 Set Parameters of Video Detection ............................................................................................................ 213
7.4.8 Service Audio Detection Tools.................................................................................................................... 214
7.4.8.1 Functions of Service Audio Detection Tools .............................................................................................. 214
7.4.8.2 Set Parameters of Audio Detection............................................................................................................ 215
7.4.9 Scene Analytics ........................................................................................................................................... 215
7.4.9.1 Functions of Scene Analytics...................................................................................................................... 215
7.4.9.2 Video requirements for scene analytics detection.................................................................................... 216

 –  8
  User Guide

7.4.9.2.1 Video requirements for object tracker-based scene analytics ................................................................. 216
7.4.9.2.2 Video requirements for object tracker (with neural filter)-based scene analytics.................................. 217
7.4.9.2.3 Video requirements for neural tracker-based scene analytics................................................................. 217
7.4.9.2.4 Video requirements for VMD-based scene analytics................................................................................. 218
7.4.9.3 Camera requirements for neural filter operation...................................................................................... 219
7.4.9.4 Camera requirements for neural tracker operation ................................................................................. 219
7.4.9.5 Camera requirements for abandoned objects detection ......................................................................... 219
7.4.9.6 Configuring Scene Analytics Detection Tools............................................................................................ 220
7.4.9.6.1 General information on Scene Analytics ................................................................................................... 220
7.4.9.6.2 Setting up Tracker-based Scene Analytics ................................................................................................ 220
7.4.9.6.2.1 Setting General Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 220
7.4.9.6.2.2 Settings Specific to Cross Line Detection ..................................................................................................................... 229
7.4.9.6.2.3 Settings specific to Abandoned Object detection........................................................................................................ 231
7.4.9.6.2.4 Settings Specific to Loitering Detection ....................................................................................................................... 232
7.4.9.6.2.5 Settings Specific to Multiple objects............................................................................................................................. 232
7.4.9.6.2.6 Settings Specific to Stop in area detection .................................................................................................................. 233
7.4.9.6.2.7 Settings Specific to Move from area to area detection................................................................................................ 233
7.4.9.6.3 Setting up Neural Tracker-based Scene Analytics .................................................................................... 234
7.4.9.6.4 Setting up VMD-based Scene Analytics...................................................................................................... 236
7.4.10 Face detection tool ..................................................................................................................................... 237
7.4.10.1 Functions of facial detection...................................................................................................................... 237
7.4.10.2 Camera requirements for facial detection ................................................................................................ 237
7.4.10.3 Configure Facial Recognition ..................................................................................................................... 237
7.4.10.3.1 Setting up advanced facial detection tools............................................................................................... 239
7.4.10.3.1.1 Configuring masks detection ........................................................................................................................................ 239
7.4.10.3.1.2 Configuring appearance in area detection................................................................................................................... 240
7.4.10.3.1.3 Configuring loitering in area detection......................................................................................................................... 241
7.4.10.3.2 Fine-tuning the facial recognition tool ...................................................................................................... 242
7.4.10.4 Configuring real-time facial recognition.................................................................................................... 242
7.4.10.4.1 Setting the automatic response to an identification of a recognized face against the list .................... 243
7.4.10.4.1.1 Examples of macros used for working with face lists .................................................................................................. 244
7.4.10.4.2 Configuring FaceCube integration ............................................................................................................. 247
7.4.11 Face Detection and Temperature Control with Mobotix M16 TR cameras .............................................. 248
7.4.11.1 Functional parameters of the Face Detection and Temperature Control ............................................... 248
7.4.11.2 Camera requirements for face detection and temperature control ........................................................ 248
7.4.11.3 Temperature screening protocol ............................................................................................................... 248

 –  9
  User Guide

7.4.11.4 Pre-configuration of the Mobotix M16 TR camera .................................................................................... 249

7.4.11.5 Configuring Face Detection and Temperature Control ............................................................................ 252
7.4.12 Automatic Number Plate Recognition (LPR/ANPR) tools ......................................................................... 254
7.4.12.1 License plate recognition (VT).................................................................................................................... 254
7.4.12.1.1 License plate recognition (VT) features and specifications...................................................................... 254
7.4.12.1.2 Camera requirements for License plate recognition (VT)......................................................................... 255
7.4.12.1.3 Configuring License plate recognition (VT) ............................................................................................... 256
7.4.12.1.4 Fine-tuning the VT number plate detection tool....................................................................................... 259
7.4.12.1.5 Activating a software license key for the ANPR ......................................................................................... 261
7.4.12.1.6 Activating the trial version of the ANPR via a software key ...................................................................... 263
7.4.12.2 License plate recognition (IV)..................................................................................................................... 264
7.4.12.2.1 License plate recognition (IV) features and specifications ....................................................................... 264
7.4.12.2.2 Camera requirements for License plate recognition (IV).......................................................................... 264
7.4.12.2.2.1 Examples of correct and incorrect video images ......................................................................................................... 264
7.4.12.2.3 Configuring License plate recognition (IV) ................................................................................................ 265
7.4.12.3 Licence plate recognition (RR) ................................................................................................................... 268
7.4.12.3.1 License plate recognition (RR) features and specifications ..................................................................... 268
7.4.12.3.2 Camera requirements for License plate recognition (RR) ........................................................................ 268
7.4.12.3.3 Configuring License plate recognition (RR) ............................................................................................... 269
7.4.12.4 Configuring real-time vehicle license plate recognition........................................................................... 271
7.4.12.4.1 Setting the automatic response to an identification of a recognized LP against the list ....................... 271
7.4.13 Neural Counter............................................................................................................................................ 271
7.4.13.1 Camera requirements for neural counter operation ................................................................................ 271
7.4.13.2 Functions of the neural counter................................................................................................................. 272
7.4.13.3 Configuring a Neuralcounter...................................................................................................................... 272
7.4.14 Fire and Smoke Detection Tools ................................................................................................................ 274
7.4.14.1 Functions of Fire and Smoke detection ..................................................................................................... 274
7.4.14.2 Camera requirements for Fire and Smoke Detection ............................................................................... 275
7.4.14.3 Configuring Smoke and Fire Detection Tools............................................................................................ 275
7.4.15 Equipment detection tool (PPE) ................................................................................................................ 277
7.4.15.1 Functions of the Equipment detection tool (PPE)..................................................................................... 277
7.4.15.2 Camera requirements for the equipment detection tool (PPE) ............................................................... 278
7.4.15.3 Configuring equipment detection tool (PPE) ............................................................................................ 278
7.4.16 Person-based privacy masking .................................................................................................................. 280
7.4.16.1 Person-based privacy mask functions....................................................................................................... 280

 –  10
  User Guide

7.4.16.2 Camera requirements for privacy masking ............................................................................................... 280

7.4.16.3 Person-based privacy mask configuration................................................................................................ 280
7.4.17 Pose detection tools ................................................................................................................................... 281
7.4.17.1 Functions of Pose Detection....................................................................................................................... 281
7.4.17.2 Camera requirements for pose detection ................................................................................................. 282
7.4.17.3 Configure Pose Detection ........................................................................................................................... 282
7.4.17.3.1 Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools ....................................................................... 282
7.4.17.3.2 Specific settings for People Counter.......................................................................................................... 284
7.4.17.3.3 Specific settings for the Man Down detection tool ................................................................................... 285
7.4.17.3.4 Specific settings for the Sitting person detection tool ............................................................................. 286
7.4.17.3.5 Specific settings for handrail holding detection ....................................................................................... 288
7.4.17.3.6 Specific settings for people masking ......................................................................................................... 289
7.4.17.3.7 Specific settings for close-standing people detection.............................................................................. 290
7.4.18 Retail Analytics............................................................................................................................................ 292
7.4.18.1 Functions of retail analytics ....................................................................................................................... 292
7.4.18.2 Camera requirements for queue detection ............................................................................................... 292
7.4.18.3 Camera requirements for Visitor Counter operation ................................................................................ 293
7.4.18.4 Configuring retail analytics detection tools .............................................................................................. 294
7.4.18.4.1 Configuring the queue detection tool........................................................................................................ 294
7.4.18.4.2 Configuring the visitors counter................................................................................................................. 295
7.4.19 Water Level Detection................................................................................................................................. 298
7.4.19.1 Camera requirements for water level detection ....................................................................................... 298
7.4.19.2 Configuring water level detection.............................................................................................................. 298
7.4.20 Embedded Detection Tools ........................................................................................................................ 300
7.4.20.1 Embedded Temperature Detection Tool................................................................................................... 301
7.4.20.2 Obtaining metadata.................................................................................................................................... 301
7.4.20.3 ANPR ............................................................................................................................................................ 302
7.4.20.4 AxxonSoft tracking in Axis devices ............................................................................................................. 302
7.4.21 Configuring Inputs ...................................................................................................................................... 305
7.4.22 Mass Configure Detection Tools................................................................................................................. 305
7.4.23 Checking the Triggering of a Detection Tool ............................................................................................. 306
7.4.24 Automatic Rules .......................................................................................................................................... 307
7.5 Configuring Macros ..................................................................................................................... 308
7.5.1 General information about the macros ..................................................................................................... 308
7.5.2 Create Macros.............................................................................................................................................. 309

 –  11
  User Guide

7.5.3 Configuring filters for event-driven macros .............................................................................................. 312

7.5.3.1 Specific parameters for triggering a face recognition macro................................................................... 315
7.5.3.2 Triggering macros by statistical data ........................................................................................................ 316
7.5.4 Settings specific to actions......................................................................................................................... 317
7.5.4.1 Wait for event .............................................................................................................................................. 317
7.5.4.2 Wait for timeout .......................................................................................................................................... 319
7.5.4.3 Wait till previous action finishes ................................................................................................................ 319
7.5.4.4 Record to archive ........................................................................................................................................ 321
7.5.4.5 Trigger an alarm.......................................................................................................................................... 324
7.5.4.6 Switch output.............................................................................................................................................. 325
7.5.4.7 Arm /disarm a camera ................................................................................................................................ 325
7.5.4.8 Switch to a PTZ camera preset................................................................................................................... 325
7.5.4.9 Show camera............................................................................................................................................... 326
7.5.4.10 Opening layout............................................................................................................................................ 327
7.5.4.11 Starting export ............................................................................................................................................ 327
7.5.4.12 Start replication .......................................................................................................................................... 329
7.5.4.13 Play audio on Server ................................................................................................................................... 330
7.5.4.14 E-mail notification ...................................................................................................................................... 331
7.5.4.14.1 The E-mail Object........................................................................................................................................ 333
7.5.4.14.1.1 Creating the E-mail Object ............................................................................................................................................ 333
7.5.4.14.1.2 Configuring the E-mail Object ....................................................................................................................................... 333
7.5.4.14.1.3 Checking E-mail Notification......................................................................................................................................... 334
7.5.4.15 SMS notification .......................................................................................................................................... 335
7.5.4.15.1 The SMS Object ........................................................................................................................................... 336
7.5.4.15.1.1 Procedure of configuring SMS notifications................................................................................................................. 336
7.5.4.15.1.2 Creating the SMS Object ................................................................................................................................................ 337
7.5.4.15.1.3 Configuring the SMS Object........................................................................................................................................... 337
7.5.4.15.1.4 Checking SMS notifications ........................................................................................................................................... 338
7.5.4.16 Starting an external program on Clients ................................................................................................... 338
7.5.4.17 Starting an external program on Servers .................................................................................................. 338
7.5.4.18 Start / stop slideshows of layouts. ............................................................................................................. 340
7.5.4.19 Enable/disable a component ..................................................................................................................... 340
7.5.4.20 Checking for archive video recordings....................................................................................................... 341
7.5.4.21 Switching to Forensic Search results ......................................................................................................... 342
7.5.4.22 Voice notification from Client..................................................................................................................... 342
7.5.4.23 Voice notification on Client ........................................................................................................................ 343

 –  12
  User Guide

7.5.4.24 Executing a macro....................................................................................................................................... 344

7.5.4.25 Alarm dispatch ............................................................................................................................................ 344
7.5.4.26 Executing a web query................................................................................................................................ 344
7.5.4.27 Text templates in macros ........................................................................................................................... 345
7.5.5 Cyclical macros ........................................................................................................................................... 348
7.6 Configuring user permissions..................................................................................................... 350
7.6.1 Creating and configuring roles................................................................................................................... 351
7.6.2 Connecting to an LDAP catalog.................................................................................................................. 356
7.6.3 Working with users...................................................................................................................................... 358
7.6.3.1 Creating local users..................................................................................................................................... 358
7.6.3.2 Locking a user account ............................................................................................................................... 359
7.6.3.3 Creating LDAP connections ........................................................................................................................ 360
7.6.3.4 Synchronize LDAP users ............................................................................................................................. 361
7.6.3.5 Deleting users.............................................................................................................................................. 361
7.6.4 Configuring the user security policy .......................................................................................................... 362
7.7 Configuring Layouts.................................................................................................................... 363
7.7.1 Creating and deleting layouts .................................................................................................................... 363
7.7.2 Rename Layouts ......................................................................................................................................... 364
7.7.3 Reorder Layouts.......................................................................................................................................... 365
7.7.4 Layout copying............................................................................................................................................ 365
7.7.5 Editing layouts ............................................................................................................................................ 365
7.7.5.1 Switching to layout editing mode .............................................................................................................. 366
7.7.5.2 Selecting a layout for editing ..................................................................................................................... 367
7.7.5.3 Configuring layout cells .............................................................................................................................. 367
7.7.5.3.1 Adding new cells to a layout....................................................................................................................... 367
7.7.5.3.2 Resizing cells ............................................................................................................................................... 370
7.7.5.3.3 Moving cells ................................................................................................................................................. 371
7.7.5.3.4 Adding cameras to cells.............................................................................................................................. 371
7.7.5.3.5 Adding information boards to cells............................................................................................................ 372
7.7.5.3.6 Linking cells................................................................................................................................................. 372
7.7.5.3.7 Merging videos from adjacent cameras (FrameMerge) ............................................................................ 373
7.7.5.3.8 Clearing cells ............................................................................................................................................... 375
7.7.5.4 Configuring viewing tiles ............................................................................................................................ 375
7.7.5.4.1 Selecting default functions for viewing tiles ............................................................................................. 375
7.7.5.4.2 Select the default video stream for each camera within your layout ...................................................... 376

 –  13
  User Guide

7.7.5.4.3 Selecting the default video mode for a camera ........................................................................................ 376
7.7.5.4.4 Moving input and output icons in a viewing tile ....................................................................................... 376
7.7.5.4.5 Configuring default zoom levels (the Fit screen function)........................................................................ 377
7.7.5.4.6 Configuring pan/tilt angle for video cameras with Immervision lenses in 180о Panorama display
format .......................................................................................................................................................... 378
7.7.5.4.7 Configuring display of water level detection............................................................................................. 379
7.7.5.4.8 Adding links to other cameras to the Camera Window ............................................................................ 380
7.7.5.5 Configuring information boards ................................................................................................................ 382
7.7.5.5.1 Configuring information board templates ................................................................................................ 382
7.7.5.5.2 Configuring Events Boards ......................................................................................................................... 382
7.7.5.5.3 Configuring a Health Board ........................................................................................................................ 384
7.7.5.5.4 Configuring a Statistics Board.................................................................................................................... 385
7.7.5.5.5 Configure the Web Board............................................................................................................................ 386
7.7.5.5.6 Configure the Dialog Board ........................................................................................................................ 387
7.7.5.6 Configuring Alarms Panel on a layout ....................................................................................................... 391
7.7.5.7 Exiting layout editing mode ....................................................................................................................... 391
7.7.6 Share Layouts.............................................................................................................................................. 391
7.7.7 Configuring special layouts ........................................................................................................................ 392
7.7.7.1 Creating special layouts ............................................................................................................................. 392
7.7.7.2 Configuring Alerted Cameras layouts ........................................................................................................ 393
7.7.7.3 Configuring Selected Cameras layout ....................................................................................................... 395
7.7.8 Configuring user-defined slide shows........................................................................................................ 397
7.7.9 Setting the default layout........................................................................................................................... 397
7.7.10 Setting a layout ID....................................................................................................................................... 398
7.8 Configuring Video Wall................................................................................................................ 398
7.9 Configuring the Interactive Map................................................................................................. 400
7.9.1 Creating a new map .................................................................................................................................... 400
7.9.2 Adding system objects to the map............................................................................................................. 403
7.9.2.1 Adding video cameras ................................................................................................................................ 403
7.9.2.2 Adding inputs and outputs ......................................................................................................................... 404
7.9.2.3 Adding switches to another map ............................................................................................................... 405
7.9.3 Configuring cameras on the map............................................................................................................... 406
7.9.3.1 Configuring a camera in standard map viewing mode............................................................................. 406
7.9.3.2 Configuring cameras in immersion mode ................................................................................................. 407
7.9.3.3 Configuring cameras with a built-in GPS tracker ...................................................................................... 408

 –  14
  User Guide

7.9.4 Attaching a map to a layout ....................................................................................................................... 409

7.9.5 Removing objects from the map................................................................................................................ 409
7.9.6 Setting keywords for geo map search ....................................................................................................... 410
7.9.7 Changing map type and display................................................................................................................. 410
7.9.8 Renaming the map...................................................................................................................................... 410
7.9.9 Sorting of map lists ..................................................................................................................................... 411
7.9.10 Deleting a map ............................................................................................................................................ 411
7.10 System preferences .................................................................................................................... 411
7.10.1 Server settings............................................................................................................................................. 411
7.10.1.1 Configuring Forensic Search MomentQuest in Archive ............................................................................ 411
7.10.1.1.1 Turning on the video stream metadata recording.................................................................................... 412
7.10.1.1.2 Configuring user permissions for Forensic Search in archive .................................................................. 412
7.10.1.1.3 Video suitability for Forensic Search of recorded video (requirements) ................................................. 412
7.10.1.2 Setting up privacy masking ........................................................................................................................ 413
7.10.1.2.1 Masking faces .............................................................................................................................................. 413
7.10.1.2.2 Setting up privacy masking in Video Footage ........................................................................................... 413
7.10.1.3 Analyzing video from external systems (Offline Analytics)....................................................................... 416
7.10.1.3.1 Importing video to Axxon Next................................................................................................................... 417
7.10.1.3.2 Indexing video from external sources........................................................................................................ 418
7.10.1.3.3 How to set a folder to import videos from................................................................................................. 420
7.10.1.4 Configuring hardware video decoding for display on the Client.............................................................. 420
7.10.1.4.1 Hardware-based decoding with Intel Quick Sync Video........................................................................... 421
7.10.1.4.2 Hardware-based decoding with NVIDIA NVDEC chips .............................................................................. 422
7.10.1.4.3 Parallel decoding with both Intel's Quick Sync Video and NVidia's NVDEC ............................................ 423
7.10.1.5 Configuring automatic response when Axxon Next VMS PC integrity check fails ................................... 423
7.10.1.6 Configuring storage of the system log and metadata............................................................................... 424
7.10.1.7 Configuring Alarm Management Mode ...................................................................................................... 426
7.10.1.8 Configuring PTZ control ............................................................................................................................. 426
7.10.1.9 Configuring schedules ................................................................................................................................ 427
7.10.1.9.1 Creating schedules...................................................................................................................................... 427
7.10.1.9.2 Deleting a schedule..................................................................................................................................... 428
7.10.1.10 Configuring the Server ports ...................................................................................................................... 429
7.10.2 Client settings.............................................................................................................................................. 429
7.10.2.1 Configuring the user interface.................................................................................................................... 429
7.10.2.1.1 Selecting the interface language ............................................................................................................... 429

 –  15
  User Guide

7.10.2.1.2 Selecting the calendar type........................................................................................................................ 431

7.10.2.1.3 Configuring Slideshow parameters ........................................................................................................... 432
7.10.2.1.4 Hiding tooltips............................................................................................................................................. 432
7.10.2.1.5 Configuring animation................................................................................................................................ 433
7.10.2.1.6 Configuring Display of Video Statistics ...................................................................................................... 433
7.10.2.1.7 Configuring previews of alarm events ....................................................................................................... 434
7.10.2.1.8 Configuring map autozoom ....................................................................................................................... 435
7.10.2.1.9 Configuring the Client screen mode (full screen or window) ................................................................... 435
7.10.2.1.10 Configuring the Appearance of the Viewing Tile ....................................................................................... 436
7.10.2.1.11 Configure Time Display............................................................................................................................... 437
7.10.2.1.12 Configuring the display of the camera ID .................................................................................................. 438
7.10.2.1.13 Prune Video to Window Resolution ........................................................................................................... 440
7.10.2.1.14 Configuring tiles on the layout ................................................................................................................... 440
7.10.2.1.15 Configuring video display on the map ....................................................................................................... 444
7.10.2.1.16 Configuring camera sorting on Object Panel ............................................................................................ 445
7.10.2.2 Configuring how Axxon Next starts ............................................................................................................ 446
7.10.2.2.1 Configuring Axxon Next instead of the standard Windows OS shell ........................................................ 446
7.10.2.2.2 Configuring Cross-System Client and autologon ...................................................................................... 447
7.10.2.2.3 Configuring automatic exiting and locking of the Client .......................................................................... 450
7.10.2.2.4 IP address filtering configuration............................................................................................................... 451
7.10.2.2.5 Selecting Preferred Servers ........................................................................................................................ 451
7.10.2.3 Configuring export ...................................................................................................................................... 452
7.10.2.3.1 Configuring export options ........................................................................................................................ 452
7.10.2.3.2 Configuring an Export Agent ...................................................................................................................... 456
7.10.2.4 Configuring audio on the Client ................................................................................................................. 457
7.10.2.5 Configuring hot keys ................................................................................................................................... 458
7.10.2.5.1 Introduction to hot keys in Axxon Next...................................................................................................... 458
7.10.2.5.2 Assigning hot keys....................................................................................................................................... 458
7.10.2.5.3 Exporting and importing hot keys.............................................................................................................. 459
7.10.2.5.4 Notes regarding hot key actions ................................................................................................................ 460
7.10.2.5.5 Joystick Configuration................................................................................................................................ 462
7.10.2.6 Configuring video capturing on operator monitor.................................................................................... 463
7.11 Configuring Failover VMS............................................................................................................ 466
7.11.1 General information about a failover system............................................................................................ 466
7.11.2 Ports used by the failover system .............................................................................................................. 468

 –  16
  User Guide

7.11.3 Supervisor Web Interface ........................................................................................................................... 468

7.11.4 Creating a Cluster........................................................................................................................................ 469
7.11.5 Failover Database ....................................................................................................................................... 472
7.11.6 Configure a Failover System Cluster .......................................................................................................... 473
7.11.6.1 Setting up basic configuration ................................................................................................................... 473
7.11.6.2 Setting up a configuration with the backup Server .................................................................................. 477
7.11.6.3 Creating and configuring independent nodes .......................................................................................... 481
7.11.6.4 1+1 Cluster Configuration........................................................................................................................... 484
7.11.6.5 Suspending a Server within a cluster......................................................................................................... 486
7.11.6.6 Disbanding a cluster ................................................................................................................................... 486
7.11.7 Set up access to a supervisor ..................................................................................................................... 487
7.11.8 Configuration backup and restore for failover VMS.................................................................................. 488
7.11.9 Cluster Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 489
7.11.10 Connecting to a Node and Configuring of an Axxon domain.................................................................... 491
7.11.11 Configuring automatic connections to nodes........................................................................................... 492
7.11.12 Upgrading Servers within a cluster ............................................................................................................ 492
7.11.13 Setting network interfaces for system nodes operation .......................................................................... 494
7.12 Self-diagnostics service .............................................................................................................. 494
7.12.1 What is the self-diagnostics service ........................................................................................................... 494
7.12.2 Starting and stopping the self-diagnostics service ................................................................................... 495
8 Working with the Axxon Next Software Package ......................................................... 496
8.1 Main Elements of the User Interface .......................................................................................... 496
8.1.1 Viewing Tile ................................................................................................................................................. 496
8.1.1.1 Color Coding of Frames .............................................................................................................................. 498
8.1.1.2 Viewing Tile Context Menu ......................................................................................................................... 499
8.1.1.3 Time Display ................................................................................................................................................ 499
8.1.1.4 Display of Video Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 500
8.1.1.5 Video Surveillance Mode Selection Tabs ................................................................................................... 501
8.1.1.6 Advanced archive navigation panel........................................................................................................... 502
8.1.2 Information boards..................................................................................................................................... 503
8.1.3 The Archive Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................... 504
8.1.3.1 Show and Hide the Archive Navigation Panel ........................................................................................... 504
8.1.3.2 The Structure and Function of the Archive Navigation Panel .................................................................. 504
8.1.3.3 Events Filter................................................................................................................................................. 506
8.1.3.4 The Timeline................................................................................................................................................ 507

 –  17
  User Guide

8.1.3.5 Events List ................................................................................................................................................... 510

8.1.3.6 The Playback Panel..................................................................................................................................... 511
8.1.4 Video Wall Panel.......................................................................................................................................... 512
8.1.5 Monitor Panel.............................................................................................................................................. 512
8.1.6 The Layouts panel....................................................................................................................................... 513
8.1.7 Interactive Map ........................................................................................................................................... 513
8.1.8 Camera Search Panel.................................................................................................................................. 514
8.1.9 Alarms Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 515
8.1.10 Objects Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 517
8.1.11 The PTZ Control Panel ................................................................................................................................ 518
8.1.12 Story board.................................................................................................................................................. 520
8.2 Video Surveillance....................................................................................................................... 521
8.2.1 Video Surveillance Modes........................................................................................................................... 521
8.2.2 Functions Available in All Video Surveillance Modes ................................................................................ 521
8.2.2.1 Scaling the Viewing Tile .............................................................................................................................. 522
8.2.2.2 Digitally Zooming Video Images................................................................................................................. 523
8.2.2.2.1 Enlarging a video image using the digital zoom scale .............................................................................. 523
8.2.2.2.2 Enlarging a video image through area selection....................................................................................... 524
8.2.2.2.3 Enlarging a video image using the mouse scroll wheel ............................................................................ 526
8.2.2.3 Video image processing.............................................................................................................................. 526
8.2.2.3.1 Changing the Contrast Level ...................................................................................................................... 526
8.2.2.3.2 Setting the Sharpness Level ....................................................................................................................... 527
8.2.2.3.3 Using Deinterlacing..................................................................................................................................... 528
8.2.2.4 Rotate Video Image..................................................................................................................................... 529
8.2.2.5 Tracking objects.......................................................................................................................................... 531
8.2.2.6 Operator comments.................................................................................................................................... 534
8.2.2.6.1 Adding comments in different surveillance modes .................................................................................. 534
8.2.2.6.2 Adding a comment...................................................................................................................................... 535
8.2.2.7 Viewing titles from POS terminals ............................................................................................................. 536
8.2.2.8 Partial decoding of video............................................................................................................................ 538
8.2.3 Real-time video surveillance ...................................................................................................................... 538
8.2.3.1 Switching to Live Video Mode..................................................................................................................... 538
8.2.3.2 Video Surveillance Functions Available in Live Video Mode..................................................................... 539
8.2.3.3 Arming and Disarming a Video Camera ..................................................................................................... 539
8.2.3.4 Controlling a PTZ Camera .......................................................................................................................... 540

 –  18
  User Guide

8.2.3.4.1 Presets ......................................................................................................................................................... 541

8.2.3.4.1.1 Creating and editing presets ......................................................................................................................................... 541
8.2.3.4.1.2 Selecting a preset........................................................................................................................................................... 543
8.2.3.4.2 PTZ Tours .................................................................................................................................................... 544
8.2.3.4.2.1 Creating and editing PTZ tours ..................................................................................................................................... 544
8.2.3.4.2.2 Launching a PTZ tour..................................................................................................................................................... 545
8.2.3.4.3 Control using step buttons and virtual joystick ........................................................................................ 545
8.2.3.4.4 Patrolling ..................................................................................................................................................... 546
8.2.3.4.5 Controlling Focus, Iris and Optical Zoom .................................................................................................. 547
8.2.3.4.6 Controlling a PTZ Video Camera in the OnScreen PTZ Mode ................................................................... 547
8.2.3.4.7 Control using Point&Click........................................................................................................................... 548
8.2.3.4.8 Control using Areazoom ............................................................................................................................. 548
8.2.3.5 Functions for tracking of moving objects .................................................................................................. 550
8.2.3.5.1 Tag & Track Pro ........................................................................................................................................... 550
8.2.3.5.2 Tag & Track Lite........................................................................................................................................... 551
8.2.3.5.3 Simultaneously using Tag & Track Pro and Tag & Track Lite ................................................................... 552
8.2.3.6 Managing Outputs....................................................................................................................................... 552
8.2.3.7 Displaying the input status......................................................................................................................... 553
8.2.3.8 Selecting video stream quality in a viewing tile (GreenStream) .............................................................. 554
8.2.3.9 Autozoom .................................................................................................................................................... 556
8.2.3.10 Autoreplace Offline Cameras on Layouts .................................................................................................. 558
8.2.3.11 Snapshot ..................................................................................................................................................... 558
8.2.3.12 Viewing selected camera's detection tool triggering events.................................................................... 558
8.2.3.13 Switching to other camera via a link in the Camera window ................................................................... 559
8.2.3.14 Removing a camera from a layout ............................................................................................................. 560
8.2.4 Video surveillance in archive mode ........................................................................................................... 561
8.2.4.1 Switching to Archive Mode ......................................................................................................................... 561
8.2.4.2 Video Surveillance Functions Available in Archive Mode ......................................................................... 563
8.2.4.3 Selecting an Archive.................................................................................................................................... 563
8.2.4.4 Viewing a combined Archive ...................................................................................................................... 564
8.2.4.5 Synchronized playback of archives............................................................................................................ 565
8.2.4.6 Compressed playback of archives (TimeCompressor) ............................................................................. 565
8.2.4.6.1 Switching to TimeCompressor mode ........................................................................................................ 566
8.2.4.6.2 Playback control ......................................................................................................................................... 567
8.2.4.6.3 Switching back to the original recording of an object .............................................................................. 568

 –  19
  User Guide

8.2.4.7 Viewing recorded video with operator comments.................................................................................... 569

8.2.4.8 Viewing External Archives........................................................................................................................... 571
8.2.4.9 Delete a part of an archive.......................................................................................................................... 571
8.2.4.10 Navigating in the Archive............................................................................................................................ 572
8.2.4.10.1 Navigating Using the Timeline ................................................................................................................... 572
8.2.4.10.2 Navigation using the advanced panel ....................................................................................................... 574
8.2.4.10.3 Navigating Using the Events list................................................................................................................. 575
8.2.4.10.4 Navigating Using the Playback Panel ........................................................................................................ 575
8.2.4.10.5 Navigation via the time indicator............................................................................................................... 576
8.2.4.10.6 Keyboard navigation .................................................................................................................................. 576
8.2.4.11 Displaying the causes of triggered situation analysis detection units..................................................... 577
8.2.4.12 Viewing the results of a saved search query.............................................................................................. 577
8.2.4.13 Manual Archive Replication........................................................................................................................ 579
8.2.4.14 Tag & Track Lite in Archive mode............................................................................................................... 580
8.2.5 Video surveillance in Alarm Management mode....................................................................................... 581
8.2.5.1 Video surveillance functions available in Alarm Management mode ...................................................... 581
8.2.5.2 Switch to Alarm Management mode ......................................................................................................... 581
8.2.5.3 Initiating an Alarm ...................................................................................................................................... 582
8.2.5.3.1 Manual Initiation......................................................................................................................................... 582
8.2.5.3.2 Automatic Initiation.................................................................................................................................... 583
8.2.5.4 Working with Alarms Panel ........................................................................................................................ 584
8.2.5.4.1 Viewing Alarms in Event Preview ............................................................................................................... 584
8.2.5.4.2 Outlining Objects that Triggered Detection .............................................................................................. 584
8.2.5.4.3 Selecting Events for Alarm Management................................................................................................... 584
8.2.5.5 Working with the Alarm Management window ......................................................................................... 585
8.2.5.5.1 Alarm Handling Tile Interface Elements .................................................................................................... 585
8.2.5.5.2 Alarm Playback ........................................................................................................................................... 585
8.2.5.5.3 Processing an Alarm ................................................................................................................................... 586
8.2.5.6 Limitations when working with alarm events in case of multi-user processing ..................................... 587
8.2.6 Video surveillance in Archive Search mode............................................................................................... 588
8.2.6.1 Switching to Archive Search mode ............................................................................................................ 588
8.2.6.2 Archive Search mode interface .................................................................................................................. 589
8.2.6.3 Video surveillance functions available in Archive Search mode .............................................................. 591
8.2.6.4 Search in an archive of a single video camera .......................................................................................... 592
8.2.6.4.1 Selecting the search type ........................................................................................................................... 592

 –  20
  User Guide

8.2.6.4.2 Setting a search interval ............................................................................................................................. 592

8.2.6.4.3 Events search .............................................................................................................................................. 593
8.2.6.4.4 Time search for video fragments (TimeSlice)............................................................................................ 595
8.2.6.4.5 Searching comments .................................................................................................................................. 596
8.2.6.4.6 Forensic Search for Fragments (MomentQuest) ....................................................................................... 596
8.2.6.4.6.1 Motion in Area ................................................................................................................................................................ 597
8.2.6.4.6.2 Loitering of an object in a specific area ........................................................................................................................ 598
8.2.6.4.6.3 Simultaneous presence of a large number of objects in a specific area..................................................................... 598
8.2.6.4.6.4 Motion from one area to another.................................................................................................................................. 599
8.2.6.4.6.5 Crossing of a virtual line by an object's trajectory ....................................................................................................... 600
8.2.6.4.6.6 Configure the search parameters ................................................................................................................................. 601
8.2.6.4.7 Titles search ................................................................................................................................................ 605
8.2.6.4.8 LPR search ................................................................................................................................................... 605
8.2.6.4.9 Face search.................................................................................................................................................. 606
8.2.6.4.9.1 Tell "friend" from "foe" by a picture ............................................................................................................................. 608
8.2.6.4.10 Saving search queries ................................................................................................................................. 608
8.2.6.4.11 Switching between search results ............................................................................................................. 609
8.2.6.4.12 Working with search results ....................................................................................................................... 609
8.2.6.4.12.1 Viewing search results ................................................................................................................................................... 609
8.2.6.4.12.2 Viewing Search Results In TimeCompressor ................................................................................................................ 611
8.2.6.4.12.3 Playback of video fragments......................................................................................................................................... 611
8.2.6.4.12.4 Enlargement of found moments ................................................................................................................................... 613
8.2.6.4.12.5 Exporting the video fragments and repeated search .................................................................................................. 614
8.2.6.5 Simultaneous search in an archive of several video cameras.................................................................. 614
8.2.7 Working with fisheye cameras ................................................................................................................... 615
8.2.7.1 Viewing modes for video from fisheye cameras........................................................................................ 615
8.2.7.1.1 Selecting viewing mode for videos from a fisheye camera ...................................................................... 615
8.2.7.1.2 360 degree Panorama and Regional view (virtual PTZ)............................................................................ 616
8.2.7.1.3 180 degree Panorama................................................................................................................................. 618
8.2.7.2 Fisheye cameras on an interactive map .................................................................................................... 618
8.2.7.2.1 Viewing video and controlling a fisheye camera from the map ............................................................... 618
8.2.7.2.2 Fisheye cameras in immersive mode......................................................................................................... 619
8.2.8 Facial recognition and search .................................................................................................................... 620
8.2.9 Vehicle number plate recognition and search .......................................................................................... 623
8.2.10 Temperature screening .............................................................................................................................. 624
8.3 Working with information boards .............................................................................................. 625

 –  21
  User Guide

8.3.1 Resizing information boards ...................................................................................................................... 625

8.3.2 Hiding information boards ......................................................................................................................... 626
8.3.3 Automatically switching to layouts with information boards .................................................................. 626
8.3.4 Working with Events Boards....................................................................................................................... 627
8.3.4.1 Options for displaying information on Events Boards.............................................................................. 627
8.3.4.2 Switching a camera linked to an Events Board to the archives ............................................................... 629
8.3.5 Working with Health Boards....................................................................................................................... 629
8.3.5.1 Viewing server status .................................................................................................................................. 631
8.3.5.2 Viewing camera status................................................................................................................................ 632
8.3.6 Working with Statistics Boards .................................................................................................................. 634
8.3.7 Working with Web Boards .......................................................................................................................... 636
8.3.8 Working with Dialog Board......................................................................................................................... 637
8.4 Layouts Management ................................................................................................................. 639
8.4.1 Changing cameras within a layout............................................................................................................. 640
8.4.2 Selection and Slideshow of Layouts .......................................................................................................... 640
8.4.3 Working with Special layouts ..................................................................................................................... 641
8.5 Monitor Management ................................................................................................................. 643
8.5.1 Managing monitors on a local Client ......................................................................................................... 643
8.5.2 Managing monitors on remote Clients within the Axxon domain............................................................ 645
8.6 Audio Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 646
8.6.1 General Information ................................................................................................................................... 646
8.6.2 Listening on the Client to sound from a camera microphone.................................................................. 647
8.6.3 Playing back sound from Client microphone on camera speakers ......................................................... 648
8.7 Working with the Interactive Map .............................................................................................. 649
8.7.1 Opening and closing the map .................................................................................................................... 650
8.7.2 Geo map search .......................................................................................................................................... 651
8.7.3 Changing the map tilt ................................................................................................................................. 652
8.7.4 Scaling and focusing of map ...................................................................................................................... 653
8.7.5 Customizing an Interactive Map................................................................................................................. 654
8.7.6 Immersive mode ......................................................................................................................................... 655
8.7.7 Switching between maps ........................................................................................................................... 656
8.7.8 Controlling devices from the map.............................................................................................................. 658
8.7.9 Displaying device status ............................................................................................................................. 659
8.7.10 Selecting Cameras for a Temporary Layout .............................................................................................. 660
8.8 Exporting Frames and Video Recordings................................................................................... 661

 –  22
  User Guide

8.8.1 Frame export ............................................................................................................................................... 661

8.8.2 Exporting Video Recordings ....................................................................................................................... 663
8.8.2.1 Standard video export ................................................................................................................................ 663
8.8.2.2 Instant video export.................................................................................................................................... 665
8.8.2.3 Simultaneous export of video from multiple cameras ............................................................................. 666
8.8.2.4 Exporting all event videos .......................................................................................................................... 667
8.8.3 Configuring export area and masks ........................................................................................................... 668
8.8.4 Viewing export progress ............................................................................................................................. 670
8.9 Macros control ............................................................................................................................ 670
8.10 Event Control............................................................................................................................... 671
8.10.1 Control in Live Video Mode......................................................................................................................... 671
8.10.2 The System Log ........................................................................................................................................... 671
8.10.2.1 Setting Event Search Filters ....................................................................................................................... 671
8.10.2.2 Event search procedure.............................................................................................................................. 672
8.10.2.3 Refreshing Event Search Results................................................................................................................ 673
8.10.2.4 Viewing Event Search Results..................................................................................................................... 673
8.10.2.5 Exporting Event Search Results ................................................................................................................. 674
8.10.2.6 Switching to archive video of specific events............................................................................................ 675
8.11 Working with Axxon Next Through the Web Client.................................................................... 675
8.11.1 Web client overview .................................................................................................................................... 675
8.11.2 Hardware and software requirements for the Web Client operation ...................................................... 676
8.11.3 Starting the web client................................................................................................................................ 676
8.11.4 Web client's GUI .......................................................................................................................................... 678
8.11.5 Web Client Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 679
8.11.6 Searching for video cameras in the web client ......................................................................................... 680
8.11.7 Working with layouts in Web Client ........................................................................................................... 683
8.11.7.1 Summary of how to work with layouts in Web Client ............................................................................... 683
8.11.7.2 Selecting and searching for a layout.......................................................................................................... 683
8.11.7.3 Creating a new layout in Web Client .......................................................................................................... 684
8.11.7.4 Editing and deleting layouts in Web Client................................................................................................ 685
8.11.7.5 Selecting the default layout in Web Client ................................................................................................ 685
8.11.7.6 Copying layouts in Web Client.................................................................................................................... 686
8.11.7.7 Sharing layouts in Web Client .................................................................................................................... 686
8.11.8 Real-time video surveillance via the web client........................................................................................ 687
8.11.9 Controlling PTZ cameras through the web client ..................................................................................... 688

 –  23
  User Guide

8.11.9.1 Controlling a PTZ camera through the web client by using presets ........................................................ 689
8.11.9.2 Changing the optical zoom of a PTZ camera in the web client ................................................................ 689
8.11.9.3 Changing the positioning speed of a PTZ camera in the web client ........................................................ 689
8.11.9.4 Changing the tilt of a PTZ camera in the web client ................................................................................. 689
8.11.10 Viewing video archives through the web client......................................................................................... 690
8.11.11 Archive position selection panel for the web client .................................................................................. 691
8.11.12 Archive search through the web client ...................................................................................................... 692
8.11.12.1 Types of Archive search available via the Web Client ............................................................................... 693
8.11.12.2 Building a Heat Map.................................................................................................................................... 693
8.11.12.3 Simultaneous search in multiple camera Video Footage via the web Client .......................................... 695
8.11.12.4 Reporting the search results ...................................................................................................................... 695
8.11.13 Alarm Monitoring via the Web Client ......................................................................................................... 696
8.11.14 Listening to a camera's microphone via the web client ........................................................................... 697
8.11.15 Digital video zoom in the web client.......................................................................................................... 698
8.11.16 Export in Web Client.................................................................................................................................... 698
8.11.17 Viewing Camera and Archive Statistics...................................................................................................... 699
8.11.18 Working with bookmarks in the Web Client .............................................................................................. 700
8.11.18.1 Editing a bookmark..................................................................................................................................... 701
8.11.18.2 Deleting a bookmark .................................................................................................................................. 702
8.11.18.3 Un-protecting a video ................................................................................................................................. 702
8.11.18.4 Deleting a protected video ......................................................................................................................... 702
8.12 Working with Axxon Next Through the Mobile Clients .............................................................. 702
9 Description of utilities.................................................................................................... 703
9.1 Axxon Next Tray Tool .................................................................................................................. 703
9.2 Activation Utility ......................................................................................................................... 703
9.3 Axxon Support Tool .................................................................................................................... 705
9.3.1 Purpose of the Support.exe Utility............................................................................................................. 705
9.3.2 Launching and Closing the Utility .............................................................................................................. 705
9.3.3 Description of the Support.exe utility interface ........................................................................................ 706
9.3.4 The Processes Service................................................................................................................................. 707
9.3.5 Collecting Data on the Configuration of Servers and Clients Using the Support .................................... 708
9.4 Log Management Utility ............................................................................................................. 711
9.4.1 Starting and closing the utility ................................................................................................................... 711
9.4.2 Configuring a Log Archive........................................................................................................................... 711
9.4.3 Configuring Logging Levels ........................................................................................................................ 712

 –  24
  User Guide

9.4.4 Set the size and maximum number of logs ............................................................................................... 713
9.4.5 Configuring Client RAM usage logging ....................................................................................................... 714
9.5 Digital Signature Verification Utility .......................................................................................... 715
9.6 Backup and Restore Utility......................................................................................................... 717
9.6.1 Purpose of BackupTool.exe........................................................................................................................ 717
9.6.2 Starting and quitting BackupTool.exe....................................................................................................... 717
9.6.3 Roll back the local configuration to a selected restore point................................................................... 718
9.6.4 Roll back the global configuration to a selected restore point ................................................................ 720
9.6.5 Backing up a configuration ........................................................................................................................ 721
9.6.6 Restoring a configuration ........................................................................................................................... 724
9.6.7 Changing the Server Name......................................................................................................................... 726
9.7 POS-terminal log collection utility............................................................................................. 728
9.8 Console utility for working with archives .................................................................................. 729
9.9 Network settings utility .............................................................................................................. 731
10 Appendices ..................................................................................................................... 733
10.1 Appendix 1. Glossary................................................................................................................... 733
10.2 Appendix 2. Known issues in the Axxon Next Software Package ............................................. 735
10.2.1 Possible Errors During Installation ............................................................................................................ 735
10.2.1.1 Error starting NGP Host Service ................................................................................................................. 735
10.2.1.2 Errors Connecting to the Postgres Database ............................................................................................ 735
10.2.1.3 Error installing Drivers Pack ....................................................................................................................... 736
10.2.1.4 Error installing DetectorPack ..................................................................................................................... 736
10.2.1.5 Window OS 10 installation error ................................................................................................................ 736
10.2.1.6 An error occurred while installing on Windows with the language pack Norsk (bokmål) ...................... 737
10.2.1.7 Error uninstalling Axxon Next on systems with Videoinspector installed ............................................... 737
10.2.2 Possible Errors During Start-Up ................................................................................................................. 737
10.2.2.1 The Client cannot be connected to the Server .......................................................................................... 737
10.2.3 Possible Errors During Operation............................................................................................................... 737
10.2.3.1 All video cameras or archives stop working once the license maximum is reached .............................. 738
10.2.3.2 No signal from video cameras and failure to connect to other servers ................................................... 738
10.2.3.3 Incorrect display of Client interface elements .......................................................................................... 738
10.2.3.4 Server error on Windows Server 2012........................................................................................................ 738
10.2.3.5 Emergency shutdown of the Client on Windows 8.1................................................................................. 738
10.2.3.6 Error creating new archives even when license restriction on total size is observed ............................. 739
10.2.3.7 The Axxon Next VMS operation along with Windows Defender software ................................................ 739

 –  25
  User Guide

10.2.3.8 Upper panel display problem..................................................................................................................... 739

10.2.3.9 High CPU load during OpenGL software emulation.................................................................................. 739
10.2.3.10 Performance of Axxon Next when working with NetLimiter 2.................................................................. 739
10.2.3.11 Exported videos' playback in Movies and TV application......................................................................... 739
10.3 Appendix 3. Assigning of the domain takes place when the Axxon Next server is installed ... 739
10.4 Appendix 4. Using Axxon Next with anti-virus software............................................................ 740
10.4.1 NOD32.......................................................................................................................................................... 740
10.4.2 ESET Smart Security ................................................................................................................................... 740
10.4.3 AVG............................................................................................................................................................... 740
10.4.4 DrWeb .......................................................................................................................................................... 740
10.4.5 McAfee SAAS ................................................................................................................................................ 741
10.5 Appendix 5. Using CH VM-Desktop USB multifunction controllers with Axxon Next .............. 741
10.6 Appendix 6. Hotkeys in Axxon Next............................................................................................ 743
10.7 Appendix 7. Automated configuration backup and restore ..................................................... 746
10.8 Appendix 8. Configuring and operating the Axxon Next in Linux OS........................................ 747
10.8.1 Linux OS supported versions...................................................................................................................... 747
10.8.2 Axxon Next limitations in Linux OS ............................................................................................................ 747
10.8.3 Installing sudo............................................................................................................................................. 748
10.8.4 Installing the Axxon Next in Linux OS ........................................................................................................ 748
10.8.4.1 Installing the Axxon Next Server in Linux OS ............................................................................................. 748
10.8.4.1.1 Installing from repository ........................................................................................................................... 748
10.8.4.1.2 Manual installation ..................................................................................................................................... 749
10.8.4.2 Installing the Axxon Next Client in Linux OS.............................................................................................. 751
10.8.4.3 Configuration and log folders .................................................................................................................... 753
10.8.4.4 Axxon Next Server launch using Docker .................................................................................................... 754
10.8.4.4.1 Docker installation...................................................................................................................................... 754
10.8.4.4.2 Specifics of Docker installation on Ubuntu ............................................................................................... 755
10.8.4.4.3 Creating the Axxon Next container ............................................................................................................ 757
10.8.4.4.4 Working with the Axxon Next container .................................................................................................... 757
10.8.4.5 Updating the Axxon Next software in Linux OS ......................................................................................... 758
10.8.4.6 Uninstalling the Axxon Next software in Linux OS .................................................................................... 758
10.8.5 Moving the Axxon Next configuration from Windows OS to Linux OS ..................................................... 758
10.8.6 Starting and stopping the Axxon Next Server in Linux OS ........................................................................ 759
10.8.7 Archive creation features in Linux OS ........................................................................................................ 759
10.8.7.1 Archive as a disk creation features in Linux OS ......................................................................................... 759

 –  26
  User Guide

10.8.7.2 Archive as a file creation features in Linux OS........................................................................................... 761

10.8.7.3 Features of archives with ext and xfs file systems..................................................................................... 761
10.8.8 Axxon Next Server configuration change................................................................................................... 762
10.8.9 Configuring the metadata storage in NAS on Linux OS ............................................................................ 763
10.8.10 Configuring the Axxon Next Client logging parameters on Linux OS ....................................................... 764
10.8.11 License activation for the LP recognition detection in Linux OS.............................................................. 765
10.8.12 System data collection in Linux OS............................................................................................................ 765
10.9 Appendix 9. Using Axxon Next with NAT .................................................................................... 766
10.9.1 Consolidating the Servers from different networks into Axxon domain.................................................. 766
10.9.2 Connecting the Client to the Server behind NAT....................................................................................... 768
10.9.3 Connecting the web and mobile Clients to the Server behind NAT ......................................................... 770
10.9.4 Audio transmission from the Client's microphone behind NAT to the Server's or camera's
loudspeaker................................................................................................................................................. 771
10.10 Appendix 10. Creating system variable...................................................................................... 772

 –  27
     User Guide

1 User Guide. Introduction

On page:

• General Information
• Purpose of the Document
• Purpose and functionality of Axxon Next 

1.1 General Information

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of
AxxonSoft.
The Axxon Next trademark is the property of AxxonSoft. All other trademarks included in this document are the property of their
respective owners.
All information contained in this document is current as of the publication date. AxxonSoft reserves the right to change or update
this document without the prior notification of or to any third party.

1.2 Purpose of the Document

This document, titled User guide contains the information necessary for building, implementing, and operating a security system
based on Axxon Next.
The structure of this document enables the user to get acquainted with the software package and then, depending on the user's
level of training, choose sections of interest for more detailed study. The chapters in this guide, whether they are informative or
serve as a reference, have their own internal structure.
The chapters Introduction and Description of the Software Package are intended to generally acquaint the user with the
technical features and functionality of the Axxon Next software package, as well as with the key stages of building a security
system based on the software package.
Recommendations to the user/administrator for installing the software and configuring equipment are presented in detail in the
chapter Installing the Axxon Next Software Package. The chapter Licensing of the software product contains instructions on how
to register a license to use the Axxon Next software package..
Startup and shutdown of the software package are described in the chapter Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software
Package.
The chapter Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package presents step-by-step instructions on configuring user-specific
settings and activating the required functionality. This information is useful for system administrators as well as for operators
with permissions to manage system settings.
Recommendations on configuring the user interface, working in various video surveillance modes, and utilizing the functional
capabilities of the Axxon Next software package are presented in chapter Working with the Axxon Next Software Package.
Chapter Description of utilities contains a description of additional software utilities employed when working with the software
package.
The Appendices contains a glossary of the product's basic terms and definitions. It also lists all known issues that you may
encounter while using Axxon Next.

1.3 Purpose and functionality of Axxon Next 

The Axxon Next software package is a next-generation open-platform video management software (VMS). Security systems based
on Axxon Next range from home security systems (for an apartment or house) to professional large-scale distributed security
systems for small and mid-size businesses (hotels, automotive service centers, shops, parking structures, etc.).
Video and audio surveillance of guarded locations, video analysis, and rapid response to suspicious situations without operator
involvement, and storage and export of obtained data are just a few of Axxon Next's many functions.
The Axxon Next software package enables the user to accomplish a wide spectrum of tasks, as it works both with digital
equipment and with analog video cameras (through video capture cards), and also makes it possible to create a hybrid security
system containing both kinds of equipment.

User Guide. Introduction  –  28

     User Guide

The modern and constantly expanding feature set of Axxon Next allows implementing new video surveillance functionality that
increases the convenience and precision of protection at end-user sites.

User Guide. Introduction  –  29

     User Guide

2 Software Lifecycle Policy

On page:

• Software Lifecycle Phases

• Software Technical Support
• Standard Period for Release of Software Updates
• Licensing Policy with Regard to Software Updates 

2.1 Software Lifecycle Phases

The software source code repository is divided into 3 branches:
• trunk - current changes;
• stabilization - preparation of a new release;
• release - the latest official release.
During the development process, all new software features are added to the trunk branch.
After reaching Feature Complete status, all changes from the trunk branch are moved to the stabilization branch.
From that time on, only software fixes that are critical for this version are added to the stabilization branch. These fixes are also
duplicated in the trunk branch.
After the version stabilization is completed, all changes are moved from the stabilization branch to the release branch, and a
new development phase begins.

2.2 Software Technical Support

After purchasing a license key, the Customer can receive full technical support throughout the key's validity period or until the
end of the software lifecycle if the license is unlimited in time.

2.3 Standard Period for Release of Software Updates

Release Standard period

Major release 1 – 1.5 years

Minor release 3 – 5 months

Bug and security fixes* 3 – 5 weeks

Major and minor releases are available on the company's official website. Releases with bug and security fixes can be requested
from technical support.
* Software bugs can only be fixed in the latest official release.

2.4 Licensing Policy with Regard to Software Updates 

• New software versions are fully compatible with the license keys of previous versions.
• After the softwarehas been updated, all the features previously specified in the license key will be available in the new
version.
• New software features that are subject to licensing will not be available until the license key is updated.

Software Lifecycle Policy  –  30

     User Guide

3 Description of the Software Package

3.1 Basic principles of building a security system based on the Axxon Next software
package
Building a security system based on the Axxon Next software package includes the following recommended stages:
1. Selecting a configuration for the security system (with the help of professionals)
2. Building a separate local area network with restricted access
3. Calculating the sufficient bandwidth required for each segment of the local area network
4. Selecting and configuring the software and hardware platform on which the selected security system configuration will be
implemented (selecting and configuring personal computers to act as servers and clients in accordance with the
requirements, as referenced in the section titled Implementation Requirements for the Axxon Next Software Package,
Operating system requirements)
5. Selecting and connecting reliable equipment that is optimally suited for a specific security system (with the help of
professionals)
6. Training personnel to work with the Axxon Next software package in accordance with the requirements (see the section
titled Requirements for Personnel Quantity and Qualifications).

3.2 Axxon Next features: reference information

On page:

• Micromodule architecture
• Support for IP cameras
• Support for analog cameras in Axxon Next
• Video and Audio Detection Tools
• Video archive
• Interactive 3D Map
• User Interface
• Face Recognition
• NumberPlate Recognition
• Receiving Events from External Systems

The advanced features available in Axxon Next are continuously updated and extended.
Axxon Next offers virtually unlimited opportunities for system scaling, task-based customization, and reallocation of resources
(based on changes in the number or quality of video and audio monitoring tasks) at end-user sites.
Video surveillance systems based on Axxon Next can scale infinitely: there are no restrictions on the number of video servers,
workstations or video cameras.
Support for over 1500 models of IP cameras is included, as well as remote access from mobile devices and a web interface. The
Axxon Next software package supports touchscreens.

3.2.1 Micromodule architecture

The micromodule architecture of Axxon Next video management software allows implementing different video management
system functions as different operating system processes. Each function is the responsibility of a different micromodule; a
dispatcher module monitors the functioning of the micromodules. If a function encounters an error and a process is quit
unexpectedly, the dispatcher module automatically relaunches the corresponding micromodule. This does not affect the
performance of other processes or the functioning of the VMS overall.

Description of the Software Package  –  31

     User Guide

3.2.2 Support for IP cameras

Drivers Pack
IP camera support in Axxon Next is provided through the Driver's Pack Module specially developed by AxxonSoft and regularly
updated to support new IP devices.
Driver's Pack allows adding support for new IP devices without having to wait for the release of new versions of Axxon Next and
without reinstalling the entire system.
Multistreaming
Many of today's IP cameras can transmit two video streams with different video parameters and compressed in different codecs.
 Axxon Next supports  Multistreaming i.e. receiving two streams from a camera simultaneously: high-quality and low-quality,
which allows taking advantage of this feature of IP equipment to optimize the CPU load on the video server and the client
workstation. .
GreenStream
The GreenStream feature saves bandwidth and client CPU resources. It automatically chooses a video stream from a camera to
the server, and then to the client, depending on the resolution at which the video is currently displayed on the client.
Embedded video camera analytics
Axxon Next supports on-board detection embedded in video cameras. This means that when on-board detection tools are
triggered, Axxon Next is notified and can use these events to drive system reactions. On-board detection does not burden the
CPU of the video server and makes use of uncompressed video (completely bypassing the compressing/decompression process),
and therefore provide extra stability in difficult conditions such as poor visibility.
360 degree camera support
360 degree camera support allows dewarping video from a fisheye camera or camera with an ImmerVision panomorphic lens to
obtain several "normal" flat images with different frame aspect ratios for display on the client screen. One of the resulting virtual
cameras can be a virtual PTZ unit.
ONVIF
AxxonSoft is a member of ONVIF (the Open Network Video Interface Forum), which work toward the development and promotion
of international standards for network security and video surveillance system interfaces. ONVIF is supported in all versions of
Drivers Pack starting with version 3.1.3.  
RTSP support
Many IP cameras support multimedia streaming via RTSP.  Axxon Next supports receiving such streams without requiring
integration of the relevant camera via Drivers Pack.

3.2.3 Support for analog cameras in Axxon Next

Alongside IP cameras, Axxon Next allows you to use analog cameras in your video surveillance system. Analog cameras are more
affordable and are well-suited for many installations without high video resolution requirements. In addition, Axxon Next allows
creating hybrid systems that combine both analog and IP cameras.

3.2.4 Video and Audio Detection Tools

Axxon Next video management software incorporates a powerful system for analysis of video images. It includes the following
video detection tools:
1. motion detection;
2. background change detection;
3. detection for loss of video quality;
4. abandoned objects detection;
5. detection of crossing a line in a given direction;
6. motion start detection;
7. motion stop detection;
8. loitering detection;
9. object appearance detection;

Description of the Software Package  –  32

     User Guide

10. object disappearance detection

In addition to the video detection tools, Axxon Next has two audio detectors:
1. noise detection - is triggered by exceeding a certain threshold volume level;
2. silence detection - is triggered when the microphone signal disappears completely
Macros  can be set to automatically run when a detection tool is triggered (on a per-detector basis). Multiple detection tools can
be combined into complex conditional rules.

3.2.5 Video archive

SolidStore
SolidStore is a new file system for reliable video storage developed by AxxonSoft  especially for storing video archives. By
optimizing the reading/writing process we managed to achieve three important advantages:
• Enable high read/write speeds, approaching the physical access speed limit of the hard disk.
• Increase the service life of the hard disk.
• Solve the problem of data fragmentation.
TimeCompressor
Time Compressor allows the user to set a time range for video footage and get a short video clip of all moving objects in the
scene. Objects and events captured at different times are displayed simultaneously in a condensed "video synopsis". Time
Compressor is especially convenient for viewing large archives that feature a relatively small number of active objects.
Forensic Search in Archive   
The Axxon Next video management software (VMS) utilizes VMDA – a database developed by AxxonSoft for indexing and storing
descriptions of observed scenes. Along with video recording, this database allows archiving characteristics of all moving objects
in the scene, and then uses these characteristics to perform quick searches of the video recordings (MomentQuest2 technology).

3.2.6 Interactive 3D Map

Interactive 3D Map superimposes camera locations on a site map and displays camera views in the same window. Cameras in the
current layout are color-coded by current status. Operators can instantly pinpoint where a selected camera is located on the map
and identify the corresponding location of interest.
Immersion Mode
When enabled, this mode overlays a translucent video viewing tile on the map; fixed objects in the field of view (furniture, doors,
etc.) are combined with their depictions on the map. This allows easily seeing where a person or car is located and where it is
going.
OpenStreetMap
OpenStreetMap support is available in Axxon Next. The site map is downloaded from the Internet and the user selects the
necessary area and scale. Additional map data is downloaded in real time, if needed, when zooming in/out or scrolling.

Note
To work with OpenStreetMap maps in Axxon Next, you need to purchase an OpenStreetMap license.

Virtual PTZ cameras on the map

The Virtual PTZ Camera function becomes available when the map contains at least one fisheye camera. This function allows
viewing video from a fisheye camera directly on the map. Click anywhere in the fisheye video shown in a layout cell to dewarp the
source video, with digital zoom and click-to-focus.

3.2.7 User Interface

Editable camera layouts

Description of the Software Package  –  33

     User Guide

Axxon Next allows you to create custom camera layouts. Layouts can be configured in any way the user wants and the aspect
ratios of viewing tiles can be fine-tuned. Editable layouts efficiently fit different cameras with different aspect ratios on the same
screen, as well as support display of dewarped fisheye camera footage.
Autozoom
Autozoom helps to monitor moving objects by automatically adjusting the level of digital zoom.  Autozoom shows close-in video
for parts of the frame that contain a moving object or objects and follows them as they move, just as a movie camera does when
taking a close-up shot. 

3.2.8 Face Recognition

Axxon Next includes an algorithm for recognizing human faces in a video frame and subsequent search for them in a video
archive of several cameras. You can search by an uploaded photo or by an image of a person's face selected in a video archive
frame. The system will return the video fragments from the archive where the searched person is present as search results.

3.2.9 NumberPlate Recognition

Axxon Next also includes an algorithm for recognizing vehicle number plates. The recognized number plates are saved to a
database and matched with a video archive of several cameras. If a number plate contains similar characters, the system
generates several hypotheses during the recognition. This increases the probability of a successful search for a particular number
in a generated database. 

3.2.10 Receiving Events from External Systems

Axxon Next includes a new feature set that is capable of receiving events from various external devices and systems — POS
terminals, access control units, external software, etc.

3.3 Functions of the Distributed Security System

You can create a distributed system within an Axxon Domain on Axxon Next.
Axxon Domain – a selected group of computers on which the server configuration of the Axxon Next software package is installed.
Linking the servers in a group makes it possible to set up interaction between them, thus organizing a distributed system.
Servers are interoperable only if they belong to the same Axxon domain. At the same time, each Server of the domain operates
independently and has its own DB.

Description of the Software Package  –  34

     User Guide

A distributed security system based on the Axxon Next software package offers the user the following functional capabilities:
1. Viewing and manual processing of video and audio data from several servers on one client
2. Controlling video cameras connected to various servers from one client
3. Configuring all servers of the distributed system on one client
4. Execution of automatic responses when detection tools are triggered (audio notification, triggering of relays, SMS and e-
mail notification, etc.) within the distributed system.

Note
If a Server is not accessible by NetBiosName or some TCP and UDP ports are closed, it is possible to build a distributed
security system on a virtual private network (VPN). For example, with the help of OpenVPN. Detailed information on
OpenVPN and examples of virtual private network configuration are given in the official documentation.
Suppose, the Server relies on a defined port range (see Installation), and you want to set up a surveillance system based
on several networks. You do not have to use VPN in that case. Use port forwarding instead.

Axxon Domain configuration is described in detail in the section titled Configuring Axxon domains.

3.4 Network Topologies of the Axxon Next Software Package

Axxon Next supports both decentralized are star network topology.
The decentralized architecture better suits smaller systems.
The star architecture is more practical for creating large centrally monitored distributed systems where no local monitoring is
required on remote sites.

Attention!
If your system is based on star topology, please take into account the following:
1. In a failover (see General information about a failover system) and non-failover systems, the Client must have
access to all Servers (located centrally).
2. In a failover system, all Manager Servers must have access to each other (located centrally).

3.5 Specifications of the Axxon Next Software Package

Security systems based on the Axxon Next software package have the following primary characteristics.

Characteristics Value

Number of servers in the distributed system Unlimited

Number of clients which support simultaneous connection to the Unlimited

server

Number of servers which simultaneously transmit video images to a Unlimited

client

Number of video capture channels for "live video" processing on one Unlimited
Server

Number of detection tools per camera Unlimited

Number of simultaneously processed signals coming from Unlimited

microphones

Description of the Software Package  –  35

     User Guide

Characteristics Value

Number of audio output channels (to speakers, headphones, etc.) depends on the sound card used for playback

Number of PTZ devices used Unlimited

Number of event sources (POS devices) Unlimited

Number of user roles and users Unlimited

Number of objects simultaneously tracked by the Object tracker up to 25

Number of license plate recognition channels Is determined by the license; there is no upper limit

Number of face recognition channels Is determined by the license; there is no upper limit

Number of mobile clients or Web clients connections Unlimited

Number of video walls Unlimited

Number of maps Unlimited

Analog video camera support yes (through video capture cards)

IP device support IP cameras and IP video servers This list is continuously expanding: support for
new hardware is added through updates to Axxon Driver Pack

CPU support 32-bit (x86), 64-bit (x64)

Number of archives in the system Unlimited

Maximum archive size Unlimited

Video compression algorithms MJPEG, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MxPEG, H.264, H.264+, H.265, H.265+, Hik264 (only for
x86)

Audio compression algorithms PCM, ADPCM, g711, g726, aac, mp2

Available video image resolutions resolutions supported by video cameras

Support for embedded video camera analytics yes

Support for touchscreens yes

3.6 Implementation Requirements for the Axxon Next Software Package

3.6.1 Limitations of the Axxon Next Software Package

When working with Axxon Next, the user must keep in mind the limitations that the developer has imposed on the system in
order to ensure its operability.

Description of the Software Package  –  36

     User Guide

No. Limitation

1 To work with Axxon Next software the following requirements for OpenGL are to be fulfilled:

1. version 2.0 and higher;

2. Availability the ARB_vertex_program, GL_EXT_blend_func_separate,
GL_ARB_framebuffer_object extensions.
Extensions availability can be checked using the OpenGL Extension Viewer program (download).
This program also contains a large database of data on OpenGL support in video cards of various vendors.

2 Axxon Next Client cannot be started if the scale of all items on the screen (DPI) is over 100%.  You may have issues with Axxon
Next VMS if the screen resolution is set at 1280*720 pixels or lower. 

3 The Server and Client must be of the same version. If not, Axxon Next VMS may have issues.

4 For correct operation of Axxon Next VMS, the OS should use the UTF-8 locale.

5 Downgrade to a previous version of Axxon Next is not allowed.

6 In one LAN, two Servers with the same name are not allowed, even if they belong to different Axxon domains

7 Maximum video frame rate in the Client is 50 fps.

8 To install Axxon Next, you must log in to Windows as an administrator.

9 For proper installation of Axxon Next, there should be no spaces at the beginning of the name of the folder which contains the
installer

10 For correct and full-feature operation of Axxon Next software, the system must not limit network activity between all Servers
and Clients.
 TCP and UDP access to these ports should be enabled. Otherwise, access to all ports should be allowed in the system

11 Time must be synchronized among all computers in the system (to be configured by the user).

12 If you have edge storage enabled in the system, synchronization between the server and the IP device is necessary (see The
Embedded Storage object).
Lack of synchronization may lead to bad DB entries of events detected on the edge device.

13 Before installing Axxon Next, make sure the video card drivers on the computer are fully up to date

14 NetBIOS name of a PC must match the following requirements:

• contains only Latin, numerical and "-" characters;

• does not exceed 15 characters in length.

15 The face detection tool requires a CPU supporting SSE4.2, FMA3 or AVX2.0 instruction set.

16 The Client cannot be started on a remote desktop through the Remote Desktop Connection utility built into Windows

Description of the Software Package  –  37

     User Guide

No. Limitation

17 If a computer is linked to an Active Directory domain, one of the following conditions must be met to enable disk access:

1. Access control lists must contain only local or built-in groups and users.
2. Create an AxxonFileBrowser user in the domain and add it to the Users group (see Installation
step 8).

This behavior is typical only of file systems that have access permissions (for example, NTFS).

3.6.2 Operating system requirements

OS version Supported Note

edition

Windows 7 SP1 (x86, x64) Starter Restrictions, posed by OS edition (2GB of main Stretch cards are supported in 32-bit version
(x86) memory, 1 physical processor, 1 monitor) - see only
http://www.microsoft.com

Home Basic Restrictions, posed by OS edition (1 physical

processor) - see http://www.microsoft.com

Home Premium Restrictions, posed by OS edition (1 physical

processor) - see http://www.microsoft.com

Professional OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Enterprise OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Ultimate OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows 8 (x86, x64) Core OS edition, enabling to use all realized product
features.

Pro OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Enterprise OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows Server 2012 (x64) Foundation Restrictions, posed by OS edition (1 physical Full Installation type is supported.Server Core
processor) Installation type is not supported

Essentials Restrictions, posed by OS edition (2 physical

processors)

Standard OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Datacenter OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows Server 2012 R2 Essentials Restrictions, posed by OS edition (2 physical Full Installation type is supported.Server Core
(x64)   processors) Installation type is not supported  

Description of the Software Package  –  38

     User Guide

OS version Supported Note

edition

Standard OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Datacenter OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows Server 2016 (x64) Essentials Restrictions, posed by OS edition (2 physical Full Installation type is supported. Server Core
processors) Installation type is not supported

Standard OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Datacenter OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows 10 (x86, x64) Pro OS edition, enabling to use all realized product
features.

Enterprise OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Education OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Home Edition OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows 10 IoT (x86, x64) Enterprise OS edition, enabling to use all realized product
features.

Windows Server 2019 (x64) Essentials Restrictions, posed by OS edition (2 physical Full Installation type is supported. Server Core
processors) Installation type is not supported

Standard OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Datacenter OS edition, enabling to use all realized product

features.

Windows Server IoT 2019 - OS edition, enabling to use all realized product Full Installation type is supported. Server Core
(x64) features. Installation type is not supported

Debian 9 (x64) - Appendix 8. Configuring and operating the Axxon Next in Linux OS
Debian 10 (x64)

3.6.3 Disk storage subsystem requirements

On page:

• General requirements
• Storage requirements
• Minimum requirements
• Size of archives
• Database of the system log
• Object trajectory database 
• Self-diagnostics service

Description of the Software Package  –  39

     User Guide

3.6.3.1 General requirements

For Axxon Next VMS operation, the disk subsystem must match the following requirements:
1. The device must have no less IOPS the Axxon Next VMS.
The Axxon Next VMS records video footage to archive volumes in 4MB blocks with a 10 second interval. If the most recent
block is not full after 10 seconds, it will be filled up later.
Similarly, footage is played back in blocks (except for re-indexation, see the utility for archive management Console utility
for working with archives).
This is how you can estimate the IOPS value for the Axxon Next VMS.
If average bitrate per camera is less than If average bitrate per camera exceeds
3.6 Mbps 3.6 Mbps

IOPS during archive recording IOPS (writing) = 0,29 * N IOPS (writing) = 0,065 * M
Archive recording includes both data input
(writing) and output (reading) operations IOPS (reading) = 0,035 * M IOPS (reading) = 0,035 * M

IOPS during archive playback IOPS (reading) = 0,035 * R * S

 Archive playback includes only output (reading)
operations

IOPS during simultaneous recording and IOPS (writing) = 0,29 * N IOPS (writing) = 0,065 * M
playback
IOPS (reading) = 0,035 * M + 0,035 * R * S IOPS (reading) = 0,035 * M + 0,035 * R * S

where

• N is the number of camera channels being recorded;

• M is the cumulative bitrate over all camera channels being recorded, in Mbps;
• R is the cumulative bitrate over all camera channels being played back at normal speed (1x), in Mbps;
• S is the playback speed.

2. If you use RAID storage, please specify write-back policy for writing to cash memory.

3.6.3.2 Storage requirements

Size of disk subsystem will be calculated on the basis of frame resolution and compression, rate of video signal frames per
second, nuMBer of cameras recording events to the hard drives and other recording parameters. 

3.6.3.2.1 Minimum requirements

You need at least 10 GB of free disk space for Windows OS and 5 GB for Linux OS to install the Axxon Next VMS package in a
Server and Client configuration.
Please see the storage calculations below, taking into account space needed for video footage, databases and system logs.

3.6.3.2.2 Size of archives

Size of disk subsystem can be calculated by formula:
Size of Disk subsystem (MB) = Time of storing an archive (days) x Cameras nuMBer x Rate of recording (fps) x3,51 x Time of
guaranteed recording from a camera (h / day) x Average frame size (KB),
where Time of storing an archive is the required time of storing an archive from one camera, days;
Cameras nuMBer is the nuMBer of cameras recording to the archive;
Rate of recording is the frame rate of recording to the archive, frames per second;
3,51 = (60 sec in min x 60 min in hour)/(1024 KB in MB) – is the coefficient used for KB/s-MB/h conversion,
Time of guaranteed recording from a camera is the nuMBer of hours of guaranteed recording from one camera to the archive
per day,

Description of the Software Package  –  40

     User Guide

Average frame size is the average size of the camera frame, kilobytes.

Note
Average frame size for 640х480 resolution is:

Video codec Average frame size

H.264 from 8 KB to 17 KB

MPEG4 from 8 KB to 35 KB

MJPEG from 23 KB to 60 KB

Average frame size may vary over a wide range depending on the vendor, model and settings of the camera and video
image complexity

Note
To calculate the frame size one can use the ratio, that while increasing vertical or horizontal resolution two times, the
average frame size will be increased four times (this rule is a relative one and can be applied only to some cameras'
models)

Examples of calculating a size of disk subsystem (without size of syslog database) are presented below.

Recording parameters Calculating results

4 cameras with 25 fps and 640х480 resolution, guaranteed recording of 24 hours per day during one week H.264: from 500 GB to 1 TB
MPEG4: from 500 GB to 2 TB
MJPEG: from 1.3 TB to 3.5 TB

16 cameras with 12 fps and 640х480 resolution, guaranteed recording of 12 hours per day during one week H.264: from 500 GB to 1 TB
MPEG4: from 500 GB to 2 TB
MJPEG: from 1.3 TB to 3.5 TB

4 cameras with 25 fps and 1280х960 resolution, guaranteed recording of 24 hours per day during one week H.264: from 2 TB to 4 TB
MPEG4: from 2 TB to 8 TB
MJPEG: from 5.3 TB to 14 TB

3.6.3.2.3 Database of the system log

The size of syslog database is to be taken into account when the size of disk subsystem is calculated. Estimated size of syslog
database is calculated by formulas:
The capacity of the system log database (low detection activity) = D * T * (0.01 GB / day);
The capacity of the system log database (average detection activity) = D * T * (0.03 GB / day);
The capacity of the system log database (high detection activity) = D * T * (0.12 GB / day);
where D is the total nuMBer of detectors created in system,
T is the estimated duration of syslog storage, days.

3.6.3.2.4 Object trajectory database 

The following formulas can help to determine the required disk size for the trajectory database:

Description of the Software Package  –  41

     User Guide

Size of object trajectory database = N×T×(0,5GB / day)– sufficient disk size;

Size of object trajectory database = N×T×(1GB / day)– sufficient disk size plus reserve space;
Size of object trajectory database = N×T×(5GB / day)– sufficient disk size plus a large reserve.
N equals the nuMBer of video cameras in the system actively recording metadata; T equals the period of time (nuMBer of days)
that metadata will be stored. By default, T = 30 days.
If you have less than 15 GB of free disk space, the Object Tracking DB is overwritten - new data records over the oldest data
records.

3.6.3.2.5 Self-diagnostics service

When calculating disk subsystem capacity, please note that self-diagnostics service may generate up to 100 Mbytes of data per
day.
The service's internal database retention time is limited to 7 days, and its size is limited to 512 Mbytes.

3.6.4 Hardware requirements

3.6.4.1 General hardware requirements

In the current implementation, Axxon Next software package is intended for use with IBM compatible PCs.
The required hardware configuration (motherboard, CPU, and hard disk) can be determined with the help of the AxxonSoft
calculator.

Attention!
If Axxon Next is installed on a computer with two processors, it is recommended to disable the Hyper-threading. 

3.6.4.1.1 Minimal RAM requirements

Installation type Minimal amount of RAM

Client 2GB

Server and Client, if the Client is not used 2GB

Server and Client 4GB

If you increase RAM speed by using memory with a higher frequency or using memory in dual-channel (or more) mode, you will
reduce CPU usage and boost the performance of Axxon Next.

3.6.4.1.2 Minimum and recommended requirements for graphics cards

Minimum and recommended requirements for graphics cards are given below:

Recommended requirements GPU: NVIDIA: GeForce 1030 1GB or higher

IGP: Intel HD Graphics 560 or higher

Description of the Software Package  –  42

     User Guide

Minimum requirements GPU NVIDIA: GeForce 7300LE / GeForce 200 or higher (512MB)

GPU AMD: Radeon HD 5000, Radeon HD 6000 or higher.
IGP: Intel HD Graphics 530
OpenGL version 2.0
Availability the ARB_vertex_program, GL_EXT_blend_func_separate,
GL_ARB_framebuffer_object extension for OpenGL

Attention!
We recommend that you use the latest drivers for both Integrated (on-board) and Dedicated (shared) Graphics Cards .

Note
Extensions availability can be checked using the OpenGL Extension Viewer program (download).

3.6.4.2 Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

The hardware requirements for the neural network-based analytics are:
1. For neural analytics operation, you may use CPUs, GPUs (NVIDIA discrete or Intel embedded), or VPUs (Intel NCS or Intel
HDDL). Some NVIDIA SDK specific features allow the neural analytics to work on NVIDIA GPUs only under Windows Server
2019 or Windows 10. 

Note
To connect an Intel NCS, insert the device into a USB port and make sure that it is recognized by Windows OS as
one of the following: Movidius, Myriad X, or VSC Loopback Device. 
Intel NCS may be used with any PC that conforms to Axxon Next hardware requirements (see Hardware
requirements).

Attention!
We do not recommend using more than one Intel NCS device per Server.
You can use several Intel HDDL devices on the Server if they have the same revision.

Attention!
For Intel HDDL to work correctly with AMD processors, pre-install the OpenVINO ™ toolkit version 2019.3.379
(see https://docs.openvinotoolkit.org/latest/
openvino_docs_install_guides_installing_openvino_windows.html).

2. To use Intel CPU or GPU for analytics, please consider that the following processors are supported: Intel Core starting
from 6th generation, Intel Xeon and Intel Pentium N4200/5, N3350/5, or N3450/5 with Intel HD Graphics https://
software.intel.com/en-us/openvino-toolkit/hardware.
3. Video card: NVIDIA GeForce 1050 Ti or higher. Requirements:
a. at least 2 GB of memory;
b. Compute Capability 3.0 or higher.

Note
You can check the GPU's Compute Capability version on the manufacturer's website.

Description of the Software Package  –  43

     User Guide

Attention!
If you use NVIDIA graphics cards, make sure to download the latest drivers from the manufacturer's
website.

When using a video card, a single neural network requires 500MB of video memory. For example: a "neural" fire detection tool
and a "neural" smoke detection tool, both with unlimited number of channels, require a 1 GB graphics card or higher. You can
use multiple video cards in your system.

Attention!
For correct operation of a detection tool, video image must match a specified set of requirements.
Requirements for each particular detection tool are listed in corresponding sections (see Configuring detection tools).

3.6.4.3 Hardware requirements for GPU based video decoding

If detection tools use GPU decoded video (see Configuring detection tools), make sure the following hardware requirements are
met:
1. NVIDIA's graphics cards:
a. Compute Capability 3.0 and above.

Note
You can check the GPU's Compute Capability version on the manufacturer's website

b. Support for CUDA 10.2 or higher.

c. Support for the required codec in NVDEC (see https://developer.nvidia.com/video-encode-and-decode-gpu-
support-matrix-new).
2. For Intel embedded GPUs:
a. 6th generation CPU or higher. 
b. Support for the required codec in Quick Sync Video.

3.6.4.4 Hardware requirements for Licence plate recognition (RR)

If license plate recognition (RR) runs on GPU, make sure the following requirements for devices are met:
1. GPU is an NVidia.
2. Compute Capability 3.1 or higher.

Note
You can check the GPU's Compute Capability version on the manufacturer's website.

3. NVidia driver version is 450.36.06 or higher.

3.6.4.5 Hardware requirements for face detection

The face detection tool requires a CPU supporting SSE4.2, FMA3 or AVX2.0 instruction set.
If facial recognition runs on GPU, make sure the following hardware requirements are met:
1. The GPU is an NVIDIA.
2. Compute Capability 6.0 or higher.

Description of the Software Package  –  44

     User Guide

Note
You can check the GPU's Compute Capability version on the manufacturer's website

3. NVidia driver version is 418.39 or higher.

3.6.4.6 Hardware requirements for Licence plate recognition (VT)

The VT automatic number plate recognition tool runs on the following processors: CPU, Intel GPU, VPU (IntelNCS).
You can find the list of supported devices on the OpenVINO™ toolkit page.

3.6.5 TCP/IP Network Bandwidth Requirements

Network bandwidth is a limiting factor in distributed system performance. The bulk of the information streamed over the
network is video data. For example, the data flow (video stream) from remote cameras, such as used to monitor ATMs, is sent via
communication channels.

Attention!
The minimum bit rate through the communication channel (network bandwidth consumption / goodput) for the Axxon
Next VMS, should be at least 2 Mbit/s.

To determine the required TCP/IP network bandwidth for video transmission from IP devices and some video capture cards, we
recommend you to use Axxon Platform Calculator (check the Total bitrate from ip devices (Mbit/s) parameter).

3.6.6 BIOS configuration requirements

Axxon Next suite performance (namely, video decoding) is sensitive to CPU frequency. The higher the frequency, the better will
be Axxon Next performance on this platform.
Modern computers have the power saving mode enabled in BIOS by default. Using this mode in multiprocessor systems results in
incomplete CPU core utilization and decreases the performance of an input/output subsystem.
To increase Axxon Next suite performance, configure the computer BIOS as follows:
1. Disable all Enhanced Intel SpeedStep (EIST) technologies.
2. Disable power saving modes: select options providing maximum performance.
3. Disable green technologies such as Energy Saving, Turbo Boost, SmartThrottling.

Attention!
Different motherboard manufacturers use different names for these technologies. Therefore, for every particular
motherboard model you must find the technology name in the documentation for this model.

3.6.7 Running Axxon Next VMS in Virtual Machines

The Axxon Next VMS can be run in the following virtual machines:
• VirtualBox (all versions);
• VMWare (all versions);
• HyperV (all versions).

Attention!
To run the Client, 3D acceleration must be enabled.

Description of the Software Package  –  45

     User Guide

Note
The operating system in a virtual machine must meet the general requirements.
If you use VirtualBox on Windows 7 SP1 and in HyperV, you won't be able to access a Guardant USB key from the guest
system.
In HyperV, you can use third-party utilities (for example, USB Network Gate) instead.

3.7 Interface of the Axxon Next Software Package

Axxon Next Client has 2 basic interfaces: Layouts  and Settings .

To switch the two, click the tabs at the top of the screen. 

Note

If there are no cameras in VMS, the tab is not available.

Attention!

You can configure access to any given tab and buttons in the top panel individually for each user role (see Configuring
user permissions).

When you are configuring VMS, the top panel shows tabs with different groups of settings, the button for switching to the system
log, current user name and the Quit button.

When you select Server or any child object in the Hardware, Archive or Detection Tools tabs, the upper panel shows the current
CPU and network load. 

In the Layouts interface in the upper pane, you see the following elements:
1. Camera search panel.
2. System time.
3. Context menu.
4. Video surveillance mode selection tabs.
5. Video wall management panel.
6. Monitor management panel.
7. Layouts panel. 
8. Macro menu.
9. Layout scaling buttons.

In the Layouts and Search interface, you can hide the top panel. To do this, click the  button in the top right corner. To show
the top panel, hover over it with the pointer.

Description of the Software Package  –  46

     User Guide

Note

To pin the top panel, click the  button.

In Full Screen (see Configuring the Client screen mode (full screen or window)), to collapse the client window, click the
 button.

3.8 Ports used by the Axxon Next Software Package

Ports Change Installation type Process Open the
able port*

20040 No Server and Client Self-diagnostics service Not required

20041 Failover Server and Client
20108

20109 Yes Server and Client NativeBL Core (see Configuring the Server ports) Required
Failover Server and Client

20110 No Server and Client PostgreSQL database Required

Failover Server and Client

20111-20210 Yes Server and Client Server (see Installation) Required

Failover Server and Client

80 (Windows) Yes Server and Client Web server (see Configuring the web server) If necessary
8000 (Linux) Failover Server and Client + HTTPS port 443

554 (Windows) Yes Server and Client RTSP server (see Configuring an RTSP Server) Not required
50554 (Linux) Failover Server and Client

8888 No Server and Client Client HTTP API (see Client HTTP API) Not required
Failover Server and Client
Client

4000 No Failover Server and Client Failover (see Ports used by the failover system) Required
4646-4648
8300-8302
8500
8600

* in a configuration including several Servers in firewalled LANs, or port forwarding on the router under NAT environment.

3.9 Requirements for Personnel Quantity and Qualifications

The following roles have been defined for operating the Axxon Next software package:
1. Security system administrator
2. Security system operator
In special cases, one person can perform the functions of both the administrator and the operator.

Description of the Software Package  –  47

     User Guide

The main duties of the administrator are to:

1. Update, configure, and monitor the operability of the security system’s hardware
2. Install, update, configure, and monitor the operability of basic and system software
3. Install, configure, and monitor software applications
4. Manage user accounts (this duty can be carried out by a user entrusted with system administrator permissions ).
The administrator must have the skills necessary for network configuration, including routing and firewall, as well as NetBIOS,
DNS, and NTP network services.
Besides, the administrator must have high qualifications and practical experience installing, configuring, and administering the
software and hardware employed in the software package.
The software package is structured so that all accessible functionality can be managed by one administrator or administration
responsibilities can be divided among several users.
The main duties of an operator are to:
1. Work with the software’s GUI (graphical user interface)
2. Optimize the performance of the personal computer to carry out tasks using the functionality provided in the software
package
3. Create roles and users in the system (if the user has been granted the appropriate permissions)
The system operator must have experience with, and be a qualified user of, PCs running Microsoft Windows and must be able to
easily perform basic operations.

Description of the Software Package  –  48

     User Guide

4 Installing the Axxon Next Software Package

4.1 Installing equipment

4.1.1 Types of Devices Used

An IP device is the source of the video signal (video data) for the Axxon Next software.

Note
You can connect analog video cameras to Axxon Next via video capture cards, which the software defines as IP devices

The following types of equipment are IP video and audio surveillance devices:
1. IP video cameras
2. Various types of IP video servers
IP video servers which use analog video cameras directly connected to them, digitize the analog video signal, and transmit it to
users via TCP/IP. When working with analog video cameras connected to IP video servers, users can utilize the same video image
viewing and transmission functions as with IP video cameras.

4.1.2 Connecting IP Devices

To work with IP devices, you need to connect the Axxon Next server to the local network where the required IP devices are
enabled.

To ensure support for IP devices on an external network:

• The IP devices must have an external static IP address.
• The necessary ports on the network equipment must be opened.

Attention!
If these requirements are met, IP devices should be properly handled. However, correct functioning is not guaranteed

Based on the video signal coming in from the IP device, an assessment is made of the guarded location and the system responds
to events registered for that location. The content and quality of the obtained video information depends on how the IP device is
installed and configured. There are a number of rules that must be followed to obtain a high-quality video signal. In particular,
high-quality peripheral equipment (hubs/routers) must be used; we advise against use of Home and Office-class devices, which
are not intended for use in such security systems.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  49

     User Guide

Note
IP devices connected to such equipment will transmit a video stream with an unacceptably long delay (from 1.5 to 3
seconds per frame)

Detailed information about creating a local network and connecting IP equipment to it is presented in the corresponding
reference documents.

4.1.3 Configuring IP Devices in Windows

IP devices can be configured in Windows by using the following software:
1. Software included with the IP device This software is used to accomplish the following tasks:
a. Searching for network devices connected to the local network
b. Preliminary IP address assignment (without account of routing)

Attention!
Without assigning preliminary IP addresses to the devices, it is not possible to access their Web interface

2. Web interface of the IP device. This interface is used to accomplish the following tasks:
a. Configuring the IP devices with consideration for routing
b. Configuring modes for the IP devices to work with video and audio signals
c. Viewing video images coming in from IP devices in standard Web browser mode
Configuration of IP devices in Windows is described in detail in the official reference documentation for the respective devices.

4.1.4 Video capture cards pins

4.1.4.1 WS-216 video capture card pins

WS-216 video capture card has two external DVI-I pins. Video and audio connection is performed with the help of DVI-I/BNC and
DVI-I/RCA stubs correspondingly. Simultaneous connection of up to 8 cameras and up to 8 sound sources to one external pin of
WS-216 video capture card is possible. The Watchdog cable is connected to the J1 pin. DI/DO card is connected to the J2 pin.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  50

     User Guide

4.2 Installation the Axxon Next Software Package

4.2.1 Installation
To install Axxon Next, regardless of the type of installation, you must perform the following steps:

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  51

     User Guide

1. Insert the Axxon Next installation disc into the CD drive, or unpack the archive with installer package.

2. Run the Setup.exe file.

Note
If you cannot run the installation files downloaded  from Internet, do as follows : allow running programs and
unsafe files in Windows OS.

3. In the dialog box, choose the desired language from the list and click OK

4. Select the Axxon Next software installation type in the dialog box by clicking the appropriate option button:
a. Client – This type of installation is used for installing the software's user interfaces, which enable any user to
connect to any server within a single security system and to perform administration/management/monitoring of a
guarded location based on the permissions granted by the administrator.
b. Server and Client — installs Client and Server services. Axxon Next Server: 
i. interacts with devices (cameras, microphones, inputs, outputs, etc.) that constitute a security system;
ii. writes video footage to archives on system disks; interacts with archives on NAS;
iii. hosts VMDA database;
iv. employs detection tools to analyze live video;
v. keeps configurations of the security system, user settings, custom layouts, macros, etc.
c. Failover Server and Client—  installs Client and Server services enhanced with the Failover capability.  In
emergency (power outage, network problems),  the Failover technology restores the server configuration on
another server. Please refer to the section titled Configuring Failover VMS for details on how to install VMS with the

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  52

     User Guide

Failover capability.

Note
We offer a separate software package containing only the Axxon Next Client. To obtain it, contact our
technical support.
This package is intended only for Client updates; you cannot install it on a PC where no Axxon Next
software was previously installed.

5. To record all installation-related events to a log file, select the Enable full installation log check box.
6.  Click the Next button.
A dialog box prompts you to select the components for installation.

7. Select check boxes for the components that you want to install. We recommend installing all components.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  53

     User Guide

8. Click the Install button. All selected components will be installed. The installation process may take considerable time.

Attention!
Starting from Axxon Driver Pack 3.51, this driver package requires the Windows update KB2999226 to be
installed. If this update is missing, you will see a warning. To continue installation, download the upgrade from
the official Microsoft website.
Two different versions of the Windows KB2999226 update are available for 32 and 64 bit system versions.

Note
The following required software is installed, if necessary:
1) PostgreSQL 10.8.0 server database If an older version of PostgreSQL is installed, it is updated to version 10.8.0.
 A new log database is automatically created (name: ngp, user name: ngp, password: ngp).
2) .NET Framework 2.0, .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 and .NET Framework 4.0
3) Acrobat Reader, which is necessary for exporting in PDF format and printing freeze frames (see Frame export).
4) VLC Player The VideoLan folder, in the Axxon Next installation folder, contains the file VLC.exe, which is a
version of the VLC Player that can be run from any connected disk without installation. This file can be used to
view exported archive video.

9. After installation of the required software and drivers, preparation begins for Axxon Next installation.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  54

     User Guide

10. Click Next on the setup wizard's welcome screen.

11. To proceed with installation, accept the terms of the license agreement by selecting the radio button next to I accept the
terms of the License Agreement and click Next.

12. Indicate the destination folders for installation of Axxon Next components and click Next. 

Attention!
The installation path for Axxon Next and its databases must contain only Latin letters and numbers.

Note
By default, the software will be installed to the directory C:\Program Files\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  55

     User Guide

13. By default, shortcuts are added to both quick launch bar and desktop. De-select the corresponding checkboxes if it's not
required.
14. Upon connection to a Server, the Client may be automatically updated. De-select the Create an archive for automatic
update checkbox if it's not required. In this case, you can save Axxon Next VMS installation time but the Clients will not be
automatically updated upon their connection to the Server.
15. By default, the Axxon Next Server's name is identical to the PC's. If the PC name contains forbidden symbols, you have to
set an appropriate name for the Server according to recommendations, and click Next.

16. In the window that opens, select an installation method and click the Next button. 
If the Custom installation method is selected, you can perform advanced configuration of the installation of Axxon Next. 
If the Standard installation method is selected, you are prompted to select an Axxon domain (Step 20). Default values will

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  56

     User Guide

be used for other steps/settings.

17. Select a user account in the file browser:

Note
The file browser helps to navigate through the Server's file system (such as when choosing disks for log
volumes). The user account for the Windows file browser will be created with administrator privileges.

Attention!
After installation of Axxon Next, make sure that a file browser account has been created in Windows and belongs
to the Administrators group.

a. Create a new account; the default name selected will be AxxonFileBrowser.

b. Select the LocalSystem account.
c. Specify username and password for new or already existing user.

18. Select a folder for storing the files and folders of the Axxon Next configuration.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  57

     User Guide

Note
By default, the files and folders of the configuration are stored at the following path: C:
\ProgramData\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\

19. Select a folder for storing Axxon Next databases: the log database and object trajectory database.

Attention!
The installation path for Axxon Next and its databases must contain only Latin letters and numbers.

Attention!
You are advised to place the log database and object trajectory database on a disk that has sufficient space. If
you will be using only a log database, the disk capacity must be at least 5% larger than the archive size. If you will
also be using a trajectory database, the disk must be at least 15% larger than the archive.
The following formulas can help to determine the required disk size for the trajectory database:
Size of object trajectory database = N×T×(0,5GB / day)– sufficient disk size;
Size of object trajectory database = N×T×(1GB / day)– sufficient disk size plus reserve space;
Size of object trajectory database = N×T×(5GB / day)– sufficient disk size plus a large reserve.
N equals the number of video cameras in the system actively recording metadata; T equals the period of time
(number of days) that metadata will be stored. By default, T = 30 days.
If you have less than 15 GB of free disk space, the Object Tracking DB is overwritten - new data records over the
oldest data records.

Note
By default, the log database and the object trajectory database will be placed in: C:\Program
Files\AxxonSoft\Axxon Next\Metadata (in the pg_tablespace and vmda_db subdirectories, respectively).
In the future, the metadata database can reside on network storage (see Configuring storage of the system log
and metadata)

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  58

     User Guide

20. Click the Next button.

21. Specify the range of ports to be used for the Server. To do so, specify the lower end of the range, as well as the number of
ports. This feature guarantees that any server process will use only ports from the allowed range for its needs. The
minimum possible number of ports is 20.

Note
The number of ports that you select affects the scalability of the system. Keep the following in mind when
specifying the number of ports:
After the Server is installed, it occupies 10 ports, including one for sending e-mails (via SMTP) or text messages
(via SMS).
In a 64-bit configuration, 4 ports are required for any number of IP devices. In a 32-bit configuration, 4 ports are
required for each 32 cameras.
Each archive requires 1 port.
1 port is required for viewing Video Footage through the Web Client.
2 ports are required for each decoded video stream on the currently opened layout in the Web Client.
2 ports are required for any number of loudspeakers in the system.
1 port is required for recording metadata into the DB.
2 ports are required for service detection tools operation.
2 ports are required for scene analytics detection tools operation.
2 ports are required for neuro tracker operation.
2 ports are required for neural counter operation.
Attention! The Failover Server and Client installation type uses 9 base ports and preset port ranges for each
node (see Ports used by the failover system).

22. Set the outside local address for a Server behind the NAT.
23. To restrict visibility of Servers on particular networks in the list of Servers during Axxon Next setup:
a. Click the button Select network interfaces... The Network interfaces window opens.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  59

     User Guide

b. By default, use of all available network interfaces on the Server is allowed, meaning that Servers on the relevant
networks will be visible in the list. If you do not want for the Servers on the networks of certain network interfaces
to be visible in the list, clear the relevant check boxes.

Note
Depending on the network topology, it will still be possible be reach the Servers manually (if broadcasting
is allowed between the network segments).

c. Click the Apply button.

24. Click the Next button.
25. Create a new Axxon Domain with the name Default (for the definition of an Axxon Domain see Appendix 1. Glossary). If
you want to add the computer to an Axxon Domain at a later time, select Server will be manually added to already
existing Axxon-domain later. Click the Next button

Note
When reinstalling Axxon Next, you have the option of using the previous Axxon Domain (select Use existing
configuration)

Note
Using the same Axxon Domain name does not guarantee that the Servers will be in the same Axxon Domain. To
place all Servers into one Axxon Domain, you must use the Axxon Next interface to add each Server to the
necessary Axxon Domain. Axxon Domain configuration is described in detail in the section titled Configuring
Axxon domains.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  60

     User Guide

26. A dialog box then appears, showing the installation parameters corresponding to the selected type of installation.

27. Verify your installation settings and click Next to begin installation of Axxon Next.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  61

     User Guide

28. Installation of Axxon Next is then performed.

A message indicating the completion of Axxon Next installation will appear in a new dialog box.

29. Click Finish to confirm completion of the installation.

Installation of Axxon Next is now complete.

4.2.2 Installing DetectorPack add-ons

By default, the Axxon Next VMS package only includes the basic DetectorPack, which contains the following set of detection
tools:
1. Object Tracker (without Neural filter).
2. Water Level Detection.
3. Retail Analytics.
4. VMD.
5. Service Video Detection Tools.
6. Service Audio Detection Tools.
Additional DetectorPack packages (add-ons):

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  62

     User Guide

1. Addon Neuro Pack contains the following tools:

a. Neural Filter. 
b. Neural Tracker.
c. Neural Counter.
d. Pose detection tools.
e. Smoke detection. 
f. Fire detection.
2. Addon Face Recognition Pack contains Face Recognition and its subordinate detection tools.
3. Addon VT LPR contrains Licence plate recognition (VT).
4. Addon RR LPR contrains Licence plate recognition (RR).
To install these add-on packages, do as follows:
1. Download the required packages on the official website.
2. Stop the Server (see Shutting down a Server).
3. Run the executable file and wait for the installation to complete.
4. Start the Server (see Starting a Server).

4.2.3 Repairing Installation

A repair installation is used to re-install all components of the Axxon Next software package. 
To start a repair installation, launch the Axxon Next software installer from the installation CD without removing the previous
version of the program.

Note
To ensure that Axxon Next is re-installed correctly, all related applications should be closed before starting the repair
installation

To run a repair installation of the Axxon Next software, you must perform the following steps:
1. Insert the Axxon Next installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. A dialog box will display the disk contents.

2. Run the Setup.exe file.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  63

     User Guide

3. Click Next on the setup wizard's welcome screen.

4. A dialog box will appear, allowing you to choose an operation.

5. Select the Repair option and click Next.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  64

     User Guide

A dialog box will appear, showing the Axxon Next repair process.

A dialog box will appear, indicating the completion of the repair process. Click Finish. Repair of Axxon Next is now complete.

4.2.4 Removal
The Axxon Next installation program can also remove the software. Use this option when you need to remove all components of
Axxon Next from your computer.

Note
All related applications should be closed before beginning removal of the Axxon Next software

You can run the Axxon Next uninstaller via one of the following methods:
1. from the Start menu
2. using Add or Remove Programs in the Windows control panel
3. By starting the executable file named setup.exe, which is included with the installed version of the product.
When you do this, the setup wizard's welcome screen appears. To remove Axxon Next, you must observe the following
procedure:

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  65

     User Guide

1. Click Next on the setup wizard's welcome screen.

A dialog box will appear, allowing you to choose an operation.

2. Select Remove.
3. To save your Axxon Next settings in a database, select the Save configuration check box. This option may be useful when
updating the product.
4. Click Next.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  66

     User Guide

A dialog box will appear showing the Axxon Next removal process.

A dialog box will appear, indicating the completion of the removal process. Click Finish. Removal of Axxon Next is now complete.

Note
To completely remove Axxon Next, use the Windows Control Panel to remove the following software:
1. PostgreSQL.
2. AxxonSoft Situation detectors.ItvDetectorPack.
3. Axxon Driver Pack.

4.2.5 Update
If you have an earlier version installed, please perform a step-by-step upgrade: 3.6.4. → 4.1.0 → 4.3.2 → 4.4.6 → 4.5.0.

Attention!
 You cannot directly upgrade to Axxon Next 4.5.0 from versions 3.6.466 and lower. 
To upgrade from an older version, do the following:
1. Remove the old version.
2. Install the new version.
3. Reconfigure the system.

Attention!
For a failover system, we recommend you to update Servers through the supervisor service (see Upgrading Servers
within a cluster).

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  67

     User Guide

Note
Before you start updating, do the following:
• back up your configuration (see Backup and Restore Utility);
• stop the Server (see Shutting down a Server) or, in case of failover system, the NGP_Supervisor service. If you run
multiple Servers in the Axxon domain, make sure to stop them all. 

To upgrade to version 4.5.0, you must:

1. Run the new build installer.

Note
You do not need to remove the previous build.

2. Install the build using an existing configuration. The procedure is the same as for a new installation (see Installation).

Attention!
When you update the software, keep DBs in the same folder. If you set a different location for DBs, the metadata
and events from it will not be available.

4.2.6 Silent install (Quiet Mode)

You can run Axxon Next installation in quiet mode (unattended setup with no user intervention).

Note
During installation you may have to reboot the system. After rebooting the installation will continue automatically.

When Redist.exe process ends and not listed in Windows Task Manager, the installation is complete.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  68

     User Guide

 This mode of installation can be configured by adding command-line options to setup.exe.  See the command-line options in the
table.

Command-line option                         Description

/? or /help Open  the Help window

/x or /uninstall Remove Axxon Next and save the configuration

/x/removeall Remove Axxon Next and delete the configuration

/r or /repair Repair Axxon Next

/qn or /quiet Silent install

/norestart Disable automatic reboot of the system during installation

/debug Log installation

/noOSCheck  Skip OS compatibility check

/postgresinstalldir="D:\Postgres" PostgreSQL installation folder

/LANG=”ru” Select installation language

ru - Russian
en - English

/INSTALLTYPE="ServerClient" Installation options:

ServerClient - Server and Client (default)
raftserver - Failover Server and Client
Client

/ADD="[]" Hers is the list of components to install or remove (if you remove/uninstall software) See
the possible values in the table below.

/REMOVE="[]" Hers is the list of components NOT to install or remove (if you remove/uninstall software)
See the possible values in the table below.

/dpcmd="INSTALL_BOSCH_VIDEOSDK=\"no\"" Bosch VideoSDK driver Installation (see notes) 

no - do not install 
yes - install

/CMD="[commands]" Basic installation options and values. Commands are [option] = \ "[value] \" or [option] =
[value] '. See available installation options in the table below.

Attention!
Occasionally, when installing the Bosch VideoSDK driver,  the CLI  window opens. To continue with installation, close
this window.

/ADD and /REMOVE values:

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  69

     User Guide

x86 x64

Acrobat Acrobat

BaseProduct BaseProduct

IPDriverPack_x86 IPDriverPack_x86

Guardant_x86 Guardant_amd64

Postgres Postgres

dotnetfx35_x86 dotnetfx35_x86

Redist2005_x86 Redist2005_x86

Redist2010_x86 Redist2010_x86

DetectorPack DetectorPack

Installation options:

Installation options Description

QUICKLAUNCH_SHORTCUT='1' Create shortcut:

1 - Yes (default)
0- No

DESKTOP_SHORTCUT='1' Copy shortcut to desktop:

1 - Yes (default)
0- No

INSTALLDIR='[%ProgramFiles%\AxxonSoft\AxxonSmart]' Axxon Next installation folder

NGP_IFACE_WHITELIST="0.0.0.0/0" Network interfaces The default value is "0.0.0.0/0"  (all available network interfaces)
Format of network interfaces: "IP-address1 / number of unit bits in the mask, IP-
address2 /number of unit bits in the mask"

NGP_ALT_ADDR="0.0.0.0" Setting the outside local address for a Server behind the NAT). 
Format of network interfaces: "IP Address1 or DNS-name1, IP address2 or DNS
Name2"

PORT_RANGE_START="20111" The initial value of the port range for Server. 20111 - default.

PORT_RANGE_COUNT="100" Number of ports in use. The minimum number is 20. 100 - default.

Options for Server and Client installation

PATH_TO_DATABASE='[INSTALLDIR]Metadata' Path to object tracking DB.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  70

     User Guide

Installation options Description

FBUSER_TYPE='DEFAULT' User account for file explorer:

DEFAULT  - Create a new account; the default name selected will be
AxxonFileBrowser.
SYSTEM - Select an account  from the Local System.
SPECIFY - Create a new account; choose the user name and password.

FBUSER_NAME='[AxxonFileBrowser]' Setting a user name and password for an account in file explorer.
When you choose  SPECIFY of the  FBUSER_TYPE parameter
FBUSER_PSW='[Axxon2.0.0]'

CONFIG_PATH='[CommonAppDataDirectory]' Path to configurations files and folders

DOMAIN_NAME_TYPE = '[NewDomain]' Select Axxon-domain:

NewDomain - create new Axxon Domain (deafault);
WithoutDomain - do NOT add Server to Axxon Domain
TheSameDomain - use existing Axxon-domain

WHATDBUSE = '[EXIST]' EXIST - Use existing log  DB (default)

NEWDB - Create new DB

WHATVMDADBUSE = '[EXIST]' EXIST - Use existing object tracking DB (default)

NEWDB - Create new DB

The command for silent installation of Axxon Next may look like:
setup.exe /quiet /norestart /debug /INSTALLTYPE="ServerClient" /REMOVE="Guardant_x86" /
CMD="CREATE_QUICKLAUNCH_SHORTCUT=\"0\" PORT_RANGE_COUNT=\"50\" DOMAIN_NAME_TYPE=\"WithoutDomain\""
This will launch installation  with the following options:
1. quite mode (/quiet);
2. no reboot (/norestart);
3. log installation to file (/ debug);
4. Server and Client (/ INSTALLTYPE = "ServerClient");
5. No  Guardant drivers (/ REMOVE = "Guardant_x86");
6. And with the following properties (/ CMD =):
a. no shortcut (="CREATE_QUICKLAUNCH_SHORTCUT=\"0\");
b. 50 ports for Server (PORT_RANGE_COUNT="50");
c. Server NOT added to Axxon-domain (DOMAIN_NAME_TYPE = '[WithoutDomain]').

4.2.7 Updating Drivers Pack

To install the latest version of Drivers Pack, do as follows:
1. Run the IPDriverPack.msi file.
2. After the installation is complete, restart the Server (see Shutting down a Server, Starting a Server). 

Note
Please note that, if Drivers Pack 3.2.0 or an earlier version is installed, you should first uninstall the earlier version.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  71

     User Guide

4.2.8 Automatic update of a remote Client

If a Server software version is higher than the Client's, you will be offered to update your Client software automatically.

Attention!
You should launch the Client as administrator to make it automatically updatable. 

Note
If the Client PC has a Server installed, no update will be possible.

Next, the Client will be updated automatically along with Detector Pack and Driver Pack driver modules (if required).

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  72

     User Guide

Note
The update may lead to a reboot.

Installing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  73

     User Guide

5 Licensing of the software product

5.1 Axxon Next license types

There are 5 types of Axxon Next license: Demo, Free, Start, Professional, and Universe.Upon installation, the software will be
launched in demo mode. 
You should activate Axxon Next VMS to utilize the full feature set of the security software package. You can activate the software
by distributing an activation key on the system. 
As for validity of the license, there are two types:
• Unlimited
• 1 year subscription
Data on all the types of Axxon Next licenses is presented below.

Functionality Type of license Axxon Next Demo  Axxon Next Free Axxon Next
(8:00-18:00)*

Maximum number of Servers in Axxon domain Unlimited 1 Unlimited

Maximum number of channels in Axxon domain Unlimited 4 64

Support for SD cards (edge storage) Yes No Yes

Macros Yes No Yes

Situation analysis detection tools (excluding line crossing) Yes No** Yes

Line crossing No No Yes

Events from external systems (POS terminals, ACFA) Yes No Optional

Scene synopsis (TimeCompressor) No No No

Cross-System Client No No No

Advanced archive search: Yes No No****

• MomentQuest
• Face search
• LPR search***

Tag&Track Pro Yes No No

Retail Analytics: Yes No No

• Visitors counter
• Queue detection 
• Heat map
• AxxonNet reports

Face recognition evasion detection Yes No No

Licensing of the software product  –  74

     User Guide

Neural Tracker Yes No No

Neural Counter

Smoke and fire detection Yes No No

Pose detection Yes No No

Personal protective equipment detection Yes No No

Water level detection Yes No No

IntelliVision Automatic Number Plate Recognition No No No

Online facial recognition Yes No No

FaceCube external face recognition module No No No

Online Vehicle License Plate recognition***** Yes No No

Searching for LPR numbers on video from multiple cameras Yes No No

Data replication No No No

Failover No No No

Video walls management Yes No No

LDAP authentication supported Yes No No

Offline analytics No No No

System features available for all licenses

Hardware Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited

Control panels
Security keyboards
Joysticks
I/O modules

AxxonNet cloud service Yes Yes Yes

Licensing of the software product  –  75

     User Guide

Server Yes Yes Yes

Support for ONVIF (profiles G, S, T), RTSP, GB/T28181
 H.265 support
Metadata from IP devices
Configuration backup and restore
Mass configuration of cameras
Multicasting
Hotkeys

Recorded Video / Investigation Yes Yes Yes

Local and network archives
Events search
TimeSlice
Operator comments

Live Monitoring Yes Yes Yes

Basic audio and video analytics
Embedded detection tools (except for Axis on-board tracker ******)
Interactive 3D map
GreenStream
Tag& Track Lite
OnScreen PTZ mode
Support for fisheye cameras and ImmerVision lenses
Export of snapshots and video episodes to multiple formats
Information boards

Remote clients Yes Yes Yes

Web client
iOS app (including Apple TV)
Android app

Information about the type of license you are using is displayed in the server properties in the Product Type field.
* The system will operate in demo mode from 8:00 AM to 6:00 PM.
** Axxon Next Free license allows you to further use metadata from core VMD with any Scene Analytics detection tool except line
crossing and abandoned objects tools. 
*** Please contact our sales team to confirm if LPR country is supported and find out more about licensing policy.
**** Axxon Next Start license allows you to use metadata from a basic VMD with the MomentQuest forensic search.
***** To use VT and IV automatic number plate recognition tools, you have to re-activate the updated license of the ANPR.
****** the module has to be purchased separately.

Note
You (admins users) get a reminder to renew license 30 days before it expires.

Licensing of the software product  –  76

     User Guide

5.2 Licensing methods

There are two licensing methods for Axxon Next:
1. License file only
The license file contains data on basic hardware configuration (motherboard, processor, hard disk, video adapter, RAM,
and network card) of all Servers. If you change any 2 of the basic hardware components, your license will be invalid. For
example, this is the case when you change  both CPU and motherboard. However, changing  a graphics card or upgrading
RAM will not affect the license.
This is why when working with Axxon Next you should bear in mind the following:

a. The activation request should be sent from the computer that will host the Axxon Next Server.
b. You can upgrade your license only if you retain the initial basic hardware configuration of all the Servers.
c. It is not possible to transfer a license from one computer to another.
2. License file + Guardant dongle.
this method allows replacing server hardware and transferring the license to another computer. To activate Axxon Next
via this method, contact AxxonSoft to receive a license file and Guardant dongle.
If you already have a Guardant dongle, you can perform activation yourself. To do so, connect the Guardant dongle to the
computer that you wish to activate and perform the standard activation steps.

Attention!
You may use a Guardant Sign key with Linux.

Note
If you install   virtualization products such as VirtualBox, VmWare  etc. , this may affect the license. Should you
encounter this problem, you are advised to uninstall all  virtualization products or  apply for a new license file

5.3 Product Activation Utility

License activation for the Axxon Next software package is carried out through the product activation utility.
You can launch the product activation utility from the Windows Start menu: Start -> All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Utilities ->
Program Activation.

Note
The product activation utility program file LicenseTool.exe is located in the folder <Directory where Axxon Next is
installed>\AxxonSoft\AxxonSmart\bin\

Then you must select the name of one of the Axxon Domain servers to which the license file will be applied (the file is applied to
all Axxon Domain servers launched at the moment of activation) and connect to the system, under an administrator's user name
and password, to continue the activation process.

Licensing of the software product  –  77

     User Guide

When the utility has loaded, its main  will be displayed.

Licensing of the software product  –  78

     User Guide

5.4 License Activation

To activate Axxon Next, please refer to the document titled Activation Guide,  which presents step-by-step instructions on 
activating, updating and upgrading Axxon Next .
It is also recommended that you use the prompts displayed in the product activation utility's dialog boxes .

Licensing of the software product  –  79

     User Guide

6 Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package

6.1 Startup

6.1.1 Starting a Server

The Axxon Next Server is started automatically when the operating system starts.
If a Server’s operation was stopped, you must complete one of the following actions to restart the Server:
1. Restart the system
2. Select Start -> All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Start Server

Note
Run the command with administrator permissions.

3. Start NGP Host Service

6.1.2 Starting an Axxon Next Client

The Axxon Next client can be started manually using the Start menu, which is intended for launching user programs in Windows.

Note
To launch the Client from command line, you have to specify the following parameters: LOGIN, PASSWORD and SERVER.
For example: C:\Program Files\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\bin>AxxonNext.exe -LOGIN=root -PASSWORD=root -
SERVER=127.0.0.1
To connect to multiple Servers, specify their addresses separated by commas.
For example: C:\Program Files\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\bin>AxxonNext.exe -LOGIN=root -PASSWORD=root -
SERVER=10.0.11.30, 10.0.11.34

To start working with the software, perform the following steps:

1. Select Start -> All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Axxon Next

Note
The Axxon Next software package program file AxxonNext.exe is located in the folder <Axxon Next installation
folder>\Axxon Next\bin\

Note
To start the client in Safe mode with OpenGL software emulation,  select: Start-> Programs-> Axxon Next-
AxxonNext (Safe mode).

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  80

     User Guide

The Axxon Next client will then launch and an authorization window will appear

2. Select a Server to connect to, and specify a port number (1). 

Connecting the Client to the Server behind NAT

Note
If the software is accessed by a remote user, the NetBIOS name or IP address of the computer with which the
connection is established should be indicated in the Server name or IP address field.

Note
The order of the servers in the list is as follows:
a. Preferred Servers (see Selecting Preferred Servers).
b. The latest server that was connected to.
c. Other Servers are in alphabetical order.

3. Enter the user name and password (2) and click Connect.

Note
The first login to the system is done with the user root, which has administrator permissions . Enter root in the
User Name and Password fields. The administrator then needs to configure the system for multi-user access
described in detail in the section titled Configuring user permissions )

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  81

     User Guide

Attention!
You need to match software versions between the Server and the Client. The Drivers Pack's version must be the
same as well.
If the Server's version is higher than the Client's, you will be offered to update your Client software (see
Automatic update of a remote Client).
It is strongly recommended to avoid any connections if the product versions do not match.

Connecting LDAP users

4. If the user requires the access confirmation by the system administrator, enter corresponding credentials and click
Connect.

Attention!
When you first start the client, the archive settings tab opens (see Configuring Archives).
After the archive is created, camera addition starts automatically (see Adding and removing IP devices). IP Device
Discovery Wizard launches.

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  82

     User Guide

If authorization is successful, a video surveillance monitor will be displayed on the screen.

Note
If Axxon Next is launched in demo mode, then after you enter the authorization parameters, a message to this effect will
appear (see the section Axxon Next in demo mode)

If the Server to which Axxon Next is connecting does not belong to any Axxon Domain, after the Connect button in the
authorization window is clicked, a message is displayed.

To connect to the Server, you must either create a new Axxon Domain based on the server or add the Server to an existing Axxon
Domain.
If you choose the first option, click OK in the message and follow the instructions given in the section Creating a new domain. For
the second option, click the button and follow the instructions given in the section Adding a Server to an existing Axxon
Domain.

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  83

     User Guide

6.1.3 Running multiple Axxon Next Clients

You can run multiple Axxon Next Clients simultaneously on a single computer in order to connect to different Servers.
In this case, you must start Clients with the additional parameter -monitor=N, where N is the number of the monitor on which
the Client is to be started.

Attention!
The maximum number of running Clients is limited to the number of connected monitors that support the minimum
required resolution (see Limitations of the Axxon Next Software Package).
You can run only one Client on a single monitor.

To run multiple Clients:

1. On your desktop, create a number of Client shortcuts equal to the number of connected monitors.
2. In the properties of each shortcut, in the Target line, add the additional parameter -monitor=N.

3. Start the Clients by using the shortcuts.

Note
If a Client is started in window mode (see Configuring the Client screen mode (full screen or window)) and moved to
another monitor, the situation changes: Clients will be started on the specified monitors even if a Client is already
running on one or more of them.

6.1.4 Axxon Next in demo mode

If activation has not been completed, Axxon Next Free Versions works in demo mode. 
The system will operate in demo mode from 8:00 AM to 6:00 PM. There are limitations to functionality (see Axxon Next license
types).
The different types of demo modes are presented in Table.

Type of demo mode Conditions Axxon Next operation

Active Axxon Next can be started between the hours of 8:00 AM and 6:00 Using Axxon Next in demo mode
PM

Inactive Axxon Next started outside the hours of 8:00 AM and 6:00 PM The Axxon Next server is not available, only the system
configuration can be viewed

If a Client is connected to an Axxon Domain in which there is at least one Server running in demo mode, an appropriate message
is displayed, along with a list of Servers in the Axxon Domain and their types of licenses.

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  84

     User Guide

Note
The notification is displayed after successful authorization

If an Axxon Domain includes at least one Server running in active demo mode, you will be given the option to continue working
(2) or start the activation utility (1).

6.1.5 Automatic Start of the Client

You can use Windows Task Scheduler to configure the Axxon Next client to start automatically at the system start-up.
It is recommended that you specify a Server start-up delay. 

Note
You can also configure automatic authorization for the Client upon start-up (see Configuring Cross-System Client and
autologon).

6.2 Shutdown

6.2.1 Shutting down an Axxon Next Client

Before closing Axxon Next, you need to exit the user interfaces. To do this, perform one of the following:

1. Click the button located in the top-right corner of the Axxon Next dialog box.

Note
If the client is opened in full-screen mode (enabled by default), the!1.jpg! is not displayed. In this case you can
exit the user interfaces using actions 2 and 3

2. In the Settings tab, click the button.

3. In the Windows taskbar notification area, in the context menu of the Axxon Next icon, select Close window.

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  85

     User Guide

When you perform one of these actions, the authorization window will appear. To close Axxon Next (completely exit the client),
click the Close button.

6.2.2 Shutting down a Server

To shut down an Axxon Next Server, complete one of the following actions:
1. Select Start -> All Programs -> Axxon Next ->  Shut down Server

Note
Run the command with administrator permissions.

2. Stop the NGP Host Service.

6.3 Automatic Server restart

If you change the following network settings in the operating system, the Axxon Next  Sever is automatically rebooted:
• IP address;
• creating a new network connection;

Attention!
While the Server restarts, the connection to cameras is temporarily lost and recording stops

6.4 Switching Users Quickly

You can switch Axxon Next users quickly without fully exiting the client.
To do this, follow the steps below:

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  86

     User Guide

1. Exit the Axxon Next user interface (see the section Shutdown).

2. When the authorization window appears, enter the user name under which you need to log in and the corresponding
password and click Connect.
Switching users is now complete.

6.5 Cross-System Client

Cross-System Client empowers users to connect to multiple servers on various domains and in different systems from a single
client workstation. All settings and cameras associated with these servers are consolidated in a single convenient view. That way
you can access multiple independent surveillance systems simultaneously, even if the customer cannot or does not want to
combine these systems.
This may happen for various reasons, such as:
1. your facilities are geographically dispersed, or
2. you want to mass configure  multiple cameras from different systems.
A typical scenario may involve police plugging Cross-System Client in security systems at different retail chains / stores.
Cross-System Client automatically connects to specified Axxon domains when you start it (see Configuring Cross-System Client
and autologon). The client first connects to the primary Axxon domain; connection to the other Axxon domains is established in
the background after the client starts.
 

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  87

     User Guide

Note
You can also configure the Client connections to Axxon domains in the sign-up in the authorization dialog box. To do
this, enter comma-separated values for Servers as follows: <Server 1 Name or IP address>:<Connection port>, <Server 2
Name or IP address>:<Connection port>. Server 1 is the primary connection

6.6 Connecting LDAP users

LDAP users are connected to the system in two steps:
1. The user logs in on the LDAP server.
2. The user then authenticates on the Axxon Next server.

Attention!
Each Client to which LDAP users are connecting must have access to the LDAP catalog.

Note
When an LDAP user connects, the user's login and password in the LDAP as configured in the Server settings are used
(see Creating LDAP connections). The login and password in the LDAP directory are not used when connecting to the
Server.

6.7 Connecting to Another Server Quickly

You can connect to another server without fully exiting the client.
To do this, follow the steps below:
1. Exit the Axxon Next user interface (see the section Shutdown).
2. When the authorization window appears, select the server to which you need to connect the client from the Computer
list.
3. Enter the user name under which you need to log in and the corresponding password and click Connect.

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  88

     User Guide

Connection to another server is now complete.

Launching and Closing the Axxon Next Software Package  –  89

     User Guide

7 Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package

7.1 General information on system configuration

7.1.1 System configuration: stages

Most system configuration is performed via the Settings expanding menu, which contains six tabs for configuring certain parts of
the system.

The main stages of system configuration are:

1. Configuring an Axxon domain.
2. Connecting and configuring hardware.
3. Configuring archives.
4. Configuring layouts and the interactive map.
5. Configuring users and roles.

Attention!
Please avoid changing system settings from different Clients simultaneously.

7.1.2 Applying and resetting settings

For a change in the system settings to take effect, you must click the Apply button.
After you click the button, a progress bar indicates that the settings are being applied. You can resume working with the system
after the process completes.

If you want to discard changes and have not clicked the Apply button, click Cancel.
If an attempt is made to close the Client but not all changes have been saved yet, a dialog box asks whether to confirm closing or
to cancel closing and save changes.

When setting up hardware, you can reset parameters to default values, or read configuration from the device at any time.
To reset parameters to default values, do the following:
1. Select the required device in the objects tree.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  90

     User Guide

2. Click , then Reset parametes to default values.

If a device's configuration differs from settings specified within the system, you can download the configuration from the device. 
To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Select the required device in the objects tree.

2. Click  , then Update device configuration.

7.1.3 Display of parameters in interface

Most system parameters and hardware parameters are displayed in the Axxon Next interface.
The description of a parameter is usually displayed in a special area when the relevant parameter is selected.

If the description of a parameter is truncated, you can stretch this area above the upper border.

7.1.4 System objects

Axxon Next VMS has the following types of system objects:
1. Axxon domain objects (see Configuring Axxon domains).
2. Hardware objects: Server, IP Server, Camera, Microphone, PTZ, Input, Output, Embedded Storage (see Configuring
System Objects for Devices).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  91

     User Guide

3. Event Source objects are used to integrate Axxon Next with external systems (see Receiving Events from External
Systems). 
4. SMS and e-mail objects used in macros and automatic rules for SMS and e-mail notifications (see The SMS Object, The E-
mail Object).
5. Export Agent objects used in macros and automatic rules for exporting video recordings and snapshots (see Configuring
export).
6. Archive objects (see Configuring Archives).
7. Detection tool objects (see Configuring detection tools).
8. Role and user objects (see Configuring user permissions).
9. Macro objects (see Configuring Macros).
Some objects are created automatically, while others are created manually or are pre-created in the system.

7.1.5 Object search

Axxon Next allows you to search for objects in the objects tree using only part of their name or the IP address. An object search
can be performed on all tabs under Devices.
To search for objects, complete the following steps:
1. Select the tab containing the object tree that you need to search

2. Enter the IP address, the full or partial name of the object in the Search field.

Note
Search is not case-sensitive

Note
 A search can also be run based on object ID

The search starts automatically once you enter something in the box. When the search is complete, you will see the number of
objects found in the tree, along with the currently displayed search results highlighted in beige.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  92

     User Guide

The parts of names corresponding to the characters you entered will be highlighted in yellow on the found objects.

Note
If you search by an IP address, the found object will be fully highlighted.

Note
If a found object is located in a collapsed branch of objects, the branch will be highlighted with a yellow dotted line.

Note
If a found object is located in a collapsed branch of objects, the branch will be highlighted in yellow

You can use the  buttons or press ENTER to navigate through the search results.
The search results rotate in a loop; moving from the last object takes you back to the first object.

Note
 If you move to an object located in a collapsed branch, the branch will automatically expand

7.2 Hardware configuration

7.2.1 Configuring Axxon domains

A distributed system based on the Axxon Next software package is created within an Axxon Domain, i.e., a selected group of
Axxon Next Servers.
When configuring Axxon Domains, the following operations are used in the necessary combinations:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  93

     User Guide

1. Creating a new domain

2. Adding a Server to an existing Axxon Domain
3. Excluding a Server from the current Axxon Domain

Attention!
You cannot combine regular and Failover Servers within the same Axxon domain (see Configuring Failover VMS).

To configure Axxon Domains, you must have the appropriate permissions (see the section Configuring user permissions).
This section gives step-by-step instructions for each operation used in configuring Axxon Domains, and then describes typical
instances of their use.

7.2.1.1 Axxon-domain object

The Axxon-domain system object is at the base of the system.
The Axxon-domain object is the parent of the Server objects, which correspond to the servers that are in the Axxon-domain.
When you select the Axxon domain object in the Total devices created group (1), the software displays information about the
Axxon domain and the current license: Servers and their number, IP devices and various used functions.  
Also displayed are license serial number (5) and expiration date (6).

Note
The number of created devices means the total number of enabled IP video channels.

In the Computer/Key HID mismatch (2) group, the license  information / error is displayed. 
If you select a licensing option in the relevant group (1), the License feature owners (3) group will include the objects currently
using this license.
You can also rename the Axxon-domain. To do so, enter the new name in the corresponding field (4) and click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  94

     User Guide

7.2.1.2 Axxon Domain operations

7.2.1.2.1 Creating a new domain

A new Axxon Domain can be created in one of two ways:
1. During installation of the Axxon Next software package with the Server and Client configuration type (see step 8 of the
instructions in the section Installation)
2. When attempting to connect to a Server which does not belong to a domain
In the second case a message will appear, in which you should click OK (see also the section Startup).

The Name new Axxon Domain window will appear. In the New Axxon Domain name field, enter the Axxon Domain name to
create a new group of computers based on the Server and click Apply.

Attention!
It is not possible to use the above steps to add a Server to an existing Axxon Domain. Assigning the same Axxon Domain
name to several Servers does not guarantee that those Servers will be in the same Axxon Domain. Different Axxon
Domains can have identical names

This will create a new Axxon Domain based on the Server. The Axxon Next software package will then be launched with the
entered authorization parameters (see the section Startup).

7.2.1.2.2 Adding a Server to an existing Axxon Domain

A Server can be added to an existing Axxon Domain from any Server within that Axxon Domain.

Attention!
Before configuring a distributed system, be sure to combine your Servers into an Axxon-domain

Attention!
It is not recommend to use Servers with different versions of Axxon Next on the same Axxon-domain.

Note
Only unallocated Servers, i.e., Servers which do not already belong to any Axxon Domain, can be added

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  95

     User Guide

There are two ways to add a Server to an Axxon Domain, depending on whether or not it is present in the search results (in the
Unallocated Servers group).
If one of these Servers is present in the search results, select it and click the  Add to Axxon-domain button.

The Server will then be added to the Axxon Domain from the Unallocated Servers group.
Since the search for unallocated Servers is conducted using broadcast packets, the results may not include Servers located in a
different subnetwork (for example, beyond a router which blocks broadcast packets).
In this case the option of manually adding a Server to an Axxon Domain can be useful; this option can be used with all
unallocated Servers, including those present in the Unallocated Servers group.
A Server can be manually added to an Axxon Domain as follows:

1. Select the Unallocated Servers group (1).

2. In the Server Name field, enter the NetBIOS name of the Server to be added to the Axxon Domain (2).
3. Enter the Server IP address and port number (3). 
4. Click the Add to Axxon-domain button (4).
The Server will then be manually added to the Axxon Domain.
After a Server is added to an Axxon Domain using any of the methods described, it will appear in the object tree.

If a Server is not currently accessible when it is added to an Axxon Domain, it will be displayed in the object tree with the  icon.
To undo addition of a Server to the Axxon-domain, select the Server and click the Exclude from Axxon-domain button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  96

     User Guide

7.2.1.2.3 Removing a Server from an Axxon Domain

Any Server on an Axxon Domain can be used to remove a Server from an Axxon Domain.

Attention!
 By excluding a Server, you also delete the macros, layouts, maps, object groups, roles, and users that have been
created on the Server

To remove a Server from an Axxon Domain, you must perform the following steps:
1. Select the Server in the list and click the Exclude from Axxon-domain button.

2. In the window which appears, confirm that you want to remove the Server from the Axxon Domain by clicking the Yes
button.

The Server will then be removed from the Axxon Domain. If the current Client was connected to the excluded Server, the user
interfaces will be unloaded and the user will be prompted to repeat the authorization procedure for Axxon Next (see the section
Startup).

Note
You can also exclude a Server from an Axxon domain using the activation utility (see Excluding the Current Server from
an Axxon Domain).

7.2.1.3 Cases of Axxon Domain configuration

All possible cases of Axxon Domain configuration are, to some degree, a combination of two typical cases.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  97

     User Guide

In the first typical case, the Servers for the future Axxon Domain are selected before Axxon Next installation. This case involves
the following steps:
1. Selecting a Server on the basis of which the new Axxon Domain will be created. Installing the Axxon Next software
package with the Server and Client configuration type, indicating the name of the new Axxon Domain (see also step 8 of
the instructions in the section Installation).

Note
Any Server in the future Axxon Domain can be selected as the primary Server

2. Installing the Axxon Next software package with the Server and Client configuration type on the other servers of the
future Axxon Domain, without adding them to the Axxon Domain (see also step 8 of the instructions in the section
Installation).

3. Connecting to the primary server.

4. Adding the remaining Servers to the Axxon Domain from the primary Server according to the instructions in the section
Adding a Server to an existing Axxon Domain.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  98

     User Guide

In the second typical case it is necessary to add servers which are part of another Axxon Domain to a new Axxon Domain. This
case involves the following steps:
1. Excluding all the Servers which are to be added to the new Axxon Domain from their current Axxon Domains, according to
the instructions in the section Removing a Server from an Axxon Domain.
2. Naming the new Axxon Domain according to the instructions in the section Creating a new domain, when attempting to
connect to one of the Servers excluded in step 1.
3. Adding the remaining Servers to the Axxon Domain from the primary Server according to the instructions in the section
Adding a Server to an existing Axxon Domain.

7.2.2 Adding and removing IP devices

You can add video cameras and IP servers to the system by using the IP Device Discovery Wizard.
To open the IP Device Discovery Wizard, click the Add device link at the end of the Server device list.

7
When the Wizard is opened for the first time after the Client is started, automatic search for new devices will begin. During
subsequent sessions, to launch the Wizard you must click the corresponding button. A progress bar indicates search progress.

To stop devices search at any time, click the Stop button.

Note
Since multicast packets are used for device search, the search results may not contain the Servers and devices from
other subnets

The search results are color-coded based on the status of the device.

Color of video camera icon Description

Fully supported device

Manual configuration required

Axxon Next compatibility not guaranteed

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  99

     User Guide

Note
If you click the IP address, you will jump to the device web interface.

Search results can be filtered in two ways:

1. By status.  To hide devices with a certain status, deselect the relevant checkbox.

2. By manufacturer, model or IP address. To do this, use the Filter field. For example, this filters the LG devices, the name of
which contains the LW model and whose IP address contains 192.

In addition, you can filter cameras from a subnet.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  100

     User Guide

When adding a device, you can immediately set several configuration options, such as:
• manufacturer and model,

Note
You can search by manufacturer and model of the device.

• login and password, 

• ID and object name, 

Note
An object identifier must contain: numbers, English characters and the "_" sign.
In the Object Tree, added devices will be sorted by ID.

• Select an archive and set the recording parameters (see Binding a camera to an archive).
• No - camera is linked to the archive, no recording;
• Always - continuous recording;
• On motion (default setting) - a VMD tool and an automatic rule for writing to the specified archive are
automatically created for the camera you are adding. By default, recording stops when an event detection is
finished.
• On motion/Embedded detection  - an embedded VMD tool and an automatic rule for writing to the specified
archive are automatically created for the camera you are adding. By default, recording stops when an event
detection is finished.

Note
This option is available only for devices that have on-board VMD.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  101

     User Guide

Note
When creating a new device, the pre-alarm time interval for video footage recording is automatically set
to 3 seconds (see Binding a camera to an archive).

• Camera coordinates (latitude, longitude, azimuth) which are used when the camera is added to the geo map (see
Adding video cameras).
In addition, three modes are available for adding a device to a configuration. These are described in the following table.

Device addition mode Description

1 Add device with default The IP device is added to the configuration with the default settings (the default settings are determined
settings by Axxon Next itself). Adding a device in this mode will change the current settings of the device.

2 Add device with current The IP device is added to the configuration with the current settings, as specified in the web interface.
settings

3 Add device with template The IP device is added to the configuration with the settings that have been previously specified for a
settings device of the same model in the configuration. Select a device of the same model (the "template device")
in the list.
Only devices of the same model are shown in the list of search results for choosing the template device.
The following settings will be copied from the template device to the new, similar device: firmware, video
stream settings, buffering settings, Other settings (see The Video Camera Object), and Other settings for
Microphone and Speaker objects, if these are configured for the template device.
This mode is best when multiple cameras of the same model are in use at a site. If this is the case, we
advise to:
Add and configure one device.
Add the remaining devices, copying settings from the "template device" as decsribed previously.

To add an IP device to a configuration:

Set device settings, if necessary.
Select a mode for adding the device to the configuration.
The device is then added to the configuration.
During a single configuration change, you can add a single device or all devices listed in the search results (other than devices for

which compatibility is not guaranteed). To add one device, click the  button. To add all devices, click the Add all button.
If you set no individual access parameters while adding hardware, a dialog window appears for setting unified access
parameters. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  102

     User Guide

Note

To remove a device from the search results, click the button.

Note
 Remember that if you add all IP devices at the asme time, the same mode and settings will be applied to all of them.

If an IP device is not shown in the search results (beacuse it is located on another subnet or contact has been temporarily lost),
you can add it manually. To do so, in the neutral-colored area above the search results, select the type of IP device that you are
adding (with or without edge storage), specify an IP address and port, and select the manufacturer and model.

Then add the device to the configuration  by following the steps described previously.
To remove IP devices, select them in the device list (by left-clicking one or more devices, holding down the CTRL key to select
multiple devices) and click the Delete button.
If you click the IP address, you will jump to the device web interface.

7.2.2.1 Bulk creation of IP devices

You can add IP devices in bulk by importing their parameters from a CSV file.

Attention!
You have to disable the UAC first.

Do the following:
1. Create a CSV file with devices listed as follows:

IP address, Port, Manufacturer, Model, Login, Password, Identifier, Object name, Latitude,
Longitude, Azimuth, Archive name, Recording mode

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  103

     User Guide

Attention!
For each added camera, three parameters are required: IP address, Make and Model. 
If a required parameter is not specified, it will be automatically set to its default value. 
You should include commas even if no additional parameters are set.

For example:

10.0.12.245, 80, Bosch, Dinion IP starlight 8000 MP, service, Admin12345!, 1441, Camera 1,
0, 0, 0, Archive AliceBlue, Always
10.0.12.246,, Bosch, Dinion IP starlight 8000 MP,,,,,,,,,
10.0.12.247, 80, Bosch, Dinion IP starlight 8000 MP,,,, Camera 3,,, Archive AliceBlue, On
motion

Attention!
The manufacturer and model of the device must be specified exactly as in the list of supported devices.

Note
For correct display of the object name in Axxon Next VMS, the CSV file must be UTF-8 or UTF-32 encoded.

2. Drag & drop the created file to the field in IP Device Discovery Wizard  in Axxon Next.

The devices will be added to the configuration.

7.2.3 Configuring System Objects for Devices

7.2.3.1 The Server Object

The Server object corresponds to a computer a) on which Axxon Next is installed in the Server and Client configuration and b) is
on the Axxon-domain.
The name of the Server object is the same as the computer's network name.
The Server object is the parent of the Camera and IP server objects, which correspond to the hardware connected to the Server.
Click the Server object to view the following information:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  104

     User Guide

1. buttons for creating a system speaker or SMS and email notifications; button for excluding the Server from the Axxon-
domain, and button for launching the Configuration management utility (1). 

2. Information on the installed version of Axxon Next and active license (2).

3. Web server configuration options (3, see Configuring the web server).
4. List of cameras connected to the Servers, including main settings (4).

Note
The number of connected devices means the total number of available IP video channels, including disabled.

The list of cameras is shown as a table with the following columns: Name, IP address, Vendor, Model, Quality, Video
codec, Frame rate and Resolution.
The table can be sorted by any of the columns.

Note
If no cameras have been created on a Server, you are prompted to search for IP devices on the network (the IP Device
Discovery Wizard is launched, see Adding and removing IP devices).

If a camera supports multistreaming, the information in the Quality, Video codec, Frame rate and Resolution  columns will be
displayed as follows> value for the lowest-quality stream/value for the highest-quality stream.

7.2.3.1.1 Configuring the web server

The web server allows accessing Axxon Next remotely over the Internet (see Working with Axxon Next Through the Mobile Clients,
Working with Axxon Next Through the Web Client).

Attention
On the local computer with the Web server running, ports from the range [9001; 9001 + number of logical cores of the
processor] must be open.

Attention
The web server recodes incoming non-H.264 videos into MJPEG format, therefore the incoming traffic may increase
dramatically.

To configure the web server in the Axxon Next software package:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  105

     User Guide

1. Select a Server object.

2. If you want to disable the web server, set the value of Enable to No (1).
3. In the Port field, enter the port number on which the web server will be located (2).
4. In the URL path field, enter the prefix that is added to the server address (3).
5. To connect to a web server via the HTTPS protocol, do the following:
a. Specify a path to the certificate (1).

Attention!
Axxon Next supports TLS encryption v1.2 and 1.3 with AES GCM, AES CCM and AES CBC algorithms.

b. Specify a path to the private key (2).

c. Enter a port number to connect to the HTTPS server (3);
6. Click the Apply button.
The web server is now configured and available over the Internet at the following address: http://<IP address of Axxon Next
Server>:<Port>/<Prefix>. For example, if the server's IP address is 10.0.11.1, the port is 8000, and the prefix is /asip-api, then the
web server can be accessed at the following address: http://10.0.11.1:8000/asip-api.

7.2.3.1.2 Configuring an RTSP Server

Axxon Next supports RTSP streaming from cameras (see Get camera live stream and Get archive stream).
To configure an RTSP Server:
1. Select a Server object.
2. In the RTSP port field, specify the port number that will be used for RTSP data transfer (1).

3. In the RTSP/HTTP port field, specify the port number for transfer of RTSP data via HTTP tunnel (2).
4. Click the Apply button.
Configuration of the RTSP Server is now complete.
To receive videos from an RTSP server, use the following link format:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  106

     User Guide

• Live rtsp://login:password@IP-Address:554/hosts/HOSTNAME/DeviceIpint.N/SourceEndpoint.video:0:0 - high quality

stream
rtsp://login:password@IP-Address:554/hosts/HOSTNAME/DeviceIpint.N/SourceEndpoint.video:0:1 - low quality stream
• Archive rtsp://login:password@IP-Address:554/archive/hosts/HOSTNAME/DeviceIpint.N/SourceEndpoint.video:
0:0/20160907T050548.723000?speed=1
where:
• login:password  -  user login and password in the Axxon Next VMS.

Attention!
For correct operation of the RTSP Server, a user name has to match the following rules:
• start with a letter;
• contain only Latin, numerical and following extra characters: "/", "-", "_", ".", ":", "+".

• hosts - permanent section of a link.

• HOSTNAME - server name.
• N - camera ID in the Axxon Next VMS.
• SourceEndpoint.video:0:0 - permanent section of a link.
• speed - a parameter required for receiving video streams from an Archive.

7.2.3.2 The Video Camera Object

Creation and configuration of the Video camera object is done in the Hardware tab. The object tree of a video camera is
generated automatically according to its functions which are integrated into the Axxon Next software package (the presence of
alarm inputs, relay outputs, PTZ unit, etc.). 

Note
You can configure recording options for a camera in the corresponding tab (see Configuring Archives).

When you have added a camera via the IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices),  you can edit the
camera's parameters. The camera parameters are grouped as follows.
In the Object identification group, you can see the camera ID, and you can enter a camera name / short name and text
comments.

Note
You may use camera's short name in hotkeys (see Notes regarding hot key actions). 

Note
By default, the short name is a camera's ID. The full name of the video camera in the object tree is displayed in the 
<Short name>. <Name> format.
After changing the short name and restarting the Client, the cameras in the object tree will be sorted by their short
names.

Also, you can disable the camera by selecting No in the Enable field.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  107

     User Guide

Attention!
In terms of licensing, every camera enabled is one channel.  Disabled cameras are not subject to licensing (see Licensing
of the software product).  If you run out of camera licenses, disable offline / unused cameras.

In the Object features group you can see the following camera properties:
1. The IP address (assigned automatically and can be changed if necessary).

Note
The port used to transmit data between the camera and the Axxon Next VMS (this value is set to 80 by default but
can be changed if necessary).

2. At first the port number is set through the camera's Web interface.
3. Camera positioning coordinates (latitude, longitude, azimuth).
4. The MAC address.
5. Manufacturer, model, firmware.
6. The number of the video channel (for an IP Server).
7. Device serial number (for Axis devices only, see Axis IP Devices).

You can also customize a number of options shared by all video cameras in this group:
1. If you want to interrupt video streaming from the camera to the Server whenever it is not needed, select Yes for Break
unused connections (21).
Conditional interruption of video transmission from a camera to the Server, if:
a. the video stream is not displayed on either Client or web client layout.
b. the stream is currently not being recorded into Video Footage.
c. the stream is currently not being processed by any detection tool.
2. After starting the Client, the default setting is to display video only after the first I-frame (key frame) is received. If the
stream comes with a relatively long GOP length (Group of Pictures) or GOV length (Group of Video Object Planes),  e. the
number of P- and B-frames between I-frames in the stream, the video may be not available for a minute. In this case,
select Yes for the Low GOP keyframe rate setting (2). This will reduce the waiting time for video by pushing the preceding
I-frame that can be stored in the memory buffer on the Server.  In some cases, the I-frame will not be buffered, but in most
cases this means that it will soon be received from the device.
In the Authentication group, you can set the username and password to connect to the camera.

If the username and/or password for connecting to the camera are different from the factory settings, select No in the Default
field and enter the current credentials.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  108

     User Guide

Attention!
If the camera supports the Digest HTTP-authorization, add the symbol " : " to the last character of the password.

To enable video buffering on Clients, set the buffer length in milliseconds in the Video buffering group.

This value should be between 50 and 1000 milliseconds. If the value 0 is selected, video buffering is disabled.
In the Camera settings  group you can see video image parameters (contrast, brightness, color saturation, etc.). When
configuring these, you can look up short parameters' descriptions in Axxon Next GUI. For more detailed information, please refer
to the camera manual.

Note
If you set up a camera via its web page, you cannot edit the parameters in the VMS (see Adding and removing IP
devices).  To configure the camera in the VMS, select the Send settings to device checkbox.

You can configure fisheye cameras in the Panomorph group.

Select a standby / substitute camera from the current Axxon domain in the Alternative view list. The sub camera shows in the
layout when the main camera is offline.

Then you can configure them to show the nearest cameras to the alerted one (see Configuring Alerted Cameras layouts).
You can configure video streams under the viewing tile. If a camera supports multistreaming, you can configure two video
streams separately: high quality and low quality. When creating an IP device with a high quality video stream, a stream with a
higher resolution is selected.
To configure video streams, you should make sure that the Send settings to device checkbox is selected.
An adaptive video stream can be configured if necessary (see Configuring an Adaptive Video Stream).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  109

     User Guide

Note
In most cases, the following parameters are set for video streams: bit rate, compression rate, frame rate, and resolution.
Detailed information on configurable parameters can be found in the official reference documentation for the video
camera.

To configure video streams, use the settings available in the Axxon Next interface, not the web interface of the camera itself.
If you are using the web interface to configure camera's video streaming, you have to set the expected fps value to have the
stream parameters correctly displayed (see Viewing camera status).
You can alter video stream settings by sending an HTTP request to the device (see its manufacturer's documentation) through
some macros (see Executing a web query, Starting an external program on Servers, Starting an external program on Clients).

Important
You can any select any stream for live view or recording (see Selecting video stream quality in a viewing tile, Binding a
camera to an archive).

If a camera does not support multistreaming, the parameters of the video streams are identical. In this case only the parameters
of the high-quality video stream are editable (the parameters of the low-quality video stream are adjusted automatically).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  110

     User Guide

Note
When some video stream parameters are changed, the video camera may automatically restart, in which case it will
become unavailable for some time (depending on the video camera)

Image from the camera will be displayed in the preview window.

Note
The indicator in the upper right corner displays the current time and recording status (see Time Display).

To switch between streams in the preview window, click the High-quality stream and  Low-quality stream tabs.

Note
When a stream is selected in the preview window, the settings for the relevant stream are displayed; settings for the
other stream are hidden.

7.2.3.2.1 Restoring default camera settings

You can restore the default Axxon Next settings for a camera. 
Current camera settings will be discarded and replaced with the defaults. 
To restore default camera settings, select a camera in the device list. Click the Reset button and then the Apply button. 

7.2.3.2.2 Mass configuration

You may bulk configure cameras of the same model and firmware. Do the following:
1. Configure any camera.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  111

     User Guide

2. Click the  button and select cameras the same settings should be applied to. 

A list of cameras of the same model and firmware opens. To quickly select multiple cameras, hold down the Shift key,
select the first and last cameras the settings should be applied to. Selecting any camera from highlighted ones will result
in selecting them all. 

3. Click the Apply button.

Note
The number in brackets refers to the number of configured cameras.

7.2.3.2.3 Configuring an Adaptive Video Stream

It is possible to convert the original video stream into the Motion Wavelet format with adaptive parameters.
Bitrate and fps of such a video stream will vary depending on the current situation: Server load, channel bandwidth and
requested video stream resolution.
To configure an adaptive video stream, perform the following steps:
1. If the video camera supports simultaneous transmission of several video streams, select the video stream to be converted
into the Motion Wavelet format in the Adaptive Video Stream list.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  112

     User Guide

If the video camera is single-channel, select Yes in the Adaptive Video Stream list.

2. Set the required resolution of an adaptive video stream, if necessary. 

If you specify resolution on only one side, then a scaling step that does not exceed the specified number is selected.
If you enter resolution values for both dimensions, the compressed frame will be displayed in the designated rectangle
with the constrained proportions. 

Note
Axxon Next server scales the adaptive video stream to 2, 4, 8, and so on. 
For example, if you select the horizontal resolution 680 for a 1280х720 stream, the adapted video be 640x360.

If the dimensions are not set (0 value), then the adaptive video stream will have the same resolution as the original video
stream.
3. Click Apply to save the changes.
Configuring an adaptive video stream is complete.

7.2.3.2.4 Configuring fisheye cameras

If you are using a fisheye camera or video camera with a panomorph lens, configure the following settings of the Video camera
object, in the Panomorph settings group:
1. To activate panoramic view, in the Activate list (1) , select Yes.

2. In the Video camera position list (2), select the mount of the video camera.

Important!
Some system features and functions depend on the chosen position of the video camera: digital zoom, display of
video in the surveillance sector on the map, and immersive mode

3. If it is a fisheye camera, select the Common fisheye-lens lens type (3).If it is a video camera with a panomorph lens, select
the corresponding type (3). When using wide angle dual lens XingYun devices, select the Double sphere fisheye-
lens type.

Note
The types of device lenses certified by ImmerVision are listed in the document.
 You cannot select ImmerVision lenses in Linux.

4. If it is a video camera with an Immervision lens, select the appropriate display mode (4): 360о panorama with virtual PTZ
(PTZ) or 180о panorama (Perimeter).
5. A typical fisheye lens with standard settings produces a skewed image in the upper part of the screen. If this is the case,
enable the Fit to frame option (5).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  113

     User Guide

Important!
If you have multiple streams from a camera, you need to calibrate each stream. To do this, before applying the
settings, switch to the required stream tab in the viewing tile (see The Video Camera Object).

Important!
Video is calibrated  every time you change any parameters in the Panomorph group.

Manual calibration is also available. To do this:

a. Disable Fit to frame , select No in  the Enable  list and click the Apply button.
b. Select Yes in the Enable list.
c. Configure the video area (circle). Left-click any point inside the circle and move the mouse pointer. To change the
diameter of the circle, do as  follows: click an anchor point  and move the mouse pointer.

d. Click the Apply button.
After applying the settings, the area outside the circle will be cut.
Configuration of the fisheye camera is complete.

7.2.3.2.5 Connecting and configuring cameras over standard protocols

7.2.3.2.5.1 Notes on configuring video cameras connected via ONVIF

On page:

• Connection through ONVIF Generic driver

• Resolution
• IP devices on other subnets (behind a NAT)
• IP devices which partially support the ONVIF protocol

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  114

     User Guide

By default, all ONVIF devices in the system are added as multistreaming (the ONVIF 2.0 driver, see Adding and removing IP
devices).
If the camera does not support multistreaming, then the video stream of lower quality will be disabled.

Note
In some cases (for example, if you do not have video from a camera), you may need to synchronize the time between the
server and the camera when you connect them via  ONVIF.

Attention!
If you connect cameras via ONVIF, auto focus (AF) and auto aperture are not available

Connection through ONVIF Generic driver

With the ONVIF Generic driver, you have the following options:
1. Currently offline cameras can transfer their settings when they get back online.
To make it happen, follow the steps below:
a. Add a camera via the ONVIF Generic driver (see Generic Drivers (General device, generic)).
b. When the device comes online, reset its parameters (see Applying and resetting settings).
c. Load the configuration from the device (see Applying and resetting settings).
2. You can select another camera in object settings while keeping all layouts, macros and archive storage
parameters.
To make it happen, follow the steps below:
a. Add a camera via the ONVIF Generic driver (see Generic Drivers (General device, generic)).
b. Set archive storage parameters and create macros.
c. In Camera object settings, specify a new IP address and user credentials (see The Video Camera Object). 
d. Reset device settings (see Applying and resetting settings).
e. Load the configuration from the device (see Applying and resetting settings).
This operation will result in swapping cameras without the need to create a new object and remove the old one. 
Resolution
Axxon Next offers three resolutions for video from cameras connected via ONVIF: maximum, medium, and minimum.

A description of the resolution levels is given in the table.

Camera type / Resolution Maximum Medium Minimum

Non-megapixel Maximum camera resolution Average camera resolution Minimum camera resolution

Megapixel Maximum camera resolution Camera resolution closest to 1024x768 Camera resolution closest to 640x480

IP devices on other subnets (behind a NAT)

By default,  NAT-friendly mode is enabled for cameras connected via the ONVIF driver.
To disable NAT-friendly mode, in the settings  of a camera, select the No value for Overriding IP address.

IP devices which partially support the ONVIF protocol

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  115

     User Guide

To connect IP devices which only partially support ONVIF functions to the Axxon Next software package, you must use an ONVIF
driver (1) with compatibility mode enabled.

Note
Such video cameras include Hikvision models and early versions of firmware from Sony, Samsung, and others.

Compatibility mode makes it possible to receive a video image from video cameras; however, some capabilities of the Axxon Next
software package will be unavailable.
Enabling compatibility mode for a video camera (2) connected using the ONVIF protocol (1) is recommended if the connection
settings are correct, but there is no video image.

7.2.3.2.5.2 Configuring connection of video cameras via RTSP

In IP Device Discovery Wizard, add a camera via RTSP with the following parameters: 
1. In the list of manufacturers, select RTSP (1).

2. URL of the RTSP feed (2). In general form, the address is as follows: rtsp://<IP address of RTSP server>:<Port on RTSP
server>/<Path>.
Up to three simultaneous video streams are supported from RTSP-connected cameras. To access multiple streams, enter
the relevant RTSP addresses, placing a semi-colon (;) after each address: rtsp://<IP address of RTSP server1>:<Port on
RTSP server1>/<Path>; rtsp://<IP address of RTSP server2>:<Port on RTSP server2>/<Path>; rtsp://<IP address of
RTSP server3>:<Port on RTSP server3>/<Path>.

Important!
 Generally, RTSP server parameters (port and path) are set through the web interface of the video camera. To do
so, refer to the manufacturer's documentation for the video camera

Important!
 If the username and/or password contain forbidden characters, such as "@", you have to escape these
characters with relevant ASCII codes to avoid log-in problems. The "@" symbol is escaped as %40. For example,
for a successful RTSP connection your device's URL may look like this: "rtsp://
admin:New%40edge@192.168.0.75:554/RVi/1/1".

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  116

     User Guide

Note
In some cases, the address format may be different. For example, a user name and password may be added to
the address for connecting to the video camera.

You are advised to refer to the manufacturer's documentation for the video camera.
Even if the password field is empty, the address string must include a colon (:).
A correct address may look like this: rtsp://user:@10.10.27.50:10017/...
An example of an incorrect address: rtsp://user@10.10.27.50:10017/...

The Video camera object is created. If the address of the RTSP server is correctly specified, the video feed from the camera is
shown in a preview tile.

Note
Port, Login and Password can not be edited. These settings are specified in the URL of the feed.

If video is unavailable, examine the log file APP_HOST.lpint, which is located in the folder <Axxon Next installation
folder>\AxxonNext\Logs.

Important!
If APP_HOST.lpint is empty, in the log management utility, check the detail level of logging for the Axxon Next Server
(see Configuring Logging Levels), The recommended detail level is Debug.

Since Drivers Pack version 3.62.2953, RTSP streaming over HTTPS is supported. To set this option, set the Transport Protocol
parameter to rtspoverhttps.

Important!
To get good video from some cameras, you should select No for the SSRC filter in the video settings

7.2.3.2.5.3 Connecting cameras via the GB/T28181 protocol

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  117

     User Guide

On the page:

• General information on GB/

T28181 standard and supported
functions
• Configuring an IP-device to
operate via GB/T28181 standard
• Configuring IP-device
connection via GB/T28181

General information on GB/T28181 standard and supported functions

Axxon Next supports connecting devices via the Chinese standard GB/T28181. This standard is based on SIP over UDP (and over
TCP since GB/T28181-2016). The GB/T28181 uses the following protocols over SIP:
• SDP (Session Description Protocol)
• MANSCDP (Monitoring and Alarming Network System Control Description Protocol)
• MANSRTSP (Monitoring and Alarming Network System Real Time Streaming Protocol)
This allows receiving the status of sensors, events from detectors, PTZ and relays control, access the built-in archive of
the IP device (make sure to set the correct device time zone in the Axxon Next), etc. within the SIP session. Single-channel
and multi-channel devices in single-stream mode and working with the UDP and TCP transport protocols is also
supported.
At the same level of the OSI model, the RTP/RTCP protocol also works in parallel with the SIP protocol, which makes it
possible to use the following functions:
• video transmission (including archival) in H264, H265, or MJPEG format.
• audio transmission in G.711a, G.711u, or G.726 format in PS (Program Stream) only. Archive audio is not
supported.
For the most up-to-date information on this standard and the features supported in Axxon Next, see the Documentation Drivers
Pack.
Configuring an IP-device to operate via GB/T28181 standard
Configuration of IP devices connected via GB/T28181 is performed through the web interface of the devices. Settings are not sent
from Axxon Next to the device.
Before connecting a camera via this protocol to Axxon Next, perform the following steps to configure SIP on the device:
1. Set the Server IP to equal the Server's IP address.
2. Set the Server port (5060 by default).
3. Set the Device ID. The ID should be set on all cameras connected via the GB/T28181 protocol and must be unique. The
format of the connection code (device ID and server ID) is a 20-digit number:
a. the first 10 digits specify the address (according to the GB/T-2260-2007 standard);
b. the next 10 digits indicate device information.
If the IP device is located behind NAT, then forward and explicitly specify the external address of the Server,
the port/port range for receiving video, and the SIP port of Axxon Next Server. Example:
34020000001110000001/50557-51557@10.3.3.11/85.172.174.36​
4. For the device to perform autodiscovery of the Server more quickly, reduce the default value of RefreshRegTime. The
name of this setting may vary on some cameras.

Note.
For telemetry to work correctly, set RefreshRegTime to more than 600.

Examples of IP device settings for connection via GB/T28181 standard

Configuring IP-device connection via GB/T28181

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  118

     User Guide

Important!
No more than one SIP server can be used for IP devices connection via the GB/T28181 protocol. This means that
several Video Capture Device objects with GBT28181 type can be created in the Axxon Next hardware tree,
however, the part of the address after @ must match for all of them. The server ID, local address, external
address, and port must be the same for all devices. If at least one parameter is different (for example, the local IP
address is not set for some device when it is set for other devices), then such a device will not start.

Note.
 Axxon Next does not support auto-discovery of devices connected via GB/T28181 and these devices are not added using
the Camera discovery tool.

After configuring the device as described earlier, add it to Axxon Next as follows:
1. Run the IP discovery wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the form for manually adding an IP device, in the Vendor list, select GBT28181 (1).

3. In the IP address field specify the value of Device ID parameter set during IP device configuration (2). The following
additional parameters can be specified optionally as follows:
[gbt://]deviceID[/videoPort]@serverID[-serverLocalIP[/serverExternalIP]]
OR
[gbt://]deviceID[/videoPortFirst-videoPortLast]@serverID[-serverLocalIP[/serverExternalIP]]
where:
deviceID is the Device ID parameter;
serverID is the identifier of the Axxon Next Server generated according to the same rules as the IP device ID (see
above).
videoPort is the port for receiving video;
videoPortFirst - videoPortLast is range of ports for receiving video;
serverLocalIP is the local IP address of the Axxon Next Server, which sets the network interface on which the Server
should be available;
serverExternalIP is the global IP address of the Axxon Next Server; this parameter is in use when the Axxon Next
Server is behind the gateway. In this case, this IP address is specified as the SIP Server IP address in the IP device
settings.

Examples.
34020000001320000008@34020000002000000001
34020000001320000008@34020000002000000001-10.0.40.246/113.125.160.58
34020000001320000008@34020000002000000001-10.0.40.246
34020000001320000008@34020000002000000001-/113.125.160.58
34020000001320000008/50200@34020000002000000001
34020000001320000008/50200-50210@34020000002000000001-10.0.40.246

4. In the Port field, enter the local port number that the Axxon Next Server shall listen for receiving messages from the
IP device (3). Usually this is the default SIP port: 5060.

Note.
The IP device SIP port is detected automatically.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  119

     User Guide

5. The Username and the Password fields are not used (4).
6. Click the 

 button.
Connection of the camera via GB/T28181 is now complete.
Examples of IP device settings for connection via GB/T28181 standard

On the page:

• Jovision
• Bosch
• Huawei
• Hikvision
• GB/T28181-2011
• GB/T28181-2016
• Dahua

Examples of IP device settings and connection settings in Axxon Next for GB/T28181 standard are given below.

Note
The protocol is usually supported by cameras for China market not having any English interface. This is why some of the
screenshots below are given in Chinese.

Jovision
Configure a Jovision camera for operation via GB/T28181 standard as follows:
1. Perform the following settings of the IP-device:
a. Go to the IP device web interface.
b. Enter your login and password.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  120

     User Guide

c. Click 确定 (Confirm) in the dialog box opened.

d. Click 设备设置 (Device settings).

e. Select Network in the dialog box.

f. In the Network Management window, click GB28181.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  121

     User Guide

g. The GB28181 window opens.

h. Set the Gb28181 Enable checkbox checked (1).

i. In the Device ID field, enter the device identification number as described in Connecting cameras via the GB/
T28181 protocol (2). Example on the picture shows Device ID 34020000001300000001.
j. In the Server Ip field, enter the Axxon Next server IP-address (3). The example shows IP 179.17.12.2
k. In the Server Port field, enter Axxon Next server port number assigned for receiving messages from the IP device
(4) The example shows port 5070.
l. In the Local Port field, enter the IP device SIP port number (5).
m. In the Refresh Interval field, enter the devise discovery period in seconds (6). The value shall not be less than 600.
n. In the Keep Alive field, enter the period in seconds for sending messages confirming the device activity (7).
o. Click the Ok button (8).
2. In Axxon Next:
a. Example value for the IP address field: 34020000001300000001@34020000001300000002-10.0.40.246/179.17.12.2
The Server ID 34020000001300000002 is not set on the Jovision device, so any Server ID can be chosen as per the
conditions set in Connecting cameras via the GB/T28181 protocol.
b. Set Port to 5070.
Bosch
Configure a Bosch camera for operation via GB/T28181 standard as follows:
1. Perform the following settings of the IP-device:
a. Go to the IP device web interface.
b. Go to Configuration - General - GB/T 28181.

c. Set the Enable checkbox checked (1).

d. In the Registration timeout field, enter the devise discovery period in seconds (2). The value shall not be less than
600.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  122

     User Guide

e. In the Heartbeat timeout field, enter the period in seconds for sending messages confirming the device activity
(3).
f. In the Server ID field, enter the Axxon Next server identification number (4). The example shows
34020000002000000001.
g. In the Server IP address field, enter the Axxon Next server IP-address (5). The example shows 172.17.12.2
h. In the Server port field, enter Axxon Next server port number assigned for receiving messages from the IP device
(6). The example shows port 5070.
i. In the Device ID field, enter the device identification number as described in Connecting cameras via the GB/
T28181 protocol (7). Example on the picture shows Device ID 34020000001350000001.
j. In the Device port field, enter the IP device SIP port number (8).
k. In the Alarm device ID field, enter the channel idettification number (9). The same value as Device ID may be
used.
l. Click the Set button (10).
2. In Axxon Next:
a. Example value for the IP address field: 34020000001350000001@34020000002000000001-10.0.40.246/172.17.12.2
b. Set Port to 5070.
Huawei
Configure a Huawei camera for operation via GB/T28181 standard as follows:
1. Perform the following settings of the IP-device:
a. Go to the IP device web interface.
b. Go to Settings - Platform connections - Second Protocol Parameters - T28181.

c. Set the GB/T 28181 checkbox checked (1).

d. In the Platform Ip field, enter the Axxon Next server IP-address (2). The example shows 10.2.2.107
e. In the Port number field, enter Axxon Next server port number assigned for receiving messages from the IP device
(3). The example shows port 5070.
f. In the Device ID field, enter the device identification number as described in Connecting cameras via the GB/
T28181 protocol (4). Example on the picture shows Device ID 34020000001110000001.
g. In the Server code field, enter the Axxon Next server identification number (5). The example shows Server ID
34020000002000000001.
h. In the @ field, enter the first 10 digits of the address according to GB/T-2260-2007 (6).
i. In the Registration validity (s) field, enter the devise discovery period in seconds (7). The value shall not be less
than 600.
j. In the Heartbeat cycle (s) field, enter the period in seconds for sending messages confirming the device activity
(8).
k. In the Max number of timeouts field, enter the maximum number of Heartbeat message omissions after which
the device connection is considered lost (9).
l. Select the video stream from the Stream index drop-down list (10).
m. In the Channel ID field, enter the channel identification number in the same format as Device ID and Server ID (11).
n. Click the Save button (12).
2. In Axxon Next:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  123

     User Guide

a. Example value for the IP address field: 34020000001110000001@34020000002000000001-10.2.2.107

b. Set Port to 5070.
Hikvision
The Hikvision cameras may support several GB/T28181 standard versions: GB/T28181-2011 and/or GB/ T28181-2016. Examples of
configuration for these versions are given below.
Setup video streams as follows before you configure the GB/T28181 standard on the IP device:
1. Go to 配置 - 视音频 - 视频 (Settings - Video and Audio - Video).
2. Configure the main stream:
a. From the 码流类型 (Stream type) drop-down list, select 主码流 (定时) (Main stream) (1).

b. From the 分辨率 (Resolution) drop-own list, select the main stream resolution (2).
c. From the 视频编码 (Codec) drop-own list, select the main stream codec (3).
3. Configure the second stream:
a. From the 码流类型 (Stream type) drop-down list, select 子码流 (Second stream) (1).

b. From the 分辨率 (Resolution) drop-down list, select the second stream resolution (2).
c. From the 视频编码 (Codec) drop-down list, select the second stream codec (3).
4. Click 保存 (Save).
GB/T28181-2011

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  124

     User Guide

1. Go to 配置 - 高级设置 - 平台接入 (Settings - Advanced settings - Platform access).

2. Set the 启用 (Enable) checkbox (1).

3. From the 协议版本 (Protocol version) drop-down list, select GB/T28181-2011 (2).
4. In the SIP服务器ID (SIP Server ID) field, enter the Axxon Next Server ID (3). The example shows Server ID
34020000002000000001.
5. In the SIP服务器域 (SIP Server domain) field, enter first 10 digits of the address according to GB/T-2260-2007 (4).
6. In the SIP服务器地址 (SIP Server address) field, enter the Axxon Next server IP-address (5). The example shows IP
109.248.191.112.
7. In the SIP服务器端口 (SIP Server Port) field, enter the Axxon Next server port number assigned for receiving messages
from the IP device (6). The example shows port 5070.
8. In the SIP用户名 (SIP user name) field, enter the device identification number as described in Connecting cameras via the
GB/T28181 protocol (7). Example on the picture shows Device ID 34020000001320000001.
9. In the 注册有效期 (Registration period) field, enter the devise discovery period in seconds (8). The value shall not be less
than 600.
10. In the 心跳周期 (Heartbeat period) field, enter the period in seconds for sending messages confirming the device activity
(9).
11. From the 28181码流索引 (Video stream) drop-down list, select one of the streams configured earlier (主码流 (定时) for
Main stream or 子码流 for Second stream) (10).
12. In the 最大心跳超时次数 ( number of timeouts for Heartbeat messages) field, enter the maximum number of Heartbeat
message omissions after which the device connection is considered lost (11).
13. Go to the 视频通道编码ID (Video channel ID) tab at the bottom of the setings page (1).

14. Enter the identifiers of all channels of the IP device in the same format as the device identifiers (2). The example
shows ID 34020000001320000002.
15. Click the 保存 (Save) button (3).
In Axxon Next:
1. Example value for the IP address field: 34020000001320000001@34020000002000000001-109.248.191.112

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  125

     User Guide

2. Set Port to 5070.

GB/T28181-2016
1. Go to 配置 - 高级设置 - 平台接入 (Settings - Advanced settings - Platform access).

2. From the 传输协议 (Transport protocol) drop-down list, select the transport level protocol to be in use: UDP or TCP (1).
3. Set the 启用 (Enable) checkbox (2).
4. From the 协议版本 (Protocol version) drop-down list, select GB/T28181-2016 (3).
5. In the SIP服务器ID (SIP Server ID) field, enter the Axxon Next Server ID (4). The example shows Server ID
34020000002000000001.
6. In the SIP服务器域 (SIP Server domain) field, enter first 10 digits of the address according to GB/T-2260-2007 (5).
7. In the SIP服务器地址 (SIP Server address) field, enter the Axxon Next server IP-address (6). The example shows IP
109.248.191.112.
8. In the SIP服务器端口 (SIP Server Port) field, enter the Axxon Next server port number assigned for receiving messages
from the IP device (7). The example shows port 5070.
9. In the SIP用户名 (SIP user name) field, enter the device identification number as described in Connecting cameras via the
GB/T28181 protocol (8). Example on the picture shows Device ID 34020000001320000001.
10. In the 注册有效期 (Registration period) field, enter the devise discovery period in seconds (9). The value shall not be less
than 600.
11. In the 心跳周期 (Heartbeat period) field, enter the period in seconds for sending messages confirming the device activity
(10).
12. From the 28181码流索引 (Video stream) drop-down list, select one of the streams configured earlier (主码流 (定时) for
Main stream or 子码流 for Second stream) (11).
13. In the 注册间隔 (Registration interval) field, enter the devise discovery interval in seconds (12).
14. In the 最大心跳超时次数 ( number of timeouts for Heartbeat messages) field, enter the maximum number of Heartbeat
message omissions after which the device connection is considered lost (13).
15. Go to the 视频通道编码ID (Video channel ID) tab at the bottom of the setings page (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  126

     User Guide

16. Enter the identifiers of all channels of the IP device in the same format as the device identifiers (2). The example
shows ID 34020000001320000002.
17. Click the 保存 (Save) button (3).
In Axxon Next:
1. Example value for the IP address field: 34020000001320000001@34020000002000000001-109.248.191.112
2. Set Port to 5070.
Dahua
Configure a Dahua camera for operation via GB/T28181 standard as follows:
1. Perform the following settings of the IP-device:
a. Go to the IP device web interface.
b. Go to 网络设置 - 平台接入 - 国标28181 (Network settings - Platform access - GBT28181).

c. Set the 接入使能 (Enable connection) checkbox (1).

d. In the SIP服务器编号 (SIP server number) enter the Axxon Next Server ID (2). The example shows Server ID
34020000002000000001.
e. In the SIP服务器IP (SIP server IP address) enter the Axxon Next server IP address (3). The example shows IP
192.168.88.33
f. In the 设备编号 (Device number) field, enter the device identification number as described in Connecting cameras
via the GB/T28181 protocol (4). Example on the picture shows Device ID 34020000001300000001.
g. In the 本地SIP服务器端口 (Local SIP port) field, enter the IP device SIP port number (5).
h. In the 心跳周期 (Heartbeat period) field, enter the period in seconds for sending messages confirming the device
activity (6).
i. In the SIP服务器端口 (SIP server port) field, enter the Axxon Next server port assigned for receiving messages from
the IP device (7). The example shows port 5060.
j. In the 注册有效期 (Registration period) field, enter the devise discovery period in seconds (8). The value shall not
be less than 600.
k. In the 最大心跳超时次数 ( number of timeouts for Heartbeat messages) field, enter the maximum number of
Heartbeat message omissions after which the device connection is considered lost (9).
l. Click 刷新 (Update).
2. In Axxon Next:
a. Example value for the IP address field: 34020000001300000001@34020000002000000001-192.168.88.33
b. Set Port to 5060.

7.2.3.2.5.4 Generic Drivers (General device, generic)

General Device is a generic driver that supports nearly all devices from a particular camera vendor. 
There are 2 types of generic drivers:
1. General device. Most configuration of General Device-connected cameras is performed via the web interface of the
device. A detailed list of supported features is given on the Documentation Drivers Pack page.
2. generic. When connected via a generic driver, the configuration of the device is read and transferred to Axxon Next. After
that, you can configure the device from within  Axxon Next.
Connection via generic drivers is available for the following devices:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  127

     User Guide

  Axis Bosch Panasonic Samsung Sony ONVIF

General Device + + + + +  

generic + + - - - +

Devices connected via General Device drivers are findable via the IP device discovery wizard. The method for adding them to the
system is the same as for ordinary devices (see Adding and removing IP devices).

Note
Axis devices are affected by a special restriction: if the user name and password for device access do not equal the
default values,  the number of channels for the device is not discoverable. Therefore, all non-integrated devices whose
user name and password for device access do not equal the default values will be shown in search results as 1-channel
General Devices.

You should always select a generic driver manually. 

If a IP device is not displayed in search results, you can add it manually:
1. In the form for manually adding an IP device, select the device manufacturer from the list (1).

2. In the Model field, select General Device or generic (2). For Axis and Bosch General devices, select the number of
channels on the device.
3. Enter the IP address and port for the device connection (3).
4. Enter the user name and password for connecting to the device (4).

5. Click the  button.

Addition of the device is now complete.

Attention!
If a device, connected via a generic driver, is temporarily not available or it has incorrect connection settings, then it is
not added to the configuration.

7.2.3.2.5.5 Connecting and setting up devices with FFmpeg driver

FFmpeg generic driver is applied to receive video and audio data:
1. over RTSP and RTMP protocols (1 channel device model),
2. from connected USB devices (Dshow device (USB camera) model),
3. from the Server monitor screen (Desktop capturer model),
4. from the application window on the Server (Window capturer model, without audio).
Receiving video and audio with FFmpeg driver over RTSP and RTMP protocols.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  128

     User Guide

Attention!
FFmpeg currently has the following limitations:
• only one stream is supported;
• video codecs are limited to H.264/H.265, audio to AAC.

To add a device, use the following address format:

protocol://[login:password@]IP-address[:port][/path]​​

Note
You can set login and password either in the address bar or in corresponding fields when adding the device. 
If authentication parameters are specified both ways, the address bar has the priority.

Attention!
If you use the address bar method, you must specify the port number. If no port number is specified, default ports are
used (554 for RTSP, 1935 for RTMP).

After you add a device, you can set a parameter string for FFmpeg app in the Additional Options field. Parameters and their
values differ by format, particular device and protocol used.

Note
See the full list of parameters for RTSP protocol on the page.

Receiving audio and video from connected USB devices

If a device is added automatically (see Adding and removing IP devices), separate objects are created for video and audio
streams.
If you need to create a single object, add the device manually using the following address format:

dshow(<index>)://(<video_device_name>)(:<audio_device_name>)

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  129

     User Guide

If no index is specified in the address, the value is 0. Use a non-zero index if you use multiple devices with the same name.
For example:

dshow://USB 2.0 HD Camera

dshow1://USB 2.0 HD Camera

Note
If a video or audio device is not present, it may be not specified in the address.

After you added the device, you have to set up its streams. For archive recording and transferring videos over the network,
MJPEG codec is recommended; for detection purposes, use YUV422.

If required, you can set a parameter string for FFmpeg app in the Additional Options field.  

For example: receive video from a USB camera in YUV420P format, 1280x960 resolution.

-pixel_format yuv420p -video_size 1280x960

Parameters and their values differ by format and particular device. To list possible parameter values, run the following command
from the Windows command line:

ffmpeg -list_options true -f dshow -i video="<device name>"

Receiving video from the Server monitor with the FFmpeg driver
To receive video from the Server monitor screen, add an object with the following address format:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  130

     User Guide

gdigrab://desktop​​

Note
To receive video from remote Clients, you have to use RTSP transmission (see Receiving video from the remote Client
monitor with the FFmpeg driver), or install Axxon Next's Server services on your Client (see Installation).

By default, videos are transmitted from all Server monitors in MJPEG format. YUV422 format is also available.

Note
The YUV422 requires more network bandwidth. Take this into account when you select a format.

You can set a parameter string in the Additional Options field. 

Supported parameters Description

-draw_mouse <int> Mouse cursor presence. Available range: 0 to 1, default value: 1.

-show_region <int> Capture area indication. Available range: 0 to 1, default value: 1.

-framerate <video_rate> FPS value.

-video_size <image_size> Video image size.

-offset_x <int> Capture area X offset. Default value is 0.

-offset_y <int> Capture area Y offset. Default value is 0.

An example parameter string:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  131

     User Guide

-draw_mouse 1 -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size 640x480 -offset_x 10 -offset_y

10

Receiving video from the remote Client monitor with the FFmpeg driver
Your Server can receive video along with system and microphone audio from a remote Client with the FFmpeg driver over RTSP.
To do it, follow the steps below:
1. On the Server:
a. Open the port for receiving data from the remote Client
b. Add a 1 channel device and specify its address in the IP address field in the following format:

listenrtsp://<Server IP-address>:<Port>/<RTSP-link>

Note
RTSP link may be omitted.

2. On the remote Client:

a. Download the package of open source FFmpeg libraries from the official website.
b. Open the command prompt, and go to the folder containing the ffmpeg.exe file.
c. Execute the following command:

ffmpeg.exe -f gdigrab -video_size 640x480 -i desktop -c:v <Codec> -f rtsp -muxdelay

0.1 "listenrtsp://<Server IP-address>:<Port>/<RTSP-link>"

where 
Codec parameter may take mpeg2video, mpeg4, h264 or hevc value;
video_size 640x480 and -muxdelay 0.1 parameters may be omitted or altered.
If necessary, you may specify additional parameters in this command. 
Supported parameters Description

-draw_mouse <int> Mouse cursor presence. Available range: 0 to 1, default value: 1.

-show_region <int> Capture area indication. Available range: 0 to 1, default value: 1.

-framerate <video_rate> FPS value.

-video_size <image_size> Video image size.

-offset_x <int> Capture area X offset. Default value is 0.

-offset_y <int> Capture area Y offset. Default value is 0.

After the command execution, remote Client's screen is shared on your display.
Receiving video from the application window on the Server with the FFmpeg driver
To receive video from the application window on the Server, add an object with the following address format:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  132

     User Guide

gdigrab://"Window title"

where "Window title" is the application window header.

Attention!
The address may contain only Latin characters. If the app window header contains some other characters, use any 3rd
party utility to change them.

By default, videos are transmitted in MJPEG format. YUV422 and MPEG4 formats are also available.

Note
The YUV422 requires more network bandwidth. Take this into account when you select a format.

You can set a parameter string in the Additional Options field. 

Supported parameters Description

-draw_mouse <int> Mouse cursor presence. Available range: 0 to 1, default value: 1.

-show_region <int> Capture area indication. Available range: 0 to 1, default value: 1.

-framerate <video_rate> FPS value.

-video_size <image_size> Video image size.

-offset_x <int> Capture area X offset. Default value is 0.

-offset_y <int> Capture area Y offset. Default value is 0.

An example parameter string:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  133

     User Guide

-draw_mouse 1 -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size 640x480 -offset_x 10 -offset_y

10

7.2.3.2.6 Configuring connection of video cameras with dynamic IP addresses

Axxon Next needs a permanent hostname, such as provided by DynDNS or similar dynamic DNS services to work with IP cameras
that use DHCP.
Use your permanent DynDNS  hostname  to access an IP camera  with a dynamic IP address.

7.2.3.2.7 Configuring virtual video cameras

The Axxon Next software package enables you to work with virtual video cameras.
This requires running Axxon Next in test mode and consists of imitating a stream of video data by playing an available video clip
(recording). You can play video recordings using video compression algorithms supported by Axxon Next (see Specifications of
the Axxon Next Software Package).

Note
Do not use video with B-frames.

To create and configure a virtual video camera, complete the following steps:
1. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the form for manually adding an IP device, select  AxxonSoft in the Vendor drop-down list (1).

3. Select Virtual from the models list to emulate a single-stream video camera. Select Virtual several streams to emulate a
video camera supporting multiple streams (2).

4. Click the   button

5. In the Folder field, specify the storage location of the video clip that will be used to imitate a video signal.

Note
The name of the video file and its file path must consist only of Latin characters

Note
Scanning for files in a specified directory is limited to one minute.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  134

     User Guide

6. By default, a video will be played back endlessly. To switch to one-shot playback, set Yes for the corresponding
parameter.

7. Click the Apply button.

7.2.3.2.8 Privacy mask settings

You can impose a privacy mask upon video image to hide parts of the scene from viewing:
• live videos;
• recorded videos;
• exported videos and still frames.
To configure privacy masking, do the following:

1. Select the Object Tracker object and click the   button.

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Note

You cannot do it if the  button is depressed (see Putting a text over the camera window). 

2. In the FoV, set the nodes of the closed area you want to obscure. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  135

     User Guide

Note
When the area is being constructed, the nodes are connected by a two-color dotted line which outlines the area's
borders.

Action Result

Click in the viewing tile Creates a new area node

Right-click on a created node Deletes the area node

Position the cursor on a node and hold down the left mouse button while you move Moves the area node
the mouse

Deletes the area

Click the  button.

3. You can mask the selected area with black matte (by default), or pixelate it. To pixelate the area, do the following:
a. Click .
b. Select the checkbox.

c. Click the OK button.

4. You can specify several areas.
5. Click the Apply button.
Mask configuration is complete. When you view video from this camera, the selected area will be hidden.

7.2.3.2.9 Putting a text over the camera window

You can superimpose a text over video in the Camera window. This text will be visible to all users in all monitoring modes but will
not be present on exported frames and videos.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  136

     User Guide

To put a text over the camera window, do the following:

1. Select a Camera object and click .

Note

You cannot do it if the button is depressed (see Privacy mask settings). 

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

2. Click any mouse button anywhere in FoV to set two anchor points  of the rectangular area where the text will be
displayed. The higher the area, the more the font size.

Note
To remove the area, click the  button.

3. Click .
4. Enter the desired text.

Attention!
The text string has to fit the width of the area. If not, you cannot apply settings. For a longer text, make the area
wider.

5. Select a font color from the dropdown list.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  137

     User Guide

6. Click the OK button.

7. If required, you can set multiple text areas in different parts of FoV.
8. Click Apply.
Now, the text is superimposed over the video image.

7.2.3.3 The IP Server Object

In the Axxon Next VMS, an IP Server object relates to:
• video capture card,
• video server,
• control panel,
• DVR, or
• input/output module. 
If you configure a video capture card, video server or DVR, each video camera  channel corresponds to a Video camera object
under the IP Server parent object. 
To configure the IP server parent object, perform the following:
1. Select the IP server object in the objects tree (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  138

     User Guide

2. Select Yes from the list in the Enable field to enable the object (2).
3. Enter the name of the IP server in the Name field (3).
4. Specify the number of the network port (4). The default value is 80.

Note
The port number is initially set through the IP server's web interface

5. Set the authentication mode (5)

Note
The login and password for connecting to the IP server are set through its Web interface

6. Click the Apply button.

The IP server and its video cameras will then be enabled, and the icon indicators for the IP server and video cameras in the
objects tree will turn green.

Configuration of IP server channels must be performed separately for each channel (with the help of child objects of Video
camera).
By default, you cannot delete child Video Camera objects  from the IP server. To enable this feature, do as follows:
1. Quit Client.
2. Start a text editor and open the AxxonNext.exe.config configuration file located in:   <Axxon Next installation folder Axxon
Next>\bin
3. Find the line <add key="AllowIpServerChannelRemove" value="false" /> and change false to true.
4. Save the changes to the file.
You can now delete camera objects from the IP server.

Attention!
You cannot restore a deleted object. You will need to create the IP server again.

7.2.3.3.1 Configuring Virtual IP Servers

Axxon Next supports working with a virtual IP server. 
To create and configure a virtual IP server, perform the following steps:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  139

     User Guide

1. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).

2. In the form for manually adding an IP device, select  AxxonSoft in the Vendor drop-down list (1).

3. Select Virtual from the models list to emulate a single-stream video camera. Select Virtual several streams to emulate a
video camera supporting multiple streams (2).

4. Click the   button

An IP server object will be added. It will be used for creating 4 virtual video cameras; location of a video file to be used for signal
emulation needs to be specified for each camera (see Configuring virtual video cameras).

7.2.3.4 The Microphone Object

If a microphone is part of an IP server, then you must specify the video camera to which it will be linked in the settings of the
given microphone. When you do this, the Microphone object will become a child of the specified Camera object.

Atteintion
When a microphone is reassigned from one camera to another, all previously recorded audio is also transferred; when
recorded video on the new camera is played, the transferred audio is played back

Note
This setting is used during synchronized video and audio monitoring of a situation as well as during synchronized video
and video recording to the archive (see the section Audio Monitoring)

In all other cases the Microphone object will automatically be displayed in the objects tree as a child of the video camera itself.
To configure the Microphone object, perform the following:
1. Select the Microphone object in the objects tree (1). 

2. Enable the microphone by selecting Yes in the Enable field (2).

3. Enter the name of the microphone in the Name field (3).
4. Configure additional microphone parameters (audio codec, bit rate, etc.) in the Other group (4) using their descriptions in
the interface of the Axxon Next software package or, for more detail, in the official reference documentation of the parent
video camera.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  140

     User Guide

5. Choose a video camera to associate this microphone with (5). As a result of this operation, the selected camera will
become a parent object for the microphone.
6. Click the Apply button.
The microphone will then be switched to its assigned work mode.
To check the microphone's operation, you must perform the following steps:
1. Select the Sound on/off check box in the Summary group.

2. Provide an audio signal to the microphone.

3. If the microphone is configured correctly, the audio signal will be transmitted to the server's speakers. The strength of the
incoming audio signal will be displayed on the indicator to the right of the Sound on/off check box.
Checking microphone operation is now complete.
If a microphone is part of an IP server, the microphone settings allow choosing  the video camera of the IP server it will be
matched to. When you do this, the microphone object will appear as the child object of the specified camera in the object tree.

7.2.3.5 The PTZ Object

The PTZ object is displayed in the device list as the child object of its respective PTZ camera.
To configure a camera's PTZ controls, the following must be true:
1. Select the PTZ object in the objects tree (1)

2. Enable the PTZ device by selecting Yes in the Enable field (2).
3. Enter the name of the PTZ device (3).
4. You can use discrete PTZ control buttons even if a camera does not support discrete mode; to enable this, select Yes for
the Discrete PTZ Control via Continuous parameter. In this case, discrete PTZ control will be emulated via continuous
control commands (4). 
5. Select the Home preset by specifying the required identifier (5). The Home preset will be applied automatically after the
time period specified in the Home preset timeout field (6).
6. To simultaneously control a PTZ camera by multiple users with the same priority, select Yes  in the Multiple control List
(7). Otherwise, only one user at a time will have a control (see Controlling a PTZ Camera).
7. To use device's existing presets in Axxon Next, do the following:
a. If a camera supports the ONVIF protocol, set Yes for the New PTZ Interface parameter (8). The device's presets
will automatically appear in the PTZ control panel.
b. In any other case:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  141

     User Guide

i. Set Yes for the Use device presets parameter (12). 

ii. Create presets with identical IDs in Axxon Next (see Creating and editing presets).

Attention!
If you have not enabled the Use device presets option, the existing presets can be lost if the
following conditions are in place:
1. In Axxon Next, the recording presets to the device option enabled (see. P.8).
2. In Axxon Next, a preset with the same ID is created (see Creating and editing presets).

8. Configuring patrol:
a. Choose the default patrol mode: Yes - on, No - off  (9). 
If the default patrolling is enabled, it can be stopped in PTZ Control Panel (see Patrolling). However, after you
finish the PTZ control session, patrols will resume automatically.
b. Set the transition speed from one preset  to another in arbitrary units from 0 to 100 (10).
c. Set the interval of time (in seconds) at which the PTZ device will switch between presets while in Patrol mode (11).
9. By default, presets are stored on IP cameras. If you want to store presets on Server, select No  in Save presets (12). 

Note
This option is available only for devices that support Absolute Positioning.

10. If necessary, configure Tag & Track (13, see Configuring object tracking).
11. Depending on camera, you may find other options in  the Other group (14). To configure them, please refer to the
interface help section and tooltips or official documentation.
12. Click the Apply button.
The PTZ device will then be switched to its assigned work mode.
To check the functioning of the PTZ device, click the Test button. If the PTZ device is configured correctly, it will turn one step
and return to its original position.

7.2.3.5.1 Configure HTTP-CGI commands to control Wash&Wiper

With Axxon Next, you can control the Wash&Wiper feature in some Axis IP devices (M7016, P7216, Q7404, Q7436 ) using HTTP-CGI
commands.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  142

     User Guide

To set HTTP-CGI commands, do as follows:

1. Create presets for the camera, numbered as follows: 101, 102, 103 and 104 (see The Presets List).
2. Go to the PTZ object  and specify commands in the appropriate fields.

Note
The corresponding Camera object  should have the Send settings to device option enabled (see The Video
Camera Object).

3. Click the Apply button.

When the camera goes to the presets 101-104,  this triggers a pre-configured command. 

7.2.3.6 The Channel object

For I/O modules or video surveillance control panels (see CCTV Keyboards), the Channel object is displayed as a child object of
an IP Server in the object tree (see The IP Server Object).
To configure the Channel object, do as follows:
1. Select the Channel object in the objects tree (1).

2. Enable the object (2).

Note
When a channel object is enabled / disabled, all Input and Output child objects are automatically enabled /
disabled.

3. Enter the name of the channel (3).

4. Click Apply.

7.2.3.7 The Input Object

If a camera has a built-in or pluggable digital input, the Input object  is displayed as a child object of the Camera in the object
tree.  The total number of Input objects for a camera corresponds to its number of pluggable digital inputs.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  143

     User Guide

If a device is defined as an IP Server, aInput will be displayed as a child of a Channel object in the object tree (see The Channel
object).
To configure a Input object, perform the following:
1. Select the Input object in the objects tree (1).

2. Enable the device (2).

Note
If a input is a child of a Channel object, then:
1) Turning on a input automatically enables its parent Channel object.
2) Turning off all Input and Output child objects automatically disables their parent Channel object.

3. Enter the name of the Input (3).

4. Set the status to which the Input will be set when no alarm is present.

5. Click the Apply button.

The Input will then be switched to its assigned work mode.
The current status of the Input is displayed in the Input information group.

If a Input is part of an IP server, the Input settings allow choosing  the video camera of the IP server it will be matched to. When
you do this, the Input object will appear as the child object of the specified camera in the object tree.

7.2.3.7.1 Configure Virtual Inputs

Switch between virtual IP-device states (HttpListener)

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  144

     User Guide

The Axxon Next software package enables you to work with virtual Inputs. This involves triggering a virtual Input and producing a
virtual Input event  / alarm in the VMS. When triggered, the virtual Input status switches  - Closed / Open.
To create and configure a virtual Input, complete the following steps:
1. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the form for manually adding an IP device, select  HttpListener in the Vendor drop-down list (1).

3. In the Port field, specify the port number that will be used Input status queries (2).

4. Click the   button

The IP Server object is automatically created to host 4 virtual Inputs.

Attention!
For a virtual Input to work correctly, please do as follows: use the Open circuit.

You can configure virtual Inputs in the same way as real ones.  Also you can specify the time-out when virtual Inputs reset their
status in the Alarm ExpirationTime field of the IP Server object.

Note
It ranges from 0 to 100.

Note
 This setting is applied only after you disable and enable the Input again.

7.2.3.8 The Output Object

If a camera has a built-in or pluggable digital output, the Output object  is displayed as a child object of the Camera in the object
tree.  The total number of Output objects for a camera corresponds to its number of pluggable digital outputs.
If a device is defined as an IP Server, a relay will be displayed as a child of a Channel object in the object tree (see The Channel
object).
To configure a Output object, perform the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  145

     User Guide

1. Select a Output object in the objects tree.

2. Enable the device (1).

Note
If a output is a child of a Channel object, then:
1) Turning on a output automatically enables its parent Channel object.
2) Turning off all Input and Output child objects automatically disables their parent Channel object.

3. Enter the name of the Output (2).

4. Set the status to which the Output will be set when no alarm is present.

5. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  146

     User Guide

The Output will then be switched to its assigned work mode.

To check the functioning of the Output, click the Test button. If the Output is configured correctly, its status will briefly change.

If a Output is part of an IP server, the sensor settings allow choosing  the video camera of the IP server it will be matched to. When
you do this, the Output object will appear as the child object of the specified camera in the object tree.

7.2.3.9 The Speaker Object

The Speaker object is used for configuration of the sound alert triggered by a macros.

Attention!
Audio notifications cannot be played back via the system speakers on a remote Client.  In this case, you are advised to
run an external program on Clients.

In Axxon Next you can create the following types of Speaker objects:
1. IP speaker device. Created automatically if there is an audio outlet on an IP device.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  147

     User Guide

Note
One audio outlet on an IP device corresponds to one child Speaker of the Camera object

2. System speaker. Created manually. Sound on the system speaker is played back using the server's sound card.
A Speaker object can play audio notification files with the extensions:
1. .wav
2. .mp3
3. .mkv
4. .avi
The following audio notification file encoding formats are supported:
1. G.711
2. G.726
3. PCM
The audio notification file should be stored on the computer corresponding to the Server object on the basis of which the
Speaker object is registered.

7.2.3.9.1 Creating and Configuring an Object

To create a Speaker system object, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the list of devices, highlight a Server object and click the Create voice notifier button (1). 

2. In the Name field (1), enter the desired name of the Speaker object.

3. Select the speaker mode: disabled, play back on Server, play back on Clients (2).  
4. In the Audio file field (3), enter the full path to the audio notification file. This parameter is mandatory.
5. In the Volume field (4), enter the desired speaker volume level.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  148

     User Guide

Note
By default, IP device speakers are disabled. To enable, for the Enable value (1), select Yes. When configuring the
speaker of an IP device, you can set other parameters as well, such as the compression algorithm for the audio
signal sent to the speaker for playback (2). Which speaker parameters you can configure is determined by the
protocol for integration of the IP device and the Axxon Next software package

6. Click the Apply button.

Creation of the Speaker object is complete.

7.2.3.9.2 Configuring a Speaker Object

To configure a Speaker object, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the list of devices, highlight the Speaker object which needs to be configured (1).

2. Select the speaker mode: disabled, play back on Server, play back on Clients (2).  
3. In the Name field (3), enter the desired name of the Speaker object.
4. In the Audio file field (4), enter the full path to the audio notification file.
5. In the Volume field (5), enter the desired speaker volume level.
6. To parent an IP device to a speaker:
a. By default, IP device speakers are disabled. To enable, for the Enable value (1), select Yes.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  149

     User Guide

b. When configuring the speaker of an IP device, you can set other parameters as well, such as the compression
algorithm for the audio signal sent to the speaker for playback (2). Which speaker parameters you can configure is
determined by the protocol for integration of the IP device and the Axxon Next software package.
c. Choose a video camera to associate this speaker with (3). As a result of this operation, the selected camera will
become a parent object for the speaker.
7. Click the Apply button.
Configuration of the Speaker object is now complete.

7.2.3.9.3 Checking Audio Notification

To check audio notification from a Speaker object, click the Test button.

When you do this, the audio notification file whose path you indicated in the corresponding field plays back (see the section
Configuring a Speaker Object). 

7.2.3.10 The Embedded Storage object

If a camera has on-board storage (SD card), the system will automatically create the corresponding object. 
To configure on-board storage, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  150

     User Guide

1. Select the required object in the devices list (1).

2. Select Yes in the Enable field to activate the object (2).

3. You can dd the name of the object (3).
4. Click the  Apply button.
You have configured on-board storage. You can view video from on-board storage (if enabled) and copy it to the archive (see
Configuring data replication).

7.2.4 Particulars of Configuration of Devices

7.2.4.1 AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS Sensor-Relay cards

7.2.4.1.1 Connecting AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS Sensor-Relay cards

The AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS Sensor-Relay card is an interface of external sensors and external executive devices (relays) as a part of
video surveillance and fire and security alarm systems.
The figure shows the appearance of AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS card. 

The layout of card connectors:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  151

     User Guide

The device is controlled via the USB interface. Electrical and technical specifications of the card are given in the Electrical and
technical specifications of AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS devices section.
Connect the AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS card to the Server as follows:
1. Switch the computer power supply off. Remove the system cover.
2. Install the AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS card into a vacant motherboard slot and fix it in the casing.
3. Connect the loop (bundled with the distribution kit) to the J1 connector and to a vacant USB connector on the
motherboard of computer.
4. To activate the hardware control of the hang, connect the wires to the H2 H3 connector.
5. To connect sensors and relays unsolder the connector bundled with the distribution kit. 
a. The connecting wires from the executive devices are soldered to the contacts marked as "Relay" (see the table
below).
Connector Application Connector Application

1 Relay 1 (+) 26 Sensor 5

2 Relay 1 27 Sensor 5

3 Relay 2 28 Sensor 6

4 Relay 2 29 Sensor 6

5 Relay 3 30 Sensor 7

6 Relay 3 31 Sensor 7

7 Relay 4 32 Sensor 8

8 Relay 4 33 Sensor 8

9 Relay 5 34 Sensor 9

10 Relay 5 35 Sensor 9

11 Relay 6 36 Sensor 10

12 Relay 6 37 Sensor 10

13 Relay 7 38 Sensor 11

14 Relay 7 39 Sensor 11

15 Relay 8 40 Sensor 12

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  152

     User Guide

Connector Application Connector Application

16 Relay 8 41 Sensor 12

b. The connecting wires from the sensors are soldered to the contacts marked as "Sensor" (see the table below).
Connector Application Connector Application

17 Sensor 1 42 Sensor 13

18 Sensor 1 43 Sensor 13

19 Sensor 2 44 Sensor 14

20 Sensor 2 45 Sensor 14

21 Sensor 3 46 Sensor 15

22 Sensor 3 47 Sensor 15

23 Sensor 4 48 Sensor 16

24 Sensor 4 49 Sensor 16

25 + 12V (Output) 50 GND (Ground)

6. Fix the unsoldered connector in the casing bundled with the distribution kit.
7. Connect ready-for-use connector to external connector of the card in order to connect sensors and relays to the Server.
The AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS card is now connected.

7.2.4.1.2 Electrical and technical specifications of AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS devices

When connecting the AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS sensor-relay cards, the electrical and technical specifications shown in the table
below should be considered.

Parameter Specification

Galvanic isolation on inputs/outputs 3750 V

Inputs Quantity - 16
Type - current loop
Galvanic isolation - Yes
Maximum voltage - 60 V
Rated voltage - 12 V
Maximum current - 60 mA

Outputs Quantity - 8
Type - open collector
Galvanic isolation - Yes
Maximum voltage - 300 V
Maximum current - 150 mA
Minimum pick-up voltage - 1.0 V
Minimum pick-up current - 5 mA

Reset Timer (Watchdog) Customizable

Ping interval of all alarm inputs 100 ms for all contacts. Customizable

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  153

     User Guide

Parameter Specification

PC connection interface USB 2.0, up to 5 meters

Power supply 500 mA consumption from USB port

7.2.4.1.3 Special features of configuring AGRG-IO-16/8-WD-DS card in Axxon Next

The connected card is automatically detected in the IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
If you add a device manually, enter the serial number of the device in the IP address field.

To read the serial number, use the manufacturer's utility.

7.2.4.2 Axis IP Devices

7.2.4.2.1 Serial number check

To check serial numbers of Axis IP devices, do the following:
1. Enter a serial number into the appropriate field.

2. Click Apply.
3. The device will be reconnected. Upon reconnection, the entered serial number will be checked against the real one.  If
numbers do not match, a separate event will be registered in the system Log.

7.2.4.2.2 Bonjour function

For Axis IP devices on which the Bonjour function is supported and enabled, changing the default value of the Friendly
name parameter is strongly discouraged. If an arbitrary Friendly name value is set for an Axis IP device, a search for connected
equipment in the Axxon Next software package will give incorrect results for this IP device.

Note
The Friendly name parameter is configured through the Web interface of the IP device: Setup -> System options ->
Network -> Bonjour

Note
The default value of the Friendly name parameter is as follows: AXIS <model name> - <mac address>, where <model
name> is the model of the Axis IP device and <mac address> is its MAC address (for example, AXIS 214 - 00408C7D2610

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  154

     User Guide

7.2.4.2.3 Video streams

Axxon Next can access the following video streams from Axis IP devices:
1. H.264/MJPEG video
2–5. Streams matching the Quality, Balanced, Bandwidth, and Mobile profiles. These profiles are configured via the camera's web
interface.
In Axxon Next, the Quality profile corresponds to stream 1. Auto, Balanced is stream 2. Auto, Bandwidth is stream 3. Auto, and
Mobile is stream 4. Auto (see The Video Camera Object).

7.2.4.3 CCTV Keyboards

7.2.4.3.1 General Information about CCTV Keyboards

Video surveillance control panels can be connected to Axxon Next in two ways:
1. Connecting a panel via the Windows driver as an HID USB device. This method makes the panel immediately available for
specifying hotkeys (see Assigning hot keys). 

Attention!
In HID mode, some control panel buttons may not work in Axxon Next.

2. Connecting a panel via the Axxon Next driver. Using this method, the panel is added to the system similarly to that of IP
devices (see Adding and removing IP devices). 

Attention!
To connect a control panel in this way, you need the Axxon Next software to be installed in the Server and
Client configuration. It's not possible to operate a board as a remote client.

The following control panels are supported in the current version of Axxon Next:

Windows driver  Axxon Next driver

Axis T8310 (T8311, T8312, T8313) + +

Dahua DH-NKB1000 + +

PELCO KBD5000 + +

Videotec DCZ + +

Hikvision DS-1005KI + +

Hikvision DS-1100KI - +

Hikvision DS-1200KI - +

Hikvision DS-1600KI - +

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  155

     User Guide

Windows driver  Axxon Next driver

UNIVIEW KB-1100 - +

7.2.4.3.2 Axis T8310 specific configuration features

7.2.4.3.2.1 Setting up on a Server

To make a T8132 keyboard operate with Rev01 hardware, restart the Axxon Next VMS server after you create the IP Server object
(see Shutting down a Server, Starting a Server).

7.2.4.3.2.2 Setting up on a Client

Since the Axxon Next version 4.3.4 and Driver Pack version 3.61, you can use the Axis T8310 control board with remote Clients
through the driver embedded into the Axxon Next software. The panel is not added to the system as an IP device, and is
immediately available for assigning hotkeys.

Various models differ in connected devices.

T8310 All devices

T8311 Joystick only

T8311 / T8312 Joystick and keypad

T8311 / T8313 Joystick and jog dial

T8312 Keypad only

T8312 / T8313 Keypad and jog dial

T8313 Jog dial only

7.2.4.3.3 Hikvision DS-1100KI specific configuration features

To work with the  DS-1100KI network keyboard in Axxon Next, power on the device and do as follows:
1. Switch the keyboard to Server mode.
2. Select Third Platform Software.
3. Enter the Axxon Next Server's IP address and communication port number.
4. You have to use the same port to add the device to the Axxon Next VMS.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  156

     User Guide

7.2.4.3.4 UNIVIEW KB-1100 specific configuration features

On page:

• General description of the UNIVIEW KB-1100 PTZ control device

• Configuring a remote control before adding it to Axxon Next
• Configuring  UNIVIEW KB-1100 in Axxon Next

7.2.4.3.4.1 General description of the UNIVIEW KB-1100 PTZ control device

A schematic representation of the UNIVIEW KB-1100 PTZ control device is shown in the figure below.

The following physical controls are available on the device:

Joystick is a rotary control moving along three axes:
• Pan axis (panning: left or right deviation).
• Tilt axis (tilt: up or down deviation).
• Zoom axis (scaling: clockwise or counterclockwise deviation).
Acceleration along each of the three axes depends on the degree of deviation from the center. The movement is carried out until
release. When released, the control returns to its original position.
Jog-Wheel (not integrated into the Axxon Next software package!) is a rotary control rotating only around its axis. When
released, the control returns to its original position. In the illustration it is located at the bottom left (outer ring).
Shuttle is a rotary control rotating only around its axis. Allows the intermittent movement in one of two directions. It has no
initial position; when released, it remains in place. In the illustration it is located at the bottom left (inner ring).
Button is a push control element that can represent two states. Allows the call of one of two functions (the function for pressing
and the function for releasing). When released, it returns to its original position (“not pressed” state).
Of all the push-button controls of the remote control, the following blocks are integrated:
• a block of playback control keys (6 keys on the left: the record button is triggered after pressing a button on the joystick);
• block of keys for control of focus, zoom, aperture and PTZ presets (8 keys);
The following keys to manipulate the device interface are also available (not related to Axxon Next):
• Pressing the button on the remote control joystick (OK) (equivalent to pressing the ENTER key).
• Cancel the action / return one step back in the remote control menu (equivalent to pressing the ESC key).
• Numbers / letters are entered from the numeric keyboard, the mode (upper/lower register, digits) is switched by the
SHIFT key.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  157

     User Guide

• Moving through the menu items and within the fields is carried out by deviating the remote control vertically /
horizontally.

7.2.4.3.4.2 Configuring a remote control before adding it to Axxon Next

Configure the network PTZ 4-dimensional Joystick Remote Control from Uniview (KB-1100) before you create the appropriate
object in the Axxon Next VMS. Proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the control device.
2. Enter username and password in the device display. The default credentials are as follows:
a. login: admin
b. password: 123456
3. Configure the device network configuration. To do this, in the Local Cfg -> Net Cfg menu, set the following settings:
a. IP address
b. Mask
c. Gateway
4. Add the Axxon Next Server to the internal configuration of this CCTV joystick keyboard. To do this, in the Dev Manage ->
Manual Cfg -> Add Dev menu, set the following settings:
a. ID – enter any number (range: 1-240, the number must not coincide with the ID of the remote control or other
already added device).
b. name – enter a string (1-8 characters).
c. DType – select VM (VideoManagementSystem, i.e. Axxon Next).
d. LType – select NetWork (the device is integrated for connecting to Axxon Next via the network).
e. After selecting LType, press the button on the joystick and enter the IP address of the Axxon Next VMS Server and
the port used (the default port is 60000).
5. Connect to the Axxon Next VMS, added in the step above. To do this, enter the ID specified above in the FindDev -> Dev ID
menu or select the found profile in the Dev Manage -> Search Dev menu.
6. If the device is found, information about it will be displayed on the device display.
7. Press on the ID field. This will onboard the remote control  in the Axxon Next VMS.
Setting up the UNIVIEW KB-1100 control device is completed.

7.2.4.3.4.3 Configuring  UNIVIEW KB-1100 in Axxon Next

Configure the UNIVIEW KB-1100 PTZ joystick control as follows:
1. Go to IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the Vendor list select Uniview-joystick (1).

3. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the remote control ( 2 ).

4. In the Port field, enter the port number, as set in step 4 of the remote control settings configuration (3).

5. Click the .
6. Enable the newly created IP Server and its Channel child object.
You have configured the UNIVIEW KB-1100 Joystick Remote Control and CCTV keyboard.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  158

     User Guide

7.2.4.3.5 Hikvision DS-1200KI specific configuration features

On the page:

• Configuring the Hikvision

DS-1200KI control device before
adding it to Axxon Next
• Features of the Hikvision
DS-1200KI control device
operation in Axxon Next

7.2.4.3.5.1 Configuring the Hikvision DS-1200KI control device before adding it to Axxon Next
Configure the Hikvision DS-1200KI PTZ control device as follows before creating the corresponding object in Axxon Next:
1. Set the control device address: Select System - Network in the device internal menu, then disable DHCP and set IP
address and gateway.

2. Set the Axxon Next server IP address and port on the device: Open the device web interface by entering the above set IP
address in the web browser, then select Platform Access - Third-Party Platform.

Note.
The web interface is only available on https by default, so please use https prefix before the IP address.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  159

     User Guide

3. Set the 8. Private VMS mode in the device's internal interface.

4. Transfer the PTZ control device to operating mode by one of the following actions:
a. Select any monitor MON (monitor) [integer in the range 1-9999], any camera CAM (camera) [integer in the
range 0-999999]; in this mode all keys will work, including the WIN (subwindow of video wall) and MULT
(layout size) keys for the monitor and camera.
b. Select any camera CAM (camera) [integer number in the range 1-999999 (number 0 is available only when
setting the monitor)]; the WIN, MULT and CAM-G keys will not work in this mode.
c. Select any monitor MON (monitor) [integer in the range 1-9999] and any group of cameras CAM-G (camera
group) [integer in the range 1-999999]; in this mode, only the MULT, OK keys and the rotations of the joystick
axes will work.

Note.
To select these parameters, enter a number on the device keypad, then press the corresponding key
(MON / WIN / CAM / CAM-G).
If the the server IP address and/or port is not accessible from the PTZ control device, the "Connect failed"
message will be displayed on the control device screen after pressing the MON / WIN / CAM / CAM-G keys.

The Hikvision DS-1200KI PTZ control device is now preconfigured.

7.2.4.3.5.2 Features of the Hikvision DS-1200KI control device operation in Axxon Next
When the MULT, PRESET, PATROL, or PATTERN keys are pressed on the device, the following actions are performed:
• when entering a number in the range 1-99 and pressing MULT for each number, Axxon Next receives a message
about pressing the corresponding separate key with a number in the range 23-121 (B22-B120);
• when pressing PresetRec for the first time, Axxon Next receives a message about pressing key 13 (B12), and the
device displays Record started;
• after pressing PresetRec for the second time, Axxon Next receives a message about pressing key 12 (B11), and
Record ended appears on the device display;
• when entering a number in the range 1-65535 and pressing PresetRec, Axxon Next receives a message about
pressing key 22 (B21), and the device displays PRESET:;
• when entering a number in the range 1-65535 and pressing Patrol, Axxon Next receives a message about pressing
key 17 (B16), and the device displays PATROL:;
• when entering a number in the range 1-65535 and pressing PatternPlay, Axxon Next receives a message about
pressing key 18 (B17), and the device displays PATTERN:;
• when entering a number in the range 65536-999999 and press any of the PresetRec / Patrol / PatternPlay buttons,
nothing happens: such numbers are not processed.

7.2.4.3.6 Dahua DH-NKB1000 specific configuration features

7.2.4.3.6.1 Keyboard operating modes

To work correctly with Axxon Next VMS, the keyboard must be recognized by Windows OS as the KEYBOARD 1000 game device.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  160

     User Guide

If the keyboard is recognized as an HID device, hold down the Shift key on the device to toggle its operating mode.

7.2.4.3.6.2 Specific OS settings

If Windows Device Manager recognizes the keyboard as BETTER_USB_HS, the device will not work.
In this case, roll back the device driver. For correct operation, Windows Device Manager has to recognize the keyboard as a HID-
compatible game controller.

7.2.4.3.6.3 Specific Axxon Next settings

The Axxon Next VMS may recognize a Dahua DH-NKB1000 keyboard as a Hikvision-joystick DS-1005KI due to their shared device
ID. 
For correct operation, the keyboard has to be recognized as Dahua DH-NKB1000.
The Pattern button will not work in the Axxon Next VMS.

7.2.4.4 CH VM-Desktop USB multifunction controller

For the controller to work properly in Axxon Next, the controller must be connected before the Axxon Next client is started.

Note
To learn about connecting the device, consult the manufacturer's official documentation.

Controller keys cannot be remapped.

Use of the CH VM-Desktop USB multifunction controller in Axxon Next is described in the corresponding section.

7.2.4.5 Configuring Vivotek Panoramic PTZ

Vivotek Panoramic PTZ is a technology for linking a fisheye camera to a PTZ camera.
This Vivotek technology allows simultaneously maintaining full situational awareness in the field of view of a fisheye camera,
while maintaining the ability to carefully monitor a specific area in depth by using a PTZ unit.
Vivotek Panoramic PTZ is supported by the fisheye cameras Vivotek SF8172 and Vivotek SF 8172V and by the PTZ camera Vivotek
SD8362E.
To use this technology in Axxon Next:
1. Install and configure the cameras in accordance with the official Vivotek documentation.
2. Add the cameras to an Axxon Next configuration.
Vivotek Panoramic PTZ  support in Axxon Next is implemented via the Areazoom (see Control using Areazoom) and Point&Click
functions (see Control using Point&Click).

7.2.4.6 Video capture cards

Axxon Next supports 3 PCIe and one USB video capture cards:
1. PCIe:
a. Yuan SC300Q16.
b. Yuan SC3C0N8.
c. Yuan WS216.
2. USB: Yuan PD652.

7.2.4.6.1 WS-216 video capture cards

In Axxon Next, each WS-216 video capture card corresponds to two devices: manufacturer ITV, model TW5864 PCI
(driver Yuan, 2) and manufacturer CaptureDevice, model CaptureDevice (driver DShow, 1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  161

     User Guide

Note
If you have a WS-216 card added through the Yuan driver,  in Windows Server OS you should activate: Desktop
Experience Feature

Сameras connected to Axxon Next through the WS-216 card require the following configuration: add ITV tw5864 PCI device
configuration (2) and select the checkbox Send settings to device (see The Video Camera Object).

Note
Axxon Next does not support receiving uncompressed video from WS-216 video capture cards.
For video cameras that are connected through WS-216 video capture cards, you can choose one of the two codecs for a
video stream:
1. H.264 (configurable)
2. H.264 (minimum resolution, non-configurable)

7.2.4.6.2 YUAN PD652 cards

To work with the YUAN PD652 cards in Axxon Next, do as follows:

Attention!
Please see the list of supported OS for the  YUAN PD652 board on the official website of the manufacturer.

1. Disable the system check for the digital signature of the drivers and install the card driver. 
2. Connect the camera to the card.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  162

     User Guide

3. Create an IP device in Axxon Next. The search result shows the camera connected through the YUAN PD652 card  as
follows:

4. In the IP device settings, select the TV standard supported by your camera.

7.2.4.7 Joysticks
Only joysticks that are detected in Windows as gaming input devices can be used in Axxon Next for controlling PTZ cameras.
Information on how to view the status for a connected joystick is available in official Microsoft documentation.

Note
 We recommend that you calibrate the joystick before you start working with  Axxon Next.

7.2.4.8 Sony IP Devices

Some Sony models support encoding of the video signal in two formats simultaneously. To use this option you must perform the
following steps:
1. Select the Send settings to camera checkbox.
2. From the Dual Encoding list, select the codec which will take priority when dual encoding.

7.2.4.9 Setting up Tibbo relay/loop boards

Tibbo relay/loop boards allow monitoring air temperature and humidity on your premises. 
To add a board to the configuration, do the following:
1. Go to IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  163

     User Guide

2. In the Vendor list, select Tibbo (1).

3. Select your board from the Model list (2).

4. Enter the IP address of the board (3).

5. Click the   button.

The parent IP Server object, and Channel, Input and child objects under it will be added.

To configure the board, do the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  164

     User Guide

1. Select the IP Server.

2. Activate the object (1).

3. In the Authentication parameter group, set Default to No (2).
4. Select a Channel object.
5. Activate the object (1).

6. Set permissible ranges for temperature (in centigrade) and relative humidity (in per cent)(2). If a reading falls out of the
range, the corresponding Input (sensor) triggers an alarm.
7. Set the check period in milliseconds (3).
8. If you need to report sensors statuses when readings are within the range, set Yes for Always report other sensors
status (4). In this case, the following records will appear in the log file in specified intervals of time (see paragraph 7):

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  165

     User Guide

Special humidity ray#16 changed status to: false ,Sensor value: 16,8 Correct range [15,
58]. Time: …..
Special temperature ray#17 changed status to: false ,Sensor value: 29,8 Correct range [20,
60]. Time: …..

9. Click Apply.
Now, the board is configured. Current temperature/humidity value will be displayed next to input's icon on the Map (see
Displaying device status).

7.2.5 Configuring object tracking

Axxon Next includes several features for tracking moving objects.
With Tag & Track Pro, an object can be tracked by a PTZ camera under the guidance of panoramic cameras.

Attention!
To use Tag & Track, make sure you have a PTZ camera in Axxon Next that supports Absolute Positioning. The devices
that support Tag & Track Pro are listed in the Drivers Pack documentation. If a PTZ camera does not meet the
requirement, you should add it to the VMS via Onvif.

With  Tag & Track Lite, the operator is alerted to the camera in front of which the moving object is most likely to appear next. The
camera is predicted based on object trajectory and mapping of cameras to map locations.
For these features to work, you must enable General information on Scene Analytics on all relevant cameras.

7.2.5.1 Configuring Tag & Track Lite

Configuration of Tag & Track Lite consists of linking video cameras with a site map (see Configuring cameras in immersion mode).
For stable operation of Tag & Track Lite, you have to set the following on the map (see Configuring a camera in standard map
viewing mode):
• exact position of cameras,
• each camera's FoV,
• FoVs intersections - overlapping areas covered by more than one camera.
FoVs intersection - area, common for FoVs of two сameras - must be no less than triple footprint of the tracked object.

7.2.5.2 Configuring Tag & Track Pro

To configure Tag & Track Pro:
1. Link panoramic cameras to a PTZ camera.
2. Calibrate cameras.
3. Set the PTZ mode.

7.2.5.2.1 Camera requirements for Tag & Track Pro

To follow objects with Tag & Track Pro, mount the cameras at the top of the scene, so that you can track motion on the plane
(floor, ground) from above.
You have to point panoramic and PTZ cameras in the same direction.
In addition, panoramic cameras should meet the following requirements: Video Requirements for Service Video Detection Tools

7.2.5.2.2 Configuring Smooth Motion for PTZ cameras

To smooth panning of a PTZ camera while using Tag & Track Pro, you can configure:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  166

     User Guide

1. The degree of prediction (1). This value should be in the range from 1 to  3000. The higher the value, the smoother is the
panning of the camera.

2. The rate at which coordinates are sent in milliseconds (2).  This value should be in the range from 100 to  3000.

7.2.5.2.3 Linking panoramic cameras to a PTZ camera

To link panoramic cameras to a PTZ camera:
1. Go to the PTZ object of the relevant camera.
2. In the Tag & Track group, in the list (1), select the camera that you want to link to the PTZ camera. Click the Add button
(2).

Note
To search for a camera, enter its ID, the full or partial name in the 1 box.  

Note
You can add only those cameras for which the Object Tracking was created and activated.

3. Repeat this action for all cameras that you want to link to the PTZ. You can connect any number of panoramic cameras to
a PTZ camera.

Note

To remove a camera from the list of panoramic cameras, click the

4. Click the Apply button.

Linking of panoramic cameras to the PTZ camera is now complete.

7.2.5.2.4 Mapping PTZ positions to panoramic field of view (calibration)

For precise tracking of moving objects, you must calibrate PTZ cameras by mapping at least six PTZ positions to points in the
field of view of each panoramic camera.
The more positions you map, the more precisely the PTZ camera is able to follow moving objects. It is recommended to map
eight or more points.
The calibration procedure is as follows:
1. Focus the PTZ camera on any point.
To change the lens orientation, left-click the frame and, while holding the mouse button, drag the pointer in the relevant
direction.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  167

     User Guide

2. Left-click to add a point in the frame of the panoramic camera toward which the PTZ camera is currently oriented.

Attention!
Set calibration points on the same plane (floor, ground). Do not set the points on different planes (for example,
when some are on the ground while others are on a tree, etc.).

Attention!
The entirety of the moving object must be inside the field of view of the PTZ camera.

3. Repeat this process for at least six points.

4. Repeat the process for all panoramic cameras (click to select a panoramic camera in the list).
5. To save the calibration points, click the Apply button.

 
After setup is complete, we recommend that you perform a calibration check. To do this:
 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  168

     User Guide

1. Click the  button to the right of the preview for that PTZ camera.
2.  Click different points in the camera's field of view.  If the PTZ camera is positioned correctly, it needs no calibration.

Note
To delete calibration points, click the button.

7.2.5.2.5 Setting PTZ mode for Tag & Track Pro

Tag & Track Pro can be used in four PTZ modes:
1. Manual – in this mode, a PTZ camera starts tracking an object only after the user selects the object in the viewing tile.
2. Automatic – in this mode, a PTZ camera automatically initiates tracking of all active objects. The PTZ camera focus on
each object in sequence based on the specified dwell interval.
3. User priority – in this mode, automatic mode is used unless the user manually selects an object for tracking.  As soon as
the user selects an object for tracking, manual mode is activated. When an object is no longer selected or disappears from
the PTZ field of view, automatic mode is reactivated.
4. Manual PTZ control – in this mode, the operator can take control of the PTZ cameras at any time. If the user does not
control the PTZ camera, then the Automatic mode is used.
Select a mode in the Priority list (1). The dwell time is specified in seconds in the corresponding field (2).

To save changes, click the Apply button.

7.2.6 Receiving Events from External Systems

Axxon Next  synchronizes the information from cash registers with the video from cameras pointed at the register area allowing
you to monitor the process. In addition, Axxon Next operators can receive events from any Intellect objects in real time and
correlate the received information with the video. The event sources can be e.g.:
• Access control systems
• Security and fire alarm systems
• Perimeter security system
In Axxon Next, information from external sources is superimposed on video from a selected camera.

7.2.6.1 Event Source Object

Axxon Next  uses the Event Source object to get external events. To create the object, make sure that:
1. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the form for manually adding an IP device, select  Event source in the Device type drop-down list.

3. Click the   button

The Event Source object is added to the system.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  169

     User Guide

Note
Once created, the Event Source object is enabled by default. To disable, select No in the Enable field.

7.2.6.2 Configuring POS devices

Axxon Next can obtain data from POS devices and offers the following capabilities:
1. Show titles in live and recorded video.
2. Search titles in recorded video.

7.2.6.2.1 Connecting POS devices

To configure a POS device, do as follows:
1. Select the Event Source object.
2. Select a connection type of the POS device (1).

3. Specify the Server connection port (2).

4. To connect via RS-232, select a port, connection speed and parity check (3).
5. Select the type of your POS device (4).
6. Select Yes in the DOS to WIN Convertsion field if the data from the POS device is DOS-encoded (5).
7. If the data is UTF-8 encoded, select Yes in the Initial UTF-8 format to enable correct display of captions (6).
8. If a Retalix terminal is used, select Yes in the corresponding field (7).
9. Click the Apply button.
You have successfully connected your POS device.

7.2.6.2.2 Configuring titles view

You can configure the font and where you want the titles displayed on screen. The titles are displayed in a rectangular area
superimposed on video.
To configure the titles view, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  170

     User Guide

1. In the Video sources group, select a camera from the list and click the + button to add the camera for titles overlay(1).
Titles from any one POS device can be overlaid on video from several cameras.

Note
To disable titles overlay for a camera, select the Delete checkbox and click the  - button.

2. Select a camera in the Video sources group (2). The Adjust the text area group shows video from the selected camera
and the adjustable titles area (3).
3. You can configure the titles area: Resize it by moving the anchor points. Move it with Drag-and-drop.
4. Change transparency with the slider (4). Slide left for more transparency, slide right for less.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  171

     User Guide

5. In the Font filed, click the  button and specify font settings in a standard Windows box (1).

6. Select font color (2).

7. Select captions font color in the camera window (3).
8. If you need to display only the lines contained between start and end markers of the receipt, Yes for the Bills Only
parameter (4).
9. In the Display duration field, set the time in seconds for accumulated text rows on the screen (5). If you set 0, captions
will stay on the screen. New events replace old ones on a continuous basis.

Note
For shops where the checkout is never crowded, we recommend  the captions display duration under 10
seconds.

10. If you don't need to display any lines following the end marker of the receipt, set Yes for the Erase Upon Completion
parameter (6).
11. Select a method of processing incoming data (7): 
a. PROCESS_LINEARLY – incoming data is stored in a buffer until the next EOL is received, and only after that is
transmitted to Axxon Next.
b. PROCESS_EVENT  – each data portion is immediately transferred to Axxon Next.
c. PROCESS_JSON – not available in the current version.
12. Click the Apply button.
You have configured the titles view.

7.2.6.2.3 Configuring receipt beginning / end

The database stores only a full receipt. A receipt starts and ends with the configured phrases. If not configured, receipts contain
2000 lines. In this case, search will not work until the receipt is saved into the database (see Titles search).

Attention!
It is strongly recommended that you configure this setting for shops with low-intensity events at the checkout.
Otherwise, the accumulation of 2000 lines can take a long time.

To configure the beginning and the end of a receipt, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  172

     User Guide

1. Populate the Begin words (1) group.  To add words, click the + button. To remove words, select their Delete check boxes
and click the -  button.   

2. Populate the End words (2) group in the same manner. 

Note
You can add any number of delimiting words. Double click a word to edit it.

3. Delimiting words are case-sensitive by default. To ignore case, select Yes in the corresponding field (1).

4. Select how to treat repetitions (2).

a. Select Ignore repeats  to skip repeating beginning words before the end words show up. When the end words
show up, the next receipt starts with the beginning words.
b. Select None to skip the end words and delimit receipts by the beginning words only.
5. Click the Apply button.
You have configured how receipts are delimited. 

7.2.6.2.4 Configuring keywords

Keywords can be highlighted in the titles.
To configure keywords, do as follows:
1. Select any number of keywords in the Word highlighting group with the + button. Double click a keyword to edit it.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  173

     User Guide

Note
To remove words, select their Delete check boxes and click the -  button.

2. You can also configure these parameters:

a. Highlighting color (1). In the appropriate column, click the  button and choose a color.
b. If you want to change the color of the background of the titles output in the camera window, select the
corresponding check box (2) and select the required color (3) when this word appears.
c. Select the Case sensitive check if you want (4).
d. To highlight the whole line, select the Whole string checkbox (5).
3. Click the Apply button.
You have configured highlighting for keywords.

7.2.6.2.5 Importing parcers

A special parsing algorithm processes the receipts and adds data  to the receipts database. This is an option for advanced
settings.
The choice of parcers depends on POS data structure:
1. XML parcer for .txt files
2. POS parcer for .prl files
The XML parser specifies the rules for adding data to the receipts database if you have XML data  from a POS terminal. The XML
parser also validates the XML data against a schema. 
The POS parser specifies the rules for adding data to the receipts database if the data is  from a POS terminal is other than XML.
The parser depends on the POS terminal data structure.
To import a parcer, do as follows:

1. In the Template file (1) field, click the  button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  174

     User Guide

You can browse for the required parcer.

2. Select the type of the parser and the file. 

3. If you use an XML parser, select XML PROTOCOL in the Terminal Type field (2).
4. Click the Apply button.
You have imported the parcer.

7.2.6.3 Receiving Intellect Events

To be able to receive Intellect events, do as follows:
1. On the Intellect machine, configure a data transfer module (see ACFA Intellect - Axxon Next Bridge Settings Guide).
2. In Axxon Next, select the Event Source object. 

3. Select TCP in the Transport protocol field (1).

4. Specify the connection port to Intellect (2).
5. Select XML PROTOCOL in the Terminal type field (3).
6. Select a preconfigured parser (4, see Configuring parser).
7. Configure the data output similar to that of the POS device (see Configuring titles view).
8. Configure keywords, if necessary (see Configuring keywords).
9. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  175

     User Guide

If the setup procedure was done correctly, the events from specified objects will be displayed in the viewing tile on Intellect in the
same way as POS device captions do (see Viewing titles from POS terminals). 

7.2.6.4 Configuring Receiving Events from CommaxComplexServer

CommaxComplexServer events can be forwarded to the Axxon Next VMS in two formats:
1. In JSON format using the Event Source (see Configuring CommaxComplexServer via Event Source).
2. As events from Virtual Inputs. This creates a virtual IP Server in the VMS (see Configuring CommaxComplexServer via
virtual IP server).

Note
CommaxComplexServer is smart apartment complex management software. It receives input from gates, doors, 
elevator call buttons etc.

Configure CommaxComplexServer before connecting to Axxon Next.

7.2.6.4.1 Configuring CommaxComplexServer via Event Source

Connect CommaxComplexServer  via Event Source as follows:
1. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the field for manually adding an IP device, select  Event Source in the Device Type drop-down list (1).

3. In the  Vendor  list select Commax (2).

4. Click the button 

.
The Event Source object is added to the system.
5. Select the new object.

6. Enter the destination port name for CommaxComplexServer events.

7. Click Apply.
The CommaxComplexServer connection is now configured.

Note
You can present information as caption (titles) superimposed on video in the Camera window. See POS configuration
instructions for that (see Configuring POS devices).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  176

     User Guide

7.2.6.4.2 Configuring CommaxComplexServer via virtual IP server

Connect to CommaxComplexServer  via virtual IP server as follows:
1. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices).
2. In the field for manually adding an IP device, select  Commax in the Vendor drop-down list (1).

3. Select  generic in the Model list (2).

4. Enter the IP address of the CommaxComplexServer (3).

5. Click the button .

The parent IP Server object and Channel and Input objects under it are added according to CommaxComplexServer
configuration. The names of the Input objects in the VMS and CommaxComplexServer are the same.

6. Select the IP Server object.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  177

     User Guide

7. Enter the destination port name for CommaxComplexServer events.

8. Click Apply.
The CommaxComplexServer connection is now configured.

7.2.7 Configuring video camera groups

You can manually group video cameras to enable quicker selection of a specific video camera for display.
Video camera groups are configured through the interface using the Devices tab (under Settings). To configure device groups,
you must have the appropriate permissions to configure devices.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  178

     User Guide

7.2.7.1 Procedure for configuring video camera groups

To configure video camera groups, complete the following steps:
1. Create Group objects.
2. Add video cameras created in the system to Group objects.
3. Create a system of groups and subgroups.

7.2.7.2 Creating a Group object

To create a Group object, complete the following steps:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  179

     User Guide

1. Go to the Groups tab.

2. To create a Group object, click the button or select Add group in the context menu of the main group.

Note
By default, an object (whose name is the same as the Axxon-domain) is available, including all cameras that have
been created in the system. This object is referred to here and elsewhere in the document as the "main group".
This object cannot be deleted. Cameras in this group cannot be deleted.

3. Specify the group name in the Name field.

4. Enter a description of the group in the appropriate field.

5. Click the Apply button.
The Group object has now been created.

7.2.7.3 Adding video cameras created in the system to Group objects

To add video cameras to groups, complete the following steps:

Note
Video cameras are added to groups via management operations (see the section titled Managing Group and Video
camera objects). The standard method for adding video cameras to groups is presented below

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  180

     User Guide

1. In the main group, select a video camera to add to the selected group.

2. Click the button or select Copy from the context menu of the selected video camera.
3. Select the Group object to which you need to add the video camera.

4. Click the button or select Paste from the context menu of the selected group.
5. Fill the groups with the necessary video cameras (see steps 1-4). 

Note
 One video camera can be assigned to multiple groups

6. Click the Apply button.

Adding video cameras to groups is now complete.

7.2.7.4 Creating a system of groups and subgroups

Groups can be included within other groups, forming a system of groups and subgroups.

A system of groups and subgroups can be created via group management operations and video camera management operations
(see the section titled Managing Group and Video camera objects).
Group objects can be moved or copied to other Group objects or to the main group.

7.2.7.5 Managing Group and Video camera objects

The main operations used to manage groups and video cameras are presented in table.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  181

     User Guide

Action Execution

Cut/Paste Using your mouse:

1. Left-click and hold the Video camera/Group object.

Note
2. Drag the object to the Group object (or to the main
You can cut a Video camera object only from a Group object. group if you are dragging a Group object).
You cannot cut a Camera object from the main group. It is also 3. Release the left mouse button.
impossible to cut the main group.

Using the toolbar:

1. Left-click the Video camera/Group object that you

want to move.

2. On the toolbar, click .

3. Left-click the Group object (or the main group, if one
of the Group objects is being moved) to which you
want to move the Video camera/Group object..

4. On the toolbar, click .

Using the keyboard:

1. Left-click the Video camera/Group object that you

want to move.
2. Press the key combination Ctrl+X.
3. Left-click the Group object (or the main group, if one
of the Group objects is being moved) to which you
want to move the Video camera/Group object..
4. Press the key combination Ctrl+V.

Copy/Paste Using your mouse:

1. Left-click and hold the Video camera/Group object

while simultaneously holding down the Ctrl key.
2. Drag the selected object to the Group object (or to
the main group, if the Group object is being copied).
3. Release the left mouse button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  182

     User Guide

Action Execution

Using the toolbar:

1. Left-click the Video camera/Group object that you

want to copy.

2. On the toolbar, click .

3. Left-click the Group object (or the main group, if one
of the Group objects is being copied) to which you
want to copy the Video camera/Group object..

4. On the toolbar, click .

Using the keyboard:

1. Left-click the Video camera/Group object that you

want to copy.
2. Press the key combination Ctrl+С.
3. Left-click the Group object (or the main group, if one
of the Group objects is being copied) to which you
want to copy the Video camera/Group object..
4. Press the key combination Ctrl+V.

Deletion 1. Left-click the Video camera/Group object that you

want to delete. .
Note 2. Press the Delete key.
You can delete a Video camera object only from a Group object. You
cannot delete a Camera object from the main group.

7.2.8 Autocopy data from local to centralized servers

Axxon Next VMS supports automatic copying of the archive (video, audio, alarms) and camera events from local servers that are
not in the same Axxon domain with the centralized server

Note
This is useful, for example, in the following case:
• The video from a bus on the route network is written to a temporary archive on the local server specific for each
bus;
• When the bus arrives at the depot, the archive and camera events are automatically transferred to the
centralized server.

To use this option, configure the centralized server as follows:

1. Manually add the Interop IP device to the configuration (see Adding and removing IP devices);

2. Enable The Embedded Storage object.

3. Specify the address of the device in the following format (1):  <IP-address of local server>:<name of local server in Axxon
domain>:<ID of camera on server>.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  183

     User Guide

Attention!
The Server name is case-sensitive. 
If the name is Server1, no connection will occur if you enter server1 or SERVER1.

4. Specify a port of the local Server from which data is transmitted (2). If you use TCP protocol (see 8), please specify the
RTSP port number (554 by default, see Configuring an RTSP Server). If you use rtspoverhttp or rtspoverhttps protocol,
specify the web server's port (80 by default, Configuring the web server).
5. Specify the user name and password (3). The user must have permissions to access the local server.
6. If you want to display live video from the local server when it is available, select Yes in the appropriate field (4).
7. Specify the maximum playback speed (5).
8. Select the data transfer protocol (6).
9. Click the Apply button.
10. Repeat the above steps for all the required cameras from all local servers.
11. Configure automatic replication from the embedded storages of the added devices to the centralized server archive (see
Configuring data replication).

Attention!
With a high network load, there may be gaps in the centralized server archive.

You have successfully set up automatic data copying from the local servers to the centralized server.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  184

     User Guide

7.3 Configuring Archives

7.3.1 General information of configuring archives

You can configure archives using the interface in the Archive tab (under Settings). To create archives you must have the
appropriate permissions.

On the base of one server you can create an unlimited number of archives.

Attention!
We do not recommend you to operate a large single volume video footage archive. 
It's more practical to divide the archive to multiple volumes located on different hardware devices.

An archive can be placed on local disks or on network disks. 

To compare these types of archives, review the following table.

Local archive Network archive

An archive can be distributed on several volumes of the server Archive can be stored on multiple network storage devices.

On one logical disk for one archive you can create only one volume, which occupies Archive can be stored only as a file of a specified size.
either a file of a set size or the entire partition (logical disk).

An archive can contain multiple volumes, which may be in the form of a file or a
partition.

Data can be copied between archives.

You can configure archives as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  185

     User Guide

1. Create archives.
2. Configure recording of the video stream from video cameras to the archives.
3. Configure data replication, if necessary.

7.3.2 General information of SolidStore file system

Fragmented files accumulate over time in the Windows file system. This is due to the fact that the operating system sequentially
fills the free disk space when writing files.
Free disk space, which appears when old files are deleted, can be located in different parts of the disk; therefore, each file can be
split into many fragments.
When reading or writing such a file, the hard drive head must constantly move, which reduces the read/write speed and causes
mechanical wear of the disc.
AxxonSoft has developed its own file system SolidStore especially for storing video archives. The system is installed on a blank
physical or logical drive, which is fully allocated to Axxon Next video archive (see Creating archives). In developing SolidStore, it
was taken into account that recording will only be sequenced in one direction (looping mode), and the newest data is written in
place of the oldest. By optimizing the reading/writing process we managed to minimize the travel of the hard disk head along its
surface and to achieve three important advantages:
• Enable high read/write speeds, approaching the physical access speed limit of the hard disk.
• Increase the service life of the hard disk.
• Solve the problem of data fragmentation: as data is written only in looping mode, fragmentation is minimal and does not
accumulate with time. This way, the read/write speed remains high throughout the operation of the video surveillance
system.
SolidStore relieves the user from the need to periodically stop the video surveillance system and run the Disk Defragmenter tool.
This significantly increases video surveillance uptime and the protected facilities remain under the watchful eyes of the security
personnel.
If it is not possible to allocate a separate disk for Axxon Next video archive, it can be written as a regular file in the existing
Windows file system.

7.3.3 Creating archives

7.3.3.1 Creating a local archive

To create a local archive:
1. In the branch of the Server object corresponding to the computer on which you need to organize an archive, click
the Create link.

Note
You can also create an archive by selecting the matching command in the context menu of the Server object (the
menu can be brought up by right-clicking the name of the Server)

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  186

     User Guide

2. Highlight the New archive link which appears (1).

3. Set the archive type to Local.

4. Specify the name and color of the archive.
5. Configure archive volumes.
a. For the disks that you want to include in the archive, select the corresponding check boxes.
b. If a disk does not have a file system, the disk can contain an archive volume in the form of a partition. In this case,
select the Formatting check box. This will format the disk using the SolidStore file system developed by AxxonSoft
(see General information of SolidStore file system).

Note
The file system on the disk can be erased by using the standard Disk Management utility in
Windows.Instructions for starting and using the utility are given on the Microsoft website.
Deleting the file system on the disk in the disk management utility consists of the following:
i. Delete the volume.
ii. Create a new volume in the resulting unformatted area.
iii. Assign a letter to the volume, but do not format it.
The system disk cannot be completely allocated for an archive

Important!
When selecting the disk on which to place the archive volume, take its size into account. If the archive is
completely filled, the oldest data will be overwritten with new data.

Note
Note that you cannot create an archive volume as a partition on a removable disk, since its partition
cannot be erased through the Disk Management utility

c. On disks that have a file system, you can store an archive volume in the form of a file. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  187

     User Guide

For this archive volume, you must enter a file size (in gigabytes) or set it by moving the slider.  The size of the
archive file must be more than 1 GB. For the Fat32 file system, the maximum archive size is 4 GB.

Important!
If the archive is completely filled, the oldest data will be overwritten with new data.

Note
By default, the file name will be the same as the name of the archive, and the file will be located at the
root directory of the disk. To change the name and/or location of the file, click the button.

6. Click the Apply button.
If volumes are configured in the form of partitions, a dialog box is displayed, warning about formatting of the relevant
system disks.

7. Read through the list of partitions that will be formatted. If the list is correct, select I have read the warning and realize
the risk of losing important data, then click Format. Otherwise, click Cancel to return to the archive settings.
Creation of the local archive is now complete.

7.3.3.2 Creating a network archive

Network archives are files on NAS (network attached storage).
To create a network archive, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  188

     User Guide

1. Go to the Server object and click the Create button.

2. Set the archive type to Remote (1).

3. Specify the name and color of the archive (2).

4. Enter a path to the archive network destination (3).

Attention!
If a particular PC is used to access a particular network archive from multiple user accounts, do the following:
a. Launch text editor and open the file: C:\Windows\System32\Drivers\etc\hosts ,then add the following
string: "192.168.1.1 DNSname1", where  192.168.1.1  - IP address of the NAS,  DNSname1  - domain name
of the NAS.
b. The name of a newly created network archive must include the actual domain name.
If you need to add several network archives under different user accounts, do the following:
a. Launch text editor and open the file: C:\Windows\System32\Drivers\etc\hosts, and add IP addresses and
domain names of all necessary NAS. 
b. The names of newly created archives must include actual domain names.
In a backup Server-driven failover system (see Setting up a configuration with the backup Server), if domain
names differ from one Server to another, the hosts file on the backup Server must include records from all
Servers.

5. Enter the user name and password (4). The user must have permissions to access the NAS. 

Attention!
The login should be specified with a prefix of the domain (domainname\username) or name of the computer
(computername\username) where this account is located.

6. Click the Add storage button (5).

This will connect you to the NAS. When you are connected,  you can see a dialog box for setting up your archive.

Attention!
Only one network user can connect to NAS at a time. This is a limitation of OS Windows. 
If this error occurs, disconnect the previous user in one of the following ways:
1. Run the command net use /delete.
2. Use PsExec to open the command prompt as the LocalSystem user (psexec.exe -i -s cmd.exe) and execute the
same command.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  189

     User Guide

7. For this archive volume, you must enter a file size (in gigabytes) or set it by moving the slider.  The size of the archive file
must be more than 1 GB. For the Fat32 file system, the maximum archive size is 4 GB.

Note

To change the archive folder, click the button and browse to a desired location

8. If you want, you can add other NAS for your archive and set them up.
9. Click the  Apply button.
You have created your network archive. After creating the archive, the NAS status is displayed.

7.3.3.3 Creating an archive based on existing archive volumes

If an archive is created from an existing volume, it will be possible to extract saved video from the file only if the following
conditions are met:
• The currently selected computer has the same name as the name of the Server or node on which the video has been saved
to an existing Video Footage volume.
• The IDs of the video cameras from which the recordings were written to the existing archive volume are the same as the
IDs of the current video cameras.
To create an archive based on an existing volume:
1. Create an archive (see Creating a local archive).
2. Select disks or network archives that contain existing volumes (by selecting check boxes, 1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  190

     User Guide

Note
A new archive can contain volumes that previously belonged to different archives

3. If the volume is in file form, select the archive file to which recording was performed (2).
4. Clear the Format check box (3).

Note
If the Format check box is selected, the archive entries that are currently stored on the volume will be erased.

5. If necessary, create new archive volumes on free partitions.

6. Click the Apply button.
The archive is created and, if all requirements are met, the archive recordings are available.

7.3.4 Binding a camera to an archive

Video and audio streams are recorded synchronously. 
Binding a camera to an archive determines the archive to which a video stream will be recorded and how.
You can bind a single camera to an archive or bind a group of cameras by using the same settings.
To bind a camera to an archive:
1. Select the new archive.
2. Select the check box that corresponds to the camera for which you want to configure archive recording (1).

3. Configure settings for archive recording.

a. In the Constant recording list, select the archive recording mode (2). 
If No is selected, the video stream will be recorded to the archive only when an operator manually initiates an
alarm or an automatic rule is initiated.
If Always is selected, video will be recorded to the archive non-stop.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  191

     User Guide

If a time schedule is selected (see Configuring schedules), video will be recorded non-stop to the archive during the
selected time period. Recording to the archive can also be initiated by the operator or an automatic rule.
b. In the Depth field, specify a video footage retention time value for the given camera (in days). Zero value means
unlimited retention. 

Attention!
If your footage archive includes videos from one or more cameras with unlimited retention, the archive
will run out of free space at some point, and FIFO based re-recording will be automatically started
regardless of retention time settings.  In this case, we cannot guarantee that the actual retention time
settings will be preserved for other cameras.
Therefore, if you set unlimited retention time for at least one camera, you may find it pointless to limit
retention time for other cameras.
To avoid retention time collisions between cameras, please make sure to provide enough storage
capacity for your footage archive (see Disk storage subsystem requirements). 

Attention!
Further, if you are increasing the available archive retention time, or setting the parameter to 0, please
note that this setting may be not applied to earlier records. Older footage falling outside the initial
retention time may become inaccessible.

Note
When setting a retention time parameter for a particular camera archive, please note that global
retention time limits have higher priority (see Configuring access restrictions to older footage). 
If your entire archive is set to, say, 10 days, and the camera retention time is set to 20 days, camera
footage will be actually retained for 10 days only.

c. In the Pre-alarm recording time field (4), enter the buffering time of the video stream from the camera in
seconds. This value should be in the range [0, 30].

Note
Pre-alarm recording is the period of pre-event recording that will be added to the beginning of an alarm
event recording

Attention!
If a macro starts recording, the pre-alarm recording time may be longer, according to your settings (see
Record to archive).

d. If you want to record pruned, decimated video, choose By keyframes from Gapping, fps.  This applies to all video
streams except MJPEG. With  MJPEG codec, please use the explicit value of frame rate. Video pruning by frame
dropping reduces the size of recorded video and saves storage, but video with skipped frames feels like the
movement is delayed, and motion feels more choppy.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  192

     User Guide

Attention!
When you prune by frame dropping, in all video streams except MJPEG , only I-fames (Intra-Coded Frame
or Key Frames) are saved. Different codecs feature various compression levels with key frames rates going
down from 3 to under 1 I-frames per second.
MJPEG video contains only I frames (Intra-coded pictures with a complete image), so it makes sense  to
set a desired frame rate here.

e. Select a stream for archive recording (6).

Note
This setting is relevant for cameras that support multistreaming.

4. Click the Apply button.

Binding of the camera to the archive is now complete.
To bind multiple cameras:
1. Select the check boxes next to the cameras for which you want to configure archive recording. To select all cameras,
select the Select all check box.

2. Configure archive recording settings for the group of cameras (marked with yellow). The indicated settings for archive
recording are applied to the selected cameras.
3. Perform custom configuration of camera recording settings, if necessary.
4. Click the Apply button.
The camera is now bound to the archive.

7.3.5 Setting the default archive

The default archive of a video camera is the archive to which images from a given video camera are recorded during user-
initiated alarms. For each video camera one and only one default archive must be set. The first archive to which recording of a
video stream from a video camera was configured automatically becomes the default archive (see Binding a camera to an
archive).
To switch the default archive for a camera:
1. Select a Server object.
The Default archives form displays a list of cameras and archives, which are marked with the corresponding colors. If
archive recording to at least one archive is enabled for a particular camera, the camera is visually marked as related to its
default archive.

2. To change the default archive for a camera, move the designator to the relevant archive.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  193

     User Guide

3. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the default camera archive is now complete.

7.3.6 Configuring data replication

Replication of archives refers to constant, block-by-block copying of fixed-size information (video, audio, metadata) from one
archive to another archive on the same Axxon-domain.

Attention!
Replication occurs as information blocks are accumulated.  1 block may contain more than a minute of video.

Attention!
Replication is performed only to the end of the archive. It is not possible to overwrite existing data in the archive.
To transfer the old data from Archive 1 to Archive 2 and continue writing new data to Archive 2, do as follows:
1. Replicate the data from Archive 1 to Archive 2, while Archive 2 cannot be written to.
2. Configure the camera to write to Archive 2.

Note
The primary purpose of data replication is to ensure long-term storage and access to multimedia recordings on remote
storage devices. 

Any archive can be the source or recipient of replication. Moreover, every archive can simultaneously be both the sender and
recipient of data. 

Note
Events indicating the start and successful completion of data replication are generated in the system (see Event
Control). These events can be used as macro triggers

To configure data replication:

1. In the list of archives on the Axxon-domain, select the archive to which you want to copy data from other archives.
2. Select one or more archives form which you want to copy data (1).  You can also replicate video from on-board camera
storage (4, see The Embedded Storage object)

3. For each archive, select the cameras from which data will be copied to the source archive (2). To select all cameras, click
the Select All button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  194

     User Guide

Note
Data for a particular camera can be copied to the source archive only from one archive. When you select a
camera for replication from an archive, the camera becomes unavailable for replication from any other archive.

Note
You cannot select cameras if they are already being recorded to the source archive.

4. Select replication period (3):

a. Always - replication is performed continuously. 
b. On demand - replication is performed manually.

Attention!
You can use macros to replicate on schedule (see Start replication).

5. Click the Apply button.

You have now configured data replication. If you have chosen the Always replication period, data replication starts immediately
after changes are applied.

7.3.7 Configuring access restrictions to older footage

You can make only newest recordings in your available for the VMS users.
To do this, select the history (in days) in the appropriate field and click Apply. 

Note
If the history value is set at 0, all recorded video is available for playback.

You can view only video recordings not exceeding the retention time setting. All other videos will be deleted.

Attention!
Further, if you are increasing the Archive retention time (0 - stands for unlimited time), this setting is applied for new
records only. Earlier records falling outside the initial retention time become inaccessible.

7.3.8 How to preserve Video Footage continuity after replacing a video source
Axxon Next supports keeping video source's recorded footage after the device is replaced. 
To do this:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  195

     User Guide

1. Copy the old video device ID and delete it from the system.

2. Create a new device under the same ID (1) and bind it to the same footage archive (2, see Adding and removing IP
devices).

Attention!
Any other parameters of the new device may differ (make and model, ID, etc.).

If you swap NVRs, make sure you preserve the same order of video channels for connected cameras.

Creating a new device with the old ID makes the previously recorded footage available for viewing / processing within the system.

7.3.9 Protecting video footage from FIFO overwriting

In the Axxon Next software package, data is being recorded cyclically (First In First Out). Normally, older video footage is
overwritten by the newer.
You can protect selected videos from being overwritten. A macro copies protected recordings to another Video Footage.
To protect videos, do the following:
1. Configure on-demand replication (see Configuring data replication).
2. Configure a macro (see Setting up a macro for automatic copying of protected records).
3. Configure protection for necessary videos (see Setting up record protection).
You can further edit the list of protected recordings through the web client.

7.3.9.1 Setting up a macro for automatic copying of protected records

You have to create and set up a cyclical macro (see General information about the macros) as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  196

     User Guide

1. First action in the macro must be the Awaiting (1).

2. The timeout delay value sets the time interval for checking Video Footage for protected records (2).
3. The second action in the macro must be checking Video Footage for protected records (3). On this step, you have to:
a. Select a camera or a group of cameras whose Video Footages have to be checked for protected records (4).
b. If you select a particular camera, specify the archive to be checked (5). If a group of cameras was selected in the
previous step, only default archive will be checked for each of them (see Setting the default archive). 
c. Specify the depth of the check in HH:MM:SS format (6). The time interval between checks is calculated as follows:
[starting time of the earliest recording in archive, starting time of the earliest recording in archive + depth of the
check].
d. Add data replication as a conditional action upon discovery of protected records within the scanning interval (7,
see Start replication). 
e. Select the Replication time for a time interval (8). The replication duration defines the time interval from which
protected records have to be copied to another Video Footage. All protected intervals starting within the [starting
time of the earliest recording in Video Footage; starting time of the earliest recording in Video Footage +
replication duration] range will be copied to Video Footage for replication. Normally, the replication duration has
to be equal to the depth of the check defined in Step 3c. 
The screenshot shows settings that make the system scan once in a minute (2) for protected records in Camera 4's (4) archive
AliceBlue (5) within the [starting time of the earliest recording in archive + 10 minutes] time interval (6). If this interval contains
protected records, the replication will be launched to copy all protected records falling into [starting time of the earliest
recording in archive; starting time of the earliest recording in archive + 10 minutes] (8) interval to archive specified for
replication.

7.3.9.2 Setting up record protection

To protect a record, create a bookmark (one of the annotation tools) 
To create a bookmark, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  197

     User Guide

1. Select the required camera on the layout and proceed to archive mode (see Switching to Archive Mode).

Note
If you need to protect the same time interval in multiple camera archives, switch the necessary cameras to
archive mode. 

2. Set the protected time interval on the timeline with  and  buttons (see The Timeline).

3. Click  in the Camera window.

4. Enter a comment (1).

5. Check the Protect box (2).

6. Check the All (3) box if you need to protect the specified interval for all cameras currently in archive mode.
7. Click the Save button (4).
The newly created bookmark will appear on the timeline. 

The protected interval will be highlighted in light grey while its beginning will be marked with .

7.3.10 Increasing capacity of an archive volume

You can increase capacity of an archive volume.

7.3.10.1 Increasing capacity of an archive volume as a partition

You can increase volume capacity only with standard media. This option does not work with RAID disk sets.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  198

     User Guide

Attention!
AxxonSoft cannot guarantee archive data integrity after this action is complete.

To increase volume capacity, do the following:

1. Stop the Axxon Next Server (see Shutting down a Server).
2. Use the Windows disk management utility to increase volume capacity.
3. Start the Server (see Starting a Server).

7.3.10.2 Increasing capacity of an archive volume as a file

To increase volume capacity, use the -expand parameter in console utility for working with archives (see Console utility for
working with archives).

7.3.11 Editing archives

You can edit the archives that have been created in the system. You can perform the following actions on them:
1. Rename an archive (see Creating archives).
2. Add new volumes. Addition of a new volume also occurs during archive creation (see Creating archives).
3. Deleting and formatting archive volumes.
4. Change settings for archive recording (see Binding a camera to an archive).
5. Change replication settings (see Configuring data replication). 

7.3.12 Deleting and formatting archive volumes

You can delete and format archive volumes.
To format the archive volume, do as follows:

1. Click the  button.

2. Select Format volume.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  199

     User Guide

3. Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed, warning about formatting of the selected volumes.

4. select the checkbox and click Format.

The volume formatting is complete.
To delete a volume, do as follows:

1. Click the  button.

2. Select Remove volume.

Note
If there is only one volume in the archive, you cannot delete it

3. Click Apply.
4. If required, you can remove archive files.

Attention!
If you delete archive files, all video footage contained will be lost.
If you do not delete archive files, you can re-use them to create another archive (see Creating an archive based
on existing archive volumes). You can as well use a partition to re-create an archive.

7.3.13 Deleting archives

You can delete an archive from the system.
To delete an archive from the system, you must perform the following steps:
1. Select the archive to be deleted in the archive list.
2. Click the Remove button.
3. Click the Apply button.
If required, you can remove archive files.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  200

     User Guide

Attention!
If you delete archive files, all video footage contained will be lost.
If you do not delete archive files, you can re-use them to create another archive (see Creating an archive based
on existing archive volumes). You can as well use a partition to re-create an archive.

Deleting an archive from the system is now complete.

7.3.14 View information about the size of archives and Server disk space.
Selecting a Server object displays statistical information about the available Server disks and created archives.
Figure 1 shows the overall balance of free disk space between the Server archives.

In addition, a list of disks is displayed, containing information about the total disk capacity, space used, and total free space (2).
When you select an archive, the following information is displayed:
1. The percentage of used space on each volume in the archive. This parameter indicates whether the volume's data is being
rewritten. If the percentage is 100%, the new data is overwriting the old data. 

2. The approximate volume usage in percentage and gigabytes (2) is displayed in the Filled archive volume field of the
Archive Parameters group.

When you update Axxon Next or restart the Server, or create the archive based on the existing volume etc., the archive is
reindexed.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  201

     User Guide

Reindexing progress bar is displayed.

7.3.15 Saving the archive when replacing a video source

In Axxon Next, it is possible to save the archive in case of replacing a video camera, NVR or any other video source.
To do this:
1. Delete the old device, but keep in mind its ID.

2. Create a new device in the system with the same ID (1) and bind it to the old archive (2, see Adding and removing IP
devices).

Attention!
Device model, IP-address and any other device parameters may differ from the previous one.

In the case of replacing the NVR, the video cameras should be connected to the same channels as before.
After creating a new device with the old ID, the archive recorded earlier will be available in the system.

7.4 Configuring detection tools

7.4.1 General Information on Configuring Detection

In the Axxon Next software package, several types of detection tools process incoming data:
1. Situation analysis detection tools.
2. Facial recognition tools.
3. Automatic number plate recognition tool.
4. Service detection tools:
a. Video analytics.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  202

     User Guide

b. Audio analytics.
5. Detection tools embedded in a video camera.
Detection setup takes place using the interface in the Detection Tools tab (under Settings). For detection setup you must have
the appropriate permissions.

Attention!
For a video camera and its corresponding branch to appear in the Detection Tools list, the camera must be enabled in
Axxon Next

Note
By default, camera inputs that can be activated through an automatic rule are displayed on the list of detection tools.

In the viewing tile, on the right side of the detection configuration window, you can set visual parameters. 

Note
The indicator in the upper right corner displays the current time and recording status (see Time Display).

The default system setting to a detection event is not to trigger any response actions. To set system response, create an
automatic rule or a macro (see Configuring Macros, Automatic Rules). 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  203

     User Guide

7.4.2 General information on metadata

Metadata is logical information extracted from video streams for easier camera management and retrieval of object-related
content.
In Axxon Next, metadata can be obtained in two ways:
1. by analyzing video streams on Server;
2. by receiving metadata from edge devices (see Embedded Detection Tools). 
The following tools are used for server-side analysis and metadata generation:  

Attention!
To extract metadata from video, you have to de-compress and analyze the video stream which, in its turn, increases the
Server's workload, thus limiting the number of available camera channels.

1. Object Tracker.
2. Neural Tracker.
3. VMD.

Note
Object tracker and Neural Tracker generates metadata containing the following information about moving
objects in scene: object type, position, size and color, motion speed and direction, etc.
VMD generates less accurate data; it does not detect object type and color.

4. Face detection tool.

Note
Face detection metadata contain facial bounding boxes and their positions, as well as facial vectors.

5. Automatic Number Plate Recognition (LPR/ANPR) tools.

Note
ANPR metadata contain license plate bounding boxes and their positions, as well as vehicle registration
numbers.

6. Pose detection.

Note
Metadata from pose detection tools contains information on positions and postures of all persons in FOV. 

The metadata is used for the following system options:

Option Required source of metadata

Scene Analytics Object Tracker, Neural Tracker, built-in detection tool, or VMD.

Forensic search MomentQuest Object Tracker, Neural Tracker, built-in detection tool, or VMD.

Face search Face detection tool.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  204

     User Guide

Option Required source of metadata

LPR search Automatic Number Plate Recognition (LPR/ANPR).

TimeCompressor Object Tracker, Neural Tracker, built-in detection tool, or VMD.

Tag&Track Pro Object Tracker, Neural Tracker, built-in detection tool, or VMD.

Object tracking Any

Autozoom Any

Attention!
If a camera uses several sources of metadata, the required source is selected automatically, except for MomentQuest.
To perform facial/license number searches, only metadata from corresponding detection tools is used.

By default, metadata files are stored in Server's object trajectory database: C:\Program
Files\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\Metadata\vmda_db\VMDA_DB.0\vmda_schema; if necessary, you can place them on any available
network storage (see Configuring storage of the system log and metadata).

7.4.3 General information on Neural Analytics

The Axxon Next VMS offers AI analytics based on neural networks. These AI tools include:
1. Neural Network Filter for Object Tracker (see Setting General Parameters).  
The neural network filter processes the results of the tracker and filters out false alarms on complex video images (foliage,
glare, etc.). 
2. Neural Tracker (see Setting up Neural Tracker-based Scene Analytics).  
Neural Tracker detects only objects of a specified class.  The Neural Tracker is more accurate than the regular one, and
detects even static objects, but it requires more computing resources.
3. Neural Counter  (see Configuring a Neuralcounter).  
The Neural Counter relies on a neural network to work out the number of objects in the zone.
4. Smoke and Fire Detection Tools based on Neural Network (see Configuring Smoke and Fire Detection Tools).  
A neural network detects fire and smoke in FoV.
5. Posture Detection based on Neural Network (see Configure Pose Detection). 
AI-powered Posture Detection captures specific human poses that may represent a security threat.
6. Equipment detection tool (PPE) based on Neural Network  (see Configuring equipment detection tool (PPE)).
For detection tool operation, you need a combination of two networks: segmenting and classifying.
7. Person-based privacy masking (see Person-based privacy masking).|
A segmenting neural network is used to structure up an image of a human body.
8. Water Level Detection (see Water Level Detection).
The detection tool may use the neural network to detect water transparency and level.

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

7.4.3.1 Requirements to data collection for neural network training

To train your neural network, you have to collect (and submit to AxxonSoft) video recordings from your actual cameras with the
same resolution, expected weather conditions and time of day as in your future application.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  205

     User Guide

For example, if your neural network is intended to analyze outdoor video feeds, your footage must contain all range of weather
conditions (sun, rain, snow, fog, etc.) in different times of day (daytime, twilight, night).
Extra requirements for video footage for each neural analytics tool are listed in the following table:

Tool Requirements

Neural Filter No less than 1000 frames containing objects of interest in given scene conditions, and the same
amount of footage containing no objects (background footage).

Neural Tracker 3 to 5 minutes of video containing objects of interest in given scene conditions. The more the
number and variability of the situations in the scene, the better.

Posture detection tools No less than 100 different persons in given scene conditions.
Attention! Different conditions mean, among others, different postures of an individual in
scene (tilting, different limbs patterns, etc.).

Segmenting detector * 3 to 5 minutes of video containing objects of interest in given scene conditions.

Food recognition * You need to submit no less than 80% of actual menu positions. Each position requires 20 to 40
images shot in different conditions. 

Note
* Will be available in future versions of Axxon Next software.

The requirements may be changed or added to at any time.

7.4.4 Detection tools implementation on processors

Refer to the following table to check compatibility of detection tools and processors.

Detection tool Windows x64 Linux AMD64

CPU GPU VPU CPU GPU VPU

VMD

Service video detection tool

Service audio detection tool

Scene analytics detection tools

Neural Tracker

Neural network filter

Neuralcounter

Face detection tools

VT Automatic Number Plate Recognition 

IV Automatic Number Plate Recognition 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  206

     User Guide

RR Automatic Number Plate Recognition 

Smoke and Fire detection tools

Pose detection tools

Retail analytics detection tools

Water level detection tool

Personal protective equipment detection tool

7.4.5 Creating Detection Tools

To create a new detection tool for a camera:
1. Click Create link in the camera object tree.
All detection tools available are shown.

2. Select the one you need.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  207

     User Guide

Note
Service Video and Audio Detection Tools are listed under Additional.

3. Click the Apply button.

Creation of the detection tool is now complete.
To create a detection tool for situation analysis, you must first create the corresponding object. It will be used as a basis for all
situation analysis tools.

 
Furthermore, you create Scene Analytics based on VMD and the Motion Mask's metadata (see Configuring VMD).

Note
To enable Scene Analytics detection tools under a basic VMD, you have to activate the object tracking option in its
settings.

Facial recognition tools are created in the same fashion: the basic Face decetion  object and its derivative detection tools.

 
A posture detection tool is created under a parent Pose Detection object.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  208

     User Guide

You can create a detection tool of the same type for a number of cameras. To do this:
1. Create the required tool on any video camera.
2. Click Apply.

3. Click the  button and select the cameras for which you want to create the same detection tool.

4. Click Apply.
To remove a detection tool, select the parent object and click Remove. To disable, select No in the Enable field.

Attention!
When you delete a detection tool all its metadata is also deleted. If you have deleted a detection tool, you cannot search
its video with the forensic MomentQuest search. 

7.4.6 VMD (video motion detection)

7.4.6.1 Video requirements for VMD

Motion detection runs properly if video match the following requirements:
1. Camera requirements:
a. Resolution: Min. 320x240 pixels.
b. Frames per second: Min. 1 fps.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  209

     User Guide

c. Camera shaking must not cause image shifting of more than 1% of the frame size.
2. Lighting requirements:
a. Moderate lighting. Lighting that is too little (night) or too much (bright sunlight) may impact the quality of video
analytics.
b. No major fluctuations in lighting levels.
3. Scene and camera angle requirements:
a. Moving objects must be visually separable from each other in the video.
b. The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden changes.
c. Minimal obscuration of moving objects by static objects (columns, trees, etc.).
d. Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can affect the quality of analytics.
e. Long single-color objects may not be tracked properly.
4. Object requirements:
a. There is no noise on the video image and there are no artifacts caused by the compression algorithm.
b. The width and height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over
1920 pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
c. The width and height of the objects in the image must not exceed 75% of the frame size.
d. The speed of objects in the frame must be at least 1 pixel per second.
e. In order to detect the object it is to be visible at not less than 8 frames.
f. Within two adjacent frames the object cannot move in the movement direction for the distance that is longer than
its size. This condition is essential for correct calculation of the object’s trajectory (track).

7.4.6.2 VMD features and specifications

The motion detection tool is triggered by motion in a video camera's field of view (FOV).
VMD metadata can be used for situation analysis in Scene Analytics (see Setting up VMD-based Scene Analytics).

7.4.6.3 Configuring VMD

To configure a VMD:
1. The Video Motion Detection tool can receive tracking metadata generated by the Motion Mask. The metadata are
recorded into the database by default. To disable, select No in the Record Object Tracking (1).

2. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (2). Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server.
3. In the Alarm end delay field, set a value in seconds for the time interval within which the detection tool remains triggered
after motion stops (3).  If motion is re-detected within this interval, no new event will be created.
4. To reduce false alarms rate from a fish-eye camera, you have to position it properly (4).  For other devices, this parameter
is not valid.
5. If necessary, enable the video stream grooming (5). In this case, only the I-frames will be decoded.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  210

     User Guide

Important
This setting applies to all codecs. If a codec has keyframes and p-frames, the keyframe is decoded no more often
than every 500 milliseconds. For the MJPEG codec, each frame is considered to be I frame.
This feature reduces the Server load but, as can be expected, negatively impacts the quality of detection.
This setting should be activated on "blind" Servers (Servers that do not display video) on which it is necessary to
perform detection.

Important
Period and Decode key frames parameters are correlated.
If no local Clients are connected to a Server, the following rules are set for remote Clients:
• If the interval between consecutive I-frames exceeds the value specified in the Period field, the detection
tool will process I-frames.
• If the I-frame frequency is lower than the value specified in the Period field, the detection tool will use the
set value.
If at least one local Client connects to the Server, the detection tool is forced to use the set value. After the local
Client disconnects, the indicated rules become valid again.

6. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (6). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
7. The VMD analyzes differences between the current frame and the static background (10, 11). Depending on a particular
scene, we recommend the following sensitivity values for contrast and size:
a. Maximum sensitivity (street scenes where target objects are smaller):
i. Sensitivity: contrast = 16.
ii. Sensitivity: size = 10.
b. Medium sensitivity (default values for generic scenes):
i. Sensitivity: contrast = 12.
ii. Sensitivity: size = 9.
c. Low sensitivity (indoor cameras with an average distance to object of ca. 4m):
i. Sensitivity: contrast = 8.
ii. Sensitivity: size = 8.
For your convenience with setting sensitivity value, in the preview window you can see the Motion Mask. To
disable it, select No in the Motion Mask (7) field.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  211

     User Guide

If there is motion, but it does not exceed the threshold value (because of the detection sensitivity), the
mask cells are colored green. If motion triggers VMD, the cells turn red.
8. To get tracked objects and their parameters (percentage of the FoV width/height, color) displayed in the Preview window,
select Yes in the Object Tracking field (8). 
9. In the Period field (9) enter the time in milliseconds. This the time before  the next video frame is processed. This value
should be in the range [0, 65535]. If the value is 0, each frame is processed.
10. By default, VMD (video motion detection) covers the entire FoV. In the FoV, you can set privacy masks - closed areas, inside
of which you want no detection.
Privacy masks are created similar to scene analysis configuration  (see Setting General Zones for Scene Analytics). 
11. Click Apply.
VMD configuration is now complete.

7.4.7 Service Video Detection Tools

7.4.7.1 Functions of Service Video Detection Tools

Name of a Detection Tool object Detection description

Quality degradation A detection tool which is triggered when the video image received from a video camera
loses quality.
For example, the detection tool may trigger upon excessive light, loss of focus, lens
blocking, or sudden drop in scene illumination.

Scene change A detection tool triggered by a change in the video image background indicating a change
in the video camera's position in space

Image Noise Detection A tool that triggers in the presence of video noise.
For instance, triggering may occur upon low bit rate, or ripples on video.

Blurred Image Detection A tool that detects blurred contours. 

For example, the detection tool may trigger when the image becomes blurry because of
dirty lens.

Compression Artifacts Detection Detects compression artifacts 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  212

     User Guide

7.4.7.2 Video Requirements for Service Video Detection Tools

For correct operation of the detection tools, video streams should match the following requirements:
1. Camera requirements:
a. Resolution: Min. 320x240 pixels.
b. Frames per second: Min. 1 fps.
c. Color: video analytics work with both black-and-white and color images.
d. Camera shaking must not cause image shifting of more than 1% of the frame size.
2. Lighting requirements:
a. Moderate lighting. Lighting that is too little (night) or too much (bright sunlight) may impact the quality of video
analytics.
b. No major fluctuations in lighting levels.
3. Scene and camera angle requirements:
a. Moving objects must be visually separable from each other in the video.
b. The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden changes.
c. Minimal obscuration of moving objects by static objects (columns, trees, etc.).
d. Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can affect the quality of analytics.
e. Long single-color objects may not be tracked properly.
4. Object requirements:
a. There is no noise on the video image and there are no artifacts caused by the compression algorithm.
b. The width and height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over
1920 pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
c. The width and height of the objects in the image must not exceed 75% of the frame size.
d. The speed of objects in the frame must be at least 1 pixel per second.
e. In order to detect the object it is to be visible at not less than 8 frames.
f. Within two adjacent frames the object cannot move in the movement direction for the distance that is longer than
its size. This condition is essential for correct calculation of the object’s trajectory (track).

7.4.7.3 Set Parameters of Video Detection

All basic detection tools have a number of common settings.
1. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (1). Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server.

2. The default setting for all detection tools is Decode key frames (2). In this case, the frames are processed every 500
milliseconds or less often. To disable Decode key frames, select No in the appropriate field.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  213

     User Guide

Important
This setting applies to all codecs. If a codec has keyframes and p-frames, the keyframe is decoded no more often
than every 500 miliseconds. For the MJPEG codec, each frame is considered to be I frame.
This feature reduces the Server load but, as can be expected, negatively impacts the quality of detection.
This setting should be activated on "blind" Servers (Servers that do not display video) on which it is necessary to
perform detection.

Important
Period and Decode key frames parameters are correlated.
If no local Clients are connected to a Server, the following rules are set for remote Clients:
• If the interval between consecutive I-frames exceeds the value specified in the Period field, the detection
tool will process I-frames.
• If the I-frame frequency is lower than the value specified in the Period field, the detection tool will use the
set value.
If at least one local Client connects to the Server, the detection tool is forced to use the set value. After the local
Client disconnects, the indicated rules become valid again.

3. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (3). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
4. In the Period field (4) enter the time in milliseconds. This the time before  the next video frame is processed. This value
should be in the range [0, 65535]. If the value is 0, each frame is processed.

To configure detection of noise, blurred image and compression artifacts, do as follows:

1. Max Processing Time is the maximum time for detection (1). If the bad image is not detected within the specified time,
change the sensitivity settings.

2. Sensitivity in standard units from 0 to 100 (2).

To save settings, click the Apply button.

7.4.8 Service Audio Detection Tools

7.4.8.1 Functions of Service Audio Detection Tools

The following detection tools enable analysis of the audio signal from a microphone.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  214

     User Guide

Name of a Detection Tool object Detection description

Audio loss A detection tool which is triggered by the line break from the microphone to the Server (complete absence of sound)

Signal A detection tool which is triggered by the reception of an audio signal from an audio device

Noise A detection tool which is triggered by the appearance of noise

Attention!
Audio loss detection may operate incorrectly with video cameras emitting a background signal with a non-zero volume,
even if the integrated microphone is physically disabled

7.4.8.2 Set Parameters of Audio Detection

To set  audio detection tools, do the following:
1. In the Period field (1), enter a time value in milliseconds. This parameter sets the time interval after which a portion of the
audio stream is analyzed. The value should be within the range [0, 65535]. If the value is 0, each portion of the audio
stream is analyzed.

|
2. For the signal detection tool, set the threshold in percentage (2). The tool triggers on exceeding the threshold.  Set the
value by trial-and-error.
3. For the noise detection tool, set the threshold in percentage (3). The tool triggers on exceeding the threshold.  Set the
value by trial-and-error.

4. To save settings, click the Apply button.

7.4.9 Scene Analytics

7.4.9.1 Functions of Scene Analytics

The following detection tools enable analysis of the situation in a video camera's field of view.

Name of a Detection Tool object Detection description

Motion in area Motion in Area detection tool.

Important! This tool is not triggered if an object enters the area (refer to Appearance in area).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  215

     User Guide

Name of a Detection Tool object Detection description

Stop in area Non-activity detection tool.

Important! This tool is not triggered if an object exits the area (refer to Disappearance in area).

Appearance in area Entry into Area detection tool.

Important! This tool does is not triggered if an object appears inside the area without crossing
its perimeter (refer to Motion in Area).

Disappearance in area Exit from Area detection tool.

Important! This tool does is not triggered if an object disappears (or becomes idle) inside the
area without crossing its perimeter (refer to Stopping in Area).

Loitering a detection tool triggered by the lengthy presence of an object in an area of a video camera's
field of view

Abandoned object a detection tool triggered by the appearance of an abandoned object in an area of a video
camera's field of view

Line crossing a detection tool triggered by the trajectory of an object crossing a virtual line

Multiple objects a detection tool is triggered when the number of objects within the designated area exceeds a
predefined value

Move from area to area a detection tool is triggered  when an object moves from one pre-specified area to another
within the scene

Attention!
To detect any motion within an area, you need to apply two detection tools: 
• Motion in Area and
• Appearance in area.

Note
Nueral filter and Neural Tracker require Addon Neuro Pack to be installed.

7.4.9.2 Video requirements for scene analytics detection

7.4.9.2.1 Video requirements for object tracker-based scene analytics

For video analytics to work correctly, the following requirements must be met:
1. Camera requirements:
a. Resolution min. 640х360 pixels.

Attention!
Pixel resolutions over 800x600 are not recommended for this detection tool. Higher resolutions lead to
increased RAM consumption and CPU load with no significant increase in tracker's performance.

b. Frames per second: Min. 6 fps.

c. Color: video analytics work with both black-and-white and color images.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  216

     User Guide

d. Camera shaking must not cause image shifting of more than 1% of the frame size.
2. Lighting requirements:
a. Moderate lighting. Lighting that is too little (night) or too much (bright sunlight) may impact the quality of video
analytics.
b. No major fluctuations in lighting levels.
3. Scene and camera angle requirements:
a. Moving objects must be visually separable from each other in the video.
b. The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden changes.
c. Minimal obscuration of moving objects by static objects (columns, trees, etc.).
d. Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can affect the quality of analytics.
e. Long single-color objects may not be tracked properly.
4. Object requirements:
a. There is no noise on the video image and there are no artifacts caused by the compression algorithm.
b. The width or height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over 1920
pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
c. The width or height of the objects in the image must not exceed 75% of the frame size.
d. The speed of objects in the frame must be at least 1 pixel per second.
e. In order to detect the object it is to be visible at not less than 8 frames.
f. Within two adjacent frames the object cannot move in the movement direction for the distance that is longer than
its size. This condition is essential for correct calculation of the object’s trajectory (track).

7.4.9.2.2 Video requirements for object tracker (with neural filter)-based scene analytics
For video analytics to work correctly, the following requirements must be met:
1. Camera requirements:
a. Resolution min. 640х360 pixels.
b. Frames per second: Min. 6 fps.
c. Color: video analytics work with both black-and-white and color images.
d. Camera shaking must not cause image shifting of more than 1% of the frame size.
2. Lighting requirements:
a. Moderate lighting. Lighting that is too little (night) or too much (bright sunlight) may impact the quality of video
analytics.
b. No major fluctuations in lighting levels.
3. Scene and camera angle requirements:
a. Moving objects must be visually separable from each other in the video.
b. The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden changes.
c. Minimal obscuration of moving objects by static objects (columns, trees, etc.).
d. Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can affect the quality of analytics.
e. Long single-color objects may not be tracked properly.
4. Object requirements:
a. There is no noise on the video image and there are no artifacts caused by the compression algorithm.
b. The width or height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over 1920
pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
c. The width or height of the objects in the image must not exceed 75% of the frame size.
d. The speed of objects in the frame must be at least 1 pixel per second.
e. In order to detect the object it is to be visible at not less than 8 frames.
f. Within two adjacent frames the object cannot move in the movement direction for the distance that is longer than
its size. This condition is essential for correct calculation of the object’s trajectory (track).
5. Camera requirements for neural filter operation.

7.4.9.2.3 Video requirements for neural tracker-based scene analytics

For video analytics to work correctly, the following requirements must be met:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  217

     User Guide

1. Camera requirements:
a. Resolution min. 300x300 pixels.
b. Frames per second: Min. 2 fps.
c. Color: video analytics work with color images.
d. Camera shaking must not cause image shifting of more than 1% of the frame size.
2. Lighting requirements:
a. Moderate lighting. Lighting that is too little (night) or too much (bright sunlight) may impact the quality of video
analytics.
b. No major fluctuations in lighting levels.
3. Scene and camera angle requirements:
a. Moving objects must be visually separable from each other in the video.
b. The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden changes.
c. Minimal obscuration of moving objects by static objects (columns, trees, etc.).
d. Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can affect the quality of analytics.
e. Long single-color objects may not be tracked properly.
4. Object requirements:
a. There is no noise on the video image and there are no artifacts caused by the compression algorithm.
b. The width or height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over 1920
pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
c. The width or height of the objects in the image must not exceed 75% of the frame size.
d. The speed of objects in the frame must be at least 1 pixel per second.
e. In order to detect the object it is to be visible at not less than 8 frames.
f. Within two adjacent frames the object cannot move in the movement direction for the distance that is longer than
its size. This condition is essential for correct calculation of the object’s trajectory (track).
5. Camera requirements for neural tracker operation.

7.4.9.2.4 Video requirements for VMD-based scene analytics

For video analytics to work correctly, the following requirements must be met:
1. Camera requirements:
a. Resolution min. 640х360.
b. Frames per second: Min. 6 fps
c. Color: video analytics work with both black-and-white and color images.
d. Camera shaking must not cause image shifting of more than 1% of the frame size.
2. Lighting requirements:
a. Moderate lighting. Lighting that is too little (night) or too much (bright sunlight) may impact the quality of video
analytics.
b. No major fluctuations in lighting levels.
3. Scene and camera angle requirements:
a. Moving objects must be visually separable from each other in the video.
b. The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden changes.
c. Minimal obscuration of moving objects by static objects (columns, trees, etc.).
d. Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can affect the quality of analytics.
e. Long single-color objects may not be tracked properly.
4. Object requirements:
a. There is no noise on the video image and there are no artifacts caused by the compression algorithm.
b. The width or height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over 1920
pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
c. The width or height of the objects in the image must not exceed 75% of the frame size.
d. The speed of objects in the frame must be at least 1 pixel per second.
e. In order to detect the object it is to be visible at not less than 8 frames.
f. Within two adjacent frames the object cannot move in the movement direction for the distance that is longer than
its size. This condition is essential for correct calculation of the object’s trajectory (track).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  218

     User Guide

7.4.9.3 Camera requirements for neural filter operation

To operate the neural filter, a camera must match the following requirements:
1. Use color cameras. Monochrome image may noticeably decrease the detection quality.
2. Video resolution is no less than 640x360.
3. Frame rate is no less than 6 FPS.
4. An object must occupy no less than 5% of the FoV width / height.
5. Objects must be visually separated from the background as well as from each other.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee normal operation of the neural filter with a fisheye camera.

7.4.9.4 Camera requirements for neural tracker operation

To operate the neural tracker, a camera must match the following requirements:
1. Minimum resolution is at least 640х360 pixels.
2. Frame rate must be no less than 8 FPS. To detect fast moving objects (running individuals, vehicles), you must set frame
rate at 18 FPS or above.
3. Objects must be visually separated from the background as well as from each other.
4. Camera is mounted in no less than 3 meters above the ground, or on the ceiling, or pointed strictly downwards (for
counting visitors with a line crossing detection tool).
5. An object must occupy no less than 5% of the FoV width / height.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee normal operation of the neural tracker with a fisheye camera.

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

7.4.9.5 Camera requirements for abandoned objects detection

Make sure the following requirements for abandoned object detection are met:
1. Camera requirements:
1. Resolution must be not less than 640х480 pixels.
2. Color: analytics works both with color and monochromatic images.
3. It is not allowed to the image shift be more than 1% from the frame size due to camera shake.
• Lighting requirements:
1. Moderate lighting. The quality of analytics performance can be lower in case of low lighting (night) or over lighting
(overexposure).
2. There must be no dramatic changes in lighting.
• Scene and camera angle requirements:
1. Background is mostly static and is not changed.
2. Incorrect analytics performance can be caused by reflective surfaces.
3. Abandoned objects are hidden by moving objects not longer than 10% of the time.
• Object images requirements:
1. An abandoned object must be visible on the image.
2. The digital noise and compression-related artifacts are minimal.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  219

     User Guide

3. The width and height of the objects in the image must be not less than 1% of the frame size (if resolution is over 1920
pixels) or 15 pixels for lower resolution.
4. The width and height of the objects in the image must not exceed 25% of the frame size.
If these conditions are in place, the Abandoned Object detection tool is guaranteed to:
• Detect 92 items out of 100
• Keep false positives to 20 out of 100.

7.4.9.6 Configuring Scene Analytics Detection Tools

7.4.9.6.1 General information on Scene Analytics

Axxon Next uses two different trackers for moving objects detection and metadata calculation:
1. Object Tracker is a primary tool. 
2. Neural Tracker is essentially the same but operates through neural networks. The neural one is more accurate and
detects even static objects, but it requires more computing resources.
The Scene Analytics detection tools work with both trackers.

Attention!
The abandoned objects detection tool works only with the primary tracker.

When created, both Object Tracker and Neural Tracker objects are enabled by default. Tracked objects' parameters (relative
width and height, color) are displayed in the camera window.

Note
Up to 25 objects can be tracked at the same time.

7.4.9.6.2 Setting up Tracker-based Scene Analytics

7.4.9.6.2.1 Setting General Parameters

Some parameters can be bulk configured for Situation Analysis detection tools. To configure them, do as follows: 
1. Select the Object Tracker object.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  220

     User Guide

2. By default, video stream's metadata are recorded in the database. You can disable it by selecting No in the Record object
tracking list (1).

Attention!
Video decompression and analysis are used to obtain metadata, which causes high Server load and limits the
number of video cameras that can be used on it.

3. If a video camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (2). Selecting a low-quality
video stream allows reducing the load on the Server.

Attention!
To display oject trajectories properly, make sure that all video streams from multi-streaming camera have the
same aspect ratio settings.

4. If you require automatic adjustment of the sensitivity of scene analytic detection tools, in the Auto Sensitivity list, select
Yes (3).

Note
Enabling this option is recommended if the lighting fluctuates significantly in the course of the video camera's
operation (for example, in outdoor conditions)

5. To reduce false alarms rate from a fish-eye camera, you have to position it properly (4).  For other devices, this parameter
is not valid.
6. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (5). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  221

     User Guide

7. In the Motion detection sensitivity field (6), set the sensitivity for motion detection tools, on a scale of 1 to 100.
8. To correct for camera shake, set Antishaker  to Yes (7).  This setting is recommended only for cameras that show clear
signs of shaking-related image degradation.
9. Analyzed framed are scaled down to a specified resolution (8, 1280 pixels on the longer side). This is how it works:
a. If the longer side of the source image exceeds the value specified in the Frame size change field, it is divided by
two.
b. If the resulting resolution falls below the specified value, it is used further.
c. If the resulting resolution still exceeds the specified limit, it is divided by two, etc.

Note
For example, the source image resolution is 2048 * 1536, and the limit is set to 1000.
In this case, the source resolution will be divided two times (down to 512 * 384): after the first division, the
number of pixels on the longer side exceeds the limit (1024 > 1000).

10. Enter the time interval in seconds, during which  object's properties will be stored in the Time of Object in DB  field (9). If
the object leaves and enters the FoV within the specified time, it will be identified as one and the same object (same ID).  
11. If necessary, configure the neural network filter. The neural network filter processes the results of the tracker and filters
out false alarms on complex video images (foliage, glare, etc.). 
a. Enable the filter by selecting Yes (1).

b. Select the processor for the neural network — CPU, one of GPUs or a IntelNCS (2). 

Attention!
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

c. Select a neural network (3). To access a neural network, contact technical support. If no neural network file is
specified, or the settings are incorrect, no filtering will occur.

Attention!
A neural network filter can be used either only for analyzing moving objects, or only for analyzing abandoned
objects. You cannot operate  two neural networks simultaneously.

12. Click the Apply button.

The general parameters of the situation analysis detection tools are now set.
Setting General Zones for Scene Analytics
By default, the entire FoV is a scene analytics zone. If you need to exclude parts of the scene prone to false alarms from detection
(leaves, water, etc.), you should set privacy masks - zone with scene analytics and metadata generation disabled
To do so, follow the steps:

1. Select the Object Tracker object and click the  button.

2. In the FoV, set the nodes of the closed area, in order, inside of which you want no detection.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  222

     User Guide

Note
When the area is being constructed, the nodes are connected by a two-color dotted line which outlines the area's
borders.

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Action Result

Click in the viewing tile Creates a new area node

Right-click on a created node Deletes the area node

Position the cursor on a node and hold down the left mouse button while you move the mouse Moves the area node

Deletes the area

Click the  button.

Once the area is closed, you will see the  buttons on the borderlines. If you click them, a new node is

added. This allows you to be more flexible with zoning. 
3. Set the required masking areas.
4. Click the Apply button.
You have successfully created the detection zone.

Note
These settings will apply for all situation analysis detection tools on the selected camera.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  223

     User Guide

Set the Minimum and Maximum Object Size for Detection

You can set the minimum and maximum object size for detection by specifying numerical values or reference areas on screen.
 Objects of all sizes beyond the set values  will not trigger detection.
To specify the size, do as follows:
1. Select the Object Tracker object.
2. In the Max. Object height and Max. Object width fields (1), enter the maximum height and width of a detectable object
as a percent of the FoV height. The values should be in the range [0,05; 100].

Attention!
If you activate the Object Calibration parameter in tracker settings, please note that in this case min/max size of
objects is specified in decimeters, not in FoV percentage (see Configure Perspective).

3. In the Min. Object height and Min. Object width fields (2), enter the minimum height and width of a detectable object as
a percent of the FoV height. The values should be in the range [0,05; 100].
4.  Click the Apply button.
To set the reference area on screen, do as follows:
1. Select the Object Tracker object.

2. Click the Min  button and  set the minimum size of  a detectable object. You can do so by dragging and dropping  the
nodes of the reference area. 

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  224

     User Guide

3. Click the Max  button and  set the maximum size of a detectable object.

Note
By default, the maximum size is the whole size of FoV, so the nodes are located in the corners.

4. Click the Apply button.
You have successfully set the minimum and maximum object size for detection.

Note
These settings will apply for all situation analysis detection tools on the selected camera.

Configure Perspective
The Perspective enhances detection tools performance and helps evaluate real sizes of objects based on simplified calibration
system.
To configure the perspective, do the following:

1. Select the Object Tracker object and click the  button.

2. Set the size of the same object in different areas of the field of view. To create a calibration length, left-click within the
video image in the viewing tile and add  two anchor points. Set at least three calibration lengths. You can resize the length

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  225

     User Guide

by stretching its anchor points . You can move it on screen by dragging and dropping.

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Note

To delete it, click the   button.

3. Select Yes in the Object Calibration option (1).

4. Enter the height in decimeters of the object you want to find in the Leveling Rod Height field (2).

Attention!
Objects smaller than the specified value will not be detected.

5. Click the Apply button.

Perspective is now configured.

Note
These settings will apply for all situation analysis detection tools on the selected camera.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  226

     User Guide

Recommendations on configuring Object Tracker

To avoid false positives of Scene Analytics detection tools, please follow the recommendations here:
1. Configure the Tracker object object iteratively and check operation quality in each iteration.
2. The parameters that affect operation quality most are: Minimum size, Maximum size (see Set the Minimum and
Maximum Object Size for Detection), and Sensitivity (see Setting General Parameters).
3. It is recommended to use Auto sensitivity mode to ensure quality of the Tracker operation in changing lighting
conditions.
4. If lighting is stable, it could be reasonable to adjust the Sensitivity value manually. Set Sensitivity value about 35 to
detect objects with low contrast or about 15 to detect contrast object.
5. Minimum size is to be selected so that it is a little less than typical object size on the image.
6. Maximum size is to be selected so that it is a little greater than typical object size on the image, considering that the object
can be joined with its shadow.
7. Lowering the Time of Object in DB allows excluding triggering of false static objects, while setting it to a higher value
could allow not breaking off alarms for overlapping or temporarily disappearing objects in some cases.
Configuring the Detection Zone
For each type of situation analysis detection tool you can set a detection zone. 
After creating a detection tool,  its rectangular detection zone is displayed in a bright color. If you have set privacy masks, they
are grayed out (see Setting General Zones for Scene Analytics).

Configuration of the detection zone is carried out in the same way as for general zones for scene analysis (see Setting General
Zones for Scene Analytics).
Setting up objects to be detected (target objects)
You can set parameters describing target objects' geometry and/or behaviour for each type of Scene Analytics tool.
To configure settings for target objects, you must:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  227

     User Guide

1. Select an appropriate Scene Analytics tool.

2. Set the maximum and minimum height of the target object as a percentage of the FoV height (1, 4).
3. Set the maximum and minimum speed of the target object as a percentage of the frame per second (2, 5).

Attention!
For better visual understanding of speed settings, proceed to setting values for searches in Archive (see
Configuring minimum and maximum object speed).

Note
In Abandoned Object detection, these parameters are not used.

4. Set the maximum and minimum width of the target object as a percentage of the FoV width (3, 6).
5. Set a color (or color range) for the target object:
a. Select the relevant detection tool object and click   in the Object Color field.  The Object Color dialog opens.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  228

     User Guide

b. You can set the color range with Drag&Drop  on the RGB / black-and-white color palette.

Any click on the palette is interpreted as the beginning of a new range; the previous range will disappear.

Attention!
The Axxon Next's inner logic treats all objects as monochrome. The object color is averaged within the
object's contour.
All objects of specified colors will be detected.

Attention!
If no colors are set, the detection tool triggers on objects of any color.

Note
To cancel a selected color, click on any palette, save changes, and click Apply.

6. Select the type of the target object that should trigger the detector (8).

Attention!
2 or more human objects moving along each other are treated by the system as a Group. If you select this type of
object for tracking, single human motion, even if detected, will not cause alarms.
If you select the Human type, group motion will not cause alarms.

7. Click the Apply button.
The setting procedure for target objects is now complete.

7.4.9.6.2.2 Settings Specific to Cross Line Detection

After you create and select a line crossing detection tool, you can see a virtual "tripwire" line in the FoV. 
To set up line crossing detection, do the following:
1. Set up a virtual line in FoV.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  229

     User Guide

a. Set the  end points of the line .

Note
When the line is being constructed, the end points are connected by a two-color dotted line. The direction
of the object's motion across the line is indicated by dotted arrows.

Action Result

Position the cursor on an end point and, holding down the left mouse button, move the mouse Moves the line end point

Position the cursor on the line, holding down the left mouse button, move the mouse Moving the line

b. By default, Line Crossing detection monitors object motion across the line in both directions. To suspend detection
of motion in one direction, click the button  to that direction.

Attention!
At least one direction must be selected for detection

Note
An unmonitored direction of object motion is indicated by a dimmed arrow

2. If an object in FoV performs repetitive movements near the virtual line, it may cause excessive triggering of the detection
tool. In this case, set an area within the object's track which must cross the line completely to trigger the tool. To do it, set
the X and Y offset values as percentage of track width and height.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  230

     User Guide

Here's an example: the green triangle is the track of the object. If you specify X and Y offset values as 25%, the tool will be
triggered only if the entire red triangle goes beyond the virtual line.

3. Click the Apply button.

7.4.9.6.2.3 Settings specific to Abandoned Object detection

To configure Abandoned Object detection, do as follows:
1. Select the Object Tracker object.

2. In the Abandoned Object Detection (1), select Yes. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  231

     User Guide

3. In the Abandoned Object Detection Sensitivity field (2), set the sensitivity for situational analytic tools for unattended
objects.  This value should be in the range [1, 100].

Note
This parameter depend on the lighting conditions and should be chosen empirically. It is recommended to start
by setting the sensitivity at 20.

4. In the Alarm on Object's Max. Idle Time in the Area field (3) specify the time in seconds. If the object remains idle for the
specified time or longer, it will be considered unattended. This value should be in the range [15, 1800].

Note
This parameter is used only for tracking "lost items", i.e objects Unattended for longer time intervals

Note
 It is recommended to start by setting the value of this parameter at 15.

5. If you require using the unattended objects detection tool for longer time intervals, select Yes  for the corresponding
parameter (4).  
6. Under the Object Tracker object, create the Abandoned Object object (see Creating Detection Tools).
7. Click the Apply button.
Abandoned object detection is now configured.

7.4.9.6.2.4 Settings Specific to Loitering Detection

When configuring the Loitering detection tool, you must set the maximum time an object can be in the analyzed area: when the
maximum time is exceeded, the detection tool is triggered.
To set a maximum time, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the Detection Tools list, highlight a Loitering in area object (1).

2. In the Event duration to trigger detection (sec) field (2), enter the maximum object loitering time in seconds. This value
should be in the range [0, 3600].
3. Click the Apply button.
The maximum loitering time is now set.

7.4.9.6.2.5 Settings Specific to Multiple objects

When configuring the Multiple objects detection tool, you must set the maximum permissible number of objects within the zone;
exceeding this number leads to triggering the tool.
To do it, follow the steps below:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  232

     User Guide

1. In the list of detection tools, select the Multiple objects (1).

2. Enter a value into the Number of Alarm Objects (2) field .

3. Click Apply.
When the number of objects in zone maxes out,  the  Start Time of Detection Tool Trigger event is generated. When the number
of object in zone drops down below the threshold value,  the  End Time of Detection Tool Trigger event is generated.

7.4.9.6.2.6 Settings Specific to Stop in area detection

The detection tool will trigger if an object stops and remains idle for a specified time period.

Note
The object doesn't  have to be completely idle, minor jitter is permitted.

To set a specified time period, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the Detection Tools list, highlight a Stop in area object (1).

2. Set the idle period duration for triggering the tool. This value should fall into the range of [0, 3600].

Attention!
Set this parameter to a value lower than the Time of Object in DB in Object tracker settings (see Setting General
Parameters).

3. Click the Apply button.

7.4.9.6.2.7 Settings Specific to Move from area to area detection

To set up a motion between areas detection tool, do the following:
1. Set the general parameters (see Setting General Parameters).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  233

     User Guide

2. Set two areas in FoV. The tool is triggered if any object moves from one area to another in any direction.
By default, the areas are stacked on top of each other. To reshape an area, drag its anchor points . To move the entire
area, left click and drag its border. To add anchor points, click .

3. Click the Apply button.

7.4.9.6.3 Setting up Neural Tracker-based Scene Analytics

To configure the neural tracker, do the following:
1. Select the Neurotracker object. 

2. By default, metadata are recorded into the database. To disable metadata recording, select No (1) from the Record
object tracking list.
3. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream to apply the detection tool to (2). 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  234

     User Guide

4. To reduce false alarms rate from a fish-eye camera, you have to position it properly (3).  For other devices, this parameter
is not valid.
5. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (4). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
6. Set the recognition threshold for objects in percent (5). If the recognition probability falls below the specified value, the
data will be ignored. The higher the value, the higher the accuracy — for the cost of sensitivity.
7. Specify the Minimum number of detection triggers for the neural tracker to display the object's trajectory (6). The
higher the value, the more is the time interval between the object's detection and display of its trajectory on screen.  Low
values may lead to false triggering.
8. Select the neural network file (7).

Attention!
A trained neural network does a great job for a particular scene if you want to detect only objects of a certain
type (e.g. person, cyclist, motorcyclist, etc.). 
To train your neural network, contact AxxonSoft (see Requirements to data collection for neural network
training).

Note
For correct neural network operation under Linux, place the corresponding file in the /opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/
directory. 

9. You can use the neural filter to sort out video recordings featuring selected objects and their trajectories. For example, the
neural tracker detects all freight trucks, and the neural filter sorts out only video recordings that contain trucks with cargo
door open. To set up a neural filter, do the following:
a. To use the neural filter, set Yes in the corresponding field (8).
b. In the Neurofilter file field, select a neural network file (9).
c. In the Neurofilter mode field, select a processor to be used for neural network computations (10).
10. Select the processor for the neural network: the CPU or one of GPUs (11). 

Attention!
We recommend the GPU.
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

11. Set the frame rate value for the neural network (12). The other frames will be interpolated. The higher the value, the more
accurate tracking, the higher the CPU load.

Attention!
6 FPS or more is recommended. For fast moving objects (running individuals, vehicles), you must set frame rate
at 12 FPS or above.

12. If you don't need to detect moving objects, select Yes in the Hide moving objects field (13). An object is treated as static if
it does not change its position more than at 10% of its width or height during its track's lifetime.
13. If you don't need to detect static objects, select Yes in the Hide stationary objects field (14). This parameter lowers the
false alarm rate when detecting moving objects.
14. In the Track retention time field, set a time interval in seconds after which the tracking of a vehicle is considered lost
(15). This helps if objects in scene temporarily obscure each other.  For example, a larger vehicle may completely block
the smaller  one from view. 
15. By default, the entire FoV is a detection zone. If you need to narrow down the area to be analyzed, you can set one or
several detection zones.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  235

     User Guide

Note
The procedure of setting zones is identical to the primary tracker's (see Setting General Zones for Scene
Analytics). The only difference is that the neural tracker's zones are processed while the primary tracker's are
ignored.

16. Click Apply.

17. The next step is to create and configure the necessary detection tools. The configuration procedure is the same as for the
primary tracker.

Attention!
To trigger a Motion in Area detection tool under a neural network tracker, an object must be displaced by at
least 25% of its width or height in FoV.

Attention!
The abandoned objects detection tool works only with the primary tracker.

7.4.9.6.4 Setting up VMD-based Scene Analytics

Video requirements for VMD

To configure situational analysis based on video motion  detection, do the following:

1. Request an updated license file from your AxxonSoft's rep.
2. Select a VMD object. 

3. Select Yes in the Object Tracking field (1). 

4. By default, metadata are not recorded into the database. To enable metadata recording, select Yes from the Record
objects Tracking list (2). 
5. To reduce false alarms rate from a fish-eye camera, you have to position it properly (3).  For other devices, this parameter
is not valid.
6. For a proper operation of VMD-based Scene Analytics, the detection tool must analyze a frame at least twice a second
(refer to Set Parameters of Video Detection section for Period (4) and Decode key frames (5) parameters description.
7. Click the Apply button.
8. Next, you have to create and configure the necessary VMD-based detection tools. The configuration procedure is the same
as for the primary tracker.

Attention!
VMD-generated metadata does not include object type and color information.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  236

     User Guide

Attention!
The abandoned objects detection tool works only with the primary tracker.

7.4.10 Face detection tool

7.4.10.1 Functions of facial detection

The following types of Face Detection tools are available in Axxon Next:
1. Appearance in area – a detection tool is triggered by the appearance of an object and subsequent face capture in FoV.
2. Loitering in area –  a detection tool triggered by the lengthy presence of an object  and its face capture  in FoV.
3. Face recognition evasion detection - triggers when anyone in scene wears dark glasses or covering masks, or uses other
masking tricks.
The Axxon Next database stores all faces in binary form:
1. All captured facial images are vectorized* and stored in the t_face_vector table, and their corresponding capture events
are stored in the t_json_event table.
2. Reference images (see Lists of facial templates) are stored in the t_face_listed table.
* Facial vector: mathematical representation of a facial image created upon face capture.

Note
These detection tools require Addon Face Recognition Pack to be installed (see Installing DetectorPack add-ons).

7.4.10.2 Camera requirements for facial detection

Face detection works properly if cameras are installed and set up as follows:
1. The frame rate must not be less than 12 fps and not less than 6 fps for face recognition at turnstiles.
2. The maximum angle of incidence should not exceed +/- 15 ° off the ground level.
3. Distance between pupils on the received photos of face must be not less than 32 pixels.
4. There should be minimum mutual overshadowing of the captured faces.
5. The faces should be evenly illuminated with a diffused light of at least 200 lux. Directional side lighting is not allowed.
6. The sharpness of the captured faces on the received photos must be over 64 grayscale. Deficient or exceeding illumination
is not allowed.
7. There should be no back light and sharp gradients of light and shade.
8. The photos of the captured faces received from video cameras should be clear. Image blurring caused by motion is not
allowed.

Note
The required distance between the camera and the face can be set using a lens with required focal length.

7.4.10.3 Configure Facial Recognition

To configure face detection tools, do as follows:
1. Set the general Facial Recognition parameters.
2. Configure  a particular detection tool.
To configure shared Facial Recognition parameters, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  237

     User Guide

1. Select the Facial Recognition object. 

2. If you require using this detection tool for real-time facial recognition, set the corresponding parameter to Yes (1).
3. If you want to use this facial recognition tool in real time in parallel with FaceCube Recognition Server (see Configuring
FaceCube integration), set Yes for Real-time recognition on external Service (4).
4. If you need to enable recording of metadata, select Yes from the Record Objects tracking list (3).
5. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (4). Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server.
6. If you need to save age and gender information for each recognized face, select Yes in the corresponding field (1, see
Facial recognition and search). 

7. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
8. If you plan to apply the masks detection tool, set Yes for the Face mask detection parameter (3, see Configuring masks
detection).
9. In some cases, the detection tool may take other object for a face. To filter out non-facial objects, select Yes in the False
Detection Filtering field while calculating the vector model of a face and its recording into the metadata DB (4). If the
filtering is on, false results will appear in the detection feed but will be ignored during searches in Archive.
10. Set the time (in milliseconds) between face search operations in a video frame in the Period of face search field (5).
Acceptable values range: [1, 10000]. Increasing this value decreases the Server load, but can result in some faces being
missed. 
11. Analyzed framed are scaled down to a specified resolution (6, 1280 pixels on the longer side). This is how it works:
a. If the longer side of the source image exceeds the value specified in the Frame size change field, it is divided by
two.
b. If the resulting resolution falls below the specified value, it is used further.
c. If the resulting resolution still exceeds the specified limit, it is divided by two, etc.

Note
For example, the source image resolution is 2048 * 1536, and the limit is set to 1000.
In this case, the source resolution will be divided two times (down to 512 * 384): after the first division, the
number of pixels on the longer side exceeds the limit (1024 > 1000).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  238

     User Guide

12. Specify the minimum and maximum sizes of detectable faces in % of the frame size (7). 
13. In the Minimum threshold of face authenticity field, set the minimum level of face recognition accuracy for the creation
of a track (8). You can set any value by trial-and-error; no less than 90 is recommended. The higher the value is, the fewer
faces are detected, while recognition accuracy increases.
14. Select the processor for the face detection - CPU or NVIDIA GPU (9). 

Attention!
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

15. If you use FaceCube integration (see Configuring FaceCube integration), activate the Send face image parameter (10).
16. Enter the time in milliseconds after which the face track is considered to be lost in the Track loss time field (11).
Acceptable values range: [1, 10000]. This parameter applies when a face moves in a frame and gets obscured by an
obstacle for some time. If this time is less than the set value, the face will be recognized as the same.
17. When using wide angle dual lens XingYun devices, the detector will analyze two 180° spherical images by default (see
Configuring fisheye cameras). This may decrease recognition quality. To de-warp the image before detection, select Yes
for the Use Camera Transform parameter (12). This parameter works as well for other types of image transformation. 
18. Select a rectangular area to be searched for faces in the preview window. To select the area, move the intersection points
.

19. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of general parameters for Facial Recognition is now complete.

7.4.10.3.1 Setting up advanced facial detection tools

7.4.10.3.1.1 Configuring masks detection

To configure the masks detection tool, do the following:
1. Activate the Face Mask Detection parameter in facial recognition tool settings (see Configure Facial Recognition).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  239

     User Guide

2. In the Number of Consecutive Mask Detections field, set the minimum number of frames with the mask for triggering
the tool. 

3. Depending on your particular task, set other parameters' values according to the table.
Triggering event Parameter Values

Lower face part masking No mask Full face masking

No mask of any kind Absence Presence Absence

No medical mask Absence Presence Presence

No balaclava Presence Presence Absence

Any mask present Presence Absence Presence

Medical mask present Presence Absence Absence

Balaclava present Absence Absence Presence

Note
The Other Types of Masks parameter is not supported in this software version.

4. If required, you can set advanced parameters (see Fine-tuning the facial recognition tool).
5. Click Apply.

7.4.10.3.1.2 Configuring appearance in area detection

To configure the detection tool:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  240

     User Guide

1. Select an object.

2. Configure parameters for the captured face (just as with detected objects, see Setting up objects to be detected (target
objects)).

Attention!
Select the Object class: Any or Face.

Note
Face color is not detected during Facial recognition, so there are no color settings.

3. Set an area inside FoV for detection. This is similar to the situation analysis configuration (see Configuring the Detection
Zone).
4. Click the Apply button.

7.4.10.3.1.3 Configuring loitering in area detection

To configure the detection tool:
1. Select an object.

2. Configure parameters for the captured face (just as with detected objects, see Setting up objects to be detected (target
objects)).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  241

     User Guide

Attention!
Select the Object class: Any or Face.

Note
Face color is not detected during Facial recognition, so there are no color settings.

3. Set the maximum time an object can stay in the zone. When the maximum time is exceeded, the detection tool is
triggered. This value should be in the range [0, 3600].
4. Set an area inside FoV for detection. This is similar to the situation analysis configuration (see Configuring the Detection
Zone).
5. Click the Apply button

7.4.10.3.2 Fine-tuning the facial recognition tool

Attention!
To fine tune this detection tool, you will require assistance from AxxonSoft tech support.

To fine-tune the detection tool, do as follows:

1. Select a recognition algorithm (1):

ALG1 is faster but less accurate while

ALG2 is more accurate but relatively slower.
2. Set up false mask detections filtering:
a. To apply filters, set Yes for the False mask detections filtering parameter (2).
b. Set the minimal percentage of probability which makes the additional algorithm identify a track as a masked face
in the Minimum filtering threshold for face mask detection field (7).   If the algorithm takes a decision that the
track relates to a masked face with a probability value lower than the specified threshold, the track will be ignored.
Set the value by trial-and-error, values over 30 are recommended.
3. Set the minimum threshold value for mask detection (3). Set a value by trial-and-error, values over 70 are recommended.
4. Set the minimum quality of a facial image for recognition with a mask (4, see Configuring masks detection). Set the value
by trial-and-error, values over 30 are recommended.
5. Set the minimum quality of a facial image for recognition without a mask (5). Set the value by trial-and-error, values over
50 are recommended.
6. If you need to filter out false positives, set the minimum percentage of probability which makes the algorithm identify a
track as a human face in the Minimum filtering threshold field (6, see Configure Facial Recognition). If the algorithm
takes a decision that the track relates to a face with a probability value lower than the specified threshold, the track will
be ignored. Set the value by trial-and-error, values over 50 are recommended.
7. Click the Apply button.

7.4.10.4 Configuring real-time facial recognition

You can program automatic responses to an identification of a recognized face against an external list (for example, of wanted
persons).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  242

     User Guide

To do it, follow the steps below:

1. Activate the Real-time Recognition parameter for the required detection tools (see Configure Facial Recognition).
2. Create one or more Lists of Persons. Add reference images of persons of interest to the lists (see Lists of facial templates).
3. Configure automatic responses to positive identification against the list.

7.4.10.4.1 Setting the automatic response to an identification of a recognized face against the list
To set an automatic response to an FR event, do as follows:
1. Create a macro (see Create Macros).
2. As a starting condition, select the Face Recognition event and the desired list (1,see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros).

3. By default, the macro is triggered by recognition of any face from the list. If required, you can specify a particular person
whose facial recognition will trigger the macro (2).

Note
To select another person, clear the 2 field and re-open the list.

4. Program an action or a sequence of actions to be performed in response to an identification of a recognized face against
the designated list (see Settings specific to actions).
5. If the response involves initiating an alarm, you can configure the Dialog Board to filter Alarm Initiated by Macro
Command events (see Configure the Dialog Board).

Examples of macros used for working with face lists

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  243

     User Guide

7.4.10.4.1.1 Examples of macros used for working with face lists

On this page:

• Alarm initiation
• Response to a recognition of a
non-listed person
• Sending an e-mail
• Starting export

Alarm initiation

This macro can be used together with the Dialog Board (see Configure the Dialog Board).
If the Dialog Board is configured to display an alarm and linked with a video camera (see Linking cells), then when a face from the
list is recognized, the following information will be displayed on the Dialog Board:
1. Reference photo from the face list.
2. An enlarged image of the recognized face in the frame.
3. The name of the recognized person, the comment in quotation marks, the name of the face list in square brackets, and
the percentage of similarity with the reference face in parentheses (see Lists of facial templates).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  244

     User Guide

Response to a recognition of a non-listed person

Sending an e-mail

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  245

     User Guide

If the e-mail is sent via the SMTP server (see Configuring the E-mail Object), then 3 files will be attached to the message:
• full frame at the moment of face recognition;
• reference photo from the face list;
• an enlarged image of the recognized face in the frame.
Starting export
As with the e-mail notifications, three files will be exported when you export an image for a facial recognition event i.e. when a
match from Lists of Facial Templates is detected:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  246

     User Guide

• Full frame at the moment of facial recognition;

• Reference photo from the List of Facial Templates.
• Close up shot of the target face captured in the scene.

7.4.10.4.2 Configuring FaceCube integration

Axxon Next supports the FaceCube facial recognition server (see https://www.bio-cube.co.kr/vs-face).
Please see the FaceCube integration workflows below: 
1. Axxon Next captures and recognizes a face, then passes the facial image to the FaceCube facial recognition server.
2. FaceCube checks the facial image against the DB. 
3. If a match is found, the Axxon Next VMS receives the results (see Facial recognition and search).
To configure FaceCube workflows, do as follows:
1. Configure the FaceCube facial recognition server and add Reference faces (see https://www.bio-cube.co.kr/).
2. Create a face list in Axxon Next and enter the address of the FaceCube facial recognition server into the List Settings field
(see Lists of facial templates).

3. Activate the Real-time recognition on external Service parameter and Send face image in the facial recognition
settings (see Configure Facial Recognition).
4. Configure automatic responses to positive identification against the list (see Setting the automatic response to an
identification of a recognized face against the list).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  247

     User Guide

7.4.11 Face Detection and Temperature Control with Mobotix M16 TR cameras

7.4.11.1 Functional parameters of the Face Detection and Temperature Control

When working with Mobotix M16 TR cameras, the standard face detection algorithm (see Functions of facial detection) is used
along with an additional option of temperature measurement. 
For each recognized face, the following is performed:
1. Temperature measurement.
2. Display the measurement result next to the face bounding box.
3. Recording the temperature value into the system log along with the face recognition event (see The System Log).
You can as well set the system to launch a macro if temperature readings exceed the maximum permitted value (see Specific
parameters for triggering a face recognition macro).

7.4.11.2 Camera requirements for face detection and temperature control

Face detection with temperature control works properly if cameras are installed and set up as follows:
1. At least 8 frames per second
2. Minimum resolution is at least 1280 х 960 pixels.
3. Indoor installation only.
4. To establish maximum measurement accuracy, avoid installing cameras near exits to street, in direct sunlight, and close
to HVAC outlets.
5. Keep the distance from camera to the subject of measurement within the range of 1–2 meters.
6. For best accuracy, install the Electromagnetic Radiation Absorber (BB) at the same distance from camera as the subjects
of measurement.
7. The maximum angle of incidence should not exceed +/- 15 ° off the ground level.
8. Distance between pupils on the received photos of face must be not less than 32 pixels.
9. There should be minimum mutual overshadowing of the captured faces.
10. The faces should be evenly illuminated with a diffused light of at least 200 lux. Directional side lighting is not allowed.
11. The sharpness of the captured faces on the received photos must be over 64 grayscale. Deficient or exceeding illumination
is not allowed.
12. There should be no back light and sharp gradients of light and shade.
13. The photos of the captured faces received from video cameras should be clear. Image blurring caused by motion is not
allowed.

Note
The required distance between the camera and the face can be set using a lens with required focal length.

7.4.11.3 Temperature screening protocol

For maximum measurement accuracy, please make sure that:
1. Subjects of measurement must have their body temperature normalized. To do this, please avoid their exposure to direct
sunlight, incoming air flow from street or HVAC, and exclude any other factors that may cause momentary changes in
body temperature.
2. The measurement area may contain only one individual.
3. No headgear, medical mask or glasses may be worn in the area.
4. The subject should dwell in the control area no less than 3 seconds, standing/sitting still, facing the camera.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  248

     User Guide

7.4.11.4 Pre-configuration of the Mobotix M16 TR camera

Attention!
Install MX-V5.2.6.7 (2020-06-16) or later firmware.
For detailed configuration via the web interface, refer to manufacturer's instructions.

Before starting Axxon Next, please configure the camera via the web interface:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  249

     User Guide

1. Proceed to admin menu (1), and select Temperatures (2).

2. Measure environmental temperature.

3. Select Setup Menu (1), and then Thermal Sensor Settings (2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  250

     User Guide

4. Select the Temperature Compensation checkbox (1).

5. Enter the environmental temperature value (2, see point 2).

6. Specify the Value Range и Thermal Range parameters as shown on the screenshot.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  251

     User Guide

7. To caption video with temperature readings, select  Display Mode (Right) (1), and then Picture in Picture (2)
checkboxes.

8. Save the settings.

7.4.11.5 Configuring Face Detection and Temperature Control

To configure face detection and temperature control, do the following:
1. Add a Temperature Matrix Data object in the Embedded Detection group.
2. Under the newly added object, create a Face Detection and Temperature Control.
3. Select temperature unit (1).

4. To caption video with thermal data, do the following:

a. Select Yes for the Show Thermal Overlay parameter (2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  252

     User Guide

b. In the Preview window, drag anchor points  to draw an area where thermal data should be displayed.

5. If you use an Electromagnetic Radiation Absorber (BB), do the following:

a. Specify its temperature (3). If temperature readings in this point are different, the bias will be used to re-calculate
readings across all measurement points. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  253

     User Guide

b. In the Preview window, double click to add anchor points  at the position of the electromagnetic radiation
absorber (BB).

6. If you have discovered that your readings differ from actual temperature values, add the offset value into the
Temperature Value Offset field (4).  Bias values may be positive or negative. 

Note
The rest of this detection tool parameters are identical to those of the basic face detection tool (see Configure
Facial Recognition).

7. Click the Apply button.
You have configured detection tool now.

7.4.12 Automatic Number Plate Recognition (LPR/ANPR) tools

7.4.12.1 License plate recognition (VT)

7.4.12.1.1 License plate recognition (VT) features and specifications

License plate recognition (VT) (Automatic  Number Plate Recognition Tool) is designed to implement the following functions:
1. Vehicle license plate recognition (the full list of supported countries is available on vendor's website);
2. Write a recognized number to a database;
3. Check the recognized license plates of vehicles on the lists of license plates.
License plate recognition (VT)  works in one of the following modes
1. Fast - It processes video feeds up to 25 fps with a maximum vehicle speed of 150 km/h.
2. Slow - It processes video feeds up to 6 fps with a maximum vehicle speed of 20 km/h.  

Note
Install the additional Addon VT LPR  to work with License plate recognition (VT).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  254

     User Guide

7.4.12.1.2 Camera requirements for License plate recognition (VT)

ANPR works properly if the following camera installation requirements are met (for a list of supported countries, visit the web-
site of the recognition module's manufacturer):
• a camera should be installed in a horizontal position (refer to manufacturer's documentation).
• character height is at least 15px, stroke width is at least 2px;
• minimum allowable contrast for uniformly contaminated license plates should be at least 10% (contrasting visibility of
characters relative to the background is 25 on a 256-point scale);
• maximum allowable non-uniform contamination is no more than 12% (the ratio of the contaminated area to the total
area of the license plate);
• the geometric proportions of the image shall not deviate by more than 10% from the real geometric proportions of the
license plate.

Note
If you transmit MPEG-4 or H.264 streams over a stable connection, please set GOP length (Group of Pictures), i.e. the
number of P- and B-frames between I-frames, to no more than 4–8 frames.

Attention!
the maximum speed of the vehicle shall not exceed 120 km/h.

For stable ANPR operation, make sure that the image of the license plate is not:
• unequally lit;

• overexposed;

• blurred;

• distorted;

• interlaced;

• dirty.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  255

     User Guide

Attention!
Otherwise, recognition accuracy might be compromised.

Some example number plate images that should be recognized fully and properly:

The camera setup is described in detail in the recognition module manufacturer's documentation.

7.4.12.1.3 Configuring License plate recognition (VT)

ANPR is a detection tool that reads license / number  plates of vehicles in FoV.

Attention!
The license plate recognition requires a CPU that supports the SSE4.1 / SSE4.2 instructions.

Attention!
Axxon Next ANPR / LPR is not compatible with Auto Intellect.
Uninstall the Axxon Next VMS  and Auto Intellect,  then reinstall Axxon Next.

To configure ANPR, do as follows:

1. Select the License plate recognition (VT) object (1).

2. If you require using this detection tool for real-time number plate recognition (see Configuring real-time vehicle license
plate recognition), set the corresponding parameter to Yes (2).
3. If you need to enable recording of metadata, select Yes from the Record Objects tracking list (3).
4. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed. Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server (4).
5. Select detection tool working mode: standard or neural (1). 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  256

     User Guide

6. In the appropriate fields, select one or more countries for ANPR (2).

Important
The more countries you select, the slower the recognition and the greater the likelihood of the recognition error.

7. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (3). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
8. Analyzed framed are scaled down to a specified resolution (4, 1920 pixels on the longer side). This is how it works:
a. If the longer side of the source image exceeds the value specified in the Frame size change field, it is divided by
two.
b. If the resulting resolution falls below the specified value, it is used further.
c. If the resulting resolution still exceeds the specified limit, it is divided by two, etc.

Note
For example, the source image resolution is 2048 * 1536, and the limit is set to 1000.
In this case, the source resolution will be divided two times (down to 512 * 384): after the first division, the
number of pixels on the longer side exceeds the limit (1024 > 1000).

9. Select the current license type (5).

License Description

Search in archive Basic ANPR Search License. Attention! This type of license provides a 30-sec delay between
the number recognition and the corresponding event.  (see Vehicle number plate
recognition and search).

25 FPS or 6 FPS The 25 FPS license has a priority. The 6 FPS license is used only if you have no 25 FPS license.
You cannot use the number plate recognition function if you have no FPS licenses purchased.

25 FPS The "Fast" license allows you to process video feeds up to 25 fps with a maximum vehicle
speed of 150 km/h. You have to obtain an appropriate license to make ANPR work.

6 FPS The "Slow" license allows you to process video feeds up to 6 fps with a maximum vehicle
speed of 20 km/h. You have to obtain an appropriate license to make ANPR work.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  257

     User Guide

Important
All license types except the standard one (Search in archive) require the hardware key or the software key
activation (see Activating a software license key for the ANPR).
You can use a 60-day trial key (see Activating the trial version of the ANPR via a software key).

Important
On a virtual machine, you may use only a hardware key. To use a hardware key, select the 25 FPS or 6 FPS license
type.

10. Set the maximum and minimum width of the vehicle number plate as a percentage of the FoV width (6, 7).

Important
The Minimum LP width parameter affects the CPU load as follows: the higher the parameter is, the higher the
load.

11. Choose a processor to run detection on (8). In standard mode, detection runs on the CPU only.
12. Set the number of frames required for LPR / ANPR (9). This is though a necessary condition, but not sufficient for the first
output. This condition delays LPR output.  This parameter allows to increase the reliability of the results, as well as to hide
false positives.
13. If necessary, configure  advanced detection settings (see Fine-tuning the VT number plate detection tool).
14. You can configure an ANPR zone in FoV. The zone is resized by moving the anchor points.

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  258

     User Guide

Note

Detection zone is displayed by default. You can click the   button to hide the zone. To undo, click this button
again.

15. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of ANPR  is now complete.

7.4.12.1.4 Fine-tuning the VT number plate detection tool

Attention!
To fine tune this detection tool, you will require assistance from AxxonSoft tech support.

To fine-tune the detection tool, do as follows:

1. If necessary, enable advanced image analysis (1).
Yes – improves the quality of recognition under adverse conditions (for example, if the characteristics / settings of the
camera do not fully meet the requirements, or in bad weather).  The processing time of the frame increases by 20-30%,
depending on its size.  Under normal conditions, this setting does not affect the quality of recognition

2. To recognize the numbers at sharp angles with respect to the camera, select Yes in the Algorithm of recognition of
distorted LP image field (2).
3. Set the image contrast threshold (3). The default value is 40 . On a high-quality image, increase this value to 50-60. If the
image has poor contrast, lower this value. 
4. If you expect different sizes of number plates within FOV, activate the LP advanced search algorithm (4). This parameter
accounts for max and min width of number plates, and, in some cases, may help increasing recognition quality and
optimizing CPU load.
5. To set up a number plate recognition event:
a. Specify the minimum percentage of similarity between the recognition result and the corresponding number plate
template, for positive LPR result (7). Use this parameter to filter the results by reliability.
b. By default, a number plate recognition event is registered after a track containing a number plate disappears from
FOV. You can set the moment of registration to a Timeout in seconds (8), or to reaching a similarity percentage
specified in the LP display quality field (5). If both parameters are set to non-zero, the recognition event will be
registered upon matching the first condition.

Note
The LP display quality parameter value must be no lower than the Minimum similarity value.

6. Specify the maximum number of recognition threads (6). If the value is 0, the recognition process will occur in the same
thread that starts it.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  259

     User Guide

Important
The cumulative value of this parameter across all NPR detection tools must not exceed:
- the licensed number of recognition threads (check your license with the lsvpwcutility – please refer to
manufacturer's documentation);
- the number of CPU cores;
- 100.

7. In the Tracker Timeout field, set a time interval in seconds after which the tracking of a vehicle is reset (10).

Note
Use this setting to eliminate double-triggering in such cases as, for example, another recognition of the same
number after it has been obstructed for some time, and then reappears in scene.
If you set Tracker Timeout to a value greater than a probable time of obstruction, the detection tool will not
double-trigger.

8. If necessary, set additional parameters. For more details, refer to the table.

Parameter Description

VodiCTL_VPW_DYNAMIC_ENABLE Enable/disable the number recognition dynamics (by default, the dynamics is enabled).
If the value is Yes, then tracking is enabled, and the number is recognized by the set of
frames. If the value is No, then tracking is disabled, and the number is recognized by each
frame separately without taking to account the previous ones, and the quality can vary from 0
to 100%.

VodiCTL_VPW_DYNAMIC_OUTPUT_PERIOD Time period (in microseconds) over which the recognition result is to be displayed to the user.
This parameter can be used only if the VodiCTL_VPW_DYNAMIC_WITH_DUPLICATE parameter
is set.

VodiCTL_VPW_DYNAMIC_OUTPUT_TIMEOUT The minimum time required to monitor the license plate (in microseconds) before displaying
the recognition result to the user. This parameter can only be used when the “Dynamic” mode
is on. In this mode, the trajectory of the vehicle is monitored, and the user does not
immediately receive the recognition result of the license plate, but after the time specified for
this setting. In this case, the first recognition result will be replaced by the result of higher
quality and subsequently displayed to the user. If parameter 0 is set for this value, the user
gets the first result of recognizing the detected license plate.  After the time specified in this
parameter expires, the monitoring of the trajectory of the license plate continues until it
disappears from the frame.

VodiCTL_VPW_DYNAMIC_WITH_DUPLICATE Enable/disable the periodic output of license plate recognition results.

VodiCTL_VPW_IMAGE_BLUR The parameter for internal use. The recommended value to set is 13.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  260

     User Guide

VodiCTL_VPW_LOG_SETTINGS Enable/disable logging of all recognition parameters.

VodiCTL_VPW_PLATE_FILTER_RODROPFACTOR The license plate filter coefficient by the so-called image density - ratio of white pixels to total
pixels (second strategy). The type is unsigned. This coefficient is used for image thresholding
and has the optimal values, which are determined by AutoSDK developers using their own
test samples. The parameter is considered as a service one, and its value should be set
according to the recommendations of technical support specialists.

VodiCTL_VPW_PLATE_FILTER_ROFACTOR The license plate filter coefficient by the so-called image density - ratio of white pixels to total
pixels (first strategy). The type is unsigned. This coefficient is used for image thresholding and
has the optimal values, which are determined by AutoSDK developers using their own test
samples. The parameter is considered as a service one, and its value should be set according
to the recommendations of technical support specialists.

VodiCTL_VPW_PLATE_FILTER_SYMCOUNT Enable/disable the simple license plates filter algorithm by the minimum number of
recognized symbols on them. If the algorithm is enabled (the value of the parameter is greater
than 0), the base search for symbols on the prospective license plate (geometry, proportions)
is performed. If less symbols are recognized on the prospective license plate than specified in
this parameter, this prospective license plate is not considered a license plate. That is, the
value of this parameter is the minimum characters that must be present on the prospective
license plate when the basic algorithm is in use.

VodiCTL_VPW_PLATE_STAR_MAX Maximum unrecognized symbols on the license plate, at which the result will still be
considered the result of the recognition of the license plate.

9. Click the Apply button.

7.4.12.1.5 Activating a software license key for the ANPR

Attention!
In a Failover system, the ANRP license is not automatically transferred to a new node (see Configuring Failover VMS).
To enable the detection tool, you need to manually activate the license on the PC where the new node is launched.

On order to receive the software license key for the ANPR, proceed as follows:
1. Download the utilities by the links below:
1. haspdinst_EOAWT.exe
2. RUS_EOAWT.exe
• In the Windows command line, execute the following two commands one after another to install the protection key driver:

haspdinst_EOAWT.exe -fr -purge

haspdinst_EOAWT.exe -i -fi -fss

Note
Make sure that the current directory in the command line is similar to the one where the haspdinst_EOAWT.exe
file is located.

• Wait for the installation completion.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  261

     User Guide

• Click OK in the dialog box to confirm installation is completed.

• Check installation correctness by opening the http://127.0.0.1:1947/_int_/ACC_help_index.html page in the web browser.

• Run the hasp_RUS.exe file to start the Remote Update System. The RUS dialog box opens.

Note.
The RUS abbreviation stands for Remote Update System.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  262

     User Guide

• Set the Collect information from this computer to enable: switch into the Installation of new protection key position
in case if license for a "clean computer" is needed, i.e. if there is no demo license on it, or to the Update of existing
protection key position, if demo license is already in use (1).
• Click Collect information.
• Save the file with .c2v extension to any folder.
• Close the hasp_RUS.exe tool.
• Hand the .c2v file to your AxxonSoft manager.
• Receive the license file with .v2c extension from your AxxonSoft manager.
• Run the hasp_RUS.exe tool and go to the Apply License File tab (1).

• Specify location of the license file in the Update File field using the ... button (2).
• Click Apply Update (3).
Receiving the software license key for the ANPR is now completed.

7.4.12.1.6 Activating the trial version of the ANPR via a software key
You can use the ANPR in trial mode.
In this mode, the number of channels is limited to 4 in both 25 FPS and 6 FPS versions for all available countries. Activate the
software key to start the 60-day trial.

Attention!
You cannot operate the ANPR tool in trial mode on a virtual machine.

To activate the ANPR in trial mode, do the following:

1. Download the distribution package: 25 FPS or 6 FPS.
2. Start the command line (Run as administrator).
3. Execute the following command SDK_4hi_60d_WORLD.exe -i -fi -fss for a 25 FPS trial license,
or SDK_4lo_60d_WORLD.exe -i -fi -fss  for a 6 FPS trial license.
The demo license is now activated.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  263

     User Guide

7.4.12.2 License plate recognition (IV)

7.4.12.2.1 License plate recognition (IV) features and specifications

License plate recognition (IV) is designed to implement the following functions:
1. Vehicle license plate recognition (the full list of supported countries is available in vendor's specifications, motorcycle
license plate recognition only for Brazil);
2. Write a recognized number to a database;
3. Check the recognized license plates of vehicles on the lists of license plates.

Note
Install the additional Addon IV LPR  to work with License plate recognition (IV).

Attention!
Only a 64-bit version is available.

7.4.12.2.2 Camera requirements for License plate recognition (IV)

•  Camera specifications
• The minimum video resolution is 640*480, the recommended resolution is 720p or 1080p.
• The minimum frame rate is 15 fps, the recommended frame rate is 25-30 fps.
• Auto Focus and Zoom would be useful for making small adjustments after setting up ANPR.
• Automatic white balance / automatic gain.
• IR for night mode with good contrast of license plate images.
• HDR / WDR
• Video requirements
• The video image should be clear, contrasting, without distortion, not blurred.
• The size of the license plate should be 15 - 70% of the total size of the image.
• The license plate must contain no more than two rows of characters.
• Camera installation requirements
• The video camera should be mounted at 0.6 - 2.4 meters above the ground.
• The angle formed by the lower line of the license plate and the horizon line should be from 0 to 20 degrees.

Important!
 It is also recommended to study the manufacturer's specification.

7.4.12.2.2.1 Examples of correct and incorrect video images

Video images that meet the video camera mounting and setup requirements for the Licence plate recognition (IV).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  264

     User Guide

Video images that do not meet the video camera mounting and setup requirements for the Licence plate recognition (IV).

7.4.12.2.3 Configuring License plate recognition (IV)

To configure License plate recognition (IV), do as follows:
1. Download Addon IV LPR from the website and install it.
2. Submit the MAC address of the Server intended for detection tool operation to Axxon's tech support.

Attention!
The detection tool will not operate on a Server having a different MAC address.

3. Copy an IntelliVision license into C:\Program Files\Common Files\AxxonSoft\DetectorPack\IntelliVisionLPRlicense.txt.

4. Restart the Server (see Shutting down a Server, Starting a Server).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  265

     User Guide

5. Select the License plate recognition (IV) object (1).

6. If you require using this detection tool for real-time number plate recognition (see Configuring online Vehicle License
Plate recognition), set the corresponding parameter to Yes (2).
7. If you need to enable recording of metadata, select Yes from the Record Objects tracking list (3).
8. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed. Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server (4).
9. Select the country from the list (1).

Attention!
Several profiles are provided for India, USA, Russia, Taiwan, Australia and African countries, differing by
recognition parameters and hardware requirements.
To recognize US license plates with vertical orientation of characters, a profile with higher accuracy of
recognition is recommended.

Note
The list of supported countries is given in the manufacturer's specifications.

10. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
11. Specify the minimum number of milliseconds between frames during recognition (3).
12. Analyzed framed are scaled down to a specified resolution (4, 1920 pixels on the longer side). This is how it works:
a. If the longer side of the source image exceeds the value specified in the Frame size change field, it is divided by
two.
b. If the resulting resolution falls below the specified value, it is used further.
c. If the resulting resolution still exceeds the specified limit, it is divided by two, etc.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  266

     User Guide

Note
For example, the source image resolution is 2048 * 1536, and the limit is set to 1000.
In this case, the source resolution will be divided two times (down to 512 * 384): after the first division, the
number of pixels on the longer side exceeds the limit (1024 > 1000).

13. Specify the maximum number of processor cores available for the detector. '0' means all cores (5).
14. Set the maximum and minimum width of the vehicle number plate as a percentage of the FoV width (6, 7).
15. Set minimum quality of ANPR (8). The higher the minimum recognition quality, the less false detections will occur.
16. By default, CPU resources are solely used for recognition. If you want to apply GPU computing resources to increase the
recognition performance, select GPU in the Processor Type field (9).
17. Specify the maximum and minimum number of digits in the number (1, 2).

18. Select recognition accuracy (3): 

a. Maximum: offers maximum recognition accuracy at the expense of higher CPU / GPU load.
b. High: offers acceptable recognition accuracy for less CPU / GPU effort.
c. Fast: offers fastest recognition speed at the expense of accuracy.
19. Specify the time interval between the initial recognition and event registration in the Timeout field (4). Zero value sets
the event registration to the moment when the track disappears from FOV.
20. In the Tracker timeout field, enter a time period in seconds. This is the time before detection starts again after a number
plate is recognized (5).
21. You can configure an ANPR zone in FoV. The zone is resized by moving the anchor points  . 

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  267

     User Guide

Note

Detection zone is displayed by default. You can click the   button to hide the zone. To undo, click this button
again.

22. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of  License plate recognition (IV) is now complete.

7.4.12.3 Licence plate recognition (RR)

7.4.12.3.1 License plate recognition (RR) features and specifications

The License plate recognition (RR) is designed to implement the following features:
1. license/number plate recognition;

Note
List of supported countries: Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Estonia, Georgia, Kyrgyzstan, Kazakhstan, Lithuania,
Latvia, Moldova, Russia, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, Vietnam, Peru, Spain, Mexico, Poland, Myanmar.

2. write a recognized number to a database;

3. check the recognized license plates of vehicles on the lists of license plates.
Depending on the features required, the Axxon Next VMS offers three types of License plate recognition (RR) tools:

1. License plate recognition (RR) - recognizes number plates in real time. Recognition is performed in Fast mode (video
stream processing at a speed of up to 30 fps).
2. License plate recognition - Parking (RR) - recognizes number plates in real time. Recognition is performed in Slow mode
(video stream processing at a speed of up to 8 fps).

Note
The sampling rate for detection tool is 150 milliseconds, all other frames are skipped.

3. License plate recognition - Search in archive (RR) -  recognizes number plates in recorded video. Recognition is
performed in Fast mode (video stream processing at a speed of up to 30 fps).

Note
This detection tool generates events with a 30 sec delay after number recognition.

Note
License plate recognition (RR) requires Addon RR LPR to be installed (see Installing DetectorPack add-ons).

7.4.12.3.2 Camera requirements for License plate recognition (RR)

ANPR works properly if the following camera specs, installation, and configuration requirements are met:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  268

     User Guide

• Character height at least 10p, preferably 20p or more;

• Minimum resolution 1280*720, recommended 1920*1080;
• Minimum frame rate for Slow mode 5 fps mode, for Fast mode 20 fps;
• Maximum horizontal angle: 30°;
• maximum vertical angle: 45°;
• Expected image contrast: the contrast difference between characters of the number plate and the background should be
at least 20 units with an image brightness scale of 0 to 255.       

7.4.12.3.3 Configuring License plate recognition (RR)

To configure License plate recognition (RR), do as follows:
1. Download Addon RR LPR from the website and install it.

Note
To make the detection tool work under Windows Server 2012 R2, make sure to install the Media Foundation
component.

2. Create the detection object you need and select it (1). 

3. If you require using this detection tool for real-time number plate recognition (see Configuring real-time vehicle license
plate recognition), set the corresponding parameter to Yes (2).
4. If you need to enable recording of metadata, select Yes from the Record Objects tracking list (3).
5. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed. Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server (4).
6. Select your target country from the list (5).
7. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (6). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
8. Set minimum quality of ANPR (7). The higher the minimum recognition quality, the less false detections will occur.
9. Select the processor for the detection tool: the CPU or one of NVidia GPUs (8).

Attention!
It may take up to one minute to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU.

10. Specify the time interval between the initial recognition and event registration in the Force report timeout field
(10). Zero value sets the event registration to the moment when the track disappears from FOV.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  269

     User Guide

Note
Skip this step with License plate recognition - Search in archive (RR).

11. Analyzed framed are scaled down to a specified resolution (10, 1920 pixels on the longer side). This is how it works:
a. If the longer side of the source image exceeds the value specified in the Frame size change field, it is divided by
two.
b. If the resulting resolution falls below the specified value, it is used further.
c. If the resulting resolution still exceeds the specified limit, it is divided by two, etc.

Note
For example, the source image resolution is 2048 * 1536, and the limit is set to 1000.
In this case, the source resolution will be divided two times (down to 512 * 384): after the first division, the
number of pixels on the longer side exceeds the limit (1024 > 1000).

12. Specify the maximum number of recognition threads (11). If the value is 0,the recognition process will occur in the same
thread that starts it.

Attention!
The cumulative value of this parameters across all LPR detection tools must not exceed the number of CPU cores
and is limited to 100.

13. You can configure an ANPR zone in FoV. The zone is resized by moving the anchor points  . 

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Note

Detection zone is displayed by default. You can click the   button to hide the zone. To undo, click this button
again.

14. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  270

     User Guide

Configuration of  License plate recognition (RR) is now complete.

7.4.12.4 Configuring real-time vehicle license plate recognition

You can program automatic responses to an identification of a recognized LP against an external list (for example, of wanted
vehicles).
To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Activate the Real-time Recognition parameter for the required detection tools (see Configuring License plate recognition
(VT)).
2. Create one or more Lists of LPs (see Lists of vehicle numbers). 
3. Add reference images of LPs of interest to the lists.
4. Configure automatic responses to positive identification against the list (see Setting the automatic response to an
identification of a recognized LP against the list).

7.4.12.4.1 Setting the automatic response to an identification of a recognized LP against the list
To set an automatic response to an FR event, do as follows:
1. Create a macro (see Create Macros).
2. As a starting condition, select the License plate recognition event and the desired list (1, see Configuring filters for event-
driven macros).

3. By default, the macro is triggered by recognition of any number from the list. If required, you can specify a particular
number whose recognition will trigger the macro (2).

Note
To select another number, clear the 2 field and re-open the list.

4. Program an action or a sequence of actions to be performed in response to an identification of a recognized LP against

the designated list (see Settings specific to actions).
5. If the response involves initiating an alarm, you can configure the Dialog Board to filter Alarm Initiated by Macro
Command events (see Configure the Dialog Board).

7.4.13 Neural Counter

7.4.13.1 Camera requirements for neural counter operation

To operate the neural counter, a camera must match the following requirements:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  271

     User Guide

1. Minimum resolution is at least 640х360 pixels.

2. Frame rate is no less than 2 FPS (no less than 4 FPS is recommended).
3. Objects must be visually separated from the background as well as from each other.
4. Camera is mounted in no less than 3 meters above the ground, or on the ceiling.
5. An object must occupy no less than 5% of the FoV width / height.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee normal operation of the neural counter with a fisheye camera.

7.4.13.2 Functions of the neural counter

The Neuralcounter relies on a neural network to work out the number of objects in the zone. 
A detection event that can be used to launch a macro is generated when the number of objects in FoV matches the pre-defined
conditions (see Configuring filters for event-driven macros). 

Note
Unlike the Multiple objects detection tool (see Settings Specific to Multiple objects), Neuralcounter generates events of
one type, namely - triggering.
Neuralcounter is less resource-intensive than Multiple objects detection tool based on Neural Tracker.

Note
For the neural counter to work,  install Addon Neuro Pack (see Installing DetectorPack add-ons).

7.4.13.3 Configuring a Neuralcounter

To configure Neuralcounter, do the following:
1. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream to apply the detection tool to (1). 

2. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
3. If you need to outline objects in the preview window, select Yes in the Detected Objects parameter (3).
4. Set the recognition threshold for objects in percent (4). If the recognition probability falls below the specified value, the
data will be ignored. The higher the value, the higher the accuracy — for the cost of sensitivity.
5. Set the interval between the analyzed frames in seconds (5). The value should be within the range of 0,05 – 30.
6. Set the minimum number of frames with excessive numbers of objects for Neuralcounter to trigger (9). The value should
be within the range of 2 – 20.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  272

     User Guide

Note
The default values (3 frames and 1 second) indicate that Neuralcounter will analyze one frame every second. If
Neuralcounter detects more objects than the specified threshold value on 3 frames, then it triggers.

7. Select the processor for the neural network - CPU, one of GPUs, or Intel NCS (6, see Hardware requirements for neural
analytics operation). 

Attention!
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

Attention!
If you specify other processing resource than the CPU, this device will carry the most of computing load.
However, the detection tool will consume CPU as well.

8. Select the neural network file (7).

Note
For correct neural network operation under Linux, place the corresponding file in the /opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/
directory.

9. Set the triggering condition for the neural counter:

a. In the Number of alarm objects field, set the threshold value for the number of objects in FoV (8). 
b. In the Trigger upon count field, select the condition polarity: whether triggering should occur on exceeding the
threshold, or dropping below it (10). 
10. In the preview window, you can set the detection zones with the help of anchor points much like privacy masks in Scene
Analytics (see Setting General Zones for Scene Analytics). By default, the entire FoV is a detection zone.

11. Click Apply.

After the neural tracker is created, the layout can display the sensor icon with the number of objects within the controlled area.
To configure this option, please follow the steps below:
1. Proceed to the Layout Editing mode (see Switching to layout editing mode).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  273

     User Guide

2. Place the sensor anywhere in FoV.

3. Customize the font. To do this, press the button .

4. Save the layout (see Exiting layout editing mode).

7.4.14 Fire and Smoke Detection Tools

7.4.14.1 Functions of Fire and Smoke detection

Important!
Unlike standard smoke / fire detection systems, smoke and fire software detection tools face many issues with the
scene and the background mage. We cannot  warrant  100% smoke / fire detection. The smoke and fire detection tools
are meant to increase the likelihood of detecting smoke / fire. However, there may be both false alarms and failures to
detect actual fire / smoke events in the camera's FoV.
We keep improving  smoke and fire detection and use machine learning based on a Neural network.
If the fire / smoke detection tools does not respond to actual fire / smoke events, please record a video clip and send it
to AxxonSoft. We will update Axxon Next to refine detection. Help us train the neural network with video feeds from you
scene to deliver best results for your fire security.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  274

     User Guide

Note
These detection tools require Addon Neuro Pack  to be installed (see Installing DetectorPack add-ons).

7.4.14.2 Camera requirements for Fire and Smoke Detection

Please follow these recommendations for proper fire and smoke detection:
1. Use color cameras. With black and white cameras, the detection quality can be noticeably worse.
2. The video resolution must be at least 640x360.
3. FPS directly affects detection efficiency; in most cases, the default value (1 detection per 10 seconds) is sufficient to detect
smoke or fire which develops in more than one minute.
4. The minimal recognized fire/smoke area depends on the particular neural network used. For a standard neural
network (see Configuring Smoke and Fire Detection Tools), the fire/smoke area must occupy at least 10% of the frame.

Note
In some cases, when fire is expected to be clearly visible, the fire area may be sufficient at 1-3% of the FoV width /
height.

5. Fire/smoke should be visually separated from the background.

Attention!
If you set a rectangular recognition area for the detection tool, the limitations apply to this area rather than to the entire
frame (see Configuring Smoke and Fire Detection Tools).

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

7.4.14.3 Configuring Smoke and Fire Detection Tools

Camera requirements for Fire and Smoke Detection

To configure smoke (fire) detection tool:

1. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (1). Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server.

2. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  275

     User Guide

3. Set the interval between the processes frames in seconds (3). The value should be in the [1;30] range.

Note
The default values (5 frames and 10 seconds) indicate that the tool will analyze one frame every 10 seconds. 
When smoke (fire) is detected in 5 frames, the tool will trigger.

4. Select the processor for the neural network — CPU, one of GPUs or a IntelNCS (4). 

Attention!
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

Attention!
If you specify other processing resource than the CPU, this device will carry the most of computing load.
However, the detection tool will consume CPU as well.

5. Select a neural network file (5).  The following standard neural networks for different processor types are located in C:
\Program Files\Common Files\AxxonSoft\DetectorPack\NeuroSDK:
smoke_movidius.ann Smoke detector / IntelNCS

smoke_openvino.ann Smoke detector / CPU

smoke_original.ann Smoke detector / GPU

fire_movidius.ann Fire detector / IntelNCS

fire_openvino.ann Fire detector / CPU

fire_original.ann Fire detector / GPU

Enter full path to a custom neural network file into this field. This is not required if you use standard neural networks
which are selected automatically.

Note
For correct neural network operation under Linux, place the corresponding file in the /opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/
directory. 

6. Set the minimum number of frames with smoke (fire) for triggering the tool (6). The value should be in the [5;20] range.
7. You can experiment with the sensitivity of the tool (7).  The value must be in the range [1; 99]. The preview window
displays the sensitivity scale of the detection tool. It is color-coded as follows:
a. Green - smoke (fire) not detected.  
b. Yellow - smoke (fire) detected, but not enough to trigger the tool.
c. Red - smoke (fire) detected.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  276

     User Guide

If you increase the sensitivity value, you have more alerts (red scale).

8. By default, the detection is performed over full image area. In the preview window, you can set several detection zones by
their anchor points as follows:
a. Right-click anywhere in the Preview window.

b. Select Detection area (rectangle) for a rectangular zone. If you specify a rectangular area, the detection tool will
work only within its limits; the rest of the FOV will be ignored.
c. Select Analytics Area (polygon) to set one or several polygonal zones. If you specify one or several polygonal
areas, the detection tool will process the entire FOV while the remaining part of the FOV will be blacked out.

Note
You can configure detection zones similarly to privacy masks in scene analytics (see Setting General
Zones for Scene Analytics).

Important!
You can use trial and error method to decide which type of detection area (rectangular or polygonal) is more effective in
your case. Some neural networks give better detection with rectangles while others are better with polygons.

7.4.15 Equipment detection tool (PPE)

7.4.15.1 Functions of the Equipment detection tool (PPE)

The Equipment detection tool (PPE) locates individuals wearing no personal protective equipment within the area where it's
required, or individuals wearing improperly applied PPE.

Attention!
We recommend you to apply detection in gateway mode: an employee entering a zone where equipment or PPE is
required should wait until the detection is complete (normally 5–10 seconds).

For detection tool's operation, you need at least two separate neural networks:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  277

     User Guide

• a segmenting network structures up an image of a human body (locates head, shoulders, arms, hands, thighs, legs and
feet);
• a classifying network detects equipment (PPE) on a specified body part, and checks if it's properly applied. 

Note
The equipment detection tool (PPE) requires Addon Neuro Pack to be installed.

7.4.15.2 Camera requirements for the equipment detection tool (PPE)

For equipment detection tool (PPE) operation, a camera must match the following requirements:
1. To apply detection in gateway mode (see Functions of the Equipment detection tool (PPE)), you should have no less than
3 FPS; in continuous mode, the minimal value increases up to 8 FPS.
2. Pixel density must be at least 170 pixels per meter. The equipment element of interest is clearly visible.
3. Approximate minimum pixel dimensions of equipment elements:
a. Upper body: 75 x 100
b. Legs: 75 x 105
c. Head: 60 x 65
d. Hands: 65 x 60
e. Feet: 45 x 40
f. Combined set 165 x 295
4. Scene lighting must not alter color of equipment elements.
5. Average illumination in scenes with equipment detection must not drop below 200 lux.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee normal operation of PPE detection with a fisheye camera.

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

7.4.15.3 Configuring equipment detection tool (PPE)

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

To set up the equipment detection tool (PPE), do the following:

1. If the camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (1). 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  278

     User Guide

2. Select one or several files for the classifying neural network (2). There must be a separate classifying neural network to
recognize equipment on each body segment.
3. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (3). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
4. Set the minimum height and width of a person (4, 5) in the frame as a percentage of the frame height/width (0,15 = 15%).
Objects which are smaller than the specified size will not be detected.
5. Select the processor for the neural network - CPU, one of GPUs, or Intel processors (6, see Hardware requirements for
neural analytics operation).

Attention!
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

Attention!
If you specify other processing resource than the CPU, this device will carry the most of computing load.
However, the detection tool will consume CPU as well.

6. Select the segmenting neural network file (7).

Attention!
To access the neural network, contact technical support https://support.axxonsoft.com/.

7. Select the Mask checkbox to display body segments in the preview window (8).

8. Set the interval between the analyzed frames - Number of frames for analysis -  in milliseconds (9). The value should be
within the range of 30 – 10,000.
9. Set the minimum number of frames containing people with no PPE for triggering the tool - Number of measurements in
a row to trigger detection (10). The value should be within the range of 2 – 20.

Attention!
To apply detection in gateway mode (see Functions of the Equipment detection tool (PPE)), we recommend you
to use the detection tool set to default delay (1000 ms) and 3 frames for output.
To apply detection in continuous mode, set the delay to no more than 250 ms, and the number of frames to no
less than 6.

10. By default, each equipment element's triggering occurs once during a continuous tracking of a human object.  You can set
triggering to multiple by setting the One Event per Equipment Element parameter to No (10).

Note
Example. An individual not wearing a helmet appears in FoV, puts on a helmet, then puts it off. If the One Event
per Equipment Element parameter is activated, you will have one alarm event, otherwise two.

11. In the preview window, you can set the detection zones with the help of anchor points much like privacy masks in Scene
Analytics (see Setting General Zones for Scene Analytics). By default, the entire FoV is a detection zone.
12. Click Apply.
Equipment detection tool (PPE) is now configured. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  279

     User Guide

The equipment detection tool (PPE) triggers an alarm when a person not wearing required equipment (PPE) on specified body
parts, or wearing inappropriate equipment, appears in FoV.

7.4.16 Person-based privacy masking

7.4.16.1 Person-based privacy mask functions

The privacy mask hides selected parts of a human body from viewing on video.
A segmenting network structures up an image of a human body: locates head, shoulders, arms, hands, thighs, legs and feet.

Note
Person-based privacy masking requires the Add-on Neuro Pack to be installed

7.4.16.2 Camera requirements for privacy masking

For person-based privacy masking operation, a camera must match the following requirements:
1. Frame rate is no less than 12 FPS.
2. Pixel density must be at least 170 pixels per meter. 
3. Average illumination in scenes with privacy masking must not drop below 200 lux.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee normal operation with a fisheye camera.

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

7.4.16.3 Person-based privacy mask configuration

To configure privacy masking, do the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  280

     User Guide

1. If the camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (1). 

2. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
3. Select the processor for the neural network - CPU, one of GPUs, or Intel processors (3, see Hardware requirements for
neural analytics operation).

Attention!
If you specify other processing resource than the CPU, this device will carry the most of computing load.
However, the detection tool will consume CPU as well.

4. Select the segmenting neural network file (4).

Attention!
To access the neural network, contact technical support https://support.axxonsoft.com/.

5. Set the interval between the analyzed frames - Number of frames for analysis -  in milliseconds (5). The value should be
within the range of 30 – 10,000.
6. Select Yes for all body parts that should be masked within FoV.
7. Click Apply.
Privacy mask configuration is now complete. Selected body parts of all individuals within FoV will be hidden from view.

7.4.17 Pose detection tools

7.4.17.1 Functions of Pose Detection

Pose detection is powered by neural networks. The operational requirements for Pose detection tools are the same as applied to
neural trackers and neural filters.
Pose detection tool types are listed in the following table.

Detection Tool Detection tool description

Man down detection Triggers alarm upon detection of a prostrate human within the scene.

Sitting person detection Triggers alarm upon detection of a sitting human.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  281

     User Guide

Hands up detection Triggers alarm upon detection of a human raising one or two hands. A hand is treated as
raised if the arm is parallel to the backbone.

Active shooter detection Triggers alarm upon detection of a human with an arm parallel to the ground.

People masking People Masking is a non-triggering detection tool that blocks individuals' bodies with solid
color.

People counter This detection tool counts individuals within a specified area. Triggering occurs on
exceeding a specified limit.

Handrail holding detection Triggers an alarm if an individual in a specified part of the scene does not hold any of
specified handrails.

Close-standing people detection Triggers an alarm if the distance between two separate individuals in scene falls below a
specified minimum value.

Note
Pose detection tools require Addon Neuro Pack to be installed (see Installing DetectorPack add-ons).

7.4.17.2 Camera requirements for pose detection

For pose detection, a camera must match the following requirements:
1. Minimum resolution is at least 640х360 pixels.
2. Frame rate must be no less than 6 FPS. 
3. Objects must be visually separated from the background as well as from each other.
4. Camera is mounted in no less than 3 meters above the ground.
5. An object must occupy no less than 5% of the FoV width / height.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee normal operation of pose detection with a fisheye camera.

Hardware requirements for neural analytics operation

7.4.17.3 Configure Pose Detection

7.4.17.3.1 Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools

To configure common parameters for pose detection tools, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  282

     User Guide

1. Select the Pose Detection object.

2. By default, video stream's metadata are recorded in the database. You can disable it by selecting No in the Record object
tracking list (1). Video decompression and analysis are used to obtain metadata, which causes high Server load and limits
the number of video cameras that can be used on it.
3. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (2). Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server.
4. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (3). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
5. Set the interval between the analyzed frames in milliseconds (4). The value should be within the range of 30 – 10,000.

Attention!
With static individuals in scene, set the interval to no more than 500 ms. With moving individuals in scene, less
than 250 ms is recommended. 
The less the interval, the higher accuracy of pose detection for the cost of CPU load. For 1000 ms interval,
accuracy will be no less than 70%.
We recommend that you use trial and error method to set the appropriate value. 

6. Select the processor for the neural network - CPU, one of GPUs, or Intel NCS (5, see Hardware requirements for neural
analytics operation).

Attention!
If you specify other processing resource than the CPU, this device will carry the most of computing load.
However, the detection tool will consume CPU as well.

Attention!
It may take several minutes to launch the algorithm on an NVIDIA GPU after you apply the settings.

Attention!
Man-down or sitting-pose detection accuracy may depend on the particular processor. If another selected
processor gives less accurate results, set the detection parameters empirically, and configure scene perspective.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  283

     User Guide

7. By default, the entire FoV is an area for detection. If necessary, you can specify the areas for detection and skip areas in
the preview window. To set an area for detection, right click anywhere on the image, and select a desired area. 

Note
The areas are set the same way as for the Scene Analytics (see Configuring the Detection Zone).

This is how it works:

a. if you specify areas for detection only, no detection will be performed in the rest of FoV.
b. if you specify skip areas only, the detection will be performed in the rest of FoV.
8. Select a neural network file (6). 
9. Select the desired detection tool.

10. Set the minimum number of frames with a human in a pose of interest for triggering the tool.

Note
The default values (2 frames and 1000 milliseconds) indicate that the tool will analyze one frame every second.
When a pose is detected in 2 consequent frames, the tool will trigger.

Note
This parameter is not used for masking settings.

11. Click Apply.

7.4.17.3.2 Specific settings for People Counter

The People Counter uses pose detection metadata.
A macro triggers when the number of individuals in FoV matches pre-defined conditions (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  284

     User Guide

Note
Unlike the Multiple Objects detection tool (see Settings Specific to Multiple objects), the counter generates events of just
one type, namely triggering.
As opposed to Neuralcounter (see Configuring a Neuralcounter), People Counter counts just people.

To set up People Counter, do the following:

1. Set common parameters (see Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools).

2. Set the visitor counter triggering condition:

a. Set the condition polarity, i.e. triggering when the number of visitors in the specified area is within the set range, or
out of the range (1). 
b. Set the range of number of visitors in FoV (2, 4).
3. Set an interval between two consecutive triggering of the visitor counter when the number of individuals in FoV
continuously matches the condition(s) (3).
4. In the preview window, you can set detection zones with the help of anchor points much like privacy masks in Scene
Analytics. By default, the entire FoV is a detection zone (see Setting General Zones for Scene Analytics).

7.4.17.3.3 Specific settings for the Man Down detection tool

Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools

To detect a lying pose, you have to configure scene perspective first. 

Please follow the steps below:

1. Select a detection tool, and click  in the preview window.

2. Set the size of the same human figure in different areas of FOV. To create a leveling rod, left-click on the video image to
add two anchor points. You should set no less than three leveling rods. The leveling rod height must correspond to a
human figure placed in the same point of the scene. You can resize the rod by stretching its anchor points , or move it
on screen by dragging and dropping.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  285

     User Guide

Attention!
When setting up leveling rods, please make sure that the following conditions are met:
a. all rods have different height;
b. all rods must be based on the same plane (for example, floor);
c. in complex scenes where detection accuracy is crucial, we recommend you to add more than 3 rods;
d. in areas where the picture is apparently distorted, place the rods in parallel to known vertical elements
(doors, bookcases, etc.).

Attention!
In portrait-oriented scenes (such as store / warehouse aisles, etc.), set the rods in triangles.

Note

For your convenience,  you can click the  button to freeze the video. To unfreeze, click the button once
more.

Note

To delete a rod, click the  button.

3. Click Apply button.

7.4.17.3.4 Specific settings for the Sitting person detection tool

Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools

To detect a sitting pose, you have to configure scene perspective first.

Please follow the steps below:

1. Select a detection tool, and click  in the preview window.

2. Set the size of the same human figure in different areas of FOV. To create a leveling rod, left-click on the video image to
add two anchor points. You should set no less than three leveling rods. The leveling rod height must correspond to a

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  286

     User Guide

human figure placed in the same point of the scene. You can resize the rod by stretching its anchor points , or move it
on screen by dragging and dropping.

Attention!
When setting up leveling rods, please make sure that the following conditions are met:
a. all rods have different height;
b. all rods must be based on the same plane (for example, floor);
c. in complex scenes where detection accuracy is crucial, we recommend you to add more than 3 rods;
d. in areas where the picture is apparently distorted, place the rods in parallel to known vertical elements
(doors, bookcases, etc.).

Attention!
In portrait-oriented scenes (such as store / warehouse aisles, etc.), set the rods in triangles.

Note

For your convenience,  you can click the  button to freeze the video. To unfreeze, click the button once
more.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  287

     User Guide

Note

To delete a rod, click the  button.

3. Click Apply button.

7.4.17.3.5 Specific settings for handrail holding detection

To set up a handrail holding detection tool, do the following:
1. Set common parameters (see Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools).
2. Click anywhere in the Preview window.

3. Mark one or several handrails with lines (1).

Attention!
If lens distortion makes the handrail non-linear, use several lines.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  288

     User Guide

4. Set anchor points to specify an area where people must hold handrails (2). 

7.4.17.3.6 Specific settings for people masking

This tool does not generate any alarms; instead, it uses posture detection metadata to mask individuals:
• on live video;
• on recorded video;
• upon exporting from Archive.

Attention!
Masking function works only for users whose role sets the View masked video parameter to No (see Creating and
configuring roles).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  289

     User Guide

7.4.17.3.7 Specific settings for close-standing people detection

Setting up common parameters for pose detection tools

By default, the Сlose-Standing People detection tool triggers when bounding boxes around individuals collide. 
You can set another triggering distance by adjusting perspective:

Attention!
For portrait-oriented scenes (such as corridors, warehouse aisles, etc.) perspective adjustment is a must.

1. Select a detection tool, and click  in the preview window.

2. Set the size of the same object in different areas of the field of view. To create a calibration length, left-click within the
video image in the viewing tile and add  two anchor points. Set at least three calibration lengths. You can resize the length

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  290

     User Guide

by stretching its anchor points . You can move it on screen by dragging and dropping.

Attention!
Leveling rods should:
a. not be located on the same line;
b. have different height.

Note

 For your convenience, you can click the   button and configure the mask on a still frame / snapshot. To
undo, click this button again.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  291

     User Guide

Note

To delete it, click the   button.

3. Enter a triggering distance value (1) in meters into the Distance Sensitivity field. The detection tool will trigger if the
current distance becomes equal or less than this value.

4. Enter the height (in meters) of the leveling rod into the Leveling Rod Height field (2).

7.4.18 Retail Analytics

7.4.18.1 Functions of retail analytics

Name of a Detection Tool object Detection description

Queue detection  Triggers if the specified number of people in the queue is exceeded

Visitors counter This detector monitors the number of visitors within the protected area, and triggers if the specified count is exceeded.

7.4.18.2 Camera requirements for queue detection

The following table contains the requirements for cameras used by the queue detection tool:

Camera • Resolution: 360 х 288 (CIF1) to 720 х 576 (CIF4) pixels; lager images
are scaled down to CIF4.
• Frames per second: 6 or more
• Color: color or greyscale.
• No camera jitter is allowed.

Illumination: • Best recognition results are achieved under moderate illumination. If

the scene is under- or over-illuminated, the recognition accuracy may
drop down.
• Sharp changes in illumination may lead to improper operation of
analytics.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  292

     User Guide

Scene and viewing angle: • Vertically downward position is the best for the purpose.  The closer
to vertical, the more accurate counting.
• Camera FOV dimensions: min. 3 x 3m (6 x 6 humans), optimal 4 x 4m
(8 x 8x humans), max. 8 x 8m (16 x 16 humans).
• The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden
changes.
• Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can
affect the quality of analytics.
• Leafage, TV screens or any periodic object movement in the
background may cause analytics glitches.

Images of objects within the scene: • Image quality: the image must be clear and sharp with no visible
compression artifacts.
• Dimensions of a human in scene: bounding rectangle has to occupy
0.25 to 10 percent of the frame area.

7.4.18.3 Camera requirements for Visitor Counter operation

The following table contains the requirements for cameras to enable the effective operation of the visitor counter:

Camera • Resolution: 720 х 576 (CIF4) or 360 х 288 (CIF1) pixel resolution. Using
pixel resolutions higher than CIF4 do not lead to higher recognition
accuracy.
• Frames per second: 25.
• Color: color camera is obligatory.
• No camera jitter is allowed.

Illumination: • Best recognition results are achieved under moderate illumination. If

the scene is under- or over-illuminated, the recognition accuracy may
drop down.
• Sharp changes in illumination may lead to improper operation of
analytics.

Scene and viewing angle: • Vertically downward position is the best for the purpose.  The closer
to vertical, the more accurate counting.
• Camera FOV dimensions: min. 2 x 2m, optimal 4 x 4m.
• The background must be primarily static and not undergo sudden
changes.
• The counting area must not contain any moving objects except for
humans.
• Reflective surfaces and harsh shadows from moving objects can
affect the quality of analytics.
• Leafage, TV screens or any periodic object movement in the
background may cause analytics glitches.
• If possible, avoid obstruction of the humans by static objects such as
pillars, trees, etc.

Images of objects within the scene: • Image quality: the image must be clear and sharp with no visible
compression artifacts.
• Dimensions of a human in scene: the bounding rectangle must
occupy 10–60 percent of the frame area.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  293

     User Guide

Other requirements: • The visitors must not move in a continuous flow; smaller groups of
humans are counted correctly.

7.4.18.4 Configuring retail analytics detection tools

7.4.18.4.1 Configuring the queue detection tool

Camera requirements for queue detection

To configure the queue detection tool, do the following:

1. If a camera supports multistreaming, select the stream for which detection is needed (1). Selecting a low-quality video
stream allows reducing the load on the Server.

2. Set an event transmission interval in seconds for sending data to the AxxonData report subsystem (see Queue length
report) if the queue length exceeds the set limit (2). Zero value means no transmission of events.
3. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (3). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
4. In the Frame processing period (msec) (4) field, specify the time period in milliseconds between frames analyzed by the
people counter within the area. The value should be within the range of 500 – 3000. The smaller the value of this
parameter, the greater the CPU load.
5. By default, the frame is compressed to 1920 pixels on the longer side. To avoid detection errors on streams with a higher
resolution, it is recommended that compression be reduced (5).
6. Specify the number of people to trigger the alarm when exceeded (6). The value should be within the range of 2 – 20. 
7. Specify the detection tool sensitivity in standard units from 0 to 1 (7). The higher the sensitivity, the smaller the
disturbances analyzed by the queue detection algorithm. Alternatively, the lower the sensitivity, the greater changes in
scene are processed by the queue detection tool.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  294

     User Guide

You should set the sensitivity value empirically based on the Motion Mask data displayed in the Preview window.

8. In the Preview window, you can set the detection zones with the help of anchor points much like privacy masks in Scene
Analytics.

9. Click  and set the approximate size of a human. You can do so by dragging the corners of the rectangular area.

10. Click Apply.

The queue detection tool is now configured. When the detection tool is triggered, the following events are generated:

Camera "6. Camera". Detection "Queue detection" triggered, quaue (min.: 6, max.: 6)

where min. and max. is estimated queue length. 

7.4.18.4.2 Configuring the visitors counter

Camera requirements for Visitor Counter operation

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  295

     User Guide

Attention!
The visitor counter is better fit for producing average figures than exact values.

Attention!
We cannot guarantee correct operation of the visitors counter with fish-eye video cameras.

To configure the visitors counter:

1. If the camera supports multistreaming, select the stream to be used for detection. Select a low-quality video stream to
reduce Server load (1).

2. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
3. By default, the frame is compressed to 1920 pixels on the longer side. To avoid detection errors on streams with a higher
resolution, it is recommended that compression be reduced (3).
4. By default, the detection tool outputs the Camera. Visitor access in the direction of "Entrance" and Camera. Visitor access
in the direction of "Exit" events. If total footfall and visitor number control / exceeding notification is required, do the
following:
a. Select Yes for the People indoor counter parameter (5).
b. Enter the current number of visitors within the area (4).
c. Set the threshold value for the visitor counter; exceeding this limit will generate the corresponding event (6).
5. In the Preview window, set the detection area. It is divided to two sectors, #1 and #2. When an object moves from #2 to #1,
the system treats it as entry; alternatively, #1 to #2 is treated as exit.
To configure the sectors, you can drag them by corners  or sides. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  296

     User Guide

To swap sectors, just click inside one of them.

Note

To show / hide sectors in the Preview window, click the button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  297

     User Guide

6. Click  and specify the approximate size of a human. You can do so by dragging the corners of the rectangular area. 

7. Click Apply.
Configuration of the visitors counter is now complete.

7.4.19 Water Level Detection

7.4.19.1 Camera requirements for water level detection

To establish accurate results, please ensure the following:
1. Only color cameras are used. 
2. Video resolution is no less than 640x360.
3. No glares or shadows are cast over the measurement scale.

7.4.19.2 Configuring water level detection

Camera requirements for water level detection

To configure the water level detection, do the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  298

     User Guide

1. Select the created detection tool.

2. If the camera supports multistreaming, select the stream to be used for detection. Select a low-quality video stream to
reduce Server load (1).
3. Select a processing resource for decoding video streams (2). When you select a GPU, a stand-alone graphics card takes
priority (when decoding with NVidia NVDEC chips). If there's no appropriate GPU, the decoding will use the Intel Quick
Sync Video technology. Otherwise, CPU resources will be used for decoding.
4. Analyzed framed are scaled down to a specified resolution (3, 1280 pixels on the longer side). This is how it works:
a. If the longer side of the source image exceeds the value specified in the Frame size change field, it is divided by
two.
b. If the resulting resolution falls below the specified value, it is used further.
c. If the resulting resolution still exceeds the specified limit, it is divided by two, etc.

Note
For example, the source image resolution is 2048 * 1536, and the limit is set to 1000.
In this case, the source resolution will be divided two times (down to 512 * 384): after the first division, the
number of pixels on the longer side exceeds the limit (1024 > 1000).

5. Choose a processor to run detection on (4). Non-neural detection may be run on the CPU only. 
6. Use the neural network if the tool fails to detect water level due to transparency of water. Please follow the steps below:
a. Select Yes for the Neural Network parameter (5).
b. Select the neural network file (6).
7. On the measurement scale (7, 8), set the upper and lower visible limits in normal conditions.
8. Move the anchor points  in FoV:7
a. to set the measurement scale;

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  299

     User Guide

Attention!
Upper and lower limits of the measurement scale must match the actual settings (see paragraph 4).

b. draw a line to set the upper limit for water level upon reaching which the detection tool triggers an alarm
c. draw a line to set the upper limit for water level upon reaching which the detection tool highlights the sensor icon
in the Camera Window with yellow color.
9. Click the Apply button.
When you have created a detection tool, you can see a sensor on the layout in the camera window.

If the sensor icon is green , the water level is lower than both critical and warning marks. If the icon is yellow , the level is
somewhere between critical and warning. A red icon  means a level above critical.
 You can also display numerical value of current water levels for the detector (see Configuring display of water level detection).

7.4.20 Embedded Detection Tools

By the date the documentation in created, the Axxon Next software package includes integrated analytics for multiple video
cameras (see Drivers Pack release notes).
If Axxon Next supports built-in analytics for a device, then detectors can be created (see Creating Detection Tools).

Note
Some devices may have issues with interdependent embedded analytics. If there is already a relevant detection tool in
Axxon Next, you can add another one, but it will not work.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  300

     User Guide

7.4.20.1 Embedded Temperature Detection Tool

Axxon Next supports selected models of thermal cameras with an embedded temperature detection tool ( the Drivers Pack
documentation, body temperature detection). This detection tool recognizes human faces on video, and performs temperature
measurement on them. 
Normally, you should set up a detection tool as follows:
1. Create a detection tool (see Creating Detection Tools).
2. Using the camera manufacturer's documentation, set up the detection tool in the Axxon Next VMS. 

Attention!
As a rule, a camera requires specifying the temperature threshold, upon reaching which the detection tool would
trigger an alarm.

3. If required, set up macros to perform pre-defined actions upon triggering the detector (see Configuring Macros).
Some cameras are capable to display a bounding box over the facial image along with corresponding temperature readings.  If
this option is available, it can be activated via the web interface of a particular camera.

7.4.20.2 Obtaining metadata

Axxon Next is also able to obtain metadata directly from certain video cameras. For example, metadata can be received from a
Bosch IVA system.
To receive metadata from a Bosch IVA, you need to create an IVA object and select Yes in the Record objects tracking list.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  301

     User Guide

7.4.20.3 ANPR
The VMS can process ANPR data from some cameras' on-board analytics.

Note
Please contact technical support https://support.axxonsoft.com/ for a list of cameras with this feature.

Generally, when configuring the embedded analytics you must follow official documentation for the corresponding video camera
or parameter description in the Axxon Next interface.
Motion Mask
If the camera supports Motion Mask, then when you configure VMD, it will be displayed in the preview window.

If there is motion, but it does not exceed the threshold value (because of the detection sensitivity), the mask cells are colored
green. If motion triggers VMD, the cells turn red.

7.4.20.4 AxxonSoft tracking in Axis devices

You can use analytics from AxxonSoft (Configuring Scene Analytics Detection Tools) on Axis devices.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  302

     User Guide

Note
This option is available for all Axis devices on the following hardware platforms:
• MIPS (ARTPEC-4 and ARTPEC-5 CPUs)
• ARMv7 (ARTPEC-6 and ARTPEC-7 CPUs).
For full list of setup parameters, refer to the AxxonSoft Tracker help.

All CPU heavy analytics and metadata generation tasks  are delegated to the camera in this case. 
To do this:
1. Go to the device's web interface. 
2. Select the Setup menu (1) -> Applications (2).

3. Select the ACAP application (3) and click Upload the Package (4).

Important!
For application, contact AxxonSoft help-desk. You will be given a license code that is to be registered along with
camera's MAC address on Axis website in order to get the license file.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  303

     User Guide

4. Go to AxxonSoft Tracker  menu (1) -> License(2).

5. Select the license file (3).

6. Click Install (4).
7. Go to  Applications, select the  installed application (1).

8. Click Start (2).

9. In Axxon Next, create for the corresponding camera the  AxxonSoft Onboard tracker object.

10. Configure the tracker and create the required detection tools.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  304

     User Guide

Note
You can configure the AxxonSoft Onboard tracker object similar to the General information on Scene Analytics.
You cannot configure perspective for solution based on Axis devices.

7.4.21 Configuring Inputs

After becoming enabled on the Devices tab, the Input object appears on the Detection Tools tab (see the section The Input
Object).
Check the functioning of the Input in the Devices tab (see the section The Input Object). The detection properties field in the
Detection Tools tab duplicates the settings entered in the Devices tab under Settings and is not editable.

Perform the follow actions for the Input detection tool, on the Detection Tools tab:
1. Check triggering of the detection tool with the help of the Triggers ribbon (optional) (see the section Checking the
Triggering of a Detection Tool.
2. Set the rules to be automatically executed when the detection tool is triggered (see the section titled Automatic Rules).

7.4.22 Mass Configure Detection Tools

You can mass configure detection tools as follows:
1. Configure one detection tool.

2. Click the button  and select detections tools the same settings should be applied to.  

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  305

     User Guide

Attention!
Detection zones cannot be changed by bulk configuration

The list of detection tools of the same type in the current Axxon domain opens. To select multiple detection tools, hold
down the Shift key, select the first and last one the settings should be applied to. Selecting any tool from highlighted ones
will result in selecting them all. 

3. Click the Apply button.

Note
The number in brackets refers to the number of configured detection tools

7.4.23 Checking the Triggering of a Detection Tool

You can check the triggering of detection tools in the Detection Tools tab.
To use this option you must perform the following steps:
1. In the Detection Tools list, highlight the detection tool object whose triggering you need to check.

Attention!
The Detection Tool object should be enabled and configured

2. Produce an event whose occurrence should trigger the detection tool: motion in the frame, turning the video camera,
providing sound to an audio device, etc.
3. If the detection tool is configured correctly, video image frames from the video camera corresponding to the detection
tool will be displayed on the trigger ribbon with the time they were received indicated.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  306

     User Guide

VMS checks the on / off status of detection tools when they triggered and stopped. Not applicable to detection of: quality loss,
position change, disappearance of an object, motion stop and ANPR.  
After the end of triggering, you get the Finished message.  

Checking the triggering of a detection tool is now complete.

7.4.24 Automatic Rules

Automatic rules are basic macros: particular actions that are performed when a detection tool is triggered (see Configuring
Macros). One or multiple automatic rules can be set for each detection tool.
The interface window for configuring automatic rules is shown when any detection tool is selected.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  307

     User Guide

Configuring automatic rules and their mode of operation is the same as configuring macros (see Configuring Macros).
Created automatic rules are displayed in the corresponding list under the  Programming tab.

Note
When you create the Record to archive automatic rule, the recording stops when VMD (see Configuring Scene Analytics
Detection Tools) triggering stops

7.5 Configuring Macros

7.5.1 General information about the macros

Macro is a tool intended for configuring system responses to events. System response may involve one or several different
actions.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  308

     User Guide

Attention!
You can apply macros within a single Axxon domain only. Macro conditions and actions cannot include objects from
another Axxon domain.

You can create and edit macros in the Programming tab.

Macros can be of 3 types:

1. Event-driven (1). These macros can be run automatically on detection / event or initiated by the user. When triggered, the
commands in the macro are executed once.
2. Automatic Rules (2).
3. Cyclic (3). Cyclic macros are run on the first Server in the Axxon domain (alphabetical order) available at the time of
launching the macro. Cyclic macros are executed immediately after you save them unless they have been created outside
the time schedule for commands (see Create Macros). After completing all the commands, the macro is automatically
restarted. Cyclic macros cannot be started by the user. Additionally, a cyclic macro can be launched at a specified time
interval, or at a random moment within the specified time interval. When triggered, the commands in such a macro are
executed once.

Attention!
If an event occurs while the cyclic macro is busy, it is skipped.  
If an event occurs while the event-driven macro is busy, it is processed as configured. 

Unless the macro has standby commands (see Wait for event, Wait for timeout, Wait till previous action finishes),  all commands
are performed simultaneously.

7.5.2 Create Macros

To create a macro, click the Create button in the list.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  309

     User Guide

Then do as follows:
1. Enter the name of the macro (1).

2. Select the macro triggering mode  (2):

Mode Event-driven  Cyclic

Newer Manual execution only  (see Working with Dialog Disabled, manual execution is possible 
Board).

Always Always on Always on

Time time schedule Runs within the selected time schedule (see Runs within the specified time schedule..
Creating schedules). Initiated by the user at any
time.

3. If you need to include a macro in the control menu on the current layout, select the corresponding check box (3, see
Macros control).
4. To configure event-driven macros, click  and select one or more trigger events (4, see Configuring filters for event-
driven macros).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  310

     User Guide

Note

To delete an event from the filter, click the  button.

5. Add one or more actions into the macro (5). Click the  button to do this. When the macro starts, all actions are
performed simultaneously.

Note

To delete an action, click the  button.

Note
To hide the start conditions and action for the macro, click the action name.

6. A cyclic macro can be launched at a specified time interval, or at a random moment within the specified time interval. To
configure this action, do as follows:
a. In the Heartbeat Interval field, specify a time interval in HH:MM:SS format (1).  For example, if you set the interval
to 8 hours and leave the Random checkbox (see 5b) unselected, the macro will be launched every 8 hours. The
macro will be launched according to cycle settings even if the actions from its previous launch are not complete In
this case, several instances of the same macro will be executed simultaneously.

b. In the Launching Interval field, specify a time interval in HH:MM:SS format (1).  For example, if you set the interval
to 8 hours and leave the Random checkbox (see 6b) unselected, the macro will be launched every 8 hours.  

Attention!
If the macro is linked to a time schedule, and the random moment falls out of schedule, no launching
occurs.  

7. To save the macro, click the Apply button.

Macros configuration is complete. Created macro are listed. If the macro is disabled (Never mode), it is grayed out.

You can copy macro commands. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Select the macro to copy.
2. Click Create.
This creates a new identical macro.

Note
To create an empty macro command with no parameters specified, select any of the common macros' groups, and click
Create.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  311

     User Guide

To remove a macro, select it in the list and click Remove.

7.5.3 Configuring filters for event-driven macros

When you create event-driven macros, you  can select one or more trigger events.
You can also filter events:

 
The following events are available for selection:

Object Event Image

Axxon domain A string of events.

If you select an event from an Axxon domain, the macro
will be launched when this event is received from any
object in the Axxon domain.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  312

     User Guide

Object Event Image

Server Server disconnected

Server connected

Camera Recording started

Recording stopped

Camera armed

Camera armed (restricted)

Camera disarmed

Alarm initiated

Alarm being processed by user

Alarm skipped

Alarm processed

Alarm processed - Critical alarm

Alarm processed - Non-critical alarm

Alarm processed - False alarm

Connected

Disconnected

Signal lost

Signal restored

You can set a threshold for these type of events: the time in seconds (0 to
100) between switching from Signal Lost to Signal Restored state. For
example, setting 10 seconds threshold for the Signal Lost condition means
triggering the macro only if the time interval between the last Signal
Restored event and the new Signal Lost event is no less than 10 seconds.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  313

     User Guide

Object Event Image

Group of cameras A string of events.

If you select an event from a group of cameras, the
macro will be launched when this event is received
from any camera in the group.

Detector, Input Triggering start

and Output
Attention!
 
If triggering conditions for a macro include a
Start Time of Detection Tool Trigger event,
any changes in macro's settings that have
been saved while the detection tool is
triggered (before the End Time of Detection
Tool Trigger event) will lead to re-executing
the macro. 
The same logic is applied when you create a
macro. If you are creating a macro, and the
detection tool is triggered, the macro will be
executed immediately after the creation is
complete.

Triggering end

Triggering (for detection tools, which do not have the

start and end of the triggering, see Checking the
Triggering of a Detection Tool)

Specified Triggering (for face detection only, see

Specific parameters for triggering a face recognition
macro)

Archive Archive partition error

Archive partition restored

Time Schedule Beginning

End

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  314

     User Guide

Object Event Image

Event source Description for the Event Source object, you must
specify the trigger word or phrase. When it comes up in
the captions, the macro starts.
For example, this filter triggers the macro when the
word "Beer" appears in the captions.
If a macro is triggered by a simultaneous combination
of words and/or values, use braces for logical AND. For
example, {Beer} {Belgium}.

7.5.3.1 Specific parameters for triggering a face recognition macro

You can set a number of specific parameters which affect triggering a face recognition macro:
1. Age of the individual (requires activation of the Gender and Age parameter, see Configure Facial Recognition).
2. Gender of the individual (requires activation of the Gender and Age parameter, see Configure Facial Recognition). Value:
1 = female, 2 = male.
3. TemperatureValue: Body Temperature of the individual (requires the Face Detection and Temperature Control, see
Face Detection and Temperature Control with Mobotix M16 TR cameras).
To set specific parameters, do the following:
1. Select Face Appeared: Specified Triggering event as a launch condition.

2. Click .
3. Specify a required parameter value in the corresponding field (1). 

Attention!
The parameter is case-sensitive.

4. In the Value (2) and Max value (3) fields, set the range of parameter values within which the macro will be triggered. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  315

     User Guide

Note
Examples. 
If you set Age to [18, 100], the macro will be triggered only if the detection tool returns the age value of 18 or
more.
If you set Gender to [1, 1], the macro will be triggered only if the detection tool returns the individual's gender as
female.
If you set Gender to [2, 2], the macro will be triggered only if the detection tool returns the individual's gender as
male.
If you set TemperatureValue to [37, 100], the macro will be triggered only if the detection tool returns the
temperature value of 37 or more.

5. Add one or more actions into the macro (see Settings specific to actions).
6. Click the Apply button.

7.5.3.2 Triggering macros by statistical data

Event-triggered macros can be launched not only by events of particular type (see Configuring Filters for Event-driven Macros)
but also by statistical parameters.
A macro can be initiated by the following parameters reaching pre-defined criteria:
1. The percentage of used space in Archive.
2. The percentage of used space on a volume.
3. The percentage of used RAM on a Server.
4. The percentage of used network bandwidth on a Server.
5. The percentage of CPU load on a Server.
To set up triggering macros by statistics, do as follows:
1. Select the desired parameter from the Start Conditions list in the Statistics group.

2. Enter the parameter definition into the Item (1) field.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  316

     User Guide

Archive usage Archive in the following format:hosts/SERVER1/MultimediaStorage.AliceBlue/MultimediaStorage,

Disk usage SERVER1@C:\  where SERVER1 is the name of a server within the Axxon domain, C:\ is the volume name.
Important! You cannot monitor storage capacity of a disk fully allocated for Archive.

Memory usage (RAM) The name of a server within the Axxon domain.

Network usage The name of a server within the Axxon domain.

CPU usage The name of a server within the Axxon domain.

3. Enter the threshold value into the Value (2) field.

4. For  Leaving condition, enter the range into the Delta (3) field (see section 5).Enter the threshold value into the Value (2)
field.
5. From the Trend (4) list, select a triggering condition for the macro.

Leaving The macro is triggered if a parameter value goes out of the specified range [Value - Delta; Value].

Rising The macro is triggered if the parameter value exceeds the threshold specified in the Value field.

Falling The macro is triggered if the parameter value falls behind the threshold specified in the Value field.

Attention!
The triggering conditions are set not for current but for future events. For instance, if the current CPU load is
85%, and you set the triggering condition to exceeding 80%, the macro will be launched only when the CPU load
exceeds 80% value next time.

6. If necessary, you can set several event and/or statistical conditions for triggering macros.  

7.5.4 Settings specific to actions

7.5.4.1 Wait for event

This is the IF condition for running a command (only after the specified events occur).
You can enter the following parameters in the Awaiting command:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  317

     User Guide

1. The time-out format is HH:MM:SS.

2. Break command - here you enter one or more events that override the Wait command. If  you do not specify events, the
time-out applies.
3. If necessary, select and configure the action to perform when an event from Break Command occurs. A new Awaiting
instance is also an option.
4. If necessary, select and configure the action to perform if none of the events that were set in Break Command occurred
during time-out. A new Awaiting instance is also an option.
For example, this macro is conditioned by the Motion detected event on Camera 1 (1).

When it occurs, the macro continues. This also starts recording (2). Further macro actions are executed, if any.
If this event does not occur, the time-out is 4 minutes (3). After this time, a sound  notification (4) plays.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  318

     User Guide

Attention!
The Awaiting command does not affect the commands below (outside of) it.

7.5.4.2 Wait for timeout

This command delays launch for downstream commands.
The time-out format is HH:MM:SS.

For example, when performing that macro, an  alarm will be initiated in the system (1), and then after 10 seconds (2) - an audio
alert (3).

7.5.4.3 Wait till previous action finishes

This is the IF condition for running a command (only if the previous steps are completed / not completed in the specified time).
To configure, set up the following parameters:
1. Set waiting period in HH:MM:SS format for previous action to be performed (1). If 00:00:00 is set, then waiting will last
forever.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  319

     User Guide

2. Specify the action to perform if the previous command was completed within the specified timeout (2). 
3. Specify the action to perform if the previous action was not completed within the specified timeout (3). If the timeout is
00:00:00, this setting is not applicable.

Attention!
This command does not affect the commands below (outside of) it.

Example: In this macro, replication  (1) and the program on the client (5) start at the same time. If replication is completed within
10 minutes (2), an Email message (3) is sent. Otherwise, a voice alert (4) is played.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  320

     User Guide

7.5.4.4 Record to archive

To configure Record to archive:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  321

     User Guide

1. Selecting a camera or group of cameras for recording (1). An implicit selection of a video camera is also allowed - Camera
that initiated command execution.

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of
cameras or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

2. Select an archive to write to (2).    

3. Configuring conditions that end recording.
Condition Description

Timer (3) Only a timer value is set. Recording stops according to the time setting.

Events Filter (5) One or several events are set, the timer is set to 00:00:00. Recording stops on any IF
event.

Timer (3) + Intelligent event filter (IF) (5). One or several events are set, the timer is set to non-zero. Recording stops when the
set time interval expires after any IF event (trigger) occurs.

Timer (3) + OR flag (4) + IF (5). One or several events are set, the timer is set to non-zero, the OR flag is set. In this
case, the recording stops on any of the two conditions: after the time interval expires
or if an IF event (trigger) occurs. 

Note
The OR flag can be set only if the timer setting is not 00:00:00.

Note
An implicit selection of an event is allowed - Last event for condition that initiated execution.
For example, if the event that triggered the execution of the command was the Start time of detection tool
trigger from any type of detection tools, then the end event will be the End time of detection tool trigger from
the same tool.

4. Set the pre-alarm recording time (6). The maximum pre-alarm recording time is 30 seconds.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  322

     User Guide

Attention!
By default, the pre-alarm recording time interval is set to the value specified in Archive settings (see Binding a
camera to an archive).
The longest pre-alarm recording time available in the Archive settings is used.
Changing this value in a specific macro does not affect the Archive settings.

5. If you have cameras in continuous recording mode (see Binding a camera to an archive) and you want to record with
specified fps (see example 2) change the frame rate, enter the required frame rate (7). After the macro command
completes, recording resumes at the frame rate specified in the archive settings.
You can use special codes:
0 - do not change the current frame rate (default);
-1- record only I-frames;
1000 - record at the standard fps of the camera.

Attention!
FPS for pre-recording will not change.
If the macro command  is set to complete  some time after a specified event has been received (see p. 3), the
frame rate will change for this Check-in Event-time.

Attention!
When you prune by frame dropping, in all video streams except MJPEG , only I-fames (Intra-Coded Frame or Key
Frames) are saved, so please use codes:-1 and 1000 .
If you go for a custom frame rate this will lead to dropping some key frames.
MJPEG video contains only I frames (Intra-coded pictures with a complete image), so it makes sense  to set a
desired frame rate here.

Example 1. A macro-command to initiate VMD-triggered recording to the Archive from any camera within Default Axxon domain.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  323

     User Guide

Example 2. All video cameras from the  Default Axxon Domain  are set to continuously record video at the specified fps by
dropping frames (see Binding a camera to an archive). When you have a motion detection event, you need to switch to full fps
recording. Configure the following macro to do so:

7.5.4.5 Trigger an alarm

This starts recording and an alarm.
Most of the parameters are from the Record to archive command settings (see Record to archive). Other than that, there are
following settings:
1. Select Alarm mode (1, always or only when there are no other active alarms for the camera).

2. Selecting a camera or group of cameras (2).  An implicit selection of a video camera is also allowed - Camera that
initiated command execution.

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of
cameras or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  324

     User Guide

3. If you selected a group of cameras or an Axxon domain at the previous step, you can select the Random (3) checkbox to
initiate an alarm on a random camera from this group/domain.
4. Select an archive to write to (4).      
5. In the Alarm flag position field, enter the number of seconds by which the alarm flag will be shifted back from the event
time that started the macro (5).

Note
If the alarm flag position is set, the event footage plays from the moment corresponding to the flag's position, and not
from the alarm start.

7.5.4.6 Switch output

This action switches a output to a pre-selected state. 
To configure this action, do as follows:
1. Select a output to switch by the macro (1). You can select any active output within your system, including outputs linked
to another Server.

2. Outputs switch back after On-time (2), or after Check-in Event-time (3) for any specified events.

7.5.4.7 Arm /disarm a camera

To configure these actions, select a camera or group of cameras that you want to arm or disarm.  An implicit selection of a video
camera is also allowed - Camera that initiated command execution.

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of cameras
or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

7.5.4.8 Switch to a PTZ camera preset

To configure the action, set up the parameters:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  325

     User Guide

1. PTZ (1) - select a PTZ unit. Any pan/tilt positioners / PTZ cameras can be used, including those from other Servers (if they
are on).

2. Preset (2) - select the camera preset to go to, when the macro starts.
3. Speed (3) -  panning speed. This value should be in the range [1, 100].

7.5.4.9 Show camera

This opens the relevant layout and map with the camera marked on it.
To configure the command, do as follows:
1. Select a camera (1).   An implicit selection of a video camera is also allowed - Camera that initiated command
execution.
For the Go to archive mode (see step 2), you can select a group of cameras. 

Note
In this software version, you cannot select a group of cameras for this action.

2. Select the display mode (2).

Display mode Description

Select camera The camera tile is highlighted on the layout

Zoom in camera The camera tile is highlighted on the layout, the viewing tiles take up  98% of the screen

Zoom in and show map The camera tile is highlighted on the layout, the viewing tiles take up  50% of the screen,
the map under the tiles shows the camera.

Switch to immersion mode Immersive mode, the viewing tiles take up  50% of the screen

Switch to Archive Mode The camera window is highlighted on the layout and it is in archive mode.  If a group of
cameras is specified, then a layout is created with all the cameras in  archive mode.

3. Select the user roles, this command applies to (3)

This command uses the following algorithm:
1. The system searches for layouts that contain the specified video camera and are accessible to the user.
2. The system chooses the layout with the minimum number of cells to display the selected video camera.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  326

     User Guide

3. If the required layout does not yet exist, the system creates a new layout with a single video camera.
4. The system switches to the selected layout.
5. The specified process is running.

7.5.4.10 Opening layout

You can open any layout you created (the Open layout) or restore the previous one (the Restore layout).

To configure the Open layout command, do the following:

1. Select a layout (1).
2. Specify the ID of the monitor where you want to open this layout (2).
3. Select the user roles, this command applies to (3).

7.5.4.11 Starting export

This exports a snapshot or video.
To configure, set up the following parameters:
1. Export agent (1) - Select Server (aka Export agent object) to send recording to (see Configuring an Export Agent).

2. Camera (2) - select a camera for export.  An implicit selection of a video camera is also allowed - Camera that initiated
command execution.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  327

     User Guide

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of
cameras or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

3. Archive (3) - select an archive for export.

4. Sets the export interval (4). 
Option Description

Image export Exports a snapshot with the time stamp identical to the start time of action. Important! The
image cannot be exported if the video camera does not have an archive.

Time schedule You need to select a time schedule.

Exports images from within time schedule. Video recording interval - 
[Beginning of the specified time slot; the end of the specified time slot]

During You should set the export duration in HH: MM: SS. The starting point of the exported video is the
command start. End point is defined on the basis of the specified duration -
(Interval [command start; command start + duration]).

Finish after Select one or more events that will trigger export stop. The starting point of the exported video will
be the command start, the end point - the moment of receiving any these events.

5. You can click the  button to add additional parameters:

a. File name (6).

Attention!
You can use the following templates for file names and text comments:
• %startTime% , or [START_TIME], or {startTime}: the starting time of exported interval.
• %finishTime% , or [FINISH_TIME], or {finishTime} : the finishing time of exported interval.
You may use the following templates for macros triggered by a text message from an event source
(see Configuring filters for event-driven macros):
• %startEvent%, or [START_EVENT], or {startEvent}: an event that triggered exporting.
• %finishEvent% , or [FINISH_EVENT], or {finishEvent}: an event that stopped the export.

b. Comments superimposed as captions over the exported video (7).

c. Offset (8) is a time period used to roll back the start time of exported video. If you set this this parameter to non-
zero, the time interval of the exported video will be as follows:
[action start - (duration + offset); action start - offset].
If exported video(s) fall into a specific slot on Time Schedule, this parameter is used to define the start time for
video retrieval. For example, if you set the Offset (GUI: Buffer) to 48 hours, all videos from the given Time Schedule
slot recorded within 48 hours before the action start will be exported.
Example: A macro command for automatically exporting video recordings of all alarm events evaluated by operators as
"confirmed".

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  328

     User Guide

7.5.4.12 Start replication

This command starts the replication process.
To configure the command, perform the following:
1. Configure on-demand replication if replication is performed from the archive (see Configuring data replication). To
replicate from the on-board storage (SD card or other storage embedded in the video camera), enable the corresponding
object (The Embedded Storage object).
2. Select a video camera or a group of cameras to replicate (1).  An implicit selection of a video camera is also allowed -
 Camera that initiated command execution.

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of
cameras or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  329

     User Guide

3. Select an archive file to which video recordings will be replicated (2).

4. Select the replication period (3).
Option Description

Whole period All missing video recordings made prior to the command start time will be copied.

Offline periods The system copies footage recorded to embedded storage (camera's SD card) during offline
periods (between consecutive Signal lost and Signal restored events).  If no Offset parameter
(see paragraph 5) is specified, the replication covers offline footage recorded during the last 24
hours.

Time schedule Select a time schedule (see Creating schedules).

All recordings made according to the time schedule settings for the last 24 hours prior to the
command start time will be copied.

During Set the replication duration in HH:MM:SS.  Video recordings from the period [start action, start
action + duration] will be copied. An additional Offset parameter can be specified as needed
(see 5).

Finish after Select one or more end events. All video recordings between the start point (when the action
starts) and the end point (when the event is received) will be copied.  Important! Replication
will not start until the end event is received.

5. Specify Offset(4), if you specified Duration for replication. Video recordings from the period [start action - offset, start
action + duration - offset] will be copied.
To run replication on schedule (corresponding to Time schedule 1), configure the macro as follows:

7.5.4.13 Play audio on Server

You can play back audio through a Server PC's loudspeaker. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  330

     User Guide

Attention!
To make the client-side audio playback possible, you have to create a Speaker object allowing Play on Server playback
mode (see The Speaker Object).

To configure the action, set up the parameters:

1. Select a speaker (1).

2. In the Audio file field (2), enter the full path to the audio notification file.
3. Configure a condition (IF event, trigger)  that will cancel the notification:
Condition Description

Timer (3) Only a timer value is set. Alerts are cancelled according to the time setting.

Events Filter (5) One or several events are set, the timer is set to 00:00:00. Alerts are cancelled
according to the IF event (trigger).

Timer (3) + Intelligent event filter (IF) (5). One or several events are set, the timer is set to non-zero. Alerts are cancelled in a
given time after the selected IF event (trigger) occurs.

Timer (3) + OR flag (4) + IF (5). One or several events are set, the timer is set to non-zero, the OR flag is set. In this
case, the alert is cancelled on any of the two conditions: after the time interval expires
or if an IF event (trigger) occurs.  

Note
The OR flag can be set only if the timer setting is not 00:00:00.

Note
An implicit selection of an event is allowed - Last event for condition that initiated execution.
For example, if the event that triggered the execution of the command was the Start time of detection tool trigger
from any type of detection tools, then the end event will be the End time of detection tool trigger from the same tool.

7.5.4.14 E-mail notification

This sends emails to the pre-set addresses. Exported videos or snapshots can be attached.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  331

     User Guide

Attention!
Connection to AxxonNet is required to receive alerts by email (see AxxonNet Setup and Operation).

To configure e-mail notification:

1. E-mail (1) - select the system object for email notifications when a macro starts.

2. Enter e-mail addresses of anyone who should be notified (2). 

Note
Multiple email addresses can be specified. Separate them with comma (,) or semicolon (;).

Note
Notifications will be sent at the address you specified when configuring the E-mail Message object (see The E-
mail Object).

3. E-mail subject (3) - select the the subject field for email notification .
4. E-mail text (4) - enter the text for email notification.

Note
You can use templates to build a message body (see Text templates in macros).

5. If necessary, you can attach exported videos or snapshots to your message. Click   to add and configure additional
parameters. Configuration of these parameters is identical to configuration of export (see Starting export).

Note
If the Period is not specified, the snapshot is sent. You can set the format of video / snapshot export  in the
Export agent settings (see Configuring an Export Agent).

6. If a macro is launched from a group of cameras (see Configuring filters for event-driven macros), you can send frames
from all cameras as attachment in a single email message. To make it possible, select the All in one Email checkbox (6). If
this checkbox is not selected, camera images will be sent in separate letters.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  332

     User Guide

7.5.4.14.1 The E-mail Object

The E-mail object is used to configure electronic messages which can then be sent to a user as an automatic response when a
detection tool is triggered.

7.5.4.14.1.1 Creating the E-mail Object

To create an E-mail object, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the list of devices, highlight a Server object and click the Create Email notifier button.

2. Click the Apply button.

3. When you do this, an E-mail object appears in the list of devices.
Creation of the E-mail object is now complete.

7.5.4.14.1.2 Configuring the E-mail Object

To configure an E-mail object, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the list of devices, highlight the E-mail object which needs to be configured (1).

2. Activate the E-mail object (2) by selecting Yes in the Enable list.
3. In the Name field (3) enter the desired name of the E-mail object.
4. Select the mode for sending e-mail alerts: through AxxonNet or through the specified SMTP server (4).

Attention!
To send alerts via AxxonNet, you should connect to it (see AxxonNet Setup and Operation).
AxxonNet has a limit of 10 messages a day.

Note
Message via AxxonNet will be sent within one minute.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  333

     User Guide

5. Configure the SMTP server, if this mode has been selected (5):
a. In the SSL certificate field, specify the path to the SSL certificate file, if you use this protocol.
b. If you need to use an SSL-encrypted connection when connecting to the outgoing mail server, select Yes from
the Use SSL list.
c. In the Name field, enter the name of the user account used to send messages on the outgoing mail server.
d. In the Password field, enter the password for the user account on the outgoing mail server.
e. In the Port field, enter the number of the port used by the outgoing mail server.
f. In the Outgoing mail server field, enter the name of the outgoing SMTP mail server.
g. In the From field, enter the e-mail address from which the messages will be sent (6).

Attention!
When using e-mail notification, mail servers may lock the user account, or deny authentication in some
cases. We recommend you to set all security parameters to off in your e-mail account.

6. Enter e-mail addresses of anyone who should be notified (7).

Note
Several email addresses can be specified. Separate them with semicolon (;)

7. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the E-mail object is now complete.

7.5.4.14.1.3 Checking E-mail Notification

To check e-mail notification from an E-mail object, send a test message by clicking the Test button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  334

     User Guide

When you do this, the following message is sent to the e-mail address indicated in the Recipients field (see the section
Configuring the E-mail Object): "Test message"

Note
If the recipient does not receive the message, make sure that the settings of the E-mail object have been properly
configured

7.5.4.15 SMS notification

To configure the action, set up the parameters:
1. Modem (1) - select the SMS object for SMS notifications when a macro starts.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  335

     User Guide

2. Message text (2) -  enter the  SMS text for SMS notifications.

Attention!
The number of characters in a message is limited to:
• 160 ASCII characters;
• 70 Unicode characters. 
If the limit is exceeded, a multi-part text message is transmitted.

Note
You can use templates to build a message body (see Text templates in macros).

3. Enter the phone numbers of anyone who should be notified (3).

Note
Several phone numbers can be specified. Separate them with semicolon (;).

Note
 Notifications / alerts will also be sent at the phone numbers you specified when configuring The SMS Object

7.5.4.15.1 The SMS Object

The SMS object is used to configure SMS messages which can then be sent to users as an automatic response when a detection
tool is triggered.

Attention!
To use SMS notification, you need a modem recognizable by the OS as a COM device. No other types of modems can be
used for this purpose.
For example, the following modem types are supported:
1. Siemens TC-35.
2. Flyer U12 (Windows 7 and higher).
Other modems may work or not. We recommend you to check supported Windows versions for each particular device.
Carrier-locked modems are not recommended.

Note
If a USB modem is used to send SMS messages, use the modem utility from the modem software bundle. It will unlock
the modem for correct operation

7.5.4.15.1.1 Procedure of configuring SMS notifications

To configure SMS notifications:
1. Stop the Server.
2. Connect a modem and, in the utility supplied with the modem, wait for the signal level to be determined.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  336

     User Guide

3. Make sure that the number of the SMS center is shown. Do not connect to the Internet.
4. Start the Server and Client. Create and configure an SMS object.

7.5.4.15.1.2 Creating the SMS Object

To create an SMS object, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the list of devices, highlight a Server object and click the Create SMS notifier button. 

2. Click the Apply button.

3. When you do this, the SMS object appears in the list of devices.
Creation of the SMS object is now complete.

7.5.4.15.1.3 Configuring the SMS Object

To configure an SMS object, you must perform the following steps:
1. In the list of devices, highlight the SMS object which needs to be configured (1).

2. Activate the SMS object (2) by selecting Yes in the Enable list.
3. In the Name field (3) enter the desired name of the SMS object.
4. In the To field (4), enter the cellular telephone number, in international format (+<country code>хххххххххx), to which
messages will be sent.
5. In the SerialPort settings group (5), indicate the port settings used to connect to the GSM modem by which SMS
messages will be sent:
a. If you need to use a DTR control signal, select Yes from the DTR list.
b. In the Bits field, enter the number of bits in the byte of a data packet.
c. In the Stop bits length field, enter the number of bits in the stop bit of a data packet.
d. If you need to use a parity check when transmitting data, select the desired method of parity check from the Parity
list.
e. From the Port list, select the serial port used to connect to the GSM modem.
f. If hardware control of the serial port data protocol is enabled (see step 5.8) and you need to use an RTS signal,
select Yes from the RTS signal list.
g. Select the speed for data transmission via the GSM modem from the Baud rate list.
h. If you need to control the serial port data protocol, select the desired method of control from the Handshaking
list: hardware (RTS/STS), software (XOn/XOff), or alternating.
6. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  337

     User Guide

Configuration of the SMS object is now complete.

7.5.4.15.1.4 Checking SMS notifications

To check SMS notifications from an SMS message object, send a test message by clicking the Test message button.
When you do this, the following message is sent to the mobile number indicated in the To field: "This is a test message to check
Axxon Next SMS notification."

Note
If the recipient does not receive the message, make sure that the settings of the SMS object have been properly
configured

7.5.4.16 Starting an external program on Clients

This starts an external program on your Axxon Next client.
The external program is started on all Clients that are connected to the domain.

Attention!
The external program is not started on a computer that is an Axxon Next Server, if the Client is not running on the
computer when a macro is triggered.

To configure, do the following:

1. On all Clients, enter the path to the  program's executable / run file (1). You can specify a network path. You can also add
command-line options.

2. Select users of the (external) program (2).

Attention!
To run the program, you need administrator permissions. You have to disable UAC (in OS Windows Server
2012 versions, 8, 8.1 and you need to edit  the registry), or start Axxon Next with administrator rights

7.5.4.17 Starting an external program on Servers

This starts an external program on your Axxon domain.

Attention!
Any software containing a GUI is not recommended to be executed on the Server. If you encounter a problem launching
interactive services, please refer to the Windows OS user manual.

To configure, do the following:

1. Allow interaction of the server NGP Host service with the desktop: Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services
 > Net Logon -> Properties - Log on.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  338

     User Guide

Note
For Failover Server and Client installation type (see Installation), you have to allow  the NGP RaFT supervisor
service to interact with desktop.

2. Add to folder <Directory where Axxon Next is installed>\UserScripts\ one or more .bat files with the application startup
command.
The command should include a path to the executable file.  You can specify a network path and command-line options
(see Starting an external program on Clients).
3. Select the server where you want to run the program (1).

4. Select a bat. file with the run command (2).

5. Enter templates, if they were set via a bat file (3).
Example 1: If you apply the following bat file:

SET "datatime=%1"
SET "cameraIpAddress=%2"

msg * Current time is %datatime%, IP-address: %cameraIpAddress%

executing the macro will lead to the following message:

Example 2: Exporting camera connection status events (offline/online) to a csv.bat file containing the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  339

     User Guide

SELECT "timestamp"
,REGEXP_REPLACE("object_id", 'hosts/', '') as device,
CASE
WHEN ("any_values"::json->>'state') = '4' THEN 'Signal Lost'
WHEN ("any_values"::json->>'state') = '3' THEN 'Signal
Restored'
ELSE ''
END as state
FROM public."t_json_event"
WHERE type = '0' AND ("any_values"::json->>'state'='3' OR "any_values"::json->>'state'='4') AND
timestamp >= '20200211T0000'
ORDER by timestamp DESC

Example 3: Exporting detection tools triggering events to a csv.bat file containing the following: 

SELECT "timestamp",
REGEXP_REPLACE("object_id", 'hosts/', '') as device,
CASE
WHEN ("any_values"::json->>'phase') = '1' THEN 'Closed'
WHEN ("any_values"::json->>'phase') = '2' THEN 'Opened'
ELSE ''
END as state
FROM public."t_json_event"
WHERE type = '1' AND timestamp >= '20200209T110000' AND "object_id" LIKE '%ray%'
ORDER by timestamp DESC

7.5.4.18 Start / stop slideshows of layouts.

These actions start and stop the slideshow of the layouts on the operator's monitor (see Selection and Slideshow of Layouts). 

Note
To stop slideshow of layouts, you can select any camera window with the left click. After restarting the client, slideshow
resumes.

7.5.4.19 Enable/disable a component

This action enables or disables the selected camera, detection tool or input. 
To configure this action, do as follows:
1. Select the required object (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  340

     User Guide

2. Select the desired command (2).

7.5.4.20 Checking for archive video recordings

This action checks recorded video from a specific camera or group of cameras for the specified period. 
To configure this action, do as follows:
1. Select a camera or a group of cameras to verify their video footage (1).

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of
cameras or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

2. Select an archive where you want to check if recorded video is available (2).  If you leave the field empty,  all recorded
video in the camera's archives is checked.
3. Specify how far back in the past to scan (3). The verification time period covers: [the time of the action start - (minus) the
depth of the check; start time of the action].
4. Select a reaction if the archive entries are found (4).
5. Select a reaction  if the archive entries are not found (5).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  341

     User Guide

Note
If E-mail - or SMS-notification is selected as a reaction, then the target cameras will be indicated in the message (if a
group of cameras was selected) for which there are no entries in the archive for the specified period.
You can also use two special purpose templates in the message:
{failureRecordCheck} – failed verification of a record in a Archive (format: Server Name|Camera Name|Archive Name).
{successRecordCheck} – successful verification of a record in a Archive (format: Server Name|Camera Name|Archive
Name).
Important! For proper execution of the macro, synchronize the time across all Servers within the Axxon domain.

7.5.4.21 Switching to Forensic Search results

This allows you to open saved search results.
To configure this action, do as follows:
1. Select a camera (1).

2. Select a previously saved search query (2).

3. You can target users by selecting a role (3).

7.5.4.22 Voice notification from Client

Use this action for routing the voice transmission from a client PC to a designated loudspeaker.

Attention!
If a Client resides behind the NAT, you have to specify the external IP address of the switch for this Client with a port
range larger than 1000 (see Network settings utility).

To configure this action, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  342

     User Guide

1. Select a speaker (1).

2. Select a microphone (2).

3. Specify sensitivity from 0 to 100 (3).
To stop sound, use the Stop voice notification from client command on Client.
To configure this command, select a speaker (4) and a microphone (5). 

7.5.4.23 Voice notification on Client

You can play back audio via client PC's loudspeakers. 

Attention!
To make the client-side audio playback possible, you have to create a Speaker object allowing Play on
Clients playback mode (see The Speaker Object).

To configure this action, do as follows:

1. Select the speaker for audio alerts (1) playback.

2. Select a role to address alerts to specific users (2).

3. If you need to cancel audio alerts after some time, set the required time interval (3).
4. For event-triggered audio alerts cancellation, do the following:
a. Create a new event macro with all required events filtered (see Create Macros, Configuring filters for event-driven
macros).
b.  Add a Stop voice notification on client action to a macro.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  343

     User Guide

c. Select the loudspeaker where you want to cancel audio alerts (1).
d. If you need to cancel alerts after a certain amount of time, set the required time interval (2).

7.5.4.24 Executing a macro

This action launches another macro.
To set up this procedure, select the necessary macro.
 

This action launches only event-related macros.

7.5.4.25 Alarm dispatch

This action consists of alarm management and evaluation.
To configure this action, do as follows:
1. Select a video camera or a group of cameras to dispatch an alarm (1).

Attention!
If the start of the macro was triggered by the activation of input or output (see Configuring filters for event-driven
macros) that is not connected to any camera, you need to select a specific camera here. If you select a group of
cameras or a camera that triggered the command, the action will not start.

2. Select the alarm status (2).

7.5.4.26 Executing a web query

This action sends a GET or POST query to a specified Server.
To configure this action, do as follows:
1. Select the authentication method: Basic or Digest (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  344

     User Guide

2. Select query type (2). 4 types are available: POST, GET, PUT, DELETE.
3. Select HTTP or HTTPS Server protocol (3).
4. Enter the IP address of the Server (4).
5. Enter the port number of the Server (5).
6. Enter the user name (6) and password (7) to be used for automatic authorization.
7. Enter query string (8).
8. For a POST query, enter its body (9).

Note
You can use templates to build a query body (see Text templates in macros).

7.5.4.27 Text templates in macros

You can use message templates in commands (see E-mail notification, SMS notification, Executing a web query) that involve
sending notifications:
• {cameraNode} - Server name;
• {eventNode} - Server name (used if the macro launching condition is not linked to a particular camera);
• {cameraName} - name and short name of the camera that initiated the macro;
• {cameraLabel} - just the camera's name;
• {cameraIpAddress} - camera's IP address;
• {cameraId} - camera's ID;
• {cameraRef}- the VIDEOSOURCEID identifier;
• {plate} - recognized vehicle number;
• {name} - name of the recognized person from Lists of Facial Templates;
• {age} - age of the recognized individual;
• {gender} - gender of the recognized individual;

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  345

     User Guide

Attention!
The {age} and {gender} templates can be applied when the following conditions are met:
a. The Gender and Age parameter is activated in facial detection tool settings (see Configure Facial
Recognition).
b. The Face Appeared: Specified Triggering event is selected as a launch condition for this macro (s).

• {appearedTime} - UTC time of object detection;

• {dateTime} - date and UTC time of triggering the macro in ISO format;
• {serverDateTime} - local Server time of triggering the macro in ISO format;
• {rectangles} - coordinates and size of the object that triggered the detection tool;
• statistics templates:
• {cpuUsage}  - percentage of CPU load on a Server;
• {netUsage} - percentage of used network bandwidth on a Server;
• {memoryUsage} - percentage of used RAM on a Server;
• {diskUsage} - percentage of disk usage;
• {archiveUsage} - percentage of Video Footage usage.

Attention!
You can apply statistics templates only if you launch a macro by a corresponding statistical condition (see
Triggering macros by statistical data).

Note
Templates allow  {} and %%. For example, %cameraId%. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  346

     User Guide

Note
Date/time templates (such as dateTime, serverDateTime, appearedTime and serverAppearedTime) offer an extended
input option which allows you to set date and time in arbitrary format. A format description parameter must be
contained within a pair of @ symbols. 
Here's an example: {dateTime@%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S@}. In this case, the actual format is presented as 2020-10-04
18:43:23.
Available parameters:

Parameter Description

%a Abbreviation for the day of the week

%A Full name of the day of the week

%b Abbreviation for the month 

%B Full name of the month 

%y Last two digits of the year

%Y Full number of the year

%m  Month of the year 

%d  Day of the month

%H Hour in 24h format

%M Minute as a decimal number 

%S Second as a decimal number

%F Fractions of second

Combined parameters:

Parameter Description

%D Equivalent to %m/%d/%y

%T Equivalent to %H:%M:%S

E.g. this macro sends an email of the following format when a water level detection tool triggers:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  347

     User Guide

Subject: Notification: Attention, water level detection is triggered.

 
Server: Server1
Camera: 10.0.11.36 34.Camera
Time: 20190812T085517.926430

7.5.5 Cyclical macros

Attention!
If you do not have the Wait command in a cyclic macro, the time-out between cycles is 1 second.

Example 1. This macro runs continuously (1), starting from the moment that you saved it.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  348

     User Guide

The cycle consists of alternating layouts with marked cameras (2) and layouts with alarmed cameras (4). Interval - 1 minute (3 ,
5).
Example 2. This macro runs continuously within the time schedule 1 (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  349

     User Guide

Every hour (5) video from camera 1 is exported (2). After the export is completed (3), an audio alert is sounded (4).

Wait for timeout

Wait till previous action finishes

7.6 Configuring user permissions

In Axxon Next, every user has permissions based on their role.
By default, there is one role (admin) and one user (root). The root user belongs to the admin role and has rights to configure all
components of the video surveillance system. To add a user with individual permissions, create a new role with the necessary
permissions and then create a new user account.

Note
Only admin  users can create other admin role users.

Roles and users can be added and configured in Settings, on the Users tab.
There are two types of users: local (stored in the Server database) and LDAP (see Connecting LDAP users).
To enable LDAP users, you must configure access to LDAP catalogs.
The actions of all system users are recorded in the system log (see The System Log).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  350

     User Guide

Note
The following user actions are logged:
• Client started/quit
• Settings for hardware, archive, or detection tool are deleted/added or changed
• Macros are created, deleted, or changed
• User permissions are added, deleted, or changed
• Camera alarm is initiated
• Camera is armed/disarmed
• Create / edit comments
• Snapshot or video is exported
• PTZ
In all user-specific events, the user IP address is indicated.

7.6.1 Creating and configuring roles

A role is intended for assigning a group of users individual rights and permissions for administration, management and/or
monitoring of individual components of Axxon Next.
To register a new role, perform the following:
1. At the end of the list of system roles, click the Create link.

The new role is added in the system, with its properties displayed on the right side.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  351

     User Guide

2. Enter a name for the role in the corresponding field (1).

3. Select priority of PTZ cameras control for users with the current role. 
4. Select priority of map access for users with the current role (2). 
Access level Description

View only You can only view maps

View/move/scale You can move and scale maps

Full access All options available

5. If you need to limit access of users of a given role to all system archives, you can specify the retention time (archive depth)
limit in the Archive depth viewing restriction field (3). If no limit is set, users may access the entire Video Footage.
6. Set access permissions for Axxon Next features (4). Access can be restricted to such features as:
a. Archive search (see Video surveillance in Archive Search mode).
b. Adding a camera to a layout in live video mode (see Adding cameras to cells).
c. Adding and editing presets for PTZ cameras (see Creating and editing presets).
d. Alarms Management (see Video surveillance in Alarm Management mode). 
No access: users have no access to alarm videos. View only: users can view alarm videos but they can't evaluate
alarms. Full access: users can view alarm videos and evaluate alarms
e. Creating comments (see Operator comments) and protected records in Video Footage (see Protecting video
footage from FIFO overwriting).
Access level Description

No access No comments allowed

Create Add comments to archives

Create / Protect Add comments to archives, create protected records

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  352

     User Guide

Access level Description

Create / Protect / Edit / Delete Add comments to archives, create and edit protected records

f. Removing videos from the footage archive (see Delete a part of an archive).
g. Allow unprotected export (see Frame export, Standard video export). Set No to require setting a password for
exported images and video.
h. Exporting snapshots and video recordings (see Exporting Frames and Video Recordings).
i. Editing layouts (see Configuring Layouts).
j. Minimizing the Client to the system tray (see Interface of the Axxon Next Software Package).
k. Managing an Axxon domain (see Axxon Domain operations).
l. Access to the Web server (see Working with Axxon Next Through the Web Client).
m. Displaying captions (see Viewing titles from POS terminals).
n. Show faces (see Masking faces).
o. Viewing the system log (see The System Log).
p. Context menu of a video camera in a viewing tile (see Viewing Tile Context Menu).
q. View masked video (see Setting up privacy masking in Video Footage).
7. Configure access rights to the Settings tabs and to system error messages (5).

Attention!
If you set the User Permission Settings parameter to Device access rights only, all users of the given role will
be permitted to change only access rights to connected devices.

Note
Error messages are displayed in real time in the Layouts interface

8. Set access permissions for Layouts in Axxon Next (6). This setting is related to both primary and web clients.
9. Set the parameters to apply the four-eyes principle (7):
a. If the administrator has to confirm the launch of export for users of this role, select the appropriate role in the
Supervisor for access to export list.
b. If the administrator has to confirm the login of users of this role, select the corresponding role in the Supervisor
for authorization in client list.
10. If you need to grant the users in this role permissions only for a certain period of time, select a Time schedule (8) from the
list. These users will not be able to use their permissions outside of the selected time schedule.
11. Configure rights to manage connected Clients' monitors by setting permissions for each Server on an Axxon domain (9). A
user who has management permissions for the monitors of a particular Server can manage monitors of any Client
connected to that Server.
12. Set permissions for access to hardware and archives on an Axxon domain (10).
Device Access permissions Description

Video camera No access You cannot access the device.

Archive only You can only view video footage in archive.

Live in Armed mode You can view video from the camera only when the camera is armed.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  353

     User Guide

Device Access permissions Description

Live You can live video from the camera. Other functions and device
configuration are not available.

Live/Archive You can view live and recorded video from the camera. You cannot
arm/disarm/configure the camera.

Live/Archive/Control All functions available. You cannot configure the device.

Live/Archive/Control/Configure All functions and settings available.

Microphone No access The user is unable to listen to live sound from the video camera. The
user is unable to listen to sound recordings from the archive.

Live Audio The user is able to listen to live sound from the video camera (the
microphone must be turned on). The user is unable to listen to
sound recordings from the archive.

Live Audio and Archive All functions are accessible

PTZ No access The user cannot control the PTZ device

Minimum level The user can control the PTZ device with the corresponding priority
(see Controlling a PTZ Camera)

Low level

Medium level

High level

Maximum level

Archive No access Access is not provided to this archive

Full access Archive is available for all functions

You can configure group rights for accessing devices and archives of a particular Server. To do so, select an access level
for the Server object. Depending on the level that is chosen, particular access levels are automatically configured for the
devices and archives of the relevant Server (see table).
Server access level Device/archive Device/archive access level

Custom - Access levels for devices and archives are set manually

No access - No access to devices and archives

Archive Only Video camera Archive only

Microphone Live Audio and Archive

PTZ Medium level

Archive Full access

Live in Armed Mode Video camera You can view armed cameras

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  354

     User Guide

Microphone Live Audio

PTZ Medium level

Archive No access

Live Video camera You can view live video

Microphone Live Audio

PTZ Medium level

Archive No access

Live/Archive Video camera You can view live and recorded video

Microphone Live Audio and Archive

PTZ Medium level

Archive Full access

Live/Archive/Control Video camera All functions. Settings not available.

Microphone Live Audio and Archive

PTZ Medium level

Archive Full access

Live/Archive/Control/Configure Video camera  All functions + settings available.

Microphone  Live Audio and Archive

PTZ  Maximum level

Archive  Full access

13. Click the Apply button to save the role.

The new role has now been created.
You can copy Roles. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Select the role to copy.
2. Click Create.
This creates a new identical role.

Note
To create an empty user role with no parameters specified, select the Roles common group, and click Create.

To delete a role, perform the following:

1. Select the role to delete.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  355

     User Guide

2. Click Delete.

Note
You cannot delete a role if the user through which you logged into the system belongs to that role.

3. Click the Apply button.
The role has now been deleted. All users under this role will also be deleted.

7.6.2 Connecting to an LDAP catalog

To connect to an LDAP catalog:
1. In the LDAP Catalogs group, click Create.

An LDAP object is added in the system. On the right, a panel displays configuration settings for the LDAP catalog.
2. Enter a name for the catalog in the appropriate field (1).

3. Enter the address of the LDAP catalog server (2) and port (3).

4. In the Base DN field, enter the Distinguished Name of the branch from which to start search (4).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  356

     User Guide

Attention!
If LDAP users are located in multiple directories with a tree-like structure, you cannot establish instant
synchronization across all users.
To synchronize each user group within a DN branch, you have to specify the path to the corresponding directory.
For example, LDAP contains a directory Employees including subdirectories Managers, Cashiers and Salesmen.
DN branches for synchronizing users within Managers directory:
ou=Managers,ou=Employees,dc=example,dc=com.
DN branches for synchronizing users within Cashiers directory:
ou=Cashiers,ou=Employees,dc=example,dc=com.
DN branches for synchronizing users within Salesmen directory:
ou=Salesmen,ou=Employees,dc=example,dc=com.

5. Enter the name of a user who has write access to the base DN, in LDAP format (RDN + DN) with password (5).
6. If encryption (SSL) is required for connecting to the LDAP server, select the corresponding check box (6).
7. In the Search filter field, enter a string for filtering catalog entries (7).

Attention!
To upload users by groups, not by directories, you should use the Member Of filter attribute. For example:
(&(objectClass=user)(memberof=CN=YourGroup,OU=Users,DC=YourDomain,DC=com))

8. In the Login attribute field, enter the field from which the user's login is obtained (8).

Note
To search users by attribute sAMAccountName, enter their names in small letters - samaccountname

9. In the DN attribute field, enter the field from which the user's DN is obtained (9).

Note
To set a login and DN attribute, you can use Microsoft Active Directory and OpenLDAP LDAP templates. To use a
template, click the relevant link (10).

10. Specify a default user role for users created via LDAP (11). If no role is specified, no automatic user creation will be
possible for this catalog.
11. Сlick the Apply button.
The LDAP catalog is now added to the system.
To test the connection, click the Test connection button. If connection is successful, the form on the lower part of the screen
displays information about the catalog users. Otherwise, an error message appears.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  357

     User Guide

7.6.3 Working with users

In Axxon Next, multiple users can be assigned to the same role. A user will be granted the permissions  for administration,
management and/or monitoring that are indicated in the settings of the user's role. When adding a new user, the name and
password necessary for that user to log in to the system are specified.

7.6.3.1 Creating local users

To add a new local user:
1. At the end of the list for a particular role click the Create link.

The new user is then added to the system, and the permissions configuration panel for that user opens on the right.

2. Enter a user name (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  358

     User Guide

3. Select the role you want to attribute to the user (2). 

4. Enter the password in the Security configuration group (3).

a. Click  . The Change password window opens.

b. Enter the user's assigned password in the New password field.

c. Retype the assigned password in the Confirmation field.
d. Click OK to save the settings.
5. To force a user to change the password upon the next connection to the Client, set the corresponding parameter (4) to
Yes.
6. If you want to limit the number of connections for a user through Web or mobile clients, do as follows: specify a maximum
number of connections (5). The Maximum number of web app connections parameter also sets a limit on maximum
number of RTSP queries from a particular user.

Attention!
The limit on the number of connections will take effect after the server is restarted (see Launching and Closing
the Axxon Next Software Package).

7. If necessary, enter additional information about the user (e-mail, IP address, personal and company ID, etc.) in
appropriate fields.
8. Click the Apply button to save the settings.
The user has now been added and assigned a role.

7.6.3.2 Locking a user account

You can lock user accounts to prevent unwanted logins.
To do this:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  359

     User Guide

1. Select a user account (1).

2. In the Lock User Account field, select Yes (2).

3. Click Apply.
To unlock an account, select No in the Lock User Account field.

7.6.3.3 Creating LDAP connections

When adding an LDAP user, the user's login is selected from the specified LDAP catalog.  No password  is required.
To add an LDAP user:
1. Add the user to the system (see Creating local users).
2. Select the LDAP catalog that contains the user (1, see Connecting to an LDAP catalog).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  360

     User Guide

3. In the Login field, click the  button (2). 

A window with all users of the LDAP catalog opens.

4. Find a user via search (1) or manually select a user from the list (2). Click OK (3).
5. Specify the other user settings (see Creating local users).
6. Click the Apply button to save the settings.
The user has now been added and assigned a role.
When an LDAP user connects, the user's login from Server settings is used with the password from the LDAP catalog.

7.6.3.4 Synchronize LDAP users

To add users from an LDAP directory to a specific role, do as follows:
1. Right-click the role to which you want to add users.

2. Choose  Synchronize with LDAP and then the required LDAP directory (see Connecting to an LDAP catalog).
All users in the selected directory will be added to this role. By default, the user name will match the login in the LDAP directory.

7.6.3.5 Deleting users

To delete a user from the tree:
1. Select the user to delete.
2. Click Delete.

Note
You cannot delete the user through which you logged into the system.

3. Click the Apply button to save the settings.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  361

     User Guide

The user has now been deleted from the tree.

Attention!
If you delete a user account on the LDAP server, it will be automatically deleted from Axxon Next VMS.

7.6.4 Configuring the user security policy

To configure the user security policy, do as follows:
1. Go to Settings -> Options -> Security Policy (1-2).

2. Set the minimum password length (3).

3. Set the number of most recent passwords for each user to be stored (4 ). 0 – do not store password history. If this value is
non-zero, passwords stored in history may not be reused.
4. Set password expiration time interval in days (5). After the time interval expires, the user will be prompted to set a new
password. 0 — the password never expires.
5. Select positions to meet complexity requirements: nothing, password only, user name and password (6).
The requirements:
a. user name:
i.  must contain no less than 6 characters and at least 2 digits;
ii. must not include common role names, such as: admin, administrator, administrator1, root, super,
superuser, supervisor.
b. The password has to contain at least 8 characters, which must meet at least 3 requirements listed below:
i. at least 1 capital letter;
ii. at least 2 lowercase letters;
iii. at least 3 digits;
iv. at least 4 special characters, such as:  !\"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\\]^_`{|}~
6. If you need to limit the number of sessions per user to one, check the corresponding box (7). This requirement also applies
to web and mobile Clients.
7. Set the number of failed login attempts to lock a user's account (8). 0 – no account locking on incorrect passwords.

Attention!
When unblocked, the user is offered only one authentication attempt. A successful authentication will reset
the failed attempts counter to zero, otherwise the user account will be blocked again.

8. Set the duration of user account locking on failed login attempts, in minutes (9). 0 – the account can be unlocked by the
administrator only.
9. Click Apply.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  362

     User Guide

Attention!
If any user accounts created in your system before you applied changes in security policy are incompatible with the new
requirements, the users will be prompted to change their credentials upon their next login.

7.7 Configuring Layouts

Axxon Next allows users to configure custom layouts.
Separate layouts are configured for each user of the system. To configure layouts, log into any Server of Axxon-domain under the
appropriate user name and configure the layouts for that user. Layouts created for the user will be available when you connect
from any Client to any Server in the Axxon-domain. The layout is selected for display and editing only for a specific user - other
users of the system will not see any changes on their screen.

Note
Creation, editing, copying, and deletion of layouts are available to users that belong to roles with the Changing custom
layouts component activated (see Configuring user permissions).

After you configure a user's layouts, you may want to limit that user's privileges.

7.7.1 Creating and deleting layouts

Layouts are created based on standard layout types. To create a new layout, click the  button in the context menu and
select one of the standard layouts.

This takes you to layout editing mode (see Switching to layout editing mode).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  363

     User Guide

Note
A new layout is also created when you select a video camera that is not displayed in any previously created layout (see
Objects Panel, Camera Search Panel).
If you do this, layout editing mode does not start and the layout will not be saved.

The newly created layout will be named automatically. You can rename it later.
To save the layout, exit layout editing mode and save changes (see Exiting layout editing mode).
The layout will then be placed at the beginning of the list in the layout panel.
If you do not save changes and exit, the layout will not be saved.
To delete layouts:
1. Select Delete/Move layouts in the context menu.

Note
You can not access it in the Layout Editing mode though.

2. Click the  button to delete layouts.

3. Click Save.
You will exit Manage Layouts mode and save changes.
The layouts have now been deleted.

7.7.2 Rename Layouts

To rename a layout, double left-click and enter a new name.

You can rename layouts in Manage Layouts mode either.

Using the "\" symbol in the layout name, you can build a layout tree in the Object Panel (see Objects Panel).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  364

     User Guide

7.7.3 Reorder Layouts

To reorder layouts in the ribbon:
1. Go to Manage Layouts mode (see Creating and deleting layouts).
2. Drag & drop layouts
3. Click Save.
You have now reordered layouts.

7.7.4 Layout copying

You can copy existing layouts.

Select the layout that you want to copy. Click the  button to open the context menu and select Duplicate layout.

An identical layout is then created.

Note
Layouts cannot be copied while in editing mode

7.7.5 Editing layouts

Every layout consists of cells, which are viewing portals that can hold either video cameras or information boards.
Axxon Next offers 5 types of information boards that can be added to layouts:
1. Events Board.
2. Health Board (for servers and cameras).
3. Statistics Board.
4. Dialog Board.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  365

     User Guide

5. Web Board
Information boards are available on the layouts ribbon in editing mode.

When a camera is added to a cell, a viewing tile appears.

7.7.5.1 Switching to layout editing mode

When you create a layout, you are automatically taken to the layout editing mode.  Alternately, you can click the  button 
and select Edit layout / map in the context menu of the layouts ribbon.

Note
To use layout editing mode, you must have required permissions.

In layout editing mode, space is divided by a grid of equal-sized squares for holding viewing tiles (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  366

     User Guide

On the edge of the layout there are grid square fragments (2), which are parts of ordinary empty cells and allow adding new cells
to the layout (see Adding new cells to a layout).

7.7.5.2 Selecting a layout for editing

To edit a layout, do as follows:
1. Go to the layout you want to change (see The Layouts panel)
2. Switch to the Layout Editing mode (see Switching to layout editing mode)
Otherwise, select a layout for editing in the layouts ribbon. You can also use layout editing mode to create a new layout (see
Creating and deleting layouts) for editing.

7.7.5.3 Configuring layout cells

7.7.5.3.1 Adding new cells to a layout

Switching to layout editing mode

You can add new cells to a layout in one of three ways:

1. Drag a non-empty cell onto a grid square fragment (see Moving cells).
2. Left-click a grid square fragment and resize it (see Resizing cells).
3. Left-click a grid square fragment and select a video camera or information board in it (see Adding cameras to cells).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  367

     User Guide

Cells are added in rows. For example, when editing a six-square (3*2) layout, a column of two grid squares is added when a
fragment is chosen on the left or right side of the screen.

A row of three squares is added when you select a fragment from the upper or lower part of the screen.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  368

     User Guide

When you select a corner fragment, both a row and column are added.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  369

     User Guide

7.7.5.3.2 Resizing cells

Switching to layout editing mode

To resize a cell, use the buttons on its edges.

Button Action Button Action

Increases the cell by a column to the left and row above Increases the cell by a column to the right and row below

Increases the cell by a column to the left Increases the cell by a column to the right

Increases the cell by a column to the left and row below Increases the cell by a column to the right and row above

Increases the cell by a row below Increases the cell by a row above

When you point the cursor at any button, a darkened area that shows the size of the cell after resizing is displayed.

You can also select and resize any tile. To resize, click the button on the cell border and expand / contract the cell as you
wish. You can resize the cell only in one direction. You cannot resize the cell in two directions with the corner buttons.
If you expand a tile, the neighboring tiles contract and vice versa. 

Note
If the cell is in the outermost top / bottom row or left | right column, you cannot resize it by clicking and dragging the
borders. You should add an extra cell to the current row or column first

Attention!
If you expand the cell over the next one or several cells, they are deleted.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  370

     User Guide

7.7.5.3.3 Moving cells

Switching to layout editing mode

To move a cell, left-click the frame of the grid square fragment and drag it to the necessary position.
The cells are then switched: the contents of the previously occupied cell are moved to the location of the cell being moved.
If a cell is moved to a grid square fragment, new cells are added to the layout (see Adding new cells to a layout).

7.7.5.3.4 Adding cameras to cells

Switching to layout editing mode

There are two ways to add a video camera to a cell:

1. Using the Objects Panel;
2. Using the Camera Search Panel.
A video camera can be added to an empty cell or to a cell containing an information panel or another video camera.

Note
Cameras from any Axxon-domain can be added to the layout.

Note
The same video camera can be added to several cells of the same layout.

Adding a Video Camera Using the Objects Panel

To add a video camera using the Objects Panel, perform the following steps:
1. Switch the cell to the active mode (with a mouse click).
2. Click a video camera in the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel).
To add multiple cameras to a layout, do the following:
1. In the objects pane, shift-click several cameras to select.
2. Left-click on any selected camera.
3. Drag the icon onto the layout.
4. Release the mouse button. 
You can use the Object Panel for adding all cameras within a group / Axxon domain to the layout. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. left click on the group / Axxon domain in the panel;
2. while keeping the mouse button pressed, move the cursor to the layout;
3. release the mouse button. 
Adding a Video Camera Using the Camera Search Panel
To add a video camera to a cell, perform the following steps:
1. Switch the cell to the active mode (with a mouse click) and select a video camera from the list in the Camera Search Panel
(see Camera Search Panel).
2. Select a video camera from the list in the Camera Search Panel with the mouse pointer and, holding down the mouse
button, move the pointer into a cell. Then release the button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  371

     User Guide

7.7.5.3.5 Adding information boards to cells

Switching to layout editing mode

You can add information boards to cells in two ways:

1. Activate the cell (by clicking it) and select the information board that you want to add to the cell.
2. Click an information board to select it. Drag the information board to the layout cell and then release the mouse.
You can add an information board to an empty cell or to a cell that contains a camera or other information board.

Note
After you add an information board to the cell, you should configure it (see Configuring information boards).

7.7.5.3.6 Linking cells

Switching to layout editing mode

You can link cells.

To create a link, select a cell and click the  button on the border.  To delete the link, click .

You can create the following links:

1. A viewing tile to a viewing tile. You can link cells from the same row only. 
This way you can hide cell borders in live view and have a virtually merged FoV from several cameras.

2. An information board to viewing tile. This way you can link adjacent cells, up / down and across. A single information
board can be linked with multiple cameras. If the viewing tile is linked to Event Board, you can click an event and switch
to the Archive mode (see Switching a camera linked to an Events Board to the archives).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  372

     User Guide

3. Also, you can link 2 information panels or empty cells to panels (see Configuring Alerted Cameras layouts).
All linked cells have a different scaling logic (see Scaling the Viewing Tile).

7.7.5.3.7 Merging videos from adjacent cameras (FrameMerge)

Switching to layout editing mode

FrameMerge stitches video feeds from neighboring cameras into a single panoramic view.
The resulting video is available:
• as live video feeds, 
• as recorded footage,
• as exported video files.

Attention!
The maximum horizontal resolution of exported video is 8184 pixels.

To use this option, cameras and their video feeds must match the following conditions:
1. Install cameras as close to each other as possible.
2. No more than 3 cameras' feeds can be merged horizontally.
3. The cameras must have:
a. pixel resolution of no less than 640 * 480;
b. identical aspect ratio for the high and low bitrate streams;
c. identical parameters of lenses.
4. You have to synchronize time on all cameras (for example, via NTP protocol).
5. Camera jitter must not result in more than 1% image shift in both directions.
6. The recommended image overlap across adjacent cameras is 20–25 percent of image width.
7. Camera images must be aligned vertically.
For best results in merging, ensure the following:
1. Daylight illumination.
2. Sufficient light to capture small details.
3. No over-exposed areas within the scene.
4. Minimum video noise and compression artifacts.
5. Moving objects must be visually separated within the FOV.
6. Same set of objects in overlapping areas. 

Attention!
If overlapping areas are plain monochrome (e.g. the sky), no merging is possible.

To configure video merging, do the following:

1. Place the cameras horizontally within the layout.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  373

     User Guide

2. Link the corresponding cells to each other (see Linking cells).

3. If you need to display a sub-area of the merged video in a separate window, do the following:
a. Add a dialog board to the layout (see Configure the Dialog Board).
b. Configure the panel to display the selected camera.
c. Link the panel to the merged video.

4. Save the layout.

While merging video feeds, the system automatically scans images from adjacent cameras for appropriate stitching points. 
The resulting image will be displayed in a single viewing window. If you select a rectangular area within the video image (as for
Area zoom function, see Control using Areazoom), the cropped image appears in the dialog board.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  374

     User Guide

Attention!
Do not move or reposition cameras after merging their video feeds.
If any of the cameras change its position, you have to reconfigure the merging.

7.7.5.3.8 Clearing cells

Switching to layout editing mode

To remove an information board or camera from a cell, in the upper-right corner, click the  button.
If clearing cells in a row or column removes content from all of these cells, the entire row and/or column is removed from the
layout.

7.7.5.4 Configuring viewing tiles

7.7.5.4.1 Selecting default functions for viewing tiles

Switching to layout editing mode

Default values for video stream quality, object tracking, autozoom, and video display (contrast, focus, deinterlacing and flip)
functions can be set for viewing tiles.
After the user switches to a layout, these functions are activated automatically.
To set a function as a default one, activate it during layout editing mode (see Selecting video stream quality in a viewing tile,
Tracking objects, Autozoom, Video image processing, Selecting viewing mode for videos from a fisheye camera) and save
changes before exiting the mode.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  375

     User Guide

7.7.5.4.2 Select the default video stream for each camera within your layout

Switching to layout editing mode

Use the upper panel to select the default video stream for all cameras within the layout:

 - low quality stream.

 

 
- GreenStream. The default setting for video stream is low-quality. Upon selection of a Camera Window, the highest resolution
stream is displayed by default. After you switch to another Camera Window, the inactive camera window returns to lower
resolution / fps display

 - high quality stream.

7.7.5.4.3 Selecting the default video mode for a camera

Switching to layout editing mode

By default, when you switch to a layout, all video cameras are in real-time / live viewing mode.
You can select a default video mode for each camera: real-time mode or archive mode.

Note
This function is not available if the camera is not attached to an archive.

To select a default video mode, in the context menu of the viewing tile, select Viewing mode and select the necessary mode.

If archive mode is selected, when you switch to the layout, the camera is immediately in archive mode.

7.7.5.4.4 Moving input and output icons in a viewing tile

Switching to layout editing mode

You can move input and output icons in a viewing tile.

To do so, left-click the input or output icon and drag it to the place in the viewing tile where you want to put the icon.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  376

     User Guide

7.7.5.4.5 Configuring default zoom levels (the Fit screen function)

Switching to layout editing mode

The Fit screen function allows displaying a viewing tile by default so that it occupies all of the available space on the screen (full
screen). The default zoom level for full screen display is calculated automatically as a minimum zoom value thal allows filling the
available screen space with the viewing tile contents.
To enable the Fit screen function for a specific video tile, display the digital zoom controller (see Digitally Zooming Video Images),
click the  button on it, and save changes when exiting editing mode.

Note

To disable the Fit screen function, click the  button again.

To enable the Fit screen function for all video tiles on the layout open the context menu and select Image size adjustment.

Note
To disable Fit screen across all layouts reselect Image size adjustment.

Now when a user switches to this layout, the video in the viewing tile is displayed at the calculated minimum necessary level of
digital zoom and the viewing tile occupies all available space.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  377

     User Guide

7.7.5.4.6 Configuring pan/tilt angle for video cameras with Immervision lenses in 180о Panorama display
format

Switching to layout editing mode

You can set the pan/tilt angle for fisheye cameras in 180о Panorama display format when switching to a layout.

This is useful when needing to display the entire viewable area in the layout (two areas of 180о each). In this case, the video
camera is added twice but with different viewing angles.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  378

     User Guide

To set the viewing angle, click and hold the  button (see 180 degree Panorama).

7.7.5.4.7 Configuring display of water level detection

Switching to layout editing mode

If you have created a water level detector for a camera (see Configuring water level detection), you can see the water level sensor
in the camera window.
You can also display  numerical value of current water levels for the detector. To do it, follow the steps below:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  379

     User Guide

1. In the text field,  enter "Water level:  {0}". To configure fonts, click .

2. Use  buttons to scale up / down the text and the sensor icon.
3. You can move the sensor just as any other object (see Moving input and output icons in a viewing tile).
When the layout is saved, you see the information  displayed in the camera window.

7.7.5.4.8 Adding links to other cameras to the Camera Window

Switching to layout editing mode

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  380

     User Guide

You can add links to other cameras to the Camera Window. If you click on such a link, you go to the corresponding camera's
window (see Switching to other camera via a link in the Camera window).
To add a link, do the following:
1. While holding the Ctrl button on your PC keyboard, left-click the camera icon on the Objects panel (see Objects Panel),
and drag it into the Camera window.
A link will be added to a window as a thumbnail  .
2. To rotate the thumbnail, click . Each click rotates the thumbnail by 45°.

Note
If you add a text note to the link (see 3), the thumbnail disappears after you rotate it by 360°, and you will have
just the text to switch to another camera.

To bring back the thumbnail, click   .

Note

To remove the link, click the  button.

3. If required, you can add a text comment to a link via the appropriate text field. To set font attributes, click the  button.
4. Use  buttons to scale up / down the text and the thumbnail.
5. You can move the link just as any other object (see Moving input and output icons in a viewing tile).
When the layout is saved, you see the newly created link in the camera window.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  381

     User Guide

7.7.5.5 Configuring information boards

7.7.5.5.1 Configuring information board templates

Switching to layout editing mode

To save information board parameters as a template, specify a name when configuring an information board.

If a name is not specified for the information board (it is not necessary to specify one), no template with the information board
parameters is saved or made available when creating new information boards.
When configuring a new information board, you can use previous templates for the type of information board in question by
selecting one from the Name list.

If you save the new information board with the same name, the template parameters are updated and all information boards
based on the template are updated as well.

To delete a template, in the Name list, click the  button across from the template. The parameters of information boards
based on the deleted template are saved, but their names are discarded.

7.7.5.5.2 Configuring Events Boards

Switching to layout editing mode

Events Boards display some or all system events.

To configure an Events Board:
1. Add an information board to the layout (see Adding information boards to cells).
2. In the upper-right corner, click the  button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  382

     User Guide

3. To allow operators to hide the information board, select the Allow hiding panel check box (1).

4. To automatically open the layout with this information board when an event matching the filter occurs, select the Switch
to layout check box (2) (see paragraph 5).
If other layouts contain information boards with the same parameters, the layout with the smallest number of cells is
opened. If there are multiple layouts with identical numbers of cells, the layout that comes first in the alphabet is chosen. 
If a layout containing this information board is open when an event is received, no switch to another layout is performed.
5. By default, some events on the Event board come with audit events.  If no display of audit events is required, select the
Enables strict messages filtering checkbox (3).
6. In the list, select the event types that you want to display on the board and click Add.

To add events of the same type from different devices, enter the name of the event in the Filter field. This will list only the
events of the chosen type. To list all events, clear the filter field.

Note

To remove an added event type, click the  button

If no event type is selected, all system events are displayed on the information board.

Note
You can also add any text to the filter. For example, if you add  Signal lost filter, Event Board will display event
data from all devices in the system.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  383

     User Guide

Note
To display facial detection tool triggering, we recommend you to select the
Triggered specified detection "Face appeared".

7. Select the default view for information on the Events Board (see Options for displaying information on Events Boards): the
first frame of the event and time, first frame and text, or text only (4).
8. Click the Apply button to save changes (4).
Configuration of the Events Board is complete.

7.7.5.5.3 Configuring a Health Board

Switching to layout editing mode

Health Boards display the status of selected system servers and connected cameras.
To configure a Health Board:
1. Add an information board to the layout (see Adding information boards to cells).
2. In the upper-right corner, click the  button.
3. To allow operators to hide the information board, select the Allow hiding panel check box (1).

4. To automatically open the layout with this information board when the status of a monitored server or camera changes,
select the Move to layout check box (2) (see paragraphs 5 and 6).
If other layouts contain information boards with the same parameters, the layout with the smallest number of cells is
opened. If there are multiple layouts with identical numbers of cells, the layout that comes first in the alphabet is chosen. 
If a layout containing this information board is open when an event is received, no switch to another layout is performed.
5. Select the Servers you want to monitor. To do so, select one server or all servers from the Axxon domain (click All selected
Servers) and click the Add button (3). 

Note

 To remove the selected server, click the  button

6. To display the status of only distressed servers out of those selected, select Only malfunctioning Servers (3).
A server is classified as distressed if any of the following are true:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  384

     User Guide

a. Any component (CPU, hard disk, or network connection) is in critical condition.

b. There is no connection to the Server.
c. Any video cameras of the Server are in critical condition.

Note
Information about the status of Servers and cameras is given in the section Working with Health Boards.

7. Select the default view for display of information on the Health Board (see Working with Health Boards): diagram,
diagram with text, or table (4).
8. Click the Apply button to save changes (5).
Configuration of the Health Board is complete.

7.7.5.5.4 Configuring a Statistics Board

Switching to layout editing mode

Statistics Boards display information on the number of events of the selected type or types, as a number and graph.
To configure a Statistics Board:
1. Add an information board to the layout (see Adding information boards to cells).
2. In the upper-right corner, click the  button.
3. To allow operators to hide the information board from a layout, select the Allow hiding panel check box (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  385

     User Guide

4. Select the event types that you want to be counted and click Add.

To add events of the same type from different devices, enter the name of the event in the Filter field. This will list only the
events of the chosen type. To list all events, clear the filter field.

Note

To remove an added event type, click the  button.

If no event type is selected, all system events are counted.

5. Select the time period for display of statistics on the graph (2).
6. Click Apply to save the changes (3).
Configuration of the Statistics Board is complete.

7.7.5.5.5 Configure the Web Board

Switching to layout editing mode

Web Board allows users to view a selected web page in the tile.

Note
Axxon Next VMS shows web pages in Internet Explorer.

To configure Web Board:

1. Add an information board to the layout (see Adding information boards to cells).
2. In the upper-right corner, click the   button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  386

     User Guide

3. To allow operators to hide the information board, select the Allow hiding panel check box (1).

4. Enter the address  in the URL field (2).

Note
The URL field  supports addresses in the following formats:
• http://www.site.com
• http://site.com
• https://www.site.com
• https://site.com
• www.site.com
• site.com
• [IP-adress]
• [IP-adress]:[Port]
• http://[IP-adress]
• http://[IP-adress]:[Port]

5. Click the Apply button to save changes (4).

Configuration of the Web Board is complete.

7.7.5.5.6 Configure the Dialog Board

Switching to layout editing mode

Dialog Board allows users to view info about alerts / detection events and quickly start macros to respond.
In addition, the panel can display:
• video from the selected camera on the layout;
• video from the Related camera for the selected camera on the layout;
• video from the Related camera for the camera linked to the panel;
• alarm event from the selected or linked camera;
• still image.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  387

     User Guide

You can configure Dialog Board as follows:

1. Add an information board to the layout (see Adding information boards to cells).
2. In the upper-right corner, click the   button.
3. To allow operators to hide the information board, select the Allow hiding panel check box (1).

4. Select the Switch to layout check box (2) (see paragraph 5) to automatically open the layout with this information board
when an event matching the filter occurs.
If other layouts contain information boards with the same parameters, the layout with the smallest number of cells is
opened. If there are multiple layouts with identical numbers of cells, the layout that comes first in the alphabet is chosen. 
If a layout containing this information board is open when an event is received, no switch to another layout is performed.
5. Select the event types that you want to display on the board and click Add.

To add events of the same type from different devices, enter the name of the event in the Filter field. This will list only the
events of the chosen type. To list all events, clear the filter field.

Note

To remove an added event type, click the button.

Note
If the board has video, the event filter is not required.

If no event type is selected, all system events are displayed on the information board.
6. Configure the  information board: 
a. If you want video on the board, then click the  button and select the item in the menu. You cannot add other
elements if you  have video here. 
i. Video – if you want to display video from the selected camera (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  388

     User Guide

ii. Related camera of selected camera - if you want to display video from the related (alternative, see The
Video Camera Object) camera of the selected camera (2).
iii. Related camera of linked camera - if you want to display video from the related (alternative, see The
Video Camera Object) camera  of the linked camera (3). In this case, the panel must be connected to
some camera window.
b. If you want to display a still image on the panel, select the "Image" element. To do this, select a desired image in
JPEG, PNG or BMP format (1) and, if necessary, adjust it to panel size (2).

c. If you want to display an alarm event in the panel from the selected or linked camera, select Alarm. If the panel is
linked to any camera window, then alarms from this camera will be displayed. If the panel is not linked to any tile,
then alarms from any selected camera will be displayed. 

When you add the Alarm item to the message panel, you can also add pre-programmed buttons to evaluate the
alarm event (see item e below). It is color-coded as follows:
Green - False alarm
Yellow - Non-critical alarm
Red - Critical alarm

d. If necessary, add a message that will be displayed on the panel in case of event (4). You can select the font and
color (3) of the message. If it is necessary to display the event text, set the Show last event checkbox (1). To keep

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  389

     User Guide

all events on the panel and be able to navigate between them, set the Keep events log checkbox (2).

e. If necessary, add the comments field. Select the appropriate check box to make comments mandatory. 

f. Add one or more Response Buttons. 

To configure Response Buttons, you should set the mandatory and optional parameters (by clicking  ):
• Enter the name of the button (1).

• Select a macro that will start when you click the button (2).
• If you want to hide the board after pressing the response button, select the checkbox (3).
• Select location for the button: On the left, in the center, on the right (4).
• Select a color (5).
7. Click Apply to save the changes
Configuration of the Dialog Board is complete.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  390

     User Guide

7.7.5.6 Configuring Alarms Panel on a layout

You can configure the size of Alarms Panel (see Alarms Panel) with included videos for each layout separately.
To do it, follow the steps below: 
1. Go to the desired layout. 
2. Open the Alarms Panel and set desired sizes of videos, and of the panel itself (see Alarms Panel).
3. Switch to the Layout Editing mode (see Switching to layout editing mode). 
4. Exit the Layout Editing mode and save changes (see Exiting layout editing mode).
The Alarms Panel will always open as you have specified it for this layout.

7.7.5.7 Exiting layout editing mode

To exit layout editing mode and save changes, click Save in the upper panel.

To exit editing mode without saving changes, click Cancel.

7.7.6 Share Layouts

You can share custom layouts with other users. The user can share only his/her custom layouts.

Note
This feature comes in handy, when it is only the administrator's job to create and edit layouts. After configuring, the
administrator can assign the layouts to users/roles.

To share a layout, complete the following steps:

1. Select a layout (see Selecting a layout for editing) and go to Layout Editing mode (see Switching to layout editing mode).

2. Click the  button and open the context menu. Select one or several roles in Share layout.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  391

     User Guide

Note
You can select the roles of the selected Axxon domain. Axxon domain can be selected on the Camera Search
Panel.

3. If you want to grant rights to edit layouts, select the Allow edit checkbox for the required user role.
4. If you want to make the layout accessible only within a pre-defined time window, select the corresponding Time Zone
from the list.
5. Exit layout editing mode (see Exiting layout editing mode).
This layout is shared with other users.
These users can not edit and share this layout. They can:
1. Work with layout (see The Layouts panel).
2. Delete it from their list (see Creating and deleting layouts).

Note
Only the layout owner can completely remove it from the VMS.
Upon removal, the layout becomes unavailable to all users. If the removed layout was open on some user's
monitor, it is immediately replaced by another layout.

3. Copy the layout (see Layout copying). If you copy the layout, you are the owner of your copy. You can edit it.
Shared layouts are sealed with the following sign:

7.7.7 Configuring special layouts

7.7.7.1 Creating special layouts

There are three special layouts available in the Axxon Next:

1. A layout that displays all the cameras with active alarms  .

2. A layout that displays all selected video cameras  . 

3. A Dynamic Layout that displays the cameras added from Object Panel in Live Video mode  .
To create a special layout, do as follows:

1. Click   to open the context menu of the Layout ribbon.

2. Select the temporary layout you want. 

The layout has now been created and added to the panel.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  392

     User Guide

You can manage the number of cameras on special layouts with the layout format - 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 64 (select in the
menu). Dynamic Layout is created empty.

Note
By default, the Selected Cameras layout is 3 * 3, and the Alerted Cameras layout changes automatically depending on
the number of alarms.

Note
To return to automatic change of the Alerted Cameras layout, click the format that you selected again.

Also, you can change any standard layout to an alerted one. To do this, in the layout editing mode, open the menu and
select Enable alarm monitor mode.

In this mode, if no active alarms are present across the cameras of the current layout, all camera windows are displayed. If any
active alarms are present, only alarm camera windows are displayed.

In alarm monitor mode, the layout will be marked with .

7.7.7.2 Configuring Alerted Cameras layouts

By default, special layout display alerts from all cameras. You can limit this: alerts only from the selected layouts.
To do this:
1. Select the layout (see Selecting a layout for editing).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  393

     User Guide

2. Open the context menu and select: Include to alarm layout.

3. Save changes (see Exiting layout editing mode). 

Note
To undo, select:  Exclude from alarm layout.

Also, you can customize the layout with active alarms to show:
1. An alarm and the Alarm Management option (1). If there are several alarms, the longest-standing alarm is displayed. If you
classify an alarm, the next alarm is displayed.

2. An alerted camera in Live Video mode (2).

3. 2 additional cameras (3, 4) in Live Video mode (for example, the 2 nearest ones to the alarmed one).
Do the following:
1. Switch to the Layout Editing mode (see Switching to layout editing mode).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  394

     User Guide

2. In the first cell, add a Dialog board (see Configure the Dialog Board) with the Alarm element and 3 buttons (green, yellow
and red) without specifying a macro (1). 

3. Leave the second cell empty (2).

4. In the third and fourth cells, add a message panel with Related camera of linked camera (3, 4).
5. Link cells as follows: 1 with 2,  2 with 4, 3 with 4 (see Linking cells).
6. Save the layout.
7. For each camera, select 2 stand-by cameras (for example, those closest to it, see The Video Camera Object).

Note
In cell 4, the first stand-by camera will be displayed, in cell 3 - the second.

7.7.7.3 Configuring Selected Cameras layout

To add a tag to a video camera, do one of the following actions:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  395

     User Guide

• Click the star  in the top left corner of the camera window;

• Click the star in Camera Search Panel (see Camera Search Panel);

• Click the star in Object Panel (see Objects Panel);

Attention!
You can add tags to cameras on any video wall (see Managing monitors on a local Client)

If you exceed the maximum number of cameras allowed, only the cameras most recently selected remain on the layout.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  396

     User Guide

Note

To remove the tag, click the star again .

You can move cameras around on layouts by drag-and-drop.

Attention!
Camera windows are not saved on the layout. After restarting the client or server, you should add them again.

Note
You can use Duplicate layout to create a copy of the current special layout.

7.7.8 Configuring user-defined slide shows

A slide show is a set of layouts displayed on the operator's screen in a specified order for a specified dwelling time (see
Configuring Slideshow parameters).
By default, the system includes only one slide show that includes all available layouts. 
To create a user-defined slide show, do the following:
1. Go to Manage Layouts mode (see Creating and deleting layouts).

2. Click  and select Create slideshow.

3. Select layouts to include into the slide show.

4. Click Save.

To remove a user-defined slide show, click the  button.

7.7.9 Setting the default layout

 You can set a default layout to be displayed after you launch the Web Client. 
To set the default layout, do the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  397

     User Guide

1. Go to Manage Layouts mode (see Creating and deleting layouts).

2. Go to the desired layout.

3. Click  and select Use by Default (1). 

Now, the current layout is assigned as default.

To assign another layout as default, repeat the steps above.

To make the system operate without a default layout, click  and select Do not use by default (2).

7.7.10 Setting a layout ID

You can set an ID for a layout. This may appear useful for calling layouts with hotkeys (see Notes regarding hot key actions).
To specify an ID, do the following:
1. Double click on a layout thumbnail.  

2. Enter an ID.

3. Click anywhere in the Client UI.

Now, the ID is added and displayed before the layout name.

Note
When you hover the mouse cursor over a layout, the name and ID (if specified) of the layout are displayed separately.

7.8 Configuring Video Wall

A Video Wall is a set of display monitors physically and logically connected to act as a single screen. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  398

     User Guide

A video wall may include any monitor connected to any Client within the Axxon domain.
You can set up a video wall via a dedicated panel (see Video Wall Panel). 

7
To set up a video wall, do the following:

1. Click the  button.

2. Click the  button. The list of available Clients pops up. Left click a Client to display its active monitors.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  399

     User Guide

3. Drag and drop monitor icons according to their monitors' physical locations on the video wall. 

Note
An ID number is assigned to each monitor added to a video wall.  To display the ID number of a monitor, click
.

4. Click Apply.
Now, the video wall is configured. 

Note
You can manage video wall's monitors the same way as Client monitors (see Managing monitors on a local Client,
Managing monitors on remote Clients within the Axxon domain).

7.9 Configuring the Interactive Map

Configuration of the interactive map is performed in layout editing mode (see the sections Interactive Map, Switching to layout
editing mode).

Note
Creation, editing, and deletion of interactive maps are available to users with roles for which the Change maps
component is activated (see the section Configuring user permissions).

7.9.1 Creating a new map

To create a new map , complete the following steps:
1. Do one of the following four actions:

a. In the lower-left part of the screen, click the  button (after displaying the map, see Opening and closing the
map).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  400

     User Guide

b. Click the  button to open the context menu of the layouts ribbon and select Add map.

c. In the map context menu (right-click the empty background), select Add new map

d. Select a video camera from the list on the video camera panel by clicking it and, while holding down the mouse
button, move the cursor to the empty map background and then release the mouse button.

Note
Actions c and d are available if no maps have been created in the system

2. Enter the map's name (1).

3. Select what will be used as a map: an image or geodata from OpenStreetMap (2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  401

     User Guide

Attention!
Creation of a map based on OpenStreetMap geodata provider is limited by default.  To create OpenStreetMap
maps, you should:
1. Purchase an OpenStreetMap license.
2. Quit Client (see Shutting down an Axxon Next Client).
3. Open a configuration file, AxxonNext.exe.config ,  in a word processor. The file is located in the <Installation
Directory of Axxon Next> \ bin.
4. Find the OpenStreetMap parameters group.

5. Set the true for the  Enabled parameter.

6. For the ApiKey parameter, enter the received key.
7. Save the changes to the file.
8. Run the Client (see Starting an Axxon Next Client).

Note
The maximum image size is 4 million pixels (the number of pixels at 2000x2000 resolution). If a larger image is
selected, no map is created

4. In the corresponding field (3), select the image that will be used as the graphical blueprint of the site (if the Raster image
map type is selected, supported formats: png, jpg, jpeg, jpe, gif and bmp) or find the site in OpenStreetMap by address,
postal code, or geographical coordinates (enter the information in the Address field; detailed information about search is
given on the provider's website). Scale can be adjusted by the scaler control or mouse wheel. You can navigate around the
map using standard methods.

Note
If the Raster image map type is selected, it is not necessary to select an image. In this case, a map with a white
background is created.

5. If you use geo maps, enter the address, postal index or OpenStreetMap coordinates (refer to provider's website for details)
of the desired location into the Address field, then click . Use the slider or the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in and

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  402

     User Guide

out, and any standard method for map navigation.

6. Select users to access the Map (4):

• all users,
• current user only (Not shared position)
• selected roles only (5).
7. Click Apply.
You have created a new map.

7.9.2 Adding system objects to the map

On maps you can add three types of system objects (video camera, input, and output) as well as objects for switching to another
map.

7.9.2.1 Adding video cameras

You can add cameras to the map in one of three ways:
1. By using the viewing tile context menu.
2. By using the map context menu.
3. By dragging a video camera icon from the video camera panel to the map.
To add a camera to the map, in the context menu of the viewing tile, select Add to map.

The camera is added to the map.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  403

     User Guide

Attention!
When a camera is added to a geo map, its icon is automatically positioned according to the camera coordinates (see
The Video Camera Object).
If the cameras have a built-in GPS tracker, their locations on the map change automatically according to the received
data (see Configuring cameras with a built-in GPS tracker).

To add a video camera by using the map context menu:

1. Right-click to open the map context menu and select Add video camera.

2. Select the necessary video camera in the displayed list by using one of the following methods:
1. If the necessary video camera is included in a group, you must first select the group (the group may also contain
subgroups), then select the video camera.
2. If the necessary video camera is not included in one of the groups, you must select the list of all video cameras that
follows the list of groups.

The camera is added to the map.

You can also, in the video camera panel, left-click a video camera's icon. Drag it to the map.
If you use this method to transfer a group of cameras to the Map, all cameras within the group will be added.

7.9.2.2 Adding inputs and outputs

To add Inputs and Outputs of video camera to the map:

Note
Only Input and Output objects that have been activated can be added to the map.

1. Right-click the icon of the video camera on the map. A context menu appears.
2. To add a Input, select Add Input (1). To add a Output, select Add Output (2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  404

     User Guide

3. In the list, select a Input or Output object.

Inputs and Outputs have now been added.

By default, the icons of the Input and Output are attached to the video camera's icon. If you move the video camera icon, the
icons of all of the video camera's devices are moved as well.
However, you can detach the Input and Output icons from the icon of the video camera. To do so, move them. Then the Input and
Output icons are moved independently.
To add  Inputs and Outputs of I/O devices to the Map, do the following:
1. Right-click anywhere on the map for a context menu.
2. Select Add input or Add output.
3. In the list, select a Input or Output object.

7.9.2.3 Adding switches to another map

You can add a "switch" to another map in one of two ways:
1. Select the tab of the map to which you want the switch to point and, without releasing the mouse button, drag it to the
map and release the mouse button.
2. By using the map context menu.
1. Select Add transition to map.

2. Select the map in the system to which the new switch will point.

Addition of the switch is now complete

Then drag the switch icon to the necessary place on the map.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  405

     User Guide

7.9.3 Configuring cameras on the map

7.9.3.1 Configuring a camera in standard map viewing mode

After adding a camera to the map, perform the following actions:
1. Drag the video camera's icon to the place on the map that represents the camera's actual location at the site (1).

2. On the map, use the corner nodes to adjust the video camera's field of view to match the actual situation at the site (2).

Important!
For ceiling-mounted fisheye cameras (see Configuring fisheye cameras), you are advised to set a 360° field of
view. If you do so, the video from the camera will be directly available in the specified area:

To enable this feature on cameras with ImmerVision lenses, PTZ display mode must be chosen (see Configuring
fisheye cameras)

3. Configure the area for video display:

Important!
The video display area is not available for ceiling-mounted fisheye cameras

• using the points at the base (3), set the size of the area (left-click and drag the cursor)
• using a third point (4) to change the tilt of the area

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  406

     User Guide

Note
You can switch map display to flat while working with the Map (see Customizing an Interactive Map).

• using the slider in the lower-right corner to set the default transparency of the area

Configuration of the camera in standard map viewing mode is complete.

7.9.3.2 Configuring cameras in immersion mode

You can link video to the objects shown on a map. This allows making video surveillance more visual and informative.
The feature is available through immersion mode (see Immersive mode).
To link video to a map, use the four attachment points. Objects in the video need to be linked to their depiction on the site map.
To link objects with symbols on the map:
1. Click an object in the video. A point is added.

Important!
When specifying points on an image, follow the rules:
1. All 4 points should belong to the same horizontal plane. Place points on the floor or on the ground.
2. Do not place 3 points on one line.
3. Points should show the perspective of the plane.

2. Click on the depiction of the object on the map. A second point is added, connected by a line to the first point.

Important!
When a fourth link is made, it is possible that the second point cannot be placed in some areas. This occurs when the
system cannot find a valid angle for displaying the video and map for the given links. Most likely, the links have been set
incorrectly.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  407

     User Guide

After a fourth link is added, an angle is chosen so that the surveillance objects in the video and on the map coincide.
To remove a link, place the cursor above the first point in the link and click the  button. After all links are added, it is possible
to change the location of previously set points by dragging them while holding the left mouse button.
To save links between video and the map, exit layout editing mode and save changes. The links you make are discarded if any of
the following occur before you exit and save changes:
• The position of the video camera icon on the map is changed.
• The angle of display of the video display area for the camera on the map is changed.
• The field of view of the camera on the map is changed in any way.

7.9.3.3 Configuring cameras with a built-in GPS tracker

Some devices contain a built-in GPS tracker that transmits the current coordinates of the device to Axxon Next VMS. 
Location of these devices / cameras and their feeds are automatically geotagged when displayed on a geo map. 

Note
This feature is widely used when cameras are installed, for example, in ambulances or public transport.

To enable this feature, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  408

     User Guide

1. Create a built-in GPS tracker object for video cameras (see Creating Detection Tools).

2. Create a geomap (see Creating a new map).

3. Add video cameras to the geomap (see Adding video cameras).

7.9.4 Attaching a map to a layout

You can attach a map to a layout. This means that when you switch to the layout, the attached map opens automatically.
To attach a map to a layout:
1. Select the layout with which you want to  associate the map  in the layouts ribbon or create a new layout (see Creating
and deleting layouts and Selecting a layout for editing).
2. Go to map editing mode (see the section Opening and closing the map)
3. Go to an existing map with which you want to associate the layout or create a new map (see the sections Switching
between maps and Creating a new map).
4. Save changesand exit layout editing mode (see Exiting layout editing mode).
After you save the layout, its icon resembles than shown in picture below.

If a map is open in 2D mode when you save a layout, when you switch to that layout, the map will always open in 2D mode. The
layout icon resembles that shown in picture below.

The map is now attached to the layout.

7.9.5 Removing objects from the map

To remove an object from the map, click the  button that is next to the object icon, or in the context menu, select Remove
from map.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  409

     User Guide

Note

To delete a map switch, you must click the  button.

7.9.6 Setting keywords for geo map search

The keywords are needed to locate a site or a street on OpenStreetMap.
For example, if you are searching for a site or a street in a particular city/town, the name of the town has to be entered as a
keyword.
The default keyword is the address set during the map creation process (see Creating a new map).
To set new keywords, you need to:

1. Click  in the lower panel.

2. Enter the desired keywords.

3. Click Apply.

7.9.7 Changing map type and display

You can change the type and  display of a map that has been created previously. To do so, open the map context menu and select
Map properties.

A map properties configuration window opens, which is similar to the map creation window (see Creating a new map).

7.9.8 Renaming the map

To rename the map, in the lower-left corner of the screen, left-click a tab and specify a new name.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  410

     User Guide

7.9.9 Sorting of map lists

You can change the order of tabs for previously created maps. By default, tabs with maps are ordered by creation date.
To change the order, drag and drop tabs as necessary. Left-click a tab and drag it to the desired location.

7.9.10 Deleting a map

To delete a map, in the lower-left corner of the screen, select the  button on the corresponding tab. Alternatively, in the
context menu, you can select Delete map.

7.10 System preferences

7.10.1 Server settings

7.10.1.1 Configuring Forensic Search MomentQuest in Archive

On the page:

• Turning on the video stream

metadata recording
• Configuring user permissions for
Forensic Search in archive

To make it possible to perform Forensic Search MomentQuest of the archives of a video camera, the following conditions must be
met:
1. Video meets the requirements (see Video suitability for Forensic Search of recorded video (requirements)).
2. There are video stream recordings from the desired video camera in the archive (see Binding a camera to an archive).
3. There are metadata recordings from this video stream in the object trajectory database.  Metadata can be generated by
Axxon Next (see General information on Scene Analytics, Face detection tool) or received from a video camera (see
Embedded Detection Tools).
4. The user has the appropriate permissions.
This section contains information on how to configure the Axxon Next software package to satisfy these conditions.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  411

     User Guide

7.10.1.1.1 Turning on the video stream metadata recording

To enable metadata recording, select Yes in the Record Object Tracking list for the corresponding detection tool (object tracker,
facial recognition, base motion detection, onboard video analytics).

Note
The metadata recording is enabled by default.

In video motion detection (VMD) settings, you have to activate the Object Tracking parameter (see Setting up VMD-based Scene
Analytics). 

Note
Information on configuring storage of metadata is provided in the section titled Configuring storage of the archive,
system log, and metadata

7.10.1.1.2 Configuring user permissions for Forensic Search in archive

You need Live/Archive, Live/Archive/Control or Live/Archive/Control/Configure permissions for a video camera to perform a
smart search (see Configuring user permissions).

7.10.1.1.3 Video suitability for Forensic Search of recorded video (requirements)

For Forensic Search of recorded video to be possible, video must meet the same requirements as those applied to video for
detection tools (see Video requirements for scene analytics detection).
In addition, the minimum and maximum detectable object speeds in video are related to the camera's frame rate.
1. The maximum detectable speed depends on the size of the object. The following table shows the relationship between
the maximum detectable speed and the frame rate for typical objects (people and cars):
Frame rate Maximum detectable speed for people Maximum detectable speed for cars

6 fps 5 km/hr 40 km/hr

12 fps 10 km/hr 85 km/hr

25 fps 20 km/hr 170 km/hr

So if it is necessary, for example, to detect people moving at speeds of up to 10 km/hr, it is sufficient to record at 12 fps.
2. The minimum object speed should be such that the object moves at a rate of at least 1 pixel per frame.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  412

     User Guide

7.10.1.2 Setting up privacy masking

7.10.1.2.1 Masking faces

You can mask recognized faces of a designated users' group (role).
The face(s) will be masked:
• during Live or Video Footage viewing,
• during Video Footage search.

Attention!
Privacy masks are displayed in the standalone Client software only. You cannot use masks with both web and mobile
Clients.

To do it, follow the steps below:

1. Create and configure Face Detection Tools for cameras where face masking is necessary (see Functions of facial
detection).
2. Set No for the Show Faces parameter in the Role Settings panel (see Creating and configuring roles). 
As a result, faces will be masked on all designated cameras' videos for all users belonging to this role.

7.10.1.2.2 Setting up privacy masking in Video Footage

You can mask any objects from Video Footage viewing by any particular user. 
The objects will be masked:
• during Video Footage viewing,
• during Video Footage search,
• on exported videos.

Attention!
Privacy masks are displayed in the standalone Client software only. You cannot use masks with both web and mobile
Clients.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  413

     User Guide

To do this, set No for the Show Recorded  Videos Unmasked option in Role Settings (see Creating and configuring roles).   The
objects will be masked for all users belonging to this role.
To mask an object from Video Footage viewing, do the following:
1. Proceed to Archive Mode and find the object to be masked (see Switching to Archive Mode).
2. Locate the frame where the object first appears in the camera's FoV (see Navigating in the Archive).

3. Click the  button.

4. Select a shape for the mask: oval or rectangular.

5. Apply the mask over the object.

Note
The procedure of setting up a mask is similar to adding a comment (see Adding a comment)

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  414

     User Guide

6. Locate the last frame before the object disappears from the camera's FoV and place the mask over it. To save mask
position, click the Add point button.

7. The system automatically interpolates the mask position on intermediate frames, assuming the object's motion is
uniform and rectilinear. 
8. Check the video. If necessary, you can specify additional mask positions on intermediate frames for better masking. The
system automatically re-interpolates mask positions within the video sequence.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  415

     User Guide

Note

To remove a mask position, click the   button.

9. After setting all necessary mask positions, enter your text notes and click Save.

Attention!
After the mask is saved, you can not delete it. Only the users having roles where View masked video in archive
 parameter is set to Yes may bypass the masking (see Creating and configuring roles).

The object is now hidden. When viewing the Video Footage, users without appropriate access rights will see the object masked.

7.10.1.3 Analyzing video from external systems (Offline Analytics)

You can run Axxon Next analytics on any video file from either external or internal storage.
To do this, you need to import the video file and index it.
After that, you will have the following options available:
1. Forensic Search for Fragments (MomentQuest).
2. Face search.
3. LPR search.
4. Searching comments.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  416

     User Guide

Note
You can search only by text comments entered after the video is imported.

5. Compressed playback of archives (TimeCompressor).

Select a mirror archive (see Selecting an Archive) to run video analytics on and Offline analytics for metadata source (see
Forensic Search for Fragments (MomentQuest). 

7.10.1.3.1 Importing video to Axxon Next

To import external video data, do as follows:
1. Create an archive. It must be equal to or larger than the total size of all files in it (see Creating archives).
2. Run IP Device Discovery Wizard (see Adding and removing IP devices):
a. In the form for manually adding an IP device, select  AxxonSoft in the Vendor drop-down list (1).

b. Select ExternalArchive from the models list (2).

c. Select the archive file to which video recordings will be added (3).

d. Click the   button

Attention!
When you add a camera:
1) continuous replication from the on-board  storage to the selected archive file (see Configuring data
replication);
2) the Scene Analytics object will be created (see Creating Detection Tools) and metadata enabled (see
Setting General Parameters). 

3. Configure Object Tracking (see Setting General Parameters). If you want to find persons and car numbers in video
footage, then create and configure the appropriate detection tools (see Configuring License plate recognition (VT),
Configure Facial Recognition).

Attention!
Do not remove the Object Tracker from your system. Otherwise you cannot import videos into your system.

4. If necessary, change the mode of data replication (see Configuring data replication). If you select On Demand mode you
can start the analysis of the video image manually (see Indexing video from external sources).

Attention!
Replication is performed only to the end of the archive. It is not possible to overwrite existing data in the archive
(see Configuring data replication).
If you ignore this rule, the videos will not be indexed.

It's preferable to import all the videos from a folder at once, otherwise you have to manually remove metadata
and records from the Archive before the next replication (see Indexing video from external sources).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  417

     User Guide

5. In the Folder field, specify the storage location of the video footage that will be used as External Archive.

Attention!
The following compression algorithms are supported: MJPEG, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MxPEG, H.264, H.265, Hik264
(x86 only) as well as uncompressed ('raw") video.
A "raw" format is a stream of consecutive frames without time stamps.

6. Imported folders with video footage or video files must be ISO 8601 timestamped: YYYYMMDDTHHMMSS. 
a. If the timestamp is in the folder name, all the videos starting from the specified date and time will be imported
without exception. The video recordings are ordered according to the file name as follows:

Note
For example, if the 20160719T100000_camera1 folder contains 3 files (1.avi, 2.avi, 3.avi), they will come
into the archive as follows:
1.avi: [19 July 2016, 10:00:00; 19 July 2016, 10:00:00 + the duration of 1.avi].
2.avi: [19 July 2016, 10:00:00 + the duration of 1.avi; 19 July 2016, 10:00:00 + the duration of 1.avi and
2.avi].
3.avi: [19 July 2016, 10:00:00 + the duration of 1.avi and 2.avi; 19 July 2016, 10:00:00 + the duration of 1.avi
and 2.avi and 3.avi].

b. If the folder name does not have the timestamp, all the video files will be imported in accordance with their
timestamps. If the file name is incorrect, the starting point of the recording on the timeline will correspond to the
modification date of the file.

Attention!
Axxon Next operation may be incorrect if video recordings in the folder overlap. No error messages are
displayed in this case.
The date in the folder name or file name (or their creation dates) may not precede the metadata storage
period as defined in the system (see Configuring storage of the system log and metadata).

If you add a Z character to the end of the timestamp, the time zones for the videos will be GMT +0, otherwise  – the
time zone of the Server.
For example, 20150701T165130Z.avi. In the Archive mode, this video recording will fit into the timeline from 1 July
2015, 16:51:30 GMT +0 to July 1, 2015, 16:51:30 + recording time GMT +0.
7. Click the Apply button.

7.10.1.3.2 Indexing video from external sources

By default, indexing starts automatically after specifying video files (see Importing video to Axxon Next).
This may take a while and increase the CPU usage. Similar to the export process, the status of the indexing process is displayed at
the top of the screen (see Viewing export progress) and in the viewing tile.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  418

     User Guide

Attention!
You should not view the replicated  archive during indexing.
Also, do not run multiple simultaneous indexing procedures.

If you set the On demand replication period (see Configuring data replication),  then to start the indexing procedure select Start
import process (1) from the context menu of the viewing tile. 

If you want to index the video from another folder, click  Import folder (2), or click  in the viewing tile.

Attention!
If you change the folder, all files in Mirror Archive and metadata will be lost.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  419

     User Guide

Attention!
You can select only the folder specified in the settings and its sub-folders 

To remove metadata and video from an archive, select Clear offline analytics data  (3) and confirm file formatting.

7.10.1.3.3 How to set a folder to import videos from

If you need videos from a different folder on Server to be indexed in addition to already processed footage, you can select only
the folder specified in the settings, and its sub-folders (see Indexing video from external sources).
To specify the folder, do the following:
1. Go to Settings->Options->Import (1–2). 

2. Specify the path to the folder (3).

3. Click the Apply button.

7.10.1.4 Configuring hardware video decoding for display on the Client

In Axxon Next, there are two ways for hardware accelerated video decoding:
1. Using Intel Quick Sync Video (see Hardware-based decoding with Intel Quick Sync Video).
2. Using the NVDEC chip on NVIDIA graphics cards (see Hardware-based decoding with NVIDIA NVDEC chips).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  420

     User Guide

In addition, decoding with both Intel QSV and NVDEC is possible (see Parallel decoding with both Intel's Quick Sync Video and
NVIDIA's NVDEC).

7.10.1.4.1 Hardware-based decoding with Intel Quick Sync Video

Intel Quick Sync Video (QSV) is a technology available on some Intel processors, that provides hardware acceleration for video
encoding/decoding. QSV offloads video encoding/decoding to a dedicated hardware CPU core, providing faster results and
reducing the video footprint on server CPU performance.

Attention!
Axxon Next applies Intel QSV for decoding:
1. Video formats: H.264, H.265 and H.265 +.
2. Live, Archive modes (forward playback only) and TimeCompressor.

Attention!
If the Client shares the same PC with a Server which applies a detection tool to а video stream, Intel Quick Sync Video
will not be used for displaying this stream.

Note
Maximum pixel resolution depends on your particular version of the Intel Quick Sync core; refer to https://
www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/homepage.html for details.

To use Intel Quick Sync Video, make sure your system meets the following requirements:
1. Since QSV is incorporated into the graphics processor, your CPU must have one (iGPU). 

Note
You  can check if the CPU supports QSV here. 

Attention!
For  H.265 and H.265 + video, Intel Quick Sync Video technology is supported only on Intel processors with
microarchitecture: Braswell (only decoding), Cherry Trail (only decoding), Skylake, Apollo Lake, Kaby, Gemini,
Coffee Lake.

2. The mainboard supports iGPU (includes Flexible Display Interface). 

3. The Graphics driver supports QSV. We recommend using the latest version of the Intel HD Graphics Driver.

Note
You can also update the driver automatically using the  Intel Driver Update Utility utility.

To activate the Intel QSV in Axxon Next you need to:

1. Enable using the integrated graphics option in the BIOS settings. 

Note
Depending on the BIOS version, it may be named differently (iGPU , Internal  Graphics , Integrated Graphics 
Adapter - PEG).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  421

     User Guide

2. In general,  the simultaneous use of the integrated graphics unit (iGPU) and external GPU has to be avoided. In this case,
to use Intel QSV, do as follows:
a. Enable Multi-Monitor in the BIOS settings.
b. Connect a “Fake/Virtual” Monitor/Display on Windows and then connect it to your iGPU and select Extend desktop
to this display in the Multiple displays list.
3. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

4. Select the Enable Hardware Decoding checkbox (3).

5. Click Apply to save the changes.

7.10.1.4.2 Hardware-based decoding with NVIDIA NVDEC chips

NVIDIA GPUs contain a hardware-based decoder (a chip referred to as NVDEC) which provides fully-accelerated hardware-based
video decoding for several popular codecs. With complete decoding offloaded to NVDEC, the graphics card and the CPU are free
for other operations and you can increase the number of video cameras displayed on the Client.
In addition, if you have the NVDEC dedicated hardware video decoder running on Servers, you can get video streaming directly to
GPU (see Detection tools implementation on processors) for analysis and detection purposes, bypassing RAM.

Attention!
In Axxon Next VMS, the NVDEC chips are used to decode:
1.  video compressed with the following codecs: H.264, Н.265 and MPEG-2.
2. In Live Video, Archive Video, and TimeCompressor.

Attention!
Before you start, please make sure to install the latest driver for your NVIDIA GPU.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  422

     User Guide

Note
Please see the list of supported devices for the  NVDEC chips  on the NVIDIA official website.

When decoding with NVDEC, the following limitations apply:

1. Maximum video resolution for H.264 - 4096x4096.
2. Maximum video resolution for H.265 - 8192x8192.
3. The maximum total frame rate per second for the H.264 codec is 648 fps.
To enable decoding with NVDEC, do as follows:
1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

2. Select the Enable Hardware Decoding checkbox (3).

3. Click Apply.

7.10.1.4.3 Parallel decoding with both Intel's Quick Sync Video and NVidia's NVDEC
In Axxon Next, decoding with both Intel QSV and NVDEC is possible.
In this case, NVIDIA devices are the first  to take up the  decoding job. Then, if they max out,  Intel QSV takes over and offloads
NVIDIA's chip.
For simultaneous decoding, you have to configure it on both Intel Quick Sync Video (see Hardware-based decoding with Intel
Quick Sync Video) and Nvidia's NVDEC chips (see Hardware-based decoding with NVIDIA NVDEC chips).

7.10.1.5 Configuring automatic response when Axxon Next VMS PC integrity check fails
When you start Servers and Clients , Axxon Next automatically checks the digital signature for all executable files (exe, dll, so).
If all files are in place and match their signatures, the "System integrity check passed successfully" record appears in the system
log (see The System Log).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  423

     User Guide

Otherwise, you can set the system to automatically perform one of the pre-configured actions. To select a response, do as
follows:
1. Select Settings-> Options -> Security Policy (1-2).

2. From the Do the following actions when system integrity compromised (3) choose the necessary response:
a. Show warning to administrators only - if selected, when the Client starts , an alert will be displayed for users of
the admin.

Note
To resume launching the Client, click Continue; to quit, click No. To open a text file containing the list of
compromised files, click Details.

b. Show warning to all users - in this case, all users will be alerted.
c. Block users without admin rights - allows only users in the Admin role to access the Server.
d. Stop non-vital services - shuts down all system objects that are subject to licensing (video cameras, detection
tools, etc.). Upon launching the Client, each user will see a notification message.
3. Click Apply.

7.10.1.6 Configuring storage of the system log and metadata

The system log is a log containing system information on events, including system error entries.
The system log is stored in a local database for each server. You can set access to the system log for a user group in the Users tab
under Settings (see the section titled Configuring user permissions).
By default, metadata files are stored in Server's object trajectory database: C:\Program
Files\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\Metadata\vmda_db\VMDA_DB.0\vmda_schema; if necessary, you can place them on any available
network storage.
To configure storage of the system log and metadata:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  424

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. In the Period field, enter the amount of days to store the system log in the Server’s database and to store metadata in the
object trajectory database (3). The maximum time is 1000 days. 

Attention!
If you enter zero value:
• System Log events will be stored 0 days;
• metadata retention time becomes unlimited.

Attention!
If you have less than 15 GB of free disk space, the Object Tracking DB is overwritten - new data records over the
oldest data records.

3. In the appropriate field, enter the amount of hours after which outdated events will be purged from the system log (4).
Outdated events are events that have been stored in the system log for a period greater than that indicated in step 2.

Note
The object trajectory database is purged of video recordings that have been stored for more than the specified
storage period:
1. Every 12 hours after Axxon Next is started.
2. Every time you start the MomentQuest forensic search tool (see Forensic Search for Fragments
(MomentQuest)).
If the camera is not recording when DB is cleaned up, then its recordings are preserved irrespective of their
timestamp.

4. The metadata database can be stored on NAS if necessary (by default, it is located locally as set during  Installation). Do
the following:
a. Enter a path to the network destination for metadata database (5). 
b. Enter the user name and password (6). The user must have permissions to access the NAS. 

Note
If you clear the path to NAS, metadata will be stored in the local database again

5. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  425

     User Guide

Configuration of the system log is now complete.

7.10.1.7 Configuring Alarm Management Mode

You can set the following parameters for alarm handling:
1. The maximum allowed reaction time to an alarm is the length of time from the moment the operator who accepted an
alarm for processing exits alarm mode, after which the alarm returns to New status, and the count for the allowed time
for ignoring an alarm begins again.

Note
For example, an operator can exit alarm mode to view the video archive related to the alarm

2. Requirement for comments when classifying alarms in Alarm Management mode.

To configure alarm handling in the system, you must perform the following steps:
1. Go to Settings → Options → Alarm processing (1-2). 

2. In the Time period of operator reaction to alarm field, enter the time during which an operator who accepted an alarm
for processing and exited alarm mode without evaluating it must return to alarm mode (3). The minimum value is 2
minutes.
3. Set the maximum dwell time for alarms on the Special Layout (4). After the dwell time has elapsed, the alarm will be
removed from the layout and the next one shows.
4. Select the alarm classifications for which you want to require comments (5).
5. Click the Apply button.
Configuration of alarm handling is now complete.

7.10.1.8 Configuring PTZ control

To configure PTZ control, do as folows:
1. Go to Settings → Options → PTZ Settings (1-2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  426

     User Guide

2. Set the operator idle time in hours, minutes and seconds (3). When the time runs out, PTZ control is unlocked
automatically if the operator did not carry out any action.
3.  By default, if the user with a higher priority controls the PTZ camera, then the PTZ control panel displays the name of the
user. To disable displaying this information, deselect the corresponding checkbox (4).
4. Click the Apply button.
You have configured PTZ control.

Controlling a PTZ Camera

Creating and configuring roles

7.10.1.9 Configuring schedules

A schedule consists of all the time intervals for which video streams from video cameras will be recorded to archive.

7.10.1.9.1 Creating schedules

To create a schedule, complete the following steps:
1. Go to Settings → Options → Time Schedules (1-2).

2. In the List of schedules, enter the name of the required schedule (3) and click .
3. Set the time intervals for the schedule:
a. Enter the interval's start time in the From column with the help of the buttons accessible by left-clicking the
appropriate cell twice (1).

Button Action

Shift the interval start back by 1 hour

Shift the interval start back by 5 minutes

Shift the interval start ahead by 5 minutes

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  427

     User Guide

Button Action

Shift the interval start ahead by 1 hour

b. Enter the interval's end time in the To column with the help of the buttons accessible by left-clicking the
appropriate cell twice (2).
c. Select the days of the week to be included in the interval by selecting the appropriate check boxes (3).
d. Create the necessary number of intervals to be included in the schedule

Note

To delete a time interval, click in the corresponding row

A visual display of time intervals for each day of the week is provided on the time chart.

4. Click the Apply button.

Creation of a schedule is now complete.

Binding a camera to an archive

Create Macros

7.10.1.9.2 Deleting a schedule

To delete a schedule, complete the following steps:
1. Go to the list of schedules (under Settings → Options → Time Schedules).

2. Click   beside the schedule that you want to delete.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  428

     User Guide

3. Click the Apply button.

Deletion of a schedule is now complete.

7.10.1.10 Configuring the Server ports

After the Axxon Next VMS is installed, you can change the port range for Servers, and the NativeBL core port number (see Ports
used by the Axxon Next Software Package).
To change the NativeBL port number, create an NGP_NATIVE_BL_PORT system variable, and set its value to the required port
number (see Appendix 10. Creating system variable).
To change the port range for a Server, use the Network settings utility (see Network settings utility).

7.10.2 Client settings

7.10.2.1 Configuring the user interface

7.10.2.1.1 Selecting the interface language

When working with Axxon Next, the user can choose the interface language.

Attention!
The events are recorded in the system log in the same language as the Server's operating system language.

User apps are run in a selected language with the exception of the System Log which registers events in Server's GUI language.
To select the interface language, complete the following steps:
1. Go to Settings → Options → Regional settings (1–2).

2. Select an interface language from the interface language drop-down list (3).
3. Click Apply to save the changes.
4. Restart Axxon Next.
The newly selected interface language will be applied once Axxon Next is restarted.
To change the events language in system log, do the following:
1. On the Server, go to Control Panel → Clock and Region (Time & Language).

Note
Here follows the setup sequence for Windows 10.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  429

     User Guide

2. Select the required language from the Format dropdown list.

3. Go to the Administrative tab.

4. Click the Copy settings button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  430

     User Guide

5. In the Copy your current settings to area, select the Welcome screen and system accounts checkbox.

6. Click OK in two windows, one after another.

7. Restart the Server (see Shutting down a Server, Starting a Server).

7.10.2.1.2 Selecting the calendar type

 When working with Axxon Next, the user can choose the type of calendar used (Gregorian or Persian).
To select the interface language, complete the following steps:
1. Go to Settings → Options → Regional settings (1–2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  431

     User Guide

2. Select the calendar type that is used in Axxon Next from the calendar drop-down list (3). 

Note
In the Axxon Next VMS, time and date formats and values are defined on the OS level (4).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.

4. Restart Axxon Next.
The newly selected calendar type will be applied once Axxon Next is restarted.

7.10.2.1.3 Configuring Slideshow parameters

Slideshow mode is a cyclical switching of layouts according to an assigned frequency (dwell-time). Slideshow is launched using
the context menu of the layouts ribbon.
To configure the slideshow dwell-time, perform the following:
1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. Set the slideshow dwell-time, in seconds, in the corresponding field (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
The slideshow dwell-time is now set.

Note
Switching layout modes is allowed only for users with Layout configuration permissions

7.10.2.1.4 Hiding tooltips

In Axxon Next, tool tips are displayed when the cursor is moved over a control element. Tooltips are enabled by default. To turn
off tooltips, perform the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  432

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. Clear the Show prompts check box (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
Tooltips are now disabled. Tooltips can be re-enabled by simply selecting the Show prompts  check box.

7.10.2.1.5 Configuring animation

Smooth motion is needed to smoothly change the position of viewing tiles, as well as for smooth switching between tabs.
Animation for viewing tiles is enabled by default. To disable this option, perform the following:
1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. Clear the Smooth motion allowed check box (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
Animation for viewing tiles will now be disabled.

7.10.2.1.6 Configuring Display of Video Statistics

You can display the following video statistics in the viewing tile:
1. Frame rate of the displayed video stream
2. Frame rate of the video stream received from a video camera or an archive
3. Bit rate of a compressed video stream
4. Resolution of the displayed video stream
To use this option you must perform the following steps:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  433

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. Select the Show video statistics check box (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
The video statistics will now be displayed in the viewing tile for all modes (Live Video, Archive, Alarm, and Archive Search).

7.10.2.1.7 Configuring previews of alarm events

You can disable previews of alarm events in the viewing tile.                             
To do this, follow the steps below:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  434

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. Select the Disable PiP viewing check box (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
After you complete these actions, previews of alarm events will be disabled.

7.10.2.1.8 Configuring map autozoom

When an alarm occurs, the map can be automatically resized and refocused so as to place the icon of the alarm camera at the
center of the map. To enable this option:
1. Go to Settings ->Options ->User interface (1–2).

2. Select the Enable map auto zoom on alarm (3) check box.
3. Click the Apply button to save changes.

7.10.2.1.9 Configuring the Client screen mode (full screen or window)

By default, the Client (main monitor and all additional monitors) is displayed in full-screen mode.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  435

     User Guide

It is possible to use window mode both on the main monitor and on additional monitors. Do the following:
1. Go to Settings ->Options ->User interface (1–2).

2. To use window mode on the main monitor, clear the Use full screen on main monitor check box (3).
3. To use window mode on additional monitors, clear the Use full screen on additional monitor check box (4).
4. Click the Apply button to save changes.
For changes to take effect, quit the Client and start it again.

7.10.2.1.10 Configuring the Appearance of the Viewing Tile

To configuring the appearance of the viewing tiles:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  436

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

2. By default, surveillance mode selector buttons are located outside the Camera window. If you prefer having them inside
the window, uncheck the Selector Buttons Outside box (3).

Attention!
In this case, you cannot use digital zoom (in both real time and archive viewing modes) and immersive mode in
the Camera window. 

3. By default, the Viewing Tile elements (context menus, export buttons, PTZ mode select buttons, etc.) are displayed over
the video. To move the controls outside the video area uncheck the Allow controls on top of video image checkbox (4).
4. If you don't need to display window elements in other windows than the active one, select the Show onscreen controls
only on selected channel checkbox (5). This parameter is valid only if the Allow controls on top of video
image checkbox is selected (4).
5. Click Apply to save the changes.
6. Reopen the Layout or create a new one.

7.10.2.1.11 Configure Time Display

By default, the time indicator (see Time Display) in the viewing tile does not display the date. 
To display the date, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  437

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

2. Uncheck the Hide date on video surveilance pane checkbox (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
4. Reopen the Layout or create a new one (see Layouts Management).
Also, you can hide the time indicator in the camera window. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Go to Role settings (see Creating and configuring roles).
2. In Access to Functions set No for Unlock camera menu button.
3. Set the camera access level  - Live.
This will hide the time indicator for user with this role's permissions on all target cameras.

7.10.2.1.12 Configuring the display of the camera ID

By default, camera ID is displayed in the viewing tile.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  438

     User Guide

To disable displaying the ID, do as follows:

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

2. Uncheck the Show camera ID checkbox (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
4. Reopen the Layout (see Layouts Management).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  439

     User Guide

7.10.2.1.13 Prune Video to Window Resolution

You can cut (prune) video resolution to fit the resolution of the viewing tile. This makes sense when the camera window (i.e.
viewing tile) resolution is smaller than that of the video feed. This allows conserving CPU and bandwidth. 
Video optimization is enabled by default. To disable, do as follows:
1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

2. Uncheck the Optimize layout video to reduce CPU usage check box (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.

Note
When you enable the option, you may notice image quality drop.

7.10.2.1.14 Configuring tiles on the layout

By default, the size of tiles is  proportional to  the video resolution.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  440

     User Guide

To fix the size and expand tiles to all free space on the layout area, do as follows:
1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  441

     User Guide

2. Uncheck the Adjust video frame border checkbox (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.

4. Reopen the Layout (see Layouts Management).
The video will retain its aspect ratio.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  442

     User Guide

To expand video to all window, do as follows:

1. Uncheck the Keep aspect ratio checkbox (3).
2. Click Apply to save the changes.
3. Reopen the Layout (see Layouts Management).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  443

     User Guide

Configuring Layouts
Configuring viewing tiles

7.10.2.1.15 Configuring video display on the map

By default, the map shows video (see Configuring a camera in standard map viewing mode) only from cameras that are not on
the current layout.
You can enable or disable video from all cameras on the map:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  444

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2). 

2. Choose video display mode on the map (3).

3. Click Apply to save the changes.
4. Reopen the Layout (see Layouts Management).

7.10.2.1.16 Configuring camera sorting on Object Panel

By default, cameras on Object Panel (see Objects Panel) are sorted by short name (see The Video Camera Object).
To sort by full name, do as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  445

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. Select the checkbox Sort devices by name (3).

3. Click Apply.

7.10.2.2 Configuring how Axxon Next starts

7.10.2.2.1 Configuring Axxon Next instead of the standard Windows OS shell

Autorun of Axxon Next, instead of the standard Windows OS shell, is used in cases where you need to restrict access to computers
running the digital video surveillance system, including preventing the launch of various applications, file copying and deletion,
various Windows operations, and other non-standard use of the computers.
If you configure Axxon Next to autorun instead of the standard Windows shell, Axxon Next will launch instead of Windows
Explorer immediately after Windows loads. This makes it impossible for the user to launch certain applications installed on the
computer or to work with certain program dialog boxes.
To activate autorun of the Axxon Next software package instead of the standard Windows shell, select the Use as OS shell check
box in Settings → Options → User interface and click Apply.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  446

     User Guide

 
Axxon Next will now launch instead of the standard Windows shell the next time you start Windows.

Note
If User Accounts Control is enabled in the Windows OS, Axxon Next VMS cannot automatically start in place of OS shell
(the appropriate check box is grayed out). Disable UAC. In Windows OS 8, 8.1 and 10 you also need to make changes to
the registry and reboot your PC.

7.10.2.2.2 Configuring Cross-System Client and autologon

It is possible for the Client to automatically connect to Servers on different Axxon domains - Cross-System Client.
For this to take place, the following conditions must be true:
• A paid license has been activated on each Server to which the Client is connected.
• Connection to all Servers made via with the same user name/password combination on each Axxon domain.
• Server names are unique.
Configuration of automatic connection to Servers on different Axxon domains is performed as follows:
1. Go to Settings → Options → Automatic connection (1–2).

2. Configuring the protocol used by Clients to connect to the Server allows prioritizing reliability or speed of data
transmission (3).The connection protocol is set individually for each Server in an Axxon-domain. All Clients connected to
the Server will receive video streams over the selected protocol.
Descriptions and recommendations for selecting a protocol are given in the table.
Protocol Description

TCP This protocol is more reliable but bandwidth-intensive. Recommended for Servers with small
numbers of cameras.

UDP unicast UDP is typically faster but less reliable for data transmission. Unicast involves data transmission
to a single recipient.
This protocol is best for Servers with many cameras connected to a single Client.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  447

     User Guide

Protocol Description

UDP multicast Multicast refers to data transmission to a group of recipients. This protocol is designed for Servers
with many cameras connected to multiple Clients.
Important! This protocol has to be supported by all network components, in particular,
switches. 

3. Type the user name and password needed for logging in to each Axxon domain (4).
4. Indicate the Servers to connect to. For each Server, perform the following steps: 
a. Select the Server in the list (5).
b. Indicate the port for connecting to the Server (6).

Note
If the Port field is left blank, the standard port (20111) will be used for connecting

c. Click the Add button (7).

Note
It is possible to connect to only one Server on an Axxon domain. So when a Server is added to the list, all
other Servers on the Axxon domain become unavailable for selection

Note

To remove a Server from the list, click the   button

5. After all Servers have been added to the list, select the main Axxon domain.
When connecting, the Client will use the parameters (maps, layouts, user rights) of the main Axxon domain. 
To select a main Axxon domain, select the check box in the relevant column of a Server that is on the Axxon domain (7).
6. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  448

     User Guide

7. Click Save (1) to save the configuration of automatic server connection to the main Server.

8. To load the preset configuration to other Clients, do the following:

a. Add the same main Server.
b. Click Load (2).
c. Click Apply.

Note
You can also load a saved configuration after restoring the system using the appropriate utility (see
Backup and Restore Utility).

Autoconnection to Servers on different Axxon domains is now complete.

The next time Axxon Next is started, connection to the selected Servers with the specified user credentials will occur
automatically.
If a Client is connected to multiple Axxon domains, some of the settings on the Options tab (user interface, data storage, export,
alarm management, and schedules) are duplicated for each Axxon domain; some are configured only for the main Axxon domain.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  449

     User Guide

7.10.2.2.3 Configuring automatic exiting and locking of the Client

You can set the system to automatically exit and/or lock the Client if the user stays idle for a pre-determined time, i.e. no signals
come from HID devices (keyboard, mouse, joystick, etc.).
To do so:
1. Go to Settings → Options → User interface (1–2).

2. In the  Period of inactivity before automatic logout field, enter the duration of user inactivity after which the Client
should be quit (3). 
If the field is blank or equals 00:00, the Client will not be quit.
3. Enter a value in the Idle Time before Locking field to set the time interval (4). To unlock the Client, the user has to re-
login.
 If the field is left blank or the value is set to 00:00, no locking will occur.

Note
If a viewing layout is open, no automatic blocking occurs.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  450

     User Guide

Note
You can lock the Client at any time using hotkeys (see Assigning hot keys, Appendix 6. Hotkeys in Axxon Next).

4. Click the Apply button.
Configuration of automatic quit of the Client is now complete.

7.10.2.2.4 IP address filtering configuration

You can restrict remote clients' access to the server to a range of IP addresses.
To do this:
1. Select Settings -> Options -> Security Policy (1-2).

2. In the Filter of allowed IP addresses group, enter the IP address (3) and subnet mask (4) to set the range of addresses
from which a connection will be permitted.
3. Click the Add button (5).
4. Click Apply.
The range is now added to the list. No connection will be possible from addresses not in the list. 
To remove an address or a range from the list, do the following:
1. Click the 
 
button.
2. Click Apply.

7.10.2.2.5 Selecting Preferred Servers

You can set Preferred Servers, which will be displayed at the top of the list when  you launch Client (see Starting an Axxon Next
Client).
To do it, follow the steps below:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  451

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings → Options → Automatic connection (1–2).

2. Select the Server in the list (3).

3. Click Add Preferred Server (4).
4. Repeat the steps for all target Servers.
5. Click Apply.

7.10.2.3 Configuring export

7.10.2.3.1 Configuring export options

Configuring export includes:
• Setting the default destination folders for exported files.
• Setting the default formats for export of video and snapshots.
• Configuring export of video in AVI format.
• Configuring the template for export of snapshots in PDF format.
• Other export settings.
Configure export as follows:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  452

     User Guide

1. Go to System settings → Options → Export (1–2).

2. In the Path to the folder for exporting a snapshot (3) and Pathto the folder for exporting video recording (4), enter
the full path to the folders where exported files are to be saved. To do this, click the  button  .

Note
During export you can specify any path.

Note
 By default, on Windows XP, exported files are stored in C:\Documents and Settings\User\My
Documents\AxxonSoft\Export\. On Windows 7 and Windows Vista, they are stored in С:
\Users\User\Documents\AxxonSoft\Export\.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  453

     User Guide

Attention!
These fields also allow you to specify the name template for the exported files, as follows:

{0}-Camera ID.
{1}-Camera name
{2}-Date.
{3} Time.
{4}-Recording duration (for video export only).

3. Select the default formats for export of video and snapshots (5). You can select any available format during export.
Snapshots can be exported in two formats: JPG and PDF. Videos can be exported into the following 4 formats:  MP4, MKV,
EXE and AVI.

Note
 Video is exported in MKV format without recompression.
Video is exported in AVI format with recompression in the selected codec (see point 4).
When video is exported in EXE format, a self-contained executable file is generated, containing video, playback
tools, and necessary codecs.

4. If you want to export to an encrypted zip archive, set a password (6). If you are exporting an .exe file, you will need to enter
a password when you open the file. 
5. Specify settings for video export in AVI format: Select a codec (7) and compression quality (8).
6. If you want to superimpose captions in the exported video, select the Export date, time, and AVI titles check box. When
exporting to MKV, captions are always added, you can turn them off when playing (9).
7. You can watermark exported video footage as follows:

Attention!
The watermark settings are applied to the entire Axxon domain.

a. Select a file with a watermark (10). PNG, JPEG, BMP pictures are allowed.
b. Set the transparency of the watermark: 100% - opaque, 0% - clear (11).
c. Set the location of the watermark (12). To do this, specify the border of the watermarked area on each side of the
frame as percentage of the frame size. The top left corner should be taken as the origin point. 
The default values are:
Left   Top   Right   Bottom 
0 0 100 100

the watermarked area will occupy the entire frame, and the watermark will be placed in the center of the image.
To place the watermark in a corner, specify the following values:
for the top-left corner: 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  454

     User Guide

Left   Top   Right   Bottom

0 0 watermark width as percentage of the frame width  watermark height as percentage of the frame height;

for the bottom-left corner: 

Left  Top    Right   Bottom
   
100 minus watermark height as percentage of the frame watermark width as percentage of the frame
0 height width 100;

for the top-right corner:

Left   Top  Right  Bottom 
   
100 minus watermark width as percentage of the frame watermark height as percentage of the frame
width 0 100 height;

for the bottom-right corner: 

Left   Top   Right   Bottom 
100 minus watermark width as percentage of 100 minus watermark height as percentage of 100 100
the frame width the frame height

8. Select a frame rate for the exported video: if Do not change is selected, the original frame rate is kept;  if 1/2 is selected,
the exported frame rate will be two times smaller than the original one; if 1/4 is selected, four times smaller, and if 1/8 is
selected, eight times smaller (13).

Note
The minimum frame rate of exported video is 1 fps.

9. Set the limit for an exported video file size in megabytes (14). If the exported video exceeds the specified size, multiple
export files will be created.

Note
The minimum value is 5 megabytes.
Due to Windows limitations, you cannot export files of more than 4 Gb to EXE format.

Attention!
Zero value sets export to a single file irrelevant to its size.

10. Configure a template for export of snapshots in PDF format:

a. Select the font and font color (1).
b. If necessary, select the PNG image to use as the background of the PDF document (2).

c. Select the document orientation (3).

Exported PDFs consist of three sections: comment entered during export; date and time of the snapshot; and
snapshot image.
d. Configure the size of the sections and their position on the page.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  455

     User Guide

Note
Section sizes and positions can be changed like standard windows.

11. Click the Apply button.

Export configuration is now complete. 

7.10.2.3.2 Configuring an Export Agent

Export Agent is a service that allows automatically exporting snapshots and video to a particular Server when a defined system
event occurs.
Automatic export of snapshots and videos will start when the relevant macro is run.
To create and configure an Export Agent:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  456

     User Guide

1. In the device tree, select a server and click the Create Export Agent button.

2. To enable the Export Agent, set Enable to Yes (1).

3. In the relevant field, set the object name (2).

4. Specify full paths to the folders that will store the exported snapshots and video (3). To do so, click the button in the
relevant field. For network folders, enter the user name and password (4). The user must have permissions to access the
NAS.
5. Specify other export options. See Configuring export options for more info
6. Click the Apply button.
Creation and configuration of the Export Agent are now complete.

7.10.2.4 Configuring audio on the Client

To broadcast audio  from the Client microphone on a camera speaker, you must configure audio on the Client.
Do the following:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  457

     User Guide

1. Go to Settings -> Options -> Audio parameters (1–2).

2. In the Audio source field, select the system device that will be used as the audio source for playback on the camera
speaker (3).

Note
The default device is shown in the list in bold.

3. Click the Apply button.

Configuration of audio on the Client is now complete.

7.10.2.5 Configuring hot keys

7.10.2.5.1 Introduction to hot keys in Axxon Next

In Axxon Next, hot keys for standard keyboards and joysticks can be set to perform certain actions.
The operator's work with hotkeys is divided into 6 modes:
1. Global mode, in which a hot key is always available.
2. Live Video mode.
3. Archive viewing and search in archive mode.
4. TimeCompressor mode.
5. Alarm Processing mode.
6. Programming - running macros.
When setting hot keys, keep the following rules in mind:
• The same shortcut can be used for different actions in different modes. 
• A shortcut in any particular mode can be associated with only one action.
• Shortcuts set in Global mode cannot be redefined in other modes.
• Hot keys are available only when the Client is active.
• On standard keyboards, alphanumeric keys must be preceded by modifier keys (CTRL, ALT, SHIFT).
• During system configuration (when the Settings tab is open), only one action with hot keys is available: go to layouts (the
Activate panel of configuration command).

Note
Please refer to the list of hotkeys in Appendix 6 to this guide.

7.10.2.5.2 Assigning hot keys

To assign hot keys:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  458

     User Guide

1. Select the Settings ->Options ->Hot keys tab (1-2).

2. In the list, select the device for which you want to configure hot keys (3).
3. Select the mode for which you want to configure hot keys (4, see Introduction to hot keys in Axxon Next).
4. To assign a shortcut to a specific action:
a. Double-click the current shortcut assigned to the action (5). The field is now cleared.

Note
For some actions in Global mode, you cannot change the default hot keys.

b. Press the key/key combination/joystick button to assign to the action. 

Note
If the field is left empty, no hot key will be assigned to the action.

5. Assign hot keys for all actions of interest.

6. Click the Apply button.
Assignment of hot keys is now complete.

7.10.2.5.3 Exporting and importing hot keys

You can export and import hot key configuration files from and to the Client. Export and import of hot keys is performed via files
in XML format.
To export hot keys:
1. Select the Settings ->Options ->Hot keys tab (1-2).

2. Click the Save to file button (3).

3. Select where to save the file and give it a name.
Export of hot keys is now complete.
To import hot keys:
1. Select the Settings ->Options ->Hot keys tab (1-2).
2. Click the Load from file button.
3. Select a file that contains a hot key configuration. Click the Open button.
The hot key combinations are imported into the Client, so long as a valid file is selected.
4. Click the Apply button.
Import of hot keys is now complete.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  459

     User Guide

7.10.2.5.4 Notes regarding hot key actions

To select an active monitor in a multi-monitor configuration (see Managing monitors on a local Client), click Select Monitor by
number (Global mode).  
When you click the button or press the hotkeys, a window opens, where you can enter the monitor ID.

Enter the monitor ID and click OK. This monitor becomes active.
When a key or key combination assigned to the Camera selection in current layout action (Global mode) is pressed, the go to
camera by ID window opens.

Enter the destination camera's user- friendly ID (see The Video Camera Object), then click OK.
If the current layout contains a camera with the specified ID, the relevant viewing tile becomes active. If the current layout does
not contain a camera with the specified ID, a minimum layout containing the camera is opened.
If you press hotkeys for Select layout by number (Global mode), a window opens requesting you to enter the layout number.
The layouts are sorted left to right, starting from 1.

Enter the number of a desired layout, then click OK.

If you press hotkeys for Select layout by ID (Global mode), a window opens requesting you to enter the layout ID (see Setting a
layout ID).
In all other cases, no system actions occur.

Descriptions of other non-trivial actions performed via hot keys are given in the table.

Mode Action Description

Global (general) Navigation (up, left, down, right) Navigate or move within the selected interface element.
These keys are active only when a navigable menu or
panel/ribbon is open.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  460

     User Guide

Activate layout ribbon When this key is pressed, the layout ribbon expands,
allowing to navigate between and select layouts. When
the ribbon is minimized or a layout is selected, the
relevant viewing tile becomes active.

Activate panel of video walls When this key is pressed, the panel of video walls
expands, allowing to navigate between available
monitors. When the panel is minimized, the viewing tile
becomes active.

Activate camera panel When this key is pressed, the camera panel expands,
allowing to navigate between and select cameras. When
the panel is minimized or a camera is selected, a viewing
tile becomes active.

Activate panel of configuration Pressing this key a second time opens the tools panel, on
the Layouts ribbon.

Open alarm panel Pressing this key again minimizes the panel.

Open panel with hardware list  (left) Pressing this key again minimizes the panel.

Global (map) Switch to 3D mode If the map is in 2D mode, clicking this button switches to
3D mode.
If the map is in 3D mode, clicking this button hides the
map.

Live Video mode Open the menu of the selected camera and Pressing this key again closes the menu.
select a menu item.

Switch to Archive mode If a viewing tile in a layout is active, the archive is opened
only for that particular camera. Pressing this key again
switches to Live Video mode. If there are no active
viewing tiles in the layout, the archive is opened for all
cameras in the layout.

Archive viewing and search in archive mode Go to Search in Archive mode. Pressing this key again switches to Archive mode.

Go to the next/previous frame Holding this key moves forward/backward frame by

frame until the key is released.

Go to the next/previous video clip Holding this key moves forward/backward between video
clips until the key is released

Go to TimeCompressor mode Pressing this key again switches to standard archive

mode.

Open list of timeline events Pressing this key again closes the list.

Move to next hour Listed are the actions available while operating the
Calendar (see Navigating Using the Timeline).
Move to next month
Move to next timestamp
Move to previous hour
Move to previous month
Move to previous timestamp

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  461

     User Guide

7.10.2.5.5 Joystick Configuration

To configure the joystick, do as follows:
1. Connect the joystick to a computer.
2. Calibrate the joystick.
3. Select the joystick from the list and click the button . 

4. Set keyboard shortcuts, and click Apply.

5. Configure the sensitivity for PTZ controls:
a. Start a text processor (i.e. Notepad) and open the file <Joystick_Name> .xml, which is located in C:
\Users\<User_Name>\AppData\Local\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\HotKeysXmlConfigurationFiles.
b. Set the sensitivity for commands in <Sensitivity>0.2</Sensitivity>.

<HotKeysSchemaDeviceCommands>
<CommandName>DiscreteZoomOut</CommandName>
<HotKey>A2-</HotKey>
<Sensitivity>0.2</Sensitivity>
</HotKeysSchemaDeviceCommands>

The sensitivity values range from 0.0 (low sensitivity) to 1.0 (high sensitivity). Please see the commands that have
sensitivity settings in the table.
Command Command description

 DiscreteMoveXAxisRight Pan right (Move right)

 DiscreteMoveXAxisLeft Pan left (Move left)

 DiscreteMoveYAxisUp Tilt up (Move up)

 DiscreteMoveYAxisDown Tilt down (Move down)

 DiscreteZoomIn Zoom in

 DiscreteZoomOut Zoom out

 DiscreteFocusNear Reduce the focal length

 DiscreteFocusFar Increase the focal length

 DiscreteIrisOpen Open the iris

 DiscreteIrisClose Close the iris

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  462

     User Guide

Attention!
Do not set values outside the range and edit other parameters in the file.

c. Save the changes to the file.

Joystick configuration is now complete. 
If the joystick is already configured the specified file does not have the Sensitivity parameter, do as follows:
1. Remove / Delete the joystick from the Axxon Next VMS.

2. Click the Apply button.

3. Add and configure the joystick again.

7.10.2.6 Configuring video capturing on operator monitor

Record of video from computer monitor is performed to control operator actions. Video from computer monitor can be
transmitted to the Axxon Next software package by general protocols using external programs, for example:
1. By RTSP protocol using the VLC Media Player included into the software package. 
2. By ONVIF protocol using the ScreenOnvif program which can be got in the  http://screenonvif.com/en web-site.
Example of the VLC Media Player configuring for transmitting video from computer monitor to the Axxon Next by the RTSP
protocol is presented in this section. Configuring of the Axxon Next software package  to receive and record this video stream is
performed by standard means as described in the Configuring an RTSP Server and Binding a camera to an archive sections.
Configuring the VLC Media Player for transmitting video from computer monitor to the Axxon Next software package by the RTSP
protocol is performed the following way:
1. Run the VLC Media Player.
2. Select the Open Network Stream item... in the Media menu.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  463

     User Guide

3. In the opened window go to the Capture Device tab.

4. In the Capture mode drop-down list select the Desktop value.

5. Set the desired frame rate for the capture in the corresponding field.
6. In the Play list select the Stream value. As a result the Stream Output window will open.

7. Click the Next button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  464

     User Guide

8. In the opened window select the RTSP value in the New destination drop-down list and click Add button.

9. Go to the RTSP tab.
10. Specify port and path to the stream if it's required.

11. Click Next button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  465

     User Guide

12. Specify parameters of video transcoding and click Next button.

13. Click Stream button in the opened window.

 
After that configure receiving of the RTSP stream and its record to the archive in the Axxon Next software package –
see Configuring connection of video cameras via RTSP and Binding a camera to an archive sections.
Configuring of the VLC Media Player for transmitting video from computer monitor by the RTSP protocol to the Axxon Next
software package is completed.

7.11 Configuring Failover VMS

7.11.1 General information about a failover system

A failover system automatically prevents data loss when one of the servers in the system fails.
In a failover system, the servers are combined into a logical structure - the cluster. 
 The Axxon Next Failover system has two types of configuration.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  466

     User Guide

1. The basic configuration allows system supervisors to permit launching Axxon Next servers (nodes) on any Servers within
the system. 

Note
While selecting a Server to transfer a node to, the supervisor tries to keep in balance the whole cluster's
performance. If all Servers deliver more or less the same performance, the selection is performed randomly.
If Servers significantly differ in their performance, the supervisor may launch several nodes on a more capable
Server, and no nodes on a less capable one. 

2. In the configuration with the specified backup Server, a node from the primary Server can be migrated only to the backup
Server. After the primary Server is back online, the node is returned.
Node migration is automatic and takes no more than one minute.

Note
In a system counting 100 cameras, the node is transferred in less than one minute in both Failover System configuration
types. All Servers within the system have identical specifications: Intel i5-7400 3GHz 4-core CPU, 16Gb RAM.

This section contains the following terms:

• Server -a computer with Failover Server and Client configuration of Axxon Next installed.
• Node- an instance of the Server services. A Server can have multiple nodes running.
• Cluster- logical grouping of Servers that allows migration of clusters between them. A cluster may encompass nodes from
different Axxon domains.
• Supervisor- the service that monitors the status of nodes and their migration.
To implement Failover in your system, we strongly recommend that:
• The system administrator should have full control over all communication channels and hardware that provides fault
tolerance at all times.
• You should build a cluster from servers in the same LAN.
• Use only the network archives, that are available from all servers in the cluster.
Example:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  467

     User Guide

7.11.2 Ports used by the failover system

Each failover system server uses the following ports:
• 4000 (Supervisor Web Interface, only TCP).
• 4646 (Nomad HTTP API, only TCP).
• 4647 (Nomad RPC, only TCP).
• 4648 (Nomad LAN/WAN Serf (Gossip), TCP and UDP).
• 8300 (Consul Server RPC, only TCP).
• 8301 (Consul LAN Serf (Gossip), TCP and UDP).
• 8302 (Consul WAN Serf (Gossip), TCP and UDP).
• 8500 (Consul HTTP API, only TCP).
• 8600 (Consul DNS, TCP and UDP).
Moreover, each node of the cluster has its pre-defined unique port range (see Installation).
For best results, use port numbers from 20111 to 32000.

7.11.3 Supervisor Web Interface

You can configure a failover system in the Supervisor Web interface at http://localhost:4000.

Note
After installation, a shortcut is added to your desktop.

On Linux OS, no additional shortcuts are created after installation. To access the supervisor web interface, go to http://
localhost:4000.

The Supervisor Web interface has 4 tabs:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  468

     User Guide

1. Hosts - Creating a Cluster.

2. Configuration - Failover Database, Configure a Failover System Cluster.
3. Dashboard - Cluster Monitoring.
4. Users - Set up access to a supervisor.

To find out your version of Axxon Next and Driverpack, click Software version.

To search hosts and servers, enter their names in the search bar in the Host tab or Dashboard tabs at the top of the window.

7.11.4 Creating a Cluster

The first time you launch the Supervisor, you should initialize the cluster. To do this:

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  469

     User Guide

1. Select the Server's IP address from the list and click Next.

2. Add the required Servers to the cluster. To do this, enter the IP address and click Link.

Attention!
All Cluster servers must be accessible to each other.
All servers must be hosted on computers with the same architecture (x 86, x 64).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  470

     User Guide

Attention!
The first three Servers added become the master Servers.
The operation of the cluster is coordinated by its master Servers, which, in particular, take decisions to migrate
nodes from one Server to another.
You can have 3 or master servers in the cluster.
If only two Servers are added, they can be configured as 1+1 (primary + backup Server). 

3. If required, you can add a user with administrator rights. After the cluster is created, only this user will have access to the
supervisor. Please follow the steps below:
a. Click the Add button.

b. Enter access credentials and click the Next button.

4. After you added all servers, click the Initialize button.

This will initialize the cluster based on the selected Servers. To add more Servers to the cluster, do the following:

1. On the Hosts tab, click .

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  471

     User Guide

2. Enter the IP address of the server (1).

3. If the server you are adding is master, select the Manager checkbox (2).
4. Click Add Host (3).
5. Add all required Servers.

Note

To remove a server from the cluster, click  and then Remove.

Attention!
To change the IP addresses of the server in the cluster, do as follows:
1. Remove the server from the cluster.
2. Change the IP address of the server.
3. Add the server with a new IP address.

7.11.5 Failover Database

By default, the database is created automatically when the cluster is initialized, and its agents are launched on the master
Servers.
The database is located in the C:\pgdata  folder and uses port 49998.
To manage database agents, do the following:
1. Go to the Configuration tab.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  472

     User Guide

2. Click DB Agents.

3. The icon next to the Server indicates the current status of the agent. 
Icon Status

Launch expected

Launched

Stopped

4. Click  to stop or launch the agent, and select the required action.

7.11.6 Configure a Failover System Cluster

A failover system can be configured two ways:
1. Basic configuration. There are no pre-assigned backup Servers in this configuration. The supervisor independently
decides where to host a particular node. Only network archives can be used in this configuration.
2. Configuration with the specified backup Server. In this configuration, a backup server is assigned to host a node which for
some reason cannot operate on its primary server. Along with network archives, local archives can be used in this
configuration.
In addition, you can create independent nodes.

7.11.6.1 Setting up basic configuration

To set up a basic configuration of a Failover system, do the following:
1. Go to the Configuration tab.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  473

     User Guide

2. Hover the mouse cursor over the  button and click the N+M button.

3. Add Servers to the configuration.

a. Click .
b. Select a specific Server, or add all Servers at once.

4. Create nodes:

a. Click .
b. Enter the node name and click the Proceed button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  474

     User Guide

Attention!
A node name may contain Latin and numerical characters, and the "-" symbol.

c. Create the required number of nodes. 

Attention!
The number of nodes should be less than the number of Servers.

5. By default, the self-diagnostics service is running on all nodes (see Self-diagnostics service). To stop it, de-activate the
Self-diagnostics parameter (1).

6. Click the Logging button to set the logging options:

a. Select Logging Level (2, see Configuring Logging Levels).
b. Set the settings for the archive of logs (3-5, see Configuring a Log Archive).
7. Click the Apply button.

The configuration is now created, and the nodes are now automatically started.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  475

     User Guide

8. Merge all nodes into a single Axxon domain (see Connecting to a Node and Configuring of an Axxon domain).
9. In a Failover system, we recommend you to physically locate the footage archive on a separate NAS that all servers in the
cluster have access to.
For each node, create a separate archive on the NAS (see Creating a network archive).

If the node is moved to a different server, it will continue to write to the specified archive.

The basic configuration of the Failover system is now complete. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  476

     User Guide

If necessary, you can further edit the configuration. To do so, click . You can perform the following actions:
• add / remove Servers;
• add / delete nodes;
• activate / de-activate the self-diagnostics service;
• change logging parameters;
• completely remove the configuration.

To manually stop or launch a node, click and select the required action.

7.11.6.2 Setting up a configuration with the backup Server

A configuration with the backup Server can include two or more Servers. 
To set up the configuration, do the following:

1. Hover the mouse cursor over the  button and click the N+1 button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  477

     User Guide

2. Click  and assign a backup Server.

3. Click  and add primary Servers.

4. If you need to maintain a local event database on Servers, activate the corresponding switch (1).

5.  If you need to maintain local footage archives on primary Servers, activate the corresponding switch (2).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  478

     User Guide

Attention!
The local video footag will be created as a 10 GB file located in the C:/temp_arch folder. If the node is migrated
from a primary Server to a backup one, video data will be recorded to this file and replicated to the main Archive
(video footage) on the backup Server (see paragraph 10).

6.  If you need to replicate local archives to the backup Server on permanent basis, activate the corresponding switch (3).
Otherwise, the replication will be performed only when the corresponding node is migrated to the backup server.
7. By default, the self-diagnostics service is running on all nodes (see Self-diagnostics service). To stop it, de-activate the
Self-diagnostics parameter (4).
8. Click the Logging button to set the logging options (5, see Setting up basic configuration).
9. Click the Apply button.
The configuration is now created, and the nodes are now automatically started. "Failover" string will be automatically
added to the name of the backup node.

10. Merge all nodes into a single Axxon domain (see Connecting to a Node and Configuring of an Axxon domain).
11. Configure the footage archives operation:
a. On the backup node, create an archive for replication (see Creating archives).
b. On the primary nodes, configure the replication from the primary Servers' archives to the backup node's archive.
The replication period should be set to Always (see Configuring data replication). You have to set the replication

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  479

     User Guide

time period to Always regardless of the value of the Forced Replication parameter (see paragraph 6).

Configuration of the Failover system is now complete. 

When a node is migrated to the Failover Server, the latter creates a temporary 10 GB archive in C:\temp_arch which Axxon Next
refers to as Archive in Failover Server.

Its records will be replicated to Backup Server's main archive (see Archive 3 on the picture above) .

If necessary, you can further edit the configuration. To do so, click  . You can perform the following actions:
• add / remove Servers;
• add / delete nodes;
• activate / de-activate the self-diagnostics service;
• change logging parameters;
• completely remove the configuration.

To manually stop or launch a node, click   and select the required action.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  480

     User Guide

7.11.6.3 Creating and configuring independent nodes

You can host separate nodes on cluster's Servers which are not used by any configuration. 
Failover doesn't cover these nodes since they rely on local databases. If the host Server fails, the nodes can not be migrated. 
To create an independent node, do as follows:
1. Go to the Configuration tab.

2. Point the cursor at   and click 1.

3. Click  and select Servers where independent nodes should be launched.

Attention!
You can create only one independent node on each server.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  481

     User Guide

4. By default, the self-diagnostics service is running (see Self-diagnostics service). To stop it, de-activate the Self-
diagnostics parameter (1).

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  482

     User Guide

5. Click the Logging button to set the logging options (see Setting up basic configuration).

6. Click the Apply button.
The nodes are now created; they should start automatically. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  483

     User Guide

7.11.6.4 1+1 Cluster Configuration

Before setting up a cluster in this configuration, you have to initialize the cluster after two Servers have been added.

In this case, the primary node will reside on the Server from which the cluster was initialized.  
If a cluster has been initialized on one Server only:
1. Add the second Server to the configuration.
2. Click the Convert to 1+1 button on the Configuration page.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  484

     User Guide

If necessary, you can further edit the configuration. To do so, click 

. You can perform the following actions:

• activate / de-activate the self-diagnostics service;

• change logging parameters;

In this configuration, a local Archive (video footage) will be automatically created as a 10 GB file located in the C:/temp_arch
folder.
If a node is transferred to a backup Server, the primary archive must be replicated as a backup archive. To do it, follow the steps
below:
1. On the backup node, create an archive for replication (see Creating archives).
2. On the primary nodes, configure the replication from the primary Servers' archives to the backup node's archive. The
replication period should be set to Always (see Configuring data replication). You have to set the replication time period
to Always.

Note

Further changes in the configuration may include only logging parameters. To do this, click the button .

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  485

     User Guide

Attention!
If the backup Server fails while the system is running, you cannot stop the primary node. 
If the backup server is down, the primary node will not restart.

7.11.6.5 Suspending a Server within a cluster

 In some cases, you may need to temporarily suspend the operation of a Server within a cluster. To do this:
1. Open the Server menu on the Configuration page.
2. Activate the Maintenance switch.

All Server's nodes then migrate to other Servers, and the status of the Server is updated. 

To resume the Server's operation within the cluster, toggle the Service switch to its initial position.

7.11.6.6 Disbanding a cluster

To disband a cluster, do the following:
1. Go to the Hosts page.

2. Click the Break Cluster button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  486

     User Guide

3. Confirm the action.

The cluster is now disbanded. 

7.11.7 Set up access to a supervisor

When you launch the supervisor for the first time and create the cluster, you can create a user with the Administrator role (see
Creating a Cluster).
In the future, you can create users with two roles: Administrator or Operator. Administrators have full access to the cluster
configuration while operators can only view the configuration and monitor the state of the system.
Users can created in the Users tab. To create a user:

1. Click the  button.

2. Enter the user's login (1).

3. Enter the user's password (2).

4. Select the role to which the user will be added (3).

Note
The first user you create will be automatically added to the Administrators role

5. Click the Add User button (4).

User creation is complete. Click  to edit the user.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  487

     User Guide

The following operations are allowed:

• Change password.
• Change role.
• Delete user.
If at least one user was created, then the authentication is required when connecting to the Supervisor web interface.

7.11.8 Configuration backup and restore for failover VMS

You can back up your cluster, DBs, and nodes configuration and restore it.
By default, backup copies of the cluster configuration are created each 24 hours on each Manager Server. If a backup copy was
created by operator's command, the next automatic backup will be performed not earlier than after 24 hours.

Attention!
The object trajectory DB cannot be backed up. In the event of server hardware failure, all metadata stored in the
database will be lost irretrievably.

To create a backup:
1. Go to the Configuration tab.

2. Click the Back up button (1) and download the backup by clicking the  button.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  488

     User Guide

To restore a configuration from a backup:

Create a cluster first.
1. Go to the Configuration tab.
2. Click the Restore button (2) and select the file with the configuration backup.

3. Click the Restore button.

Attention!
Restoring configuration will stop all active tasks.

Configuration restore completed.

To transfer the configuration from a common security server to a failover system:
1. Create a copy of the configuration on the server (see Backing up a configuration).
2. Connect to the configuration backup and restore utility on the node (see Connecting to a Node and Configuring of an
Axxon domain).

3. Restore the saved configuration (see Restoring a configuration).

7.11.9 Cluster Monitoring

You can monitor clusters in the Dashboard tab.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  489

     User Guide

The following information is available:

1. The status of all cluster servers. All cluster servers are cross-checked against a number of criteria. The status info of a
server reflects the cross-check results.
Status Description

The server successfully passed all checks.

The server did not pass some checks. The red stripe around the icon reflects the percentage of failed checks.

2. The percentage of allocated CPU resources is calculated for all running nodes.  For example, for a node consuming 9300
standard units out of total of 12400, the percentage is: (9300/12400)*100%=75%.

Attention!
This parameter does not reflect the actual Server CPU load; the amount of the node related load can be either
higher or lower than the displayed value.

3. Running database servers and their statuses.

Status Description

The database server is running.

The database server is running, some checks failed.

The database server is stopped.

 To open the CPU server load diagram, click Show Resource.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  490

     User Guide

You can filter servers by status using the Health status panel.

Status Description

Servers that passed all checks.

Servers that did not pass some

of the checks.

Servers that failed all checks.

The icon indicates the number of cluster servers in this status

7.11.10 Connecting to a Node and Configuring of an Axxon domain

When the cluster is configured, connect the client to the node. Do the following:
1. Start the Client (see Starting an Axxon Next Client).

2. Enter the IP address of any cluster server (1) and click the  button.

Attention!
You cannot connect to a node located behind a NAT.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  491

     User Guide

3. Select from the list the node you want to connect to (2). Enter first characters of the node name into this field, and the fast
search starts.
4. Enter the user name and password (3) and click Connect (4).
During the first connection to the node, you will be prompted to create an Axxon domain (see Creating a new domain).
You can then merge nodes into a unified logical structure following standard procedures of Axxon domain configuration (see
Configuring Axxon domains).

Attention!
An Axxon domain cannot include nodes from different clusters.

7.11.11 Configuring automatic connections to nodes

Configuring automatic connections to a failover system is similar to setting up an automatic connection to a common security
server (see Configuring Cross-System Client and autologon), with a few minor changes.  To add a node to autostart, do as follows:
1. Select the Discover cluster check box (1).

2. Enter the IP address of any cluster server (2) and click the button (3).
3. Select from the list the node you want to add to autostart (4).
4. Click the Add button (5).

7.11.12 Upgrading Servers within a cluster

To upgrade all Servers within a cluster, do the following:
1. Go to the Hosts page.

2. Click Update.

Attention!
You can bulk upgrade the entire cluster only if all of its servers are accessible.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  492

     User Guide

3. On your PC, select the required distribution in zip archive, or specify a web link (1).

4. Select the update method: all Servers simultaneously, or one after another (2). In the former case, all nodes operation will
be halted until the update is finished, in the latter case the nodes will operate without interruption.
5. To record all installation-related events to a log file (3), select the Enable full installation log check box.
6. Click Start.
The installation package download starts. You can cancel the update unless the download is complete.

7. After the installation package is downloaded, the Axxon Next software suite will be updated in quiet mode on all Servers
within the cluster. Depending on the previously selected update method, the Servers will be updated simultaneously or
one after another.

After the update is completed on a Server, its status will change to Done.

Note
If the upgrade fails, you will see the Error message in the status bar.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  493

     User Guide

After all Servers within the cluster are updated, the status at the top of the page will also change.

7.11.13 Setting network interfaces for system nodes operation

By default, failover system nodes use all available network interfaces. 
To limit the number of network interfaces, do the following:
1. Locate the file  C:\Program Files\RaftLauncher\current\raft-settings.xml and add a new parameter:

<item key="NGP_IFACE_WHITELIST">172.17.0.0/16</item>

Use the following settings format: "IP-address1 / number of unit bits in the mask, IP-address2 /number of unit bits in the
mask"
2. Add the same parameter to another file:  C:\Program Files\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\bin\raft\raft-settings.xml .

7.12 Self-diagnostics service

7.12.1 What is the self-diagnostics service

This is a service that tests operability of Axxon Next's internal components, and launches pre-specified actions in case of
emergency.

Type of failure Action

Out of RAM Relaunch of Axxon Next's most RAM-consuming process.

Camera is connected but Relaunch of the corresponding process or micro-service.

does not send data

No events from a detection Relaunch of the corresponding process or micro-service.

tool

No records in Video Footage Relaunch of the corresponding process or micro-service.

No footage is recorded on Relaunch of the corresponding process or micro-service.

detection

Out of system disk space  Deletion of logs.

Clearing the database from system events of more than 7 days old.

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  494

     User Guide

Note
Aside from the listed errors, the service detects internal errors of the Axxon Next software, and performs required
actions for each case. 

7.12.2 Starting and stopping the self-diagnostics service

To launch the self-diagnostics service, complete one of the following two actions:
1. Select the Start self-diagnostics command in the Axxon Next Tray Tool utility,

2. Launch the NGP_Self_Diagnostics. 

Note
In a failover system, the self-diagnostics service is activated / de-activated in cluster settings (see Configure a Failover
System Cluster).

To stop the self-diagnostics service, complete one of the following actions:

1. Select the Stop self-diagnostics commandin the Axxon Next Tray Tool utility,
2. Stop the NGP_Self_Diagnostics. 

Configuration of the Axxon Next Software Package  –  495

     User Guide

8 Working with the Axxon Next Software Package

8.1 Main Elements of the User Interface

8.1.1 Viewing Tile

A viewing tile is used to display video stream on the monitor of a computer with specific parameters for the purpose of video
surveillance, archive viewing, and forensic search in archives. The viewing tile also has a function which allows the generation
and evaluation of alarm events in the process of video monitoring of a guarded location.
The Camera window has flexible display options (see Configuring the Appearance of the Viewing Tile):
- Control buttons over the video image, mode selector buttons inside the window.

- Control buttons over the video, selector buttons outside.

- Control buttons outside the video, selector buttons inside.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  496

     User Guide

- Control buttons and selector buttons outside the video image.

There are two states of a camera window within the layout: active or inactive. 
A window in active state includes an additional navigation panel (see Advanced archive navigation panel) and video mode
selection tabs (see Video Surveillance Mode Selection Tabs).
To switch a window to active state, click anywhere inside the window; clicking outside de-activates it.
A more detailed description of the functions of the viewing tile can be found in the section titled Video Surveillance.
If the connection to the camera is lost, the camera window is darkened and you get a corresponding message on the most
recently received image.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  497

     User Guide

To copy the camera name to the Clipboard, right-click on it .

8.1.1.1 Color Coding of Frames

Color coding of the frame of a viewing tile is used to indicate the status of the video camera.

Color of viewing tile frame Camera status

Red Active alarm

No active camera alarms

Green Camera disarmed

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  498

     User Guide

Yellow Camera armed

Gray Archive mode

8.1.1.2 Viewing Tile Context Menu

The viewing tile context menu is used to access the following functions (depending on the enabled surveillance mode):
1. Video surveillance
2. Audio monitoring
3. Exporting frames and recordings
4. Object tracking
To bring up the viewing tile context menu (1), left-click the video camera icon in the upper left-hand corner of the tile (2).

8.1.1.3 Time Display

The time display appears in the upper right-hand corner of the viewing tile.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  499

     User Guide

Note

Depending on the settings (see Configure Time Display), the indicator may show the date 

Current time of Client is displayed on the indicator in real-time mode: .

If the Client's time is different from the Server time, the Server time will also be displayed below the indicator.

In archive, alarm, and video frame search modes, it shows the time of the fragment being viewed and the playback mode:

1. Forward playback .
2. Reverse playback .
3. Pause .

If the video is currently being recorded from the camera, the letter R is displayed in red to the right of the clock: 
. Otherwise, the letter R is displayed in gray:  .

If the camera is not linked to the archive, the letter R is crossed out:  .

8.1.1.4 Display of Video Statistics

You can display video statistics in the viewing tile  (see the section titled Configuring Display of Video Statistics). In real-time
mode the video display statistics are shown. In Alarm, Archive, and Clip Search modes, it shows the time of the fragment being
viewed and the playback mode:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  500

     User Guide

Video statistic Parameter description

Client-side FPS Frame rate of the displayed video stream.

Server-side FPS Frame rate of the video stream received from a video camera or an archive.

Bitrate Bitrate of a compressed video stream.

Frame size Resolution of the displayed video stream.

Note
The video stream parameters are updated every 10 seconds.

8.1.1.5 Video Surveillance Mode Selection Tabs

To select the video surveillance mode, use the tabs in the lower right-hand part of the viewing tile:

Alarm Management mode is activated when an alarm is triggered (see Initiating an Alarm).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  501

     User Guide

8.1.1.6 Advanced archive navigation panel

The advanced archive navigation panel is displayed in the lower portion of the screen in Archive or Archive Search   modes. 

When you click a live camera tile, the advanced navigation panel shows only the timeline and the archive selection button.

Note
If the camera is not linked to a video archive, the panel will be unavailable

In Live Video mode, if you click the timeline, you go to Archive mode.
The advanced archive navigation panel includes the following components:
1. Timeline;
2. Playback control buttons;
3. Archive selection button;
4. Tabs for compressed and standard archive playback modes.
Tracks are marked in different colors depending on the alarm status or detection tool activation:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  502

     User Guide

Condition Track color

Archive absent (1) Gray

Archive (2) White

Archive present, alarm active (3) Red

Archive present, detection tool activated (no alarm) (4) Yellow

Additionally, the timeline on the advanced archive navigation panel features missing footage tags . A tag is displayed when
footage is missing for over 40% of the currently visible part of the timeline.
Depending on the duration of the missing footage, tags may have different thickness:

1.  - less than one hour;

2.  - from 1 to 24 hours;
3.  - more than 24 hours.
The duration of missing footage is indicated near the tag.

The date of the first recording in a Video Footage archive is displayed near the left edge of the archive stripe.  

Note

In this case, the archive portion left of the marker  contains videos shot when the camera was not linked to this
particular Archive. 

The advanced archive navigation panel is used to position the archive at a specific time, control playback, and switch to
compressed archive playback mode.
The advanced archive navigation panel works completely in sync with the playback panel and the timeline:
1. The playback mode selected on the advanced navigation panel is displayed on the playback panel.
2. The playback speed that is set on the playback panel will be used as the playback speed when playback is restarted on
the advanced navigation panel, and vice versa.
3. The playback control buttons on the advanced navigation panel are the same as the buttons on the playback panel.
4. Any movement through the main timeline is duplicated onto the timeline of the advanced navigation panel.

8.1.2 Information boards

Information boards offer a quick view of system status and events. There are three kinds of information boards, each displaying a
specific type of information:
1. Events Board (1).
2. Health Board (2).
3. Statistics Board (3).
4. Dialog board (4).
5. Web board (5).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  503

     User Guide

To learn about information boards, consult the relevant section.

8.1.3 The Archive Navigation Panel

8.1.3.1 Show and Hide the Archive Navigation Panel

The Archive Navigation Panel is located on the right side of the screen and is automatically displayed when you switch to archive
mode (see Switching to Archive Mode).

To show/hide the panel, press the Playback Panel button.

8.1.3.2 The Structure and Function of the Archive Navigation Panel

The archive navigation panel is automatically displayed in the right-hand part of the screen when you switch the viewing tile to
Archive or Search for Clip by Frame mode.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  504

     User Guide

The archive navigation panel includes the following components:

1. The alarm events filter (1).
2. Timeline (2).
3. Events List (3).
4. Playback panel (4).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  505

     User Guide

The archive navigation panel is used for the following functions:

1. Navigating through the archive.
2. Playing back recordings.
3. Selecting playback mode: forward or backward.
4. Setting playback speed.
5. Selecting events for display on the timeline and in the events list.
6. Viewing the list of events of the selected type.

8.1.3.3 Events Filter

The Events Filter component allows selecting the type of events that are displayed on the archive navigation panel.
To select an event type:
1. Click the Events filter button (1). The Events filter window will then be displayed (2).

2. Select the check boxes for the types of alarms which should be displayed on the archive navigation panel, according to
their status:
a. Confirmed alarm
b. Suspicious situation
c. False alarm
d. Unclassified alarm
e.

Note.
If you clear the check box for a certain type of alarm, this type of alarm and the corresponding track are
no longer displayed on the timeline

3. Select the check boxes for the types of alarms which should be displayed on the archive navigation panel, according to
the cause of their initiation:
a. Initiated by operator
b. Initiated by video detection tool (basic, situation analysis, or embedded)
c. Initiated by audio detection tool (basic, situation analysis, or embedded)
d. Initiated by input

Note.
By default, all check boxes are already selected.

Attention
To display alarms on the timeline, select at least one type of alarm event and one initiator

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  506

     User Guide

4. Select the check box to display operator comments.

5. Click the Apply button.

Note.
To close Events Filter, click to same button again.

Selection of events is now complete.

Events of the selected type are now displayed on the timeline  (see the section titled The Timeline) and in the events list (see the
section titled Events List).

8.1.3.4 The Timeline

The timeline is a graphical representation of the time axis of the archive and is located in the middle part of the navigation panel.

The timeline contains indicators of the presence of recordings, or tracks.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  507

     User Guide

Tracks are marked in different colors depending on the alarm status or detection tool activation:

Condition Track color

Archive absent (1) Gray

Archive (2) White

Archive present, alarm active (3) Red

Archive present, detection tool activated (no alarm) (4) Blue

Note
Pre-alarm recordings are white on the timeline, post-alarm footage is blue.

Note
If video recordings overlap or coincide in time, the available footage is prioritized as follows:
1. If there is recorded video, then red colored recordings have the highest priority and white ones have the least
priority.
2. Grey footage takes priority over dark grey.

At the moment when an alarm is assigned a status (critical, non-critical, false, or unclassified), a flag is added to the track. A flag
is added to the point on the timeline when the alarm began.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  508

     User Guide

The flag is colored according to the alarm status:

1. Green – false alarm
2. Yellow – non-critical alarm
3. Red – critical alarm
4. Gray – unclassified alarm

Note
Display of any particular alarm event in the list is determined by filter settings (see the section titled Events Filter).

Operator comments are displayed with the corresponding icons on the track. An icon is placed on the timeline at the point
corresponding to the commented frame (or to the first frame of the interval, if the comment is for an interval).

If comments were left during alarm classification, the icons are displayed in the appropriate colors.
You can scroll and zoom the timeline using the mouse.
To scroll the timeline, move the cursor on its background  vertically while holding down the left mouse button. To change the
scale of the timeline, right-click the timeline's background and, while holding down the right mouse button, move the cursor
down to zoom out or up to zoom in.
The timeline lets you select at which moment to start playback of a recording in the viewing tile. To choose at which moment to
begin playback, you can either left-click the indicator and hold it down while dragging it to the desired position, or just left-click
the left portion of the timeline.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  509

     User Guide

If there is no recording in the selected position, the indicator will automatically move to the position corresponding to the
nearest recording.

Note
You can also set a timeline indicator in the desired position by indicating the exact date and time (see the section titled
Navigating Using the Timeline).
You can also position the timeline indicator with the help of the events list (see the section Events List).

8.1.3.5 Events List

The Events List displays alarms and operator comments.
To display the events list, click the Events button.

The events list is now displayed.

Note
Whether or not a particular event is displayed in the list depends on the filter settings (see the section  Events Filter).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  510

     User Guide

Note
The list displays only the alarm events that are currently in the visible portion of the timeline

To hide the events list, click the Events button again.

When you place the cursor over an event in the list, detailed event information appears.

Note
Navigation through the archive by using the events list is described in the section Navigating Using the Events list

8.1.3.6 The Playback Panel

The playback panel is located in the lower part of the navigation panel.

The playback panel contains the following buttons:

1.  Go to preceding frame.

2.  Go to next frame.
3.  Switches to the preceding recording.
4.  Switches to the next recording.

5.  Play/Pause.

The  button also acts as a slider which sets the speed and mode (forward/backward) of playback.

Note
Use of the playback panel is described in detail in the section Navigating Using the Playback Panel.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  511

     User Guide

8.1.4 Video Wall Panel

Configuring Video Wall

The Video Wall panel is automatically displayed at the top of the screen.
The panel is used to set up a video wall from all monitors currently connected to Axxon domain Servers on which video walls
management is permitted for the given User (see Creating and configuring roles). 

To keep the panel always visible, click the  button.

Note

To hide the panel, click the  button.

8.1.5 Monitor Panel

The Monitor panel is automatically displayed at the top of the screen.

The panel shows thumbnail views of Client monitors currently connected to Axxon domain Servers on which video walls
management is permitted for the given User (see Creating and configuring roles).
To open an expanded monitor view, click on its thumbnail.

If you need to always display expanded monitor views, click .

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  512

     User Guide

Note.

To disable expanded views, click   .

You can change width of the Monitor panel. To do it, click and drag the panel border  .
When you resize the Monitor panel, the Layout panel is automatically changed.

8.1.6 The Layouts panel

The Layouts panel is automatically displayed at the top of the screen.

The panel shows layouts available in the system.

Note
If the client is connected to multiple Axxon domains, only layouts from the main Axxon domain are available.

Layouts Management

8.1.7 Interactive Map

The 3D interactive map is used to visualize the secured facility, control cameras and identify cameras' location.
Interactive maps in Axxon Next can obtain image data from graphics of the site or geospatial data from OpenStreetMap.

Note
To work with OpenStreetMap maps in Axxon Next, you need to purchase an OpenStreetMap license.

The map can contain icons for cameras, inputs, and outputs. The area in which live video is displayed and field of view are
indicated for each camera.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  513

     User Guide

Please refer to the section titled Working with the Interactive Map for further details on how to work with the 3D map.

8.1.8 Camera Search Panel

The Camera Search Panel panel lists all video cameras connected to Axxon Next VMS. It also allows the user to find online
cameras.
If you click the search bar (1),  a dropdown (2) opens that  lists all cameras within your Axxon domain.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  514

     User Guide

Note
If the client is connected to multiple Axxon domains, cameras from the main Axxon domain are listed by default. To find
cameras from another Axxon domain, select the domain from the dropdown list (3).

To search for a specific camera, enter its full  name or part of it into the search bar.

If you click a camera, a layout opens with the minimum number of cells for displaying the selected camera views.

Note
If the current layout contains the selected camera, the relevant viewing tile becomes active.

If there is no layout with the selected video camera, a new layout with a single cell is created.
To open the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel), click the

 button.

8.1.9 Alarms Panel

Alarms Panel allows users to view and manage alerts / detection events.
Alarms Panel displays video footage for all alerts / detection events in individual Event Preview tiles.

Alarms Panel is at the top of the screen. The default setting is Auto Hide. To open Alarms Panel, click the  button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  515

     User Guide

The panel opens downwards, occupying a vertical strip on the screen. You can stretch or shrink it from  10% to 50% of the screen
height.
To resize the panel, left-click the Alarms button and hold and drag the  pointer up or down.

You can also  expand the panel to full screen. This will hide the camera views (layout). To do so, click the  button.

You can resize thumbnails of video fragments displayed on the panel.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  516

     User Guide

You can do this when the size of the panel is exceeds  the minimum size (10% of the screen height).

To resize Event Previews, use the slider  in the bottom left corner of the panel - .

To hide the panel, click the  button.

8.1.10 Objects Panel

If you have permissions, Objects Panel displays cameras from all servers in the Axxon domain.

Note
If the Client is connected to multiple Axxon domains, you can see cameras from all  Axxon domains according to your
permissions.

To open this panel, click the  button in the upper left corner of the screen.

Note
On Object Panel, the cameras can be sorted either by name or by a short name (see Configuring camera sorting on
Object Panel).

The object tree on the panel can be represented as Servers (1), Groups (2) and Layouts (3). 
If you select a camera on the panel, a layout opens with the minimum number of cells for displaying the selected camera views
(see Camera Search Panel).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  517

     User Guide

Note
The search results are displayed in the Objects Panel dynamically — as users type and refine their queries.

To lock the panel, click the 

button in its bottom left corner. Press the

 button to unlock the panel.

You can resize the Objects Panel according to your needs. To do this, left-click and drag the right border of the panel.

To hide the panel, click the  button.

8.1.11 The PTZ Control Panel

The PTZ control panel is displayed automatically in the right-hand part of the screen when the viewing tile of a PTZ camera is
activated in Live Video mode.

Note
The PTZ control panel is displayed only if the  PTZ object for the particular video camera is enabled (see the section
titled The PTZ Object).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  518

     User Guide

 
The PTZ control panel is used for the following functions:
1. Controlling PTZ video cameras.
2. Setting and switching to camera presets.
3. Launching/stopping PTZ tours.
4. Launching/stopping patrolling.
The PTZ control panel includes the following interface elements:
1. Presets list.
2. PTZ tours list.
3. Dialer
4. PTZ controls for iris, focus, and optical zoom

Note
If a camera does not support a function, the controls for this function cannot be accessed

5. Virtual 3D joystick

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  519

     User Guide

Note
The type of virtual 3D joystick and adjustment scale depend on the type of PTZ cameras: discrete or continuous
control of Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Focus, and Iris.

6. Patrol button

Note
Use of the dialer, PTZ controls, joystick, and patrol button is described in the section Controlling a PTZ Camera.

8.1.12 Story board

The Story board becomes available after you set a time interval on the timeline (see Standard video export).

To open the board, click the corresponding button. 

In the Story board, you can check all videos related to an incident to export them with one click (see Exporting all event videoss).

To hide the board, click once more the Story board button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  520

     User Guide

8.2 Video Surveillance

8.2.1 Video Surveillance Modes

The video image from a video camera is displayed on the computer monitor through the Client’s interface objects, namely the
video surveillance monitor and the viewing tile.

There are four modes for working with a viewing tile:

1. Live Video mode
2. Alarm Management mode
3. Archive mode
4. Archive Search mode

Note
Alarm Management mode is available if an alarm has been initiated in the system.

8.2.2 Functions Available in All Video Surveillance Modes

The following video surveillance functions are available in all video surveillance modes:
1. Selecting a video camera.
2. Scaling the viewing tile.
3. Digitally zooming video images.
4. Processing video images.
5. Rotating video Images.
6. Tracking objects.
7. Operator comments.
8. Viewing titles from POS terminals.
9. Partial decoding of video.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  521

     User Guide

8.2.2.1 Scaling the Viewing Tile

The scale of the viewing tile can be adjusted.
This can be done in one of three ways:
1. Using the buttons in the upper right-hand part of the active viewing tile.
2. Using the buttons in the top panel.
3. Using the mouse.
If you click a viewing tile, you can see  size control buttons on the right-hand side. 

1.  — increases the size of the viewing tile by one step;

2.  — resets the size of the viewing tile.

When a viewing tile is enlarged, the scale of the entire layout is increased. Some of the cells are moved off the screen.
Viewing tiles are enlarged as follows:
1. If a viewing tile occupies 100% of any of the sides of the layout (maximum viewing tile size), it cannot be enlarged.
2. If a viewing tile occupies 50% or more (but not 100%) of any of the sides of the layout, it is enlarged as much as possible.
3. If a viewing tile occupies less than 50% on both sides of the layout, it is enlarged in two steps: the first step enlarges the
viewing tile to 50% on the corresponding side of the layout and the second step enlarges the viewing tile to the maximum
size.

Note
The third case applies to layouts that contain nine or more cells

If a viewing tile is linked to another one or an information board, at the first enlargement step (to 50%), the viewing tile and the
other tile / information board are displayed together and occupy all of the screen on one side. 

Note
In this case, the first step takes into account the total size of the related cells: the related cells must be less than 50% of
both sides of the layout

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  522

     User Guide

Also, if you click a viewing tile, you can control its size with the buttons on the top panel:

1.  - Resets the size of the viewing tile.

2.  - Resizes the tile up to 50% on one side of the layout.

3.  - Maximizes the size of the viewing tile.

How to resize the camera window using a mouse:
1. In full screen mode, click anywhere to minimize the window. 
2. Otherwise, double click inside the window to display it in full screen mode.

8.2.2.2 Digitally Zooming Video Images

Digital zooming in a video image enables a gradual increase in the magnification of a video image without changing the
dimensions of the viewing tile.
The video image can be enlarged using the following tools:
1. Digital zoom scale
2. Area selection
3. Mouse scroll wheel

8.2.2.2.1 Enlarging a video image using the digital zoom scale

To display the digital zoom scale on the viewing tile screen, select Show digital zoom in the context menu of the viewing tile.
Displaying the zoom control:

 
Digital zoom scale:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  523

     User Guide

To enlarge a video image, left-click the slider and hold and drag the digital zoom scale up to the desired value. The maximum
zoom is 16x. To return back to the original image, move the slider back to its original position.
To hide the digital zoom scale, select Hide digital zoom in the context menu of the viewing tile. Also, 3 seconds after you scale
down the video image to the minimum, the zoom scale will automatically hide.

After hiding the digital zoom scale, the selected zoom level of the image will be preserved when switching between image
viewing modes.

8.2.2.2.2 Enlarging a video image through area selection

To enlarge a video image, select the area of the image that you would like to enlarge.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  524

     User Guide

You can select an area by doing the following:

1. Click and hold down the left mouse button inside the viewing tile.
2. Move the mouse cursor to the desired position.
3. Release the left mouse button.
Once you have completed the above actions, the selected area will be displayed across the entire viewing tile.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  525

     User Guide

Note
If you select an area that requires a zoom of more than 16x to display, it will be marked with a red frame. The video
image will not be enlarged.

8.2.2.2.3 Enlarging a video image using the mouse scroll wheel

When using the mouse scroll wheel, the video image is enlarged relative to the mouse cursor. A description of this process is
provided in the table below.

Action Executed function

Mouse wheel is scrolled forward by one level The video image is enlarged by 2x

Mouse wheel is scrolled backward by one level The video image is reduced by 2x

8.2.2.3 Video image processing

In Axxon Next, the video image processing functions implemented in the viewing tile enhance the performance and convenience
of using the video surveillance system.
The following video image processing functions are available from the viewing tile:
1. Contrast
2. Sharpness
3. Deinterlacing

To enable video image processing functions, use the Visualization option in the context menu of the viewing tile. Only one image
processing function can be enabled at a time.

8.2.2.3.1 Changing the Contrast Level

An Axxon Next operator is granted access to adjust the contrast of a video image.
To adjust the contrast, select the Contrast option in the Visualization context menu.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  526

     User Guide

An example of the Contrast function is given in the following image.

To return to the original image, reselect the Contrast option in the Visualization context menu.

8.2.2.3.2 Setting the Sharpness Level

An Axxon Next operator is granted access to adjust the sharpness of a video image.
To adjust the sharpness, select the Sharpness option in the Visualization context menu.

The image in the following picture shows an example of use of the Sharpness tool.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  527

     User Guide

To return to the original image, use the Sharpness function again.

8.2.2.3.3 Using Deinterlacing

The Deinterlacing tool is used to correct tooth-type distortions (also called "combing artifacts"), which appear on the borders of
video image fragments when objects move quickly relative to the background.
An example of a combing artifact is shown in the picture below.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  528

     User Guide

To utilize this tool, select the Deinterlace option in the Visualization context menu.

The image in the viewing tile will then be corrected.

To disable Deinterlacing, reselect the Deinterlace option.

8.2.2.4 Rotate Video Image

You can rotate a video 90 °, 180 ° or 270 ° degrees.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  529

     User Guide

Note
If you enable video rotation,  only video in Live Video and Archive modes is rotated:
• NA (not applicable) for video display on the map and on the alarms.
• NA to recording for archives.
• NA for export.
• NA for analytics (metadata).

To rotate video, complete the following steps:

1. In the viewing tile context menu, select Visualization.

2. Select the angle of rotation (clockwise).

Video rotation is now complete.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  530

     User Guide

To disable video rotation, select Visualization-> Disable rotation in the viewing tile context menu.

8.2.2.5 Tracking objects

Object tracking allows a user to visually track the movement of objects in a camera's field of view or in a video recording in an
archive.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  531

     User Guide

Attention!
Object Tracking is available if:
1. the object tracker is activated for this camera (see General information on Scene Analytics);
2. the Video Motion Detection tool is activated (see Configuring VMD);
3. at least one of the Embedded Analytic tools is activated (see Embedded Detection Tools).

Object tracking performs the following functions:

1. Recognizes the presence of a moving object and dynamically marks it with a transparent rectangle on the video image.
2. Displays the trajectory of the object's movement.
Motion is detected based on the time gradient of the video image’s difference between frames.
To enable object tracking, select Show tracking in the viewing tile context menu.

Object tracking functions will now be activated.

To disable object tracking, click Hide tracking in the viewing tile context menu..
If you have created a situation analysis tool for this video camera (see Functions of Scene Analytics), then you can see the
detection parameters (areas, lines) in Live Video mode along with object tracking in the camera window.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  532

     User Guide

Note
Areas to be excluded from surveillance are outlined in dotted black and green line while detection areas are outlined in
black and gray.

If an ANPR detection tool has been created for a camera, the license plates within the video image will be outlined (see Automatic
Number Plate Recognition (LPR/ANPR) tools).

Attention!
To ensure correct display of the outline, set the camera's Video Buffering parameter with the range of 500–1000 (see
The Video Camera Object).

If a face detection tool has been created for a camera, all faces within the video image will be outlined.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  533

     User Guide

If a pose detection tool (see Configure Pose Detection) has been created for a camera, a human skeleton is highlighted over the
video image.

8.2.2.6 Operator comments

Operator comments on past or ongoing events allow a more complete understanding about the situation at the site.
Comments are displayed during playback (see Viewing recorded video with operator comments) and are marked with tags on the
timeline (see The Timeline). Comments can also be searched (see Searching comments).

8.2.2.6.1 Adding comments in different surveillance modes

In Archive and Archive Analysis modes, comments can be added both for specific frames and for intervals of time.
To add a comment for an interval, select an interval on the timeline, place the timeline indicator either inside the interval or at

one border of it, and click the  button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  534

     User Guide

Note

If comments are added during playback in Archive or Archive Analysis mode, playback is paused after the  button is
clicked.

In Alarm Management mode, operators can be required to give comments after classifying an event (see Configuring Alarm

Management Mode) or comments can be left in free form, before event classification, by clicking the  button. The comment
applies to the entire duration of the alarm.

8.2.2.6.2 Adding a comment

To add a comment, click the  button. A dialog box opens for entering a comment.

The number of characters in the comment is limited.

The following parameters can be configured:
1. Position of comment in the frame (the window with the comment is movable by dragging the window title).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  535

     User Guide

2. Transparency of comment window, by adjusting the  slider from left to right (from opaque to maximum
transparency).
3. Marking the area of interest in the frame, with a dot ( ), semicircle ( ), or rectangle ( ). To do so:
1. Click the relevant button and then click anywhere in the frame. The selected element is displayed.

2. Drag the element to the necessary place in the frame. To do so, left-click and drag the edge of the area (or for a dot, click
and drag the dot).
3. Set the size by dragging the corner points.

To save the comment, click the Save button. Otherwise, click  to cancel.
After being saved, a comment is displayed in the frame as specified. To delete the comment, before you perform any other
command in the system, click the  button..

8.2.2.7 Viewing titles from POS terminals

If you have configured the titles overlay, the video tiles show titles superimposed on video (see Configuring titles view).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  536

     User Guide

You can have titles from several POS terminals in the same camera window.

Note
Keywords or lines can be highlighted according to the settings (see Configuring keywords).

If you view recorded video, titles are synced by time.

Note
With  certain captions' output settings (the Duration parameter = 0, see Configuring titles view) and low-intensity
events at the checkout, you may have a time lag between the captions displayed and the video time stamp. 

To disable titles overlay, select Event Sources in the context menu of the viewing tile and a POS terminal that you want to hide.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  537

     User Guide

8.2.2.8 Partial decoding of video

Video encoding / compression is a digital video processing technique aimed at reducing the bit rate of streamed video and
bandwidth consumption. Video is compressed according to a specific software algorithm - codec.
To compress video signals from IP-devices, standard codecs such as MPEG-4 or vendors' proprietary codecs are used.
Before displaying the compressed video signal on screen, it is automatically decompressed. 
If the resolution of a viewing tile is lower than that of compressed video, only part of the video stream is decoded. This reduces
CPU load on Axxon Next clients. Partial decoding does not affect bandwidth requirements.  Partial decoding works with MPEG-2,
MJPEG and MxPEG. 

8.2.3 Real-time video surveillance

8.2.3.1 Switching to Live Video Mode

To switch the Camera Window from a different surveillance mode to Live Video viewing mode, click the Live tab in the lower-right
corner.

The viewing tile will then appear in Live Video mode.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  538

     User Guide

8.2.3.2 Video Surveillance Functions Available in Live Video Mode

In Live Video mode, the following video surveillance functions are accessible:
1. Selecting video stream quality in a viewing tile.
2. Autozoom.
3. Functions for tracking of moving objects.
4. Arming/disarming a video camera.
5. Controlling a PTZ Camera.
6. Controlling outputs.
7. Displaying the input status.
8. Autoreplace offline cameras on layouts.
9. Snapshot.
10. Functions Available in All Video Surveillance Modes.

8.2.3.3 Arming and Disarming a Video Camera

In Axxon Next, a video camera is armed via all the detection tools registered for that video camera.
To arm a camera, select one of the following two parameters in the context menu of the viewing tile:
1. Arm (1). In this case, the camera will be available to all users who have access to it.
2. Arm in private (2). In this case, the camera will not be available to the users with the  Live in Armed mode. 

To disarm a camera , select Disarm in the context menu of the viewing tile. The video camera will then be disarmed.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  539

     User Guide

8.2.3.4 Controlling a PTZ Camera

PTZ video camera can be controlled with the PTZ Control Panel or directly in the Viewing Tile (see Controlling a PTZ Video
Camera in the OnScreen PTZ Mode, Control using Areazoom, Control using Point&Click).
The user gains access to this panel when the viewing tile of a video camera in Live Video mode that supports a PTZ control
interface is selected.

Attention!
PTZ camera is controlled in accordance with the priority settings (see Creating and configuring roles). If multiple users
have the same control priority, they can control a PTZ camera simultaneously.
If the user with higher priority controls the PTZ camera with the the PTZ control panel (as long as the camera is
selected) users with a lower priority can not control it.  If the user with higher priority controls the PTZ camera, the
relevant information is displayed on the panel.

If you disabled the option to simultaneously control a PTZ camera by multiple users, users with the same priority take
over the control on a first-come, first-served basis.
However, a user with equal or higher priority can take over the PTZ control. To do this, click the Take Control button.
If the user that controls the PTZ camera is idle a certain time (see Configuring PTZ control), it is automatically unlocked
and the control becomes available to all users.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  540

     User Guide

The following actions can be performed using the PTZ device control panel:
1. Use presets.
2. Modify the parameters of the iris, focus, and optical zoom.
3. Modify the horizontal and vertical tilt angle of the video camera.
4. Starting/stopping patrol mode.

Note
Setting presets is described in detail in the section The PTZ Control Panel.

8.2.3.4.1 Presets

8.2.3.4.1.1 Creating and editing presets

The presets list created for a selected video camera is displayed in the upper part of the PTZ control panel in the
 tab.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  541

     User Guide

For each preset in the list, the following parameters are displayed:
1. The identification number
2. A descriptive name
The presets list is used for the following functions:
1. Creating presets.
2. Editing the identification number and name of an existing preset.
3. Deleting presets.
4. Switching to a preset.
You can create up to 100 presets with numbers from 0 to 99. To create a preset, you must perform the following steps:
1. Place the PTZ camera in the position which is to be saved as a preset.

2. Click . Fields for entering an identification number and a descriptive name for the preset will then appear.

3. Fill in these fields as desired.

Attention!
If a preset with the identification number entered already exists, its parameters, as well as the corresponding
PTZ camera position, will be overwritten.

4. Left-click anywhere in the presets list and press Enter to save changes.
Creation of a preset is now complete.
To edit the number and name of an existing preset, you must perform the following steps:
1. Highlight the desired preset in the list.

2. Click . The identification number and descriptive name fields will then become accessible for editing.
3. Modify the preset number and/or name as desired.
4. Left-click anywhere in the presets list to save changes.
Editing of the preset is now complete.
To delete an existing preset, you must perform the following steps:
1. Highlight the desired preset in the list.

2. Click .
The preset has now been deleted.
To switch to a preset, left-click the corresponding line in the presets list. The camera will then be switched to the desired
position.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  542

     User Guide

Note
See the section Selecting a preset.

8.2.3.4.1.2 Selecting a preset

To switch a PTZ camera to a preset, you can use the presets list. To do this, left-click the corresponding line in the given presets
list.

To switch a PTZ camera to a preset, you can use the Enter number panel. To display the Enter number panel, click the Enter
number button.

To switch to a preset using the Enter number panel, you must perform the following steps:
1. Using the numeric buttons (0-9), enter the number of the preset to which you want to switch.
The entered number is displayed in a special field.
To delete the last digit entered, click the  button.

2. Click the  button to switch to the preset with the number entered. The camera will then be switched to the desired
position.
Switching to a preset using the Enter number panel is now complete.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  543

     User Guide

Note
Examples of entering a number:

5,  – Switch to preset number 5;

0, 5,  – Switch to preset number 5.

5, 7,  – Switch to preset number 57.

8.2.3.4.2 PTZ Tours

During a PTZ tour, the camera automatically scrolls between pre-listed preset positions.

Attention!
In Axxon Next, you can set up PTZ tours only for cameras connected via the ONVIF Generic driver (see Generic Drivers
(General device, generic)). 

The presets list created for a selected video camera is displayed in the upper part of the PTZ control panel in the
 tab.

8.2.3.4.2.1 Creating and editing PTZ tours

Axxon Next automatically adds PTZ tours created with the camera's web interface.

To add a new tour, do the following:

1. Click the  button.

2. Enter a name of the new tour, and click the OK button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  544

     User Guide

3. Select the tour's first preset (1).

4. Specify dwelling time in seconds for this preset (2).

5. Specify transition speed to this preset in standard units from 1 to 100 (3).

Attention!
This parameter is reserved for future Axxon Next software versions.

6. Click the OK button.

7. Add all other desired presets in the same way.
8. Click  to return to the PTZ tours list.
To alter a tour, select it in the list and click Edit.

To delete a tour, select it and click .

8.2.3.4.2.2 Launching a PTZ tour

To start a tour, do the following:
1. Select a tour from the list.

2. Click the Patrol button.

To stop a tour, click again the Patrol button.

8.2.3.4.3 Control using step buttons and virtual joystick

To control a PTZ camera, you can use both step buttons (discrete PTZ mode) and the virtual joystick (the camera must support
continuous PTZ), if the camera supports both modes.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  545

     User Guide

To select, click the  and  buttons.

Otherwise, only one of the modes may be used.

Note
If your camera is set to Discrete PTZ Control via Continuous, your control options will be limited to buttons only (see The
PTZ Object).

Set the sensitivity level of PTZ step buttons by selecting a value from 1 to 10.

If you press and hold the buttons, the PTZ camera will move continuously.

Attention!
Interaction between PTZ cameras and the Client may cause the cameras to jerk in some cases. 
Cameras also may jerk when they are connected by the Onvif protocol (see Notes on configuring video cameras
connected via ONVIF).

Virtual joysticks are controlled as follows:

1. Click and hold down the left mouse button in the central (blue) portion of the joystick.
2. Drag the joystick in the necessary direction.

Note
You can also move the joystick by clicking and holding the left mouse button outside of the joystick border.
The turn speed depends on the tilt of the joystick: the greater the tilt, the higher the speed.

Note
If you rotate a camera view / viewing tile 180°, you will have PTZ controls inverted.

8.2.3.4.4 Patrolling
Patrolling is an automatic change in the position of a camera along a route defined in the camera's presets list.

Note
You can use a cycle macro to set up patrolling (PTZ camera tour, see Switch to a PTZ camera preset, Wait for timeout,
Cyclical macros).

Patrolling must be activated in camera settings (see The PTZ Object). In this case, the operator can stop patrolling by clicking the
Patrolling button on the PTZ control panel. After the manual PTZ control session is over, patrolling will resume automatically.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  546

     User Guide

If patrolling is switched off in camera settings, you can switch it on by clicking the Patrolling button.

Attention!
Manual control takes priority over automatic control. Any interference in the patrolling process cancels it.

To stop patrolling, click the Patrol button again.

Note
Any user (regardless of priority, see Creating and configuring roles) can stop patrolling

Patrolling will automatically stop when a manual PTZ control session is over, or after you close the PTZ control panel.

Note
Control session automatically stops after a set idle time (see Configuring PTZ control).

8.2.3.4.5 Controlling Focus, Iris and Optical Zoom

To control focus, iris and optical zoom, use the corresponding sliders.

To control focus, iris, and optical zoom, move the corresponding slider up or down.

If the camera has AF (auto focus), you can see the corresponding  button under the slider.

Some devices allow to control optical zoom with the mouse scroll wheel.
To control optical zoom with the mouse, go to OnScreen PTZ mode (see Controlling a PTZ Video Camera in the OnScreen PTZ
Mode), otherwise the zooming will be digital (see Digitally Zooming Video Images).

8.2.3.4.6 Controlling a PTZ Video Camera in the OnScreen PTZ Mode

The OnScreen PTZ mode enables controlling a PTZ video camera by mouse manipulations in the Viewing Tile. 

Click  to enable this mode

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  547

     User Guide

Note
In OnScreen PTZ mode, the Areazoom function is disabled (see Control using Areazoom).

To change the viewing angle, click on a video image with the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer in the required
direction. During this action the software displays a visual element on the image showing the camera lens movement direction
and speed.

The faster you move the mouse, the faster the camera rotation will be. 

Click  again to disable the OnScreen PTZ mode.

8.2.3.4.7 Control using Point&Click

To change the focus of the camera lens, left-click anywhere within the video image in the viewing tile.

Attention!
To operate Point&Click, go to OnScreen PTZ mode (see Controlling a PTZ Video Camera in the OnScreen PTZ Mode).

Once you have done that, the focus of the camera lens will automatically change to the selected area. The focus is changed using
Axxon Next algorithms.

Note
This function is available for only some CCTV cameras.
For more information, contact AxxonSoft.

8.2.3.4.8 Control using Areazoom

You can focus on a particular area in a video frame.

Note
Areazoom function is unavailable if the OnScreen PTZ mode is enabled (see Controlling a PTZ Video Camera in the
OnScreen PTZ Mode).

To do so:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  548

     User Guide

1. Click a point to focus on it.

2. Holding down the mouse button, moving outward from the center of the focus area, the user sets the size of the area.
Releasing the mouse button finalizes the selection.

The lens is reoriented and the image is enlarged so that the selected area now fills the entire viewing tile.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  549

     User Guide

Note
This function is available for only some CCTV cameras.
For more information, contact AxxonSoft.

8.2.3.5 Functions for tracking of moving objects

Axxon Next includes several features for tracking moving objects.
With Tag & Track, an object can be tracked by a PTZ camera under the guidance of panoramic cameras.
With  Tag & Track Lite, the operator is alerted to the camera in front of which the moving object is most likely to appear next. The
camera is predicted based on object trajectory and mapping of cameras to map locations.

8.2.3.5.1 Tag & Track Pro

Tag & Track functionality depends on the PTZ mode that is specified in the settings.

Attention!
To use Tag & Track Pro, make sure your PTZ camera supports Absolute Positioning. The devices that support Tag &
Track Pro are listed in the Drivers Pack documentation.
When connecting via the ONVIF protocol, Absolute Positioning support is also required. Contact camera vendor for
Information on the Absolute Positioning support in the ONVIF protocol.

Attention!
If manual or control priority mode is selected, for Tag & Track Pro you must activate object tracking in the viewing tile of
the overview camera (see the Tracking objects section).

• If automatic mode is selected, the PTZ camera will track all active objects. In this case the PTZ camera switches focus
between each object with the specified dwell time.

Note
The PTZ camera is positioned so that the moving object is in the center of the frame.

• In manual mode, the PTZ camera tracks an object only after the object is manually selected in the viewing tile (left-click to
track). If you click anywhere in overview camera's FOV that contains no tracks, the PTZ camera cancels object tracking
and focuses on the specified point. 

• If control priority mode is selected, the PTZ camera automatically tracks an object until another object is manually
selected for tracking in the viewing tile. If an object is deselected (by clicking again) or if it leaves the field of view of the
PTZ camera, automatic mode is re-activated.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  550

     User Guide

• If the PTZ camera is in manual mode, the user controls it with on screen or with a joystick / CCTV keyboard. If the user
does not operate the PTZ camera (Control panel hidden), then the Automatic mode is used.

Note
Tag & Trac Pro cannot be used with the OnScreen PTZ mode simultaneously (see Controlling a PTZ Video Camera in the
OnScreen PTZ Mode).

8.2.3.5.2 Tag & Track Lite

Attention!
For Tag & Track Lite to work, you must activate object tracking in the viewing tile (see the Tracking objects section).

Tag & Track Lite works as follows:

1. The operator left-clicks an object to start tracking it (the object is outlined with a white frame).

2. After the selected object leaves the field of view of the camera, the video camera's location on the map and trajectory of
the object are used to predict the camera in front of which the object is likely to appear.
3. The viewing tile of that camera is activated. If the current layout does not contain that camera, a minimal layout with the
camera is shown.

Note.
If the viewing tile for that camera is currently in archive mode, the tile is switched to Live Video mode and made
active.

Note.
If video in the viewing tile of the original camera is magnified and the predicted camera is not in the layout, the
viewing tile with the camera is made active and the same degree of digital zoom is applied.

Attention!
Tag & Track Lite merely predicts, and therefore cannot guarantee, that the object will appear in front of a given
camera.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  551

     User Guide

4. To continue tracking the object, select it again in the camera window. 

8.2.3.5.3 Simultaneously using Tag & Track Pro and Tag & Track Lite
In some cases, it may be useful for Tag & Track Pro and Tag & Track Lite features to be active at the same time.
For example:
• In Tag & Trac Pro, manual or control priority mode is selected for the PTZ mode.
• In Tag & Track Lite, an object is selected in the field of view of the camera that is designated as the overview camera for
Tag & Track Pro.
In this case, both features are active: the object will be tracked by the PTZ camera and its trajectory will be used to predict the
camera in front of which it will appear next.

8.2.3.6 Managing Outputs

To control a output, select Show output in the context menu of the viewing title.

Note
You must first activate an object before you can control its output.

This opens Output Switch.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  552

     User Guide

Note
To hide Output Switch, select Hide output in the context menu of the viewing tile.

You can toggle the output state by clicking the radio button.

Note
If a output is controlled by several operators simultaneously, the output will remain activated as long as at least one
operator requires it.

Output Switch Output status

Normal

Activated

8.2.3.7 Displaying the input status

To display the status of a video camera’s input, select Show input in the context menu of the viewing tile.

Note
You must first activate an object to display the status of its input.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  553

     User Guide

The status of the input will now appear in the viewing tile.

Note
To hide the input status, select Hide input in the context menu of the viewing tile.

There are four possible statuses of a input.

Input status Description

Video camera is armed, input is in normal status

Video camera is armed, input is in alarm status

Video camera is disarmed, input is in normal status

Video camera is disarmed, input is in alarm status

8.2.3.8 Selecting video stream quality in a viewing tile (GreenStream)

If a video camera supports multistreaming, you can select the quality of the video stream that you want for display in viewing
tiles.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  554

     User Guide

Note
If the video camera is not configured for multiple video streams, this action is not available (see The Video Camera
Object).

To select video stream quality:

1. In the context menu of the viewing tile, select Select quality.

2. Select the quality of video stream that you want for display in the viewing tile.

Item Description

Auto (GreenStream) The default setting for video stream is low-quality. Upon selection of a Camera Window, the
highest resolution stream is displayed by default. After you switch to another Camera Window,
the inactive camera window returns to lower resolution / fps display

High A high-quality video stream is used for display in the viewing tile (see The Video Camera
Object).

Low (default) A low-quality video stream is used for display in the camera window (see The Video Camera
Object).. When you zoom on the camera window, it switches to a high quality video stream
(see Scaling the Viewing Tile).

Adaptive Viewing Tile shows an adaptive video stream (see Configuring an Adaptive Video Stream).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  555

     User Guide

Note
Automatic video stream selection (enabled by the Auto option) is unavailable if automatic resolution selection
has been set for any stream (see The Video Camera Object).

3. Click between between the tiles. 

Selection of video stream quality in the viewing tile is now complete.

The  symbol indicates high quality stream viewing.

8.2.3.9 Autozoom
The Autozoom function performs automatic control of digital zoom.
If a viewing tile is inactive and autozoom is enabled, the following actions occur:
1. The smallest rectangular area that contains all tracked objects (even if object tracking is disabled) is chosen.
2. Maximum digital zoom is performed for the selected area.
If autozoom is enabled but there are no moving objects in the video frame, the contents of the viewing tile are shown at their
original size.

Note
If the Fit screen function is activated for a viewing tile, the default digital zoom level is used.

Autozoom stops when a viewing tile is selected and resumes when the viewing tile is no longer active.
Autozoom can be enabled both for a single camera and for all video cameras in a layout.
To enable autozoom for a specific camera, in the viewing tile context menu, select Enable autozoom.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  556

     User Guide

Important
Autozoom is available if:
1. the object tracker is activated for this camera (see General information on Scene Analytics);
2. the Video Motion Detection tool is activated (see Configuring VMD);
3. at least one of the Embedded Analytic tools is activated (see Embedded Detection Tools).

Note
Autozoom resizing takes into account objects from all tracking sources that are activated for a particular video camera

To disable autozoom, select the corresponding command in the viewing tile context menu.
To enable autozoom for all cameras in a layout, select Enable autozoom for all.

To disable autozoom for all cameras in a layout,  select Disable autozoom for all.

Note
If autozoom is activated for one or more cameras in a layout, by default the menu displays the Disable autozoom for
all option.

Note
When you switch to the layout editing mode, the auto zoom is disabled for all cameras.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  557

     User Guide

8.2.3.10 Autoreplace Offline Cameras on Layouts

If the main camera goes offline and a sub camera is defined in the settings (see The Video Camera Object), they are automatically
replaced:  the sub camera shows in the tile in place of the main one.
Cameras are swapped across all layouts in the system.
When connection restores, changes are automatically undone. 

8.2.3.11 Snapshot
In Live Video mode, you can "freeze" video.  To do so, click the time display (scrubber) in a viewing tile. 
This will cause the viewing tile to be highlighted with a blue border. A snowflake icon will appear in the time field.

In this case, the camera window will also have buttons to set the moment of time, if you want to go to Archive mode (see
Navigation via the time indicator).
To return to live video,  click the display again.  

8.2.3.12 Viewing selected camera's detection tool triggering events

You can get quick access to selected camera's detection tool triggering events from any layout. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Select a camera on the layout.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  558

     User Guide

2. Click the Events button on the right margin of the screen.

An events panel (see Working with Events Boards) opens containing detection tool triggering events for this camera only.

To hide the panel, click again the Events button.

8.2.3.13 Switching to other camera via a link in the Camera window

The Camera window may contain links to other cameras (see Adding links to other cameras to the Camera Window).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  559

     User Guide

When you click a link, the corresponding camera is selected, and the Camera window expands.
If a linked camera is not present on the currently selected layout, a layout containing the required camera is selected. If there are
multiple layouts containing the required camera, the layout with the least number of windows is selected.
If a linked camera is not present on any layouts, a temporary layout is selected that will be automatically deleted after you
proceed to another layout.

8.2.3.14 Removing a camera from a layout

You can remove a camera from any given layout.

Attention!
These changes are not saved, and the camera will reappear when you call the layout again, or relaunch the Client.

To do it, follow the steps below:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  560

     User Guide

1. Open the Camera Window context menu.

2. Select Clear Cell.

The corresponding layout cell becomes empty.

You can further drag and drop a camera from the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel) or Camera Search Panel (see Camera Search
Panel).

8.2.4 Video surveillance in archive mode

8.2.4.1 Switching to Archive Mode

To switch from a different surveillance mode to the Archive mode, click the Playback tab in the lower-right corner of the Camera
Window.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  561

     User Guide

Note
If a camera is not linked to a video archive and has no on-board storage, this tab will be not available.

You can also switch from Live Video mode to Archive mode if you select a position on the advanced archive navigation panel
(see Advanced archive navigation panel).

Note
In Live Video mode, if the viewing tile is not active, the tabs for switching to other modes and the advanced archive
navigation panel are not displayed. To activate, click the viewing tile

 To switch all cameras within a layout to Archive mode, click the Playback button on the upper panel.

To return to live viewing, click Live.

Furthermore, if all cameras within a layout are in Live Video mode, you have to open the Archive navigation panel to switch the
cameras to Archive mode (see Show and Hide the Archive Navigation Panel).

Note
If archive mode is selected as the default video mode for a camera in a layout, when you switch to that layout, the
camera is immediately in archive mode (see Selecting the default video mode for a camera).

On first access to Archive mode, the most recently recorded video will be selected on the timeline (see The Timeline). On further
accesses to a particular camera archive, the timeline indicator will show the position of the most recent video in the Archive.

Attention!
If you prefer to open the most recently recorded video when accessing the Archive (Video Footage), create a
ResetArchivePosition parameter in the following registry key on the Client:
 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AxxonSoft.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  562

     User Guide

Click  to create a temporary layout for Archive (video footage) viewing.
The temporary layout is not preserved after you switch to any other layout. 

8.2.4.2 Video Surveillance Functions Available in Archive Mode

In archive mode the following video surveillance functions are accessible:
1. Autozoom.

Note
Refer to section Real-time video surveillance for a description of switching to the results of a saved search query
and the Autozoom function.

2. Selecting an archive for viewing of recordings.

3. Synchronized playback of archives.
4. Compressed playback of archives.
5. Viewing recorded video with operator comments.
6. Viewing external archives.
7. Navigating through the archive.
8. Displaying why situation analysis detection units have been triggered.
9. Viewing the results of a saved search query.
10. Manual archive replication.
11. Tag & Track Lite.
12. Functions Available in All Video Surveillance Modes.

8.2.4.3 Selecting an Archive

You can select video footage to view only if the camera is recording to several archives.
If you do not select an archive, the default archive is played back (see Binding a camera to an archive).
To select another archive for playback:
1. Click the archive name or the  button on the advanced archive navigation panel.

2. Select the required archive from the list.

Note
You can select all available Mirror Archives (if any, see Configuring data replication) and on-board storage (if
enabled, see The Embedded Storage object)

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  563

     User Guide

You can now view video footage from the selected archive  in the viewing tile.

Attention!
The next time you enter the Archive mode, the selected (not default!) archive will be displayed.

Note
If there is no recording in the selected archive, a message to that effect will appear in the viewing tile.

8.2.4.4 Viewing a combined Archive

In some cases, you might need to record videos from a single camera into multiple Archives.
For example, videos triggered by Detection Tool #1 go into  into Archive #1, and videos triggered by Detection Tool #2 are
recorded into Archive #2.
For more user convenience, AxxonNext offers an option to visually combine records from different Archives.
To view a combined Archive, you need:
1. Go to the Archive selection menu (see Selecting an Archive).
2. Check boxes for the Archives to be combined.

Records from all checked Archives will appear on the timeline. You can apply any system function to a combined Archive.

Note
Clicking on a particular Archive brings you to viewing videos from this Archive only.

Note
If you select multiple archives for a particular camera, and then switch all the layout to Archive mode, all cameras will
be set to multi-archive display.

When combining multiple streams from the same camera into one Archive, the highest quality stream is prioritized.
For example, if
• a lower quality video stream is permanently recorded into Archive #1, 
• and a high quality video stream is recorded into Archive #2 by VMD, 
then the combined Archive will consist of high quality motion-triggered records and low quality "other" videos.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  564

     User Guide

8.2.4.5 Synchronized playback of archives

Synchronized playback of archives lets you play back archives from several different video cameras simultaneously.
To enable synchronized playback, switch a few video cameras into archive mode. The timeline will then display time axes for the
corresponding archives.

Synchronized archive playback is controlled through the playback panel in the same way as playback for a single archive.

8.2.4.6 Compressed playback of archives (TimeCompressor)

During compressed playback (TimeCompressor), the viewing tile simultaneously displays tracked objects from different
moments in time within the selected portion of the archive. This lets you quickly look through the archive to find important
events and investigate them in more detail.
For condensed playback of archived video from a camera, the following conditions must be true:
1. Camera is bound to an archive (see Binding a camera to an archive).
2. The camera must have at least one active source of metadata (Object Tracker, Video Motion Detection, Embedded
Analytics).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  565

     User Guide

Attention!
For the Object Tracker, you have to select the video stream currently selected for Video Footage recording (see Setting
General Parameters). 

8.2.4.6.1 Switching to TimeCompressor mode

To use TimeCompressor, complete the following steps:
1. You can set the time span for viewing video in TimeCompressor on the timeline in one of the following ways:
a. Set the pointer to the start position. In that case you view the  whole archive to the end of it (see the section
titled Navigating Using the Timeline).
b. Select the time span with the right-click.

Note
The TimeCompressor mode allows you to view the results of a specific archive search (see Viewing Search
Results In TimeCompressor).

2. Click the  button on the Advanced Archive Navigation Panel

The archive will now start playing in compressed mode.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  566

     User Guide

Note
Only one video camera can run TimeCompressor at one time. If synchronized playback is started and a video camera is
switched to TimeCompressor mode, playback of all other video cameras will be automatically paused.

Note
To switch back to the standard archive browsing mode, click the displayed area of the Advanced Archive Navigation

Panel  .

8.2.4.6.2 Playback control

Playback control in TimeCompressor mode is managed using the advanced navigation panel and the playback panel.
To set the desired number of tracked objects to be simultaneously displayed, set the slider in the appropriate position (1). The
extreme left position of the slider corresponds to two objects, the extreme right - sixteen.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  567

     User Guide

  

Note
Once you have configured this setting, playback begins at the beginning of the selected interval.

Note
However, according to the logic of the algorithm, the number of displayed objects may be greater.

To stop or start playback, use the  and  buttons on the playback panel or the identical buttons on the advanced
navigation panel.

To start archive playback in TimeCompressor mode starting at the beginning of the selected interval, click the  button (2).

8.2.4.6.3 Switching back to the original recording of an object

To leave TimeCompressor mode to go back to the original recording of an object, left-click the object.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  568

     User Guide

The system will now automatically switch back to the original recording of the object in standard archive playback mode.
Playback of the recording will be paused, and the beginning of the recording will correspond to the moment at which the object
was selected. 
The period during which the objects remains in the camera's field of view is displayed in the viewing tile. 

Note
Once you have switched back to the original recording of the object, you can return to TimeCompressor mode to the

place where the switch was made. To do this, click the  tab. In this case, playback in TimeCompressor mode will be
paused.

8.2.4.7 Viewing recorded video with operator comments

Operator comments are displayed when recorded video is played back in a viewing tile.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  569

     User Guide

Comment text begins display five seconds before the frame for which the comment was added (before the first frame, if the
comment was set for an interval), with gradual outlining of the area (or point) that was specified when adding the comment.
When the commented frame is shown or during the commented interval, the area (or point) is also highlighted,

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  570

     User Guide

Five seconds after the commented frame (after the end of the interval, if the comment was for an interval), the comment is
hidden.

To minimize comments and the displayed area, if any was specified, click the   button.

To return to the full comment, click the  button.

8.2.4.8 Viewing External Archives

External Archive is time-referenced video footage (see Importing video to Axxon Next).
If you go to Archive mode,  the timeline shows available video recordings. If there is no time overlapping for video recordings, the
space between them is blank.
If video recordings overlap, they are displayed as one track that spans from the beginning of the first video clip to the end of the
second.
If you want to watch this track, both video clips are played sequentially and in full.

8.2.4.9 Delete a part of an archive

You can delete an arbitrary part of an archive. To do this:
1. Set the time interval for the footage to be deleted from the archive:
a. on the main timeline, set the indicator to the beginning of the interval, click the  button, then set the indicator
to the end of the interval and click  again; as an alternative, you can right-drag the mouse over the required
interval. To delete the interval, click  ;
b. on the additional navigation panel, you can set the time interval the same way using the  buttons. You
cannot set the interval with the mouse on the additional panel.

2. Click  in the Camera window.

3. To delete footage within the specified time interval for all cameras within the archive, check the All box .

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  571

     User Guide

4. Click .

5. Click the Delete button to confirm the deletion.

Attention!
You cannot recover deleted footage.

Attention!
If several archives were selected for viewing (see Viewing a combined Archive), the footage will be deleted from
all of them.

After the deletion is complete, the remaining footage may contain some artifacts near the cut points.

8.2.4.10 Navigating in the Archive

You can navigate in the archive using the following interface elements:
1. Timeline
2. Advanced navigation panel
3. Events list
4. Playback panel
5. Time indicator
You can also navigate through the archive by easily flipping through recordings.

8.2.4.10.1 Navigating Using the Timeline

Note
Use of the timeline is described in detail in the section The Timeline.

You can select recordings in the archive for playback in a viewing tile by using the timeline, in one of two ways:
1. Left-click the indicator (1) and drag it to the corresponding position on the timeline. Alternatively, you can left-click the
left portion of the timeline.

Note
The position on the timeline is a graphical representation of a specific moment in time.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  572

     User Guide

The frame corresponding to the selected position (moment in time) will then be displayed in the viewing tile (2).

Attention!
If the system clock is shifted back one hour (for example, in winter saving), the videos from the lost hour will
disappear from the timeline but remain accessible.
For example, at 3 PM the clock is shifted back one hour. If you place the timeline marker anywhere after 02:00:00,
videos shot after the shift will be played back.
If you set the marker to 01:59:59 or earlier, videos shot from 01:59:59 to 02:59:59 (time stamped before the shift)
will be played back. 

2. Click the indicator. The calendar opens. Select the date to which you want to jump in the archive and specify the time in
HH:MM:SS format, by using the arrows or keyboard number keys.

Note
The Tab key can be used to navigate across various elements of the Calendar.

You are then taken to the specified point in the archive.

If one video camera is in archive mode and you move the indicator to a point for which there is no video, the indicator will
automatically go to the video for the closest point in time. If two or more video cameras are in archive mode, you will not be
taken to the video for the closest point in time; the message No archive will be shown on screen.
To play back the selected recording, use the playback panel (see the section titled Navigating Using the Playback Panel).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  573

     User Guide

8.2.4.10.2 Navigation using the advanced panel

You can use the advanced navigation panel to select recordings in the archive for playback in the viewing tile. To do this,
complete one of the following two actions:
1. Left-click the timeline (1) and hold down the button while dragging the scale to the desired position.
2. Left-click the desired moment in time on the timeline.
3. Left-click and hold the desired moment in time on the timeline.

 
When you left-click and hold left the  mouse button and the timeline is moved, you can view the corresponding recording in fast
forward. The further left you click, the faster is the playback speed.

Note
The current moment in time is determined by the cursor located in the center of the timeline (2). The position of the
cursor relative to the timeline never changes.

Once the selected moment is reached, playback stops. The speed of playback depends on the speed of the timeline’s movement.

To start archive playback click   in the middle of the timeline.To pause playback, click the  button or left-click the
timeline.
To control playback, use the playback panel (see the section titled  Navigating Using the Playback Panel) or the advanced
navigation panel.

Playback  Pause

Item Description Item Description

Decreases playback speed by one level Go to the preceding frame

Decreases playback speed by one level Go to the next frame

Go to the previous recording Go to the previous recording

Go to the next recording Go to the next recording

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  574

     User Guide

Attention!
Click and hold the   button to jump to the end of the archive.

8.2.4.10.3 Navigating Using the Events list

The Events List and the timeline are dynamically linked: when you select an event in the list, the timeline indicator automatically
jumps to the selected position.

For details, see the section titled Events List.

8.2.4.10.4 Navigating Using the Playback Panel

To navigate in the archive using the playback panel, you must first select a recording for playback.
Once a recording is selected, the following operations are accessible:

1. Play recording:

2. Pause/Stop playback:

3. Go to the preceding frame .

4. Go to the next frame .

5. Go to the previous recording .

6. Go to the next recording .

You can fast-forward / fast-rewind  and change playback direction (forward / back).
Fast-rewind playback.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  575

     User Guide

 
Slow playback.

For reverse playback of a recording, move the slider to the left of the position corresponding to zero playback speed (the center
of the slider); for forward playback, move it to the right. The current playback speed is displayed under the slider. During forward
playback of a recording, a + sign appears before the speed; during reverse playback, a - sign appears. The value 0X corresponds
to zero speed, i.e., no playback; the value 1X corresponds to the frame rate of recording.
Tp speed up playback by one step, click +. To slow down by one step, click -. To temporarily change the playback speed, move
the slider in the desired direction. 
To slow playback N-fold, do as follows:
1. Accelerate playback N-fold:
2. Click the value of the current playback speed below the slider. 
This  slows the playback N-fold.To return to the fast playback, click the current speed again.

Note
Forward playback speed can be increased up to 32x, reverse playback speed — up to 8x.

8.2.4.10.5 Navigation via the time indicator

The time indicator in a viewing tile can be used to set the time of the current day on the timeline to which you want to navigate in
the archive.
To do so, left-click the indicator and specify the time in HH:MM:SS format, by using the arrows or keyboard number keys. 

You are then taken to the specified point in the archive.

If one video camera is in archive mode and you try to navigate to a point for which there is no video, you will be automatically
taken to the video for the closest point in time. If two or more video cameras are in archive mode, you will not be taken to the
video for the closest point in time; the message No archive will be shown on screen.

8.2.4.10.6 Keyboard navigation

You can use keyboard shortcuts to navigate through an archive and control video playback.

Key or key combination Resultant action during pause Resultant action during play

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  576

     User Guide

Spacebar Begins playback Pauses playback

Ctrl+Spacebar Uses the current position to set the export interval Uses the current position to set the export interval

Up-Arrow Increases playback speed by one level Increases playback speed by one level

Down-Arrow Decreases playback speed by one level Decreases playback speed by one level

Left-Arrow Moves back to the preceding key frame -

Right-Arrow Moves forward to the next key frame -

Page up Switches to the preceding recording Switches to the preceding recording

Page down Switches to the next recording Switches to the next recording

8.2.4.11 Displaying the causes of triggered situation analysis detection units

When positioning the archive in the range [-1 sec.; +1 sec.] from when the situation analysis detection unit was triggered, the
objects that triggered the detection unit will be marked on the video frame.

8.2.4.12 Viewing the results of a saved search query

If the system has saved Forensic Search queries for a video camera, tabs for these queries are displayed in the lower-right corner
of the corresponding viewing tile.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  577

     User Guide

If not all tabs fit in the viewing tile, a full list of saved Forensic Search queries is available by clicking the  button.

Clicking a tab switches to Archive mode, displaying the results of the relevant search on the timeline (the process is similar to
viewing search results in Archive Analysis mode).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  578

     User Guide

The standard Archive mode controls are used for navigating between search results (see Navigating in the Archive).

Note
To search in standard archive mode without displaying search results, click the corresponding tab in the viewing tile.

The parameters for the search are displayed when switching from search results to Archive Analysis mode.

8.2.4.13 Manual Archive Replication

You can protect selected video recordings from being overwritten. To do this:
1. Create a new archive (see Creating Archive) and configure on-demand replication for it (see Configuring data replication).
2. Switch to Archive Mode (see Switching to Archive Mode).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  579

     User Guide

3. Set the time interval on the timeline (see Standard video export). Recordings from this range will be copied to the new file.

4. Click the button .

5. In the Export folder (1), select the archive where selected recordings will be copied. 

Attention!
You can replicate recorded video only to the "right" end (later point in time) of the archive.  It is not possible to
overwrite existing data in the archive.
If the selected replication range starts and ends earlier  than the starting time of the mirror archive (e.g. you want
to copy a hour of video footage from 9 a.m. to 10 a.m., but the mirror archive starts at 11.a.m.), replication will
not be possible (the Export button is not available).

6. Click the Export button (2).

Selected recordings have now been copied to the specified file.

8.2.4.14 Tag & Track Lite in Archive mode

Configuring Tag & Track Lite

Tag & Track Lite

Attention!
For Tag & Track Lite to work, you must activate object tracking in the viewing tile (see the Tracking objects section).

Tag & Track Lite in the archive mode works as follows:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  580

     User Guide

1. Left click an object's track to select the object of interest.

2. The most probable camera where the object may have been captured next  is suggested.
3. After selecting an object, you are switched to the suggested camera.  Camera footage will be played back automatically
from the moment when the target object was supposed to appear in the FoV.

Attention!
Tag & Track Lite merely predicts, and therefore cannot guarantee, that the object will appear in front of a given
camera.

8.2.5 Video surveillance in Alarm Management mode

8.2.5.1 Video surveillance functions available in Alarm Management mode

The following video surveillance functions are available in Alarm Management mode:
1. Forwarding and reversing playback of an alarm at various speeds.
2. Evaluating alarms (assigning a status).
3. Functions Available in All Video Surveillance Modes.

8.2.5.2 Switch to Alarm Management mode

When an alarm is initiated, the system switches to alarm mode automatically at the moment the event is accepted for
processing. Operator can escape the Alarm management mode. To return a viewing tile from a different surveillance mode to

Alarm Management mode, in the lower-left corner of the tile, click the  button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  581

     User Guide

The viewing tile will then appear in Alarm Management mode.

If there are multiple alarms for a camera, Alarm Management mode will open to the most recent alarm.

8.2.5.3 Initiating an Alarm

A system alarm can be initiated in one of two ways:
1. Manually (by an operator)
2. Automatically (when a detection tool is triggered is triggered)

Note
You can initiate an alarm only if the specific video camera is linked to the archive.

8.2.5.3.1 Manual Initiation

To initiate an alarm manually, you must perform the following steps:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  582

     User Guide

1. In the lower-left corner of the viewing tile, click the  button.

2. The operation will trigger an alarm that appears on Alarms Panel (see Alarms Panel). To classify an alarm, click the
 button again.

Note
When in Alarm Management mode, the user that initiated the alarm will be indicated at the bottom of the
viewing tile.

Manual initiation of an alarm is now complete.

8.2.5.3.2 Automatic Initiation

Automatic rules or macros can be configured to initiate an alarm (see the section titled Trigger an alarm).

If an alarm is initiated automatically, the Alarms Panel tab is color-coded . 

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  583

     User Guide

To evaluate the situation, click the Alarms Panel tab, select the event and classify it in Alarms Management (see the section titled
Selecting Events for Alarm Management).

8.2.5.4 Working with Alarms Panel

8.2.5.4.1 Viewing Alarms in Event Preview

Each alert / alarm event is displayed on Alarms Panel as follows: Each Event Preview tile shows a thumbnail with the first frame
of video footage for the relevant event; the playback button; time stamp of the event  and camera ID.

When you hover over the Event Preview tile, all information about the alarm pops up.

If you click the  button, the event footage / alarm recording  will then be played back in Event Preview in a repeating cycle.
To stop playback, click the  button.
On the Alarms Panel, click on the alarm event video window to play back the event video in the camera window.

If the  button is activated on the Alarms Panel, the alarm video will appear in a temporary layout containing just the current
camera.
If the button is inactive, the video playback will start in the regular layout.

8.2.5.4.2 Outlining Objects that Triggered Detection

In the Event Preview tile, you can outline objects that triggered detection / an alarm. To do so, click the  button.
The object is outlined only if the alarm was initiated by detection tools.

To undo object outlining, click the  button again.

8.2.5.4.3 Selecting Events for Alarm Management

When you click the Event Preview tile, a  layout opens that has the  relevant camera's view.  The layout is selected automatically
with the following algorithm:
1. The system searches for layouts that contain the alarmed camera. The user must have permissions to view it.
2. The system chooses the layout with the minimum number of cells to display the selected video camera.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  584

     User Guide

3. If the required layout does not yet exist, the system creates a new layout with a single video camera.
4. The system switches to the selected layout.
5. The video camera becomes active in the selected layout. The viewing tile is expanded by one level. It switches to the
Alarm Management mode. (if you have selected an active alarm) or to the Archive mode. (if you have selected a
processed / classified alarm or missed / unclassified).

8.2.5.5 Working with the Alarm Management window

8.2.5.5.1 Alarm Handling Tile Interface Elements

The alarm handling tile is a viewing tile which, besides the standard interface elements (context menu, time indicator, etc.), also
contains elements for alarm playback and evaluation:
1. Playback panel
2. Timeline
3. A button for quick positioning of the timeline indicator in the position corresponding to the beginning of the alarm.

8.2.5.5.2 Alarm Playback

As soon as an alarm is accepted for evaluation, the alarm recording is played back automatically one time, at 1X speed. Playback
is launched either from the moment of the beginning of the alarm, or from the moment corresponding to the position of the
alarm flag (only when the alarm is initiated automatically; see the section Trigger an alarm).

If the alarm was initiated automatically, the visual element set for the detection tool which initiated the alarm will be displayed
in the viewing tile: or a detection area or virtual tripwire , which triggers the detection tool when it is crossed. The object which
caused the trigger will be outlined with a red frame.
Display of an Area visual element:

Display of a Line visual element:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  585

     User Guide

The name of the detection unit that initiated the alarm is displayed in the lower portion of the viewing tile.
To navigate the fragment of an alarm event, use the Advanced Archive Navigation Panel (see Navigation using the advanced
panel) or the Playback Panel (see Navigating Using the Playback Panel).
To switch to a required fragment of an alarm event in order to play it again, hold the timeline pointer with the left mouse button
and drag it to the required position.

To go to the beginning of the alarm event, click .

8.2.5.5.3 Processing an Alarm

To process an alarm, use the group of colored buttons in the lower left-hand corner of the Alarm Management tile. After
processing of the alarm, the viewing tile on the given client automatically switches to Live Video mode. The alarm is no longer in
the Alarms tab.

Attention!
In the case of multi-user event processing, only the first operator to switch to alarm mode may process the alarm (if he
or she has the appropriate permissions). For the rest of the operators, the Alarm Management buttons are not
displayed.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  586

     User Guide

Button Executed function

Confirmed alarm

Suspicious alarm
 

False alarm
 

8.2.5.6 Limitations when working with alarm events in case of multi-user processing
In the case of multi-user processing, only one operator may accept an alarm for processing. Other operators may switch to alarm
mode with limited functions for the purpose of playing back the alarm. This can be done in one of two ways:

1. Click the  button (see the section Video surveillance in Alarm Management mode).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  587

     User Guide

2. Switch to the Alarms tab and select the alarm from the alarms list.

In Alarm Management mode with limited functions, the Alarm Management buttons are not displayed. Instead, the name of the
operator who is currently processing the alarm is displayed. The other functions of the alarm handling tile remain unchanged.
After processing of the alarm on another client, on the given client the status assigned to the alarm is displayed in place of the
name of the operator.
If a user has accepted an alarm for processing and leaves Alarm Management mode (going to Live Video mode, Archive or Archive
Search mode, the viewing tile for another camera, etc.), after an amount of time equal to the operator's idle time after leaving,
other users will also have the opportunity to accept the alarm for processing.
If more than one alarm appears for one camera, any operator may access all alarms not yet accepted for processing.

8.2.6 Video surveillance in Archive Search mode

8.2.6.1 Switching to Archive Search mode

To switch the Camera Window from a different surveillance mode to the Archive Search mode, click the Search tab in the lower-
right corner.

Note
If the video camera is not linked to a video archive, this tab will be unavailable.

Note
In Live Video mode, if the viewing tile is not active, the tabs for switching to other modes are not displayed. To display
the tabs, click the viewing tile by using either button of the mouse.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  588

     User Guide

The archive analysis interface will then appear.

8.2.6.2 Archive Search mode interface

The visual layout of Archive Search mode is divided into the following 4 components:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  589

     User Guide

1. Viewing tile (1, see Viewing Tile)

2. Search control panel (2, see Search in an archive of a single video camera)
3. Search results panel (3, see Viewing search results)
4. archive navigation panel (4, see The Archive Navigation Panel)

You can hide search parameters for a portrait-oriented camera. To do so, click the  button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  590

     User Guide

To unhide, press the  button.

8.2.6.3 Video surveillance functions available in Archive Search mode

In Archive Search mode, the following video surveillance functions are available:
1. Selecting an archive for video recording analysis.
2. Autozoom.
3. Navigating through the archive.
4. Display of the causes of triggered situation analysis detection units.
5. Viewing recorded video with operator comments.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  591

     User Guide

6. Events search.
7. Forensic search.
8. Time search.
9. Searching comments.
10. Switching between search results.
11. Playing back fragments retrieved by searches of specific moments in time.
12. Zooming in on objects that trigger detection tools.
13. Functions Available in All Video Surveillance Modes.

Note
The functions for navigating through an archive, displaying the causes of situation analysis detection unit triggering,
and Archive Selection were inherited from archive mode; their descriptions are Video surveillance in archive mode. The
Autozoom function is described in the Real-time video surveillance section.

8.2.6.4 Search in an archive of a single video camera

8.2.6.4.1 Selecting the search type

To start a search, click  and choose the search type.

Note
The current Axxon Next suite release supports only search of a single type at one time.

Note
In the on-board storage of the camera, you can only find video episodes with thumbnail search (TimeSlice).

8.2.6.4.2 Setting a search interval

Setting a search interval follows the same procedure for all types of archive search.
By default, the search spans across video footage / archive tracks currently displayed on the timeline (see Navigating Using the
Timeline).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  592

     User Guide

To alter the search interval, select the desired value from the  Search Range dropdown list.

Search Range Description

Whole Archive Searches are performed across the entire Archive.

Timeline Searches span across Archive tracks currently displayed on the timeline.

Range Searches are performed within the interval currently selected on the timeline.

You can set an interval using  and  buttons.

Last 1h/3h/6h/12h/24h The searches will be performed within the last hour (or 3, 6, 12, 24 hours) of recorded footage.

Next 5min /15min /30min /1h /3h The searches will be performed within the following interval: [specified start of the interval;
specified start of the interval + 5min / 15min / 30min / 1h / 3h]. To set the beginning time of

the interval, click .

8.2.6.4.3 Events search

This type of search lets you select events in the archive based on the type of event.
To do this, complete the following steps:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  593

     User Guide

1. Choose the type of events to search for moments (1).

Event Description

All alarms The search finds moments in the archive containing all types of alarms

Non-critical alarm The search finds moments in the archive containing non-critical alarms

Critical alarm The search finds moments in the archive containing critical alarms

Unclassified alarm The search finds moments in the archive containing unclassified alarms

False alarm The search finds moments in the archive containing false alarms

Triggering The search finds moments when detection units were triggered

Recording start The search finds the beginning and end of recordings from the specified video camera regardless of the initiator

2. Select an event initiator from a list with the same name (2).

Note
An event initiator could be an operator, a video camera input, or any detection unit that is activated in the
system. The search results will show the moments in time containing the events that were triggered by the
initiator.

3. If necessary, click  and add more similar search conditions.

4. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
5. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

This starts a search in the archive based on the defined criteria. Search results are available on the search results panel.

Note
To zoom objects that caused an alarm or triggered a detection unit, select the Expand alarm object check box in the
lower portion of the search results panel.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  594

     User Guide

8.2.6.4.4 Time search for video fragments (TimeSlice)

The search of fragments by time is meant for quick search of moment of interest by dividing a selected time period into equally
sized fragments.

Search by time is performed using the following algorithm:

1. Setting a search interval.
2. In the Interval field, specify the duration of the video episodes in the MM:SS format:
a. If you do not specify the duration (00:00), Time Slice (Thumbnail Search) splits video footage from the selected
time interval into 12 equal episodes.
b. If you set the duration other than 0, Time Slice splits the selected time interval into video clips of the specified
duration. The number of slices depends on the specified parameters.

Note
It's recommended to set the interval value to no less than 10 seconds.

3. Start the first search iteration (click the Search button).

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

The search results panel displays frames that match moments in time that are equally spaced from each other; the search
control panel shows the number of fragments found.

4. If the specific moment is not found, then start the second search iteration: double-clicking on the found moment triggers
the search in the time interval from this moment to the next one.
5. Keep searching until the specific moment is found.

Note
Information on playback of video fragments is provided in the section titled Playback of video fragments

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  595

     User Guide

8.2.6.4.5 Searching comments

Comments search allows filtering for comments that contain certain text.
To search comments:
1. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
2. Enter the text that you want to find in comments.

Attention
Search is performed for the entire string of entered text, not for separate words.

Note
If no text is specified, all comments for the selected interval are found.

3. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

This starts a search for video fragments based on the defined criteria. The search results pane displays frames for which there are
comments containing the search text. The relevant comment is displayed under each frame.

Note
If the comment was left for an interval, the first frame of the interval is displayed.

8.2.6.4.6 Forensic Search for Fragments (MomentQuest)

Forensic Search lets you search for moments in the archive using the following criteria:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  596

     User Guide

1. Motion in Area.
2. Loitering of an object in a specific area.
3. Simultaneous presence of a large number of objects in a specific area.
4. Crossing of a virtual line by an object’s trajectory.
5. Motion from one area to another.

8.2.6.4.6.1 Motion in Area

To perform forensic search for motion in area:
1. In the Viewing Tile, define the area to be analyzed during search in accordance with the selected condition.
The nodes of an area are connected by a two-colored dotted line.
By default, an area is defined by 4 nodes with the coordinates (30%, 30%), (70%, 30%), (70%, 70%) and (30%, 70%) as
percentages of the width and height of the frame, respectively. 

To edit an area, use the following actions.

Action Result

Right-click on a line Creates a new area node

Right-click on a created node Deletes the area node

Position the cursor on a node and hold down the left mouse button while you move the mouse Moves the area node

2. Select the metadata source if there are several for this video camera. This parameter will not be displayed if there is only
one source.
3. Specify any number of additional parameters by clicking , if necessary (see Configure the search parameters).
4. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
5. Click the Search button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  597

     User Guide

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

The found moments will be displayed in the search results panel.

8.2.6.4.6.2 Loitering of an object in a specific area

To search for moments of an object loitering in an area:
1. In the Viewing Tile, define the area to be analyzed during search in accordance with the selected condition (see Motion in
Area).
2. Select the metadata source if there are several for this video camera (1). This parameter will not be displayed if there is
only one source.

3. Set the minimum duration of stay in the area (2, in seconds and minutes). Search results contain recorded video in which
the object is present in the area for longer than the indicated time.
4. Specify any number of additional parameters by clicking , if necessary  (see Configure the search parameters).
5. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
6. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

The found moments will be displayed in the search results panel.

8.2.6.4.6.3 Simultaneous presence of a large number of objects in a specific area

To search for moments when objects gather in an area:
1. In the Viewing Tile, define the area to be analyzed during search in accordance with the selected condition (see Motion in
Area).
2. Select the metadata source if there are several for this video camera (1). This parameter will not be displayed if there is
only one source.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  598

     User Guide

3. Specify the number of objects allowed in the area (2). Search results contain recorded video in which the number of
objects in the area exceeds the specified number.
4. Specify any number of additional parameters by clicking  , if necessary (see Configure the search parameters).
5. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
6. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

The found moments will be displayed in the search results panel.

8.2.6.4.6.4 Motion from one area to another

To search for moments when the object moves from one area to another:
1. Set two areas in the Viewing Tile: the area the object moves from and the one it moves to.
The nodes of each area are connected by a two-colored dotted line. The direction of motion between the areas is
indicated by a dotted arrow.
By default, each area is defined by 4 nodes. The nodes of the first area have the coordinates (20%, 40%), (40%, 40%),
(40%, 60%), (20%, 60%), and those of the second have the coordinates (60%, 40%), (80%, 40%), (80%, 60%), (60%, 60%) as
percentages of the width and height of the frame, respectively. 

Note
You can collapse the graphical elements if they block the visual elements and prevent editing them. To hide
them, select the  Hide graphical elements check box.

Area editing operations are described in the Motion in Area section.

To change the direction of motion between the areas, click the   button on the direction arrow.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  599

     User Guide

2. Select the metadata source if there are several for this video camera. This parameter will not be displayed if there is only
one source.
3. Specify any number of additional parameters by clicking  , if necessary (see Configure the search parameters).
4. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
5. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

The found moments will be displayed in the search results panel.

8.2.6.4.6.5 Crossing of a virtual line by an object's trajectory

To search for moments when the object crosses a virtual line:
1. Set the virtual line to be crossed in the Viewing Tile.
The end points of the line are connected by a two-colored dotted line. The direction of the object's motion across the line
is indicated by dotted arrows.
By default, the end points of the line have the coordinates (50%, 30%) and (50%, 70%) as percentages of the width and
height of the frame, respectively.

To move the end point of a line, position the cursor on the end point and hold down the left mouse button as you move
the mouse.
By default, both directions of motion across the virtual line are taken into account when searching the archive. If you do
not need to search in a specific direction, click the   button corresponding to that direction.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  600

     User Guide

Attention!
At least one direction must be selected for the search.

Note
A disregarded direction of object motion is indicated by a dimmed arrow.

2. Select the metadata source if there are several for this video camera. This parameter will not be displayed if there is only
one source.
3. Specify any number of additional parameters by clicking  , if necessary (see Configure the search parameters).
4. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).
5. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

8.2.6.4.6.6 Configure the search parameters

It is not required to specify parameters, but for more precise results, it is possible to set one or more parameters for each
criterion:

The search criteria Possible parameters

Motion in Area Direction of movement

Maximum and minimum object size
Maximum and minimum object speed
Object color
Object type
Entry/exit from area

Loitering in area Maximum and minimum object size

Object color
Object type

Many objects in area Maximum and minimum object size

Object color
Object type

Object trajectory crossing a virtual line Maximum and minimum object size
Motion from area to area Maximum and minimum object speed
Object color
Object type

Configuring minimum and maximum object size

The procedures for setting the minimum and maximum size of a moving object are identical.
The minimum (or maximum) size of a moving object can be set using any of the following methods:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  601

     User Guide

Note
The first method lets you roughly configure the size, and the second method allows you to set the size precisely.

1. Position the cursor on a visual element node and hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse (1).

2. Set the width and height of an object of the minimum (maximum) size using the arrows in the upper and lower margins,
respectively. The dimensions of a visual element in the viewing tile can be changed in a similar manner (2).
The minimum (maximum) size of an object is now set.
Configuring minimum and maximum object speed
In the Axxon Next VMS, the speed is a relative value computed from parameters of different units. The computing algorithm
includes both frame width and height. For more accurate search, we recommend you to perform several search iterations while
setting speed values empirically.   
The procedures for setting the minimum and maximum speed of a moving object are identical.
The minimum (or maximum) speed of a moving object can be set using any of the following methods:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  602

     User Guide

1. Position the cursor on an end point of the arrow and hold down either mouse button while you move the mouse. The
length of the arrow will correspond to the minimum (maximum) displacement of the object per second (1).

2. Use the arrows to set the minimum (maximum) speed of the object as percentages of the frame per second (2).
The minimum (maximum) speed of a moving object is now set.
The following objects will be included in the search results:
• If you set only the maximum speed - the objects that move slower, than the maximum speed.
• If only the minimum speed is specified - the objects that move faster than the minimum speed.
• If both the maximum and the minimum speed are specified - the objects whose speed does not exceed the maximum, but
is more than the minimum speed.
Configuring object color
The color range is selected using drag and drop on the color palette (click and hold either mouse button, move the mouse, then
release the button).

Any click on the palette is interpreted as the beginning of a new range; the previous range will disappear. 

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  603

     User Guide

Attention!
The Axxon Next's inner logic treats all objects as monochrome. The object color is averaged within the object's contour.
All objects of specified colors will appear in search results.

Configuring direction of object movement

By default, when searching the archive, the system searches for motion in all directions. It is possible to prevent searching for
motion in one or several specific directions.
Click with either mouse button to designate a direction in which you do not want to perform movement search (privacy mask).
The sector corresponding to the direction is then colored gray. If necessary, repeat this action for other directions. To reactivate
searches for a masked (gray) direction, click it again with either mouse button.

The required directions of an object’s movement are now set.

Configuring object entry/exit from area
"Entry" occurs when an object enters the field of view and crosses its boundaries; "exit" occurs when an object disappears from
the field of view and crosses its boundaries.
To find moments when an object enters an area, select Entеr, or for moments when an object exits an area, select Exit.

Choosing the object type

You can search for moving objects of one or several types: a person, a group of people, a vehicle, or an item left behind. To do
this, check the corresponding boxes.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  604

     User Guide

Note
The object type is determined by analyzing its appearance. An item that does not move for some time is considered to
be abandoned, e.g. a parked car.

Attention!
You cannot search by object type in VMD-generated metadata (see Setting up VMD-based Scene Analytics).

8.2.6.4.7 Titles search

You can search for keywords in the titles DB.
To search the titles DB, do as follows:
1. Set a time interval for your search (see Setting a search interval).
2. Enter the text that you want to find in the titles. You can search the whole word or part of it.

Attention!
Search is performed for the entire string of entered text, not for separate words.

3. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

This starts a search for video fragments based on the defined criteria. The search results pane displays frames for which there are
titles containing the keywords.

Attention!
When you search for events, the event time corresponds to the start time of the receipt, rather than the time of
occurrence of the search text.

8.2.6.4.8 LPR search

With LPR search you can find video footage for the recognized number plates.
To search recorded video for LPR results:
1. Set a time interval for your search (see Setting a search interval).
2. Enter the number plate.  Fuzzy search supported if you enter the number with the ? mask for  any one character, and the *
mask for any number of characters) For example, a search query ?20* will show all vehicles with license plate containing 2

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  605

     User Guide

and 0 in the second and third position respectively. The total number of characters  in number plates will be variable.

3. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

This starts a search for video fragments based on the defined criteria. The search results pane displays frames for which there are
number plates containing the search text.
A recognized number plate will be highlighted by a red frame in the Viewing Tile.

8.2.6.4.9 Face search

Face search allows to find faces similar to a given photo in an archive.
If you perform facial search via the camera window, face track and dimensions are always highlighted.

To perform face search:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  606

     User Guide

1. Set the search interval (see Setting a search interval).

2. Set the minimum similarity level (in %) between the face in the photo and faces from the archive (1). The search results
will contain only the video footage with faces with similarity levels above the set value.  

3. Select a photo with the face to be searched for in the archive (2). Supported formats: png, jpg, jpeg, jpe. Clicking on a
face will select this face as a search parameter. If you do not select a photo, then all faces recognized during the specified
time will be displayed.

4. Select, how to sort search results:  - by the face match;  - by time (3).
5. Click the Search button.

Note
Once launched, the search can be stopped at any time. To do this, click the Stop button which appears instead
of the Search button.

This starts a search in the archive based on the defined criteria.

The video frames with faces satisfying search conditions will be displayed in the search results panel. A recognized face will be
highlighted with a red frame, and the face similarity level(in %) will be shown below.

To instantly export a facial image from the scene, do the following:

1. Click a face track within the camera window.

2. Click the button  (4). 

The facial image will be saved to a pre-specified folder (see Configuring export options).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  607

     User Guide

8.2.6.4.9.1 Tell "friend" from "foe" by a picture

To determine the "friend"-"foe" status, do as follows:
1. Select a photo (1).

2. Click the  button. 

The Search bar (2) will display the probability that the person is a "stranger".
The algorithm  is as follows: 
1. The person is compared to all the recognized persons in the last 30 days.
2. The number of days (N) in which the person was captured by camera and recognized is calculated.
3. The probability is calculated according to the formula (1-N/30) * 100. 

8.2.6.4.10 Saving search queries

Saving a search query allows you to:
• quickly retrieve its results;
• apply search criteria to other cameras.
To save a search query, specify a name (1) and click the Save button (2). After this, the tab for the search query becomes
available in the lower-right corner of the viewing tile in Archive mode (see Viewing the results of a saved search query).

Attention!
The search range can not be saved.

To apply the saved search criteria to another camera's archive, switch the camera to Archive Search mode and select the
required search query.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  608

     User Guide

To edit a search query, view the list and select the relevant query.
Changes are not saved until the Save button is clicked. If the query name is changed, the query is saved under the new name and
the old, unchanged query remains available.

To delete a search query, click the  button.

8.2.6.4.11 Switching between search results

If a search was run more than once and the user did not exit Archive Search mode during that time, it is possible to switch
between search results.

Note
The number of stored results is limited only by the amount of RAM in the server.

Click  on the search control panel to switch to the previous search result, and click  to switch to the next result.
Each time you switch between results, the search results panel displays the moments corresponding to the previous/next result.

8.2.6.4.12 Working with search results

8.2.6.4.12.1 Viewing search results

The Search Control Panel shows how many episodes are found when the search is complete.

The search results panel displays the precise moments in an archive that correspond to the defined search criteria. The precise
time of each moment is displayed underneath (1).

Note
An alarm object is outlined in red.

Note
To copy the time and the start date of the video fragment to the Clipboard, right-click on them.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  609

     User Guide

A scroll bar is located on the right side of the search results panel (2). Beneath is a time scale adjuster (3).
If you choose a spot on the the timeline, the search results are automatically sorted.  The closest episode will be highlighted in
search results. 
You can filter the search results and keep only the important episodes. To do this:

1. Double-click the episode, that you want to keep. Its thumbnail is tagged with a star .

Note

To remove the tag, click the star again . 

2. Tag all the episodes you want to keep. 

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  610

     User Guide

3. Click Clear to delete untagged episodes from the search results. 

8.2.6.4.12.2 Viewing Search Results In TimeCompressor

When you search recorded video for motion events by metadata (LPR search, Face search, Forensic Search for Fragments
(MomentQuest)), you can view results in the TimeCompressor mode.

To do this, click the   button on the timeline in the camera window.

8.2.6.4.12.3 Playback of video fragments

To view the video fragment corresponding to a found moment in the archive, complete the following steps:
1. Left-click the found moment on the search results panel.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  611

     User Guide

2. Using the playback panel (1), start playback of the fragment in the viewing tile (2).

By default, the playback starts with the time specified under the thumbnail. You can use the control (3) to change the start
time. If the control is in the leftmost position,playback starts 4 seconds earlier then the start time. If the control is in the far right
position, playback starts 4 seconds later.

Note
If object tracking is activated in the viewing tile, then the properties of tracked objects (width and height as a
percentage of the width or height of the frame) are displayed when viewing video fragments found through forensic
search.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  612

     User Guide

Note
To switch between video fragments, use the corresponding buttons on the playback panel or on the advanced
navigation panel (see the sections titled Navigation using the advanced panel and Navigating Using the Playback
Panel).

Extreme zooming a camera window makes the Search Conditions and Archive Navigation panels become hidden (see Scaling the
Viewing Tile). 

8.2.6.4.12.4 Enlargement of found moments

When you find moments in archive video, you can enlarge the following:
• Object that triggered the detection tool (during event search).
• Track (during forensic search).
• Commented area of the frame (during comment search).

To do so, above the search results, click the  button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  613

     User Guide

Attention!
Enlargement occurs only in the following cases:
1. If the height and width of the visual item specified in the forensic search settings is less than 1/3 of the frame
dimensions.
2. If the tracking object occupies less than 1/3 of the frame (for detection tool search)
3. If the object marked by the comment occupies less than 1/3 of the frame (for comments search)
In all other cases, the found moments are displayed in their entirety.

To close zoom, click the  button again.

8.2.6.4.12.5 Exporting the video fragments and repeated search

To export the video fragment corresponding to a found moment in the archive:
1. Double-click the found moment on the search results panel.The interval for export will be set apart from this moment
until the next found moment.

Important
Double-clicking the found moment will also cause a repeated search within the selected time interval for export.

2. Export the video (see Exporting Video Recordings).

8.2.6.5 Simultaneous search in an archive of several video cameras

Attention!
The number of video cameras for search is not limited.

To search multiple cameras' Video Footage, do the following:

1. Choose your desired search type and criteria (see Search in an archive of a single video camera).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  614

     User Guide

2. In the Camera Search Panel, check the cameras where Video Footage search has to be performed (see Camera Search
Panel). 

To check all cameras within an Axxon domain, check the domain's box in the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel).

3. Click the Search button.

8.2.7 Working with fisheye cameras

8.2.7.1 Viewing modes for video from fisheye cameras

Axxon Next allows viewing the video stream and video archive from fisheye cameras, dewarping the video image into one of the
following formats:

1. 360о panorama.
2. Regional view.
3. 180о panorama (for video camera with an Immervision lens).

8.2.7.1.1 Selecting viewing mode for videos from a fisheye camera

By default, fisheye camera video viewing mode setting is taken from device settings (see Configuring fisheye cameras), or from
layout settings (see Selecting default functions for viewing tiles).
To change the viewing mode, do the following:
1. Open the camera's context menu.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  615

     User Guide

2. Select Change panomorph view type to PTZ or Change panomorph view type to Perimeter.

Note
This setting is not preserved if you switch to another layout.

8.2.7.1.2 360 degree Panorama and Regional view (virtual PTZ)

By default, video from fisheye cameras is displayed in viewing tiles as a 360о panorama.

Note
This display format is only available in Live Video  and Archive Video modes

When digital zoom is applied to video (see Digitally Zooming Video Images) by one notch or more, regional viewing begins.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  616

     User Guide

The following actions are available when viewing video in this format:
1. Point & Click functionality (see Control using Point&Click).
2. Change the angle of view of the fisheye camera, by left-clicking in the viewing tile.

In both viewing modes, all standard video surveillance functions are available for the fisheye camera.

When using a dual lens fisheye camera, the default viewing mode is set to two 180° views.

When you zoom in one of the images, both views will be merged into a single panoramic view.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  617

     User Guide

8.2.7.1.3 180 degree Panorama

This viewing mode is available for:
• cameras with Immervision lenses;
• dual lens fisheye cameras.

Note
If the video camera is wall-mounted, the angle of view cannot be configured (see Configuring fisheye cameras).

To set the viewing angle, click and hold the   button while moving the cursor to the left or right.
Point&Click (see Control using Point&Click) and all standard video viewing functions are available when viewing video in this
format.

8.2.7.2 Fisheye cameras on an interactive map

8.2.7.2.1 Viewing video and controlling a fisheye camera from the map
If a fisheye camera is ceiling-mounted (this position is selected in the video camera settings, see Configuring fisheye cameras)
and a 360о field of view is specified for it on the map, the video from the camera is displayed on the map in real time.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  618

     User Guide

To refocus the angle of view of a fisheye camera so that a chosen point in the viewing tile becomes the center of the frame, left-
click that point (this is the Point & Click function, see Changing the camera lens focus (Point&Click)).

Note
If the viewing tile for the fisheye camera is inactive when it is clicked, the first click on the video on the map activates the
viewing tile. The second click activates the Point & Click function

8.2.7.2.2 Fisheye cameras in immersive mode

In immersive mode (see Immersive mode), the video from a fisheye camera is displayed on the entirety of the video surveillance
screen, above the map display, as virtual PTZ (see Viewing modes for video from fisheye cameras).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  619

     User Guide

In immersive mode, only the following video surveillance functions are available for fisheye cameras.
1. Digital zoom via mouse scrolling (see Enlarging a video image using the mouse scroll wheel).
2. Point & Click functionality (see Changing the camera lens focus (Point&Click)).
3. To change the angle of view of a fisheye camera, move the mouse around the video image while holding down the left
mouse button.

To exit immersive mode, click the  button.

8.2.8 Facial recognition and search

Face recognition events are registered in the System Log (see The System Log).
These events can as well be displayed on the Events Board (see Working with Events Boards) or Dialog Board (see Working with
Dialog Board).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  620

     User Guide

If you activate the age and gender informartion collection, its results will be displayed on the panel and saved into the System
Log (see Configure Facial Recognition).

If the Camera window is linked to the Event Board (see Linking cells), you can double click on an event to start the Video Footage
search for sequences containing the recognized face.
If you have created any lists of faces, configured an alarm on facial recognition, and linked the Camera window to the dialog
board, you will have the following information on screen upon recognition a person that belongs to the list:
1. Reference photo from the List of Faces.
2. Close up shots  of faces captured in the scene.
3. Additional information about the person, and similarity percentage between the recognized and reference photos.

If the Dialog Board has a portrait orientation, its lower part will display the alarm video. 

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  621

     User Guide

The Alarm notification panel will also include:

1. reference photo,
2. thumbnail preview of the source recognition video,
3. name of the list of faces,
4. similarity percentage.

You can search FR events in recorded video from one (see Face search) or multiple cameras (see Simultaneous search in an
archive of several video cameras). 
You can set the system to mask recognized faces from viewing (see Masking faces).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  622

     User Guide

8.2.9 Vehicle number plate recognition and search

VMS logs every ANPR number (see The System Log).

Attention!
Depending on detection tool settings, a delay may occur between the number recognition and the registration of the
corresponding event (see Configuring License plate recognition (VT), Configuring License plate recognition (IV)).
The event is time-stamped with the time of recognition, not registration.
For example, if a car passes the camera at 12:05:00, and the detection tool is set to a 10 sec timeout, the event  will be
registered at 12:05:10 and the event data will include 12:05:00 as the time of recognition.

Attention!
The standard license provides a more than 30-sec delay between the number recognition and the corresponding event
(see Configuring License plate recognition (VT).

All relevant events can be displayed on the Events Board (see Working with Events Boards) or Dialog Board (see Working with
Dialog Board).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  623

     User Guide

If you have created any LP Lists in your system, you can program automatic responses (e.g. alarm triggering) to LP recognition
events related to list's entries (see Configuring real-time vehicle license plate recognition).

8.2.10 Temperature screening

In Axxon Next, only two methods of temperature screening are available:
1. With the use of Mobotix M16 TR cameras. In this case, temperature values are displayed next to each recognized face's
bounding box (see Face Detection and Temperature Control with Mobotix M16 TR cameras).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  624

     User Guide

Each face recognition event contains thermal measurement data which can be displayed on the Events Board (see
Working with Events Boards).
2. With the use of built-in detection tools of selected camera models (see Embedded Detection Tools).
Some cameras are capable to display a bounding box over the facial image along with corresponding temperature
readings. If this option is available, it can be activated via the web interface of a particular camera.

8.3 Working with information boards

8.3.1 Resizing information boards

You can resize information boards in the same way as viewing tiles (see Scaling the Viewing Tile).

Note
When the Counter Board is enlarged, the graph is enlarged as well, displaying data for a broader range of time. When
the size of the Counter  Board is reduced, the opposite occurs.
In both cases, the right-hand border of the graph is constant.

If an information board tile is linked to a viewing tile, at the first enlargement step (to 50%), the viewing tile and information
board tile are displayed together and occupy all of the screen on one side.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  625

     User Guide

Note
In this case, the first step takes into account the total size of the related cells: the related cells must be less than 50% of
both sides of the layout

8.3.2 Hiding information boards

Operators can hide information boards in a layout, if this is allowed in the settings.

To hide an information board, in its upper-right corner, click the  button.

Note
If configured, Dialog Board hides after you click a Response Button (see Configure the Dialog Board).

If all cells in the layout have the same size, the space freed up after hiding an information board is allocated to the neighboring
cells. Horizontal neighbors have priority over vertical ones.
If free space cannot be distributed horizontally, it is distributed between the vertical neighbors.
In more complicated cases (when cell sizes are different), an attempt is made to distribute the free space between horizontal
neighboring cells. If this is not possible, free space is distributed between vertical neighboring cells. If even this second attempt is
unsuccessful due to the layout configuration, the space remains empty.
Hidden information boards are displayed in two cases:
1. After switching to another layout and back to the original one
2. When an event occurs that requires the operator's attention A description of such events for each type of information
board is given in the following table.

Types of information boards Events that trigger board display

Dialog and Events An event matching the board filtering settings occurs

Health Server condition worsens

Counter New events occur

8.3.3 Automatically switching to layouts with information boards

Automatic switching to a layout with an information board is possible for Events Board, Health Board and Dialog  Board (if it is
set up to Automated Responses to Events). This option is available when configuring boards of these types.
Automatic switching to a layout with Events Board or Dialog Board occurs when all of the following conditions are met:
1. The current layout does not contain Event/ Dialog Board.
2. An event matching the board filtering settings has occurred in the system.
Automatic switching to a layout with a Health Board occurs when the following conditions are met:
1. The current layout does not contain a Health Board.
2. The status of a monitored server or camera worsens.
The layout with the smallest number of cells is chosen for display. If there are multiple layouts with identical numbers of cells,
the layout that comes first in the alphabet is chosen.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  626

     User Guide

8.3.4 Working with Events Boards

8.3.4.1 Options for displaying information on Events Boards

Events Boards display information about selected system events. Configuration of the events to display is performed in the
corresponding section.
Events on the board can be displayed in three ways, chosen via the buttons in the upper-left corner of the board:
1. First frame of events and their time

Note
The frame is not displayed when there is no recording in the archive.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  627

     User Guide

2. First frame of events and text

3. Text only

When a layout is switched to, by default the Events Board is displayed as configured in the settings.

At the top of the list are the most recent events. If you are at the end of the list, you can use the  button in the panel's top-
right corner to go to the most recent events. New events are highlighted for 4 seconds. The panel may include up to 100 events.  If
the number of events exceeds the maximum permitted value, the newer events will be displayed in place of older ones.
You can also access the events panel on the right side of the screen (see Viewing selected camera's detection tool triggering
events). In this case, it includes only detection events for a selected camera.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  628

     User Guide

8.3.4.2 Switching a camera linked to an Events Board to the archives

If an Events Board is linked with a camera, clicking an event will switch the camera to Archive mode at the point in time
corresponding to the event.

Note
If there is no archive for a camera when an alarm occurs, the archive is positioned at the closest recorded archive entry.

Note
 If an Events Board is linked to several cameras, all cameras transition to Archive mode.

8.3.5 Working with Health Boards

Health Boards display the status of selected system servers and connected cameras.
By default, the panel displays the status of Servers.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  629

     User Guide

To switch to viewing the status of cameras, click the diagram for the relevant server.

Note
In table mode, you can view server status  by clicking the relevant line in the table.

To switch to a view of server status, click the  button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  630

     User Guide

8.3.5.1 Viewing server status

Information about the status of servers can be displayed in three ways, chosen via the buttons in the upper-left corner of the
board:
1. as diagrams

2. as diagrams with text

3. as a table

Note
Disconnected Servers are displayed at the end of the list with dimmed brightness.

Tables can be sorted by any column in any direction.

On each server the following metrics are monitored: CPU, Network usage, Disk subsystem status, Power status.

Note
The remaining time of the archive replication is also displayed in the table.

Areas of the diagram change color based on the respective status.

  CPU Network HDD

Red Load >95% Connection failure Critical load on the disk subsystem, data loss when recording to archive over 10%

Yellow Load from 85% to 94% At 70% to 100% of capacity Elevated load on the disk subsystem, data loss when recording to archive under 10%

Green Load <85% At less than 70% of capacity Normal functioning of the disk subsystem (proper operation)

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  631

     User Guide

When you switch the server to reserve power, an  icon is added to the chart. The icon disappears when you restore the main
power.
The edge of the diagram changes color based on the status of the connected cameras (see Viewing camera status).
If the entire edge is green, all cameras are in normal condition. If part of the edge is yellow or red, some cameras have borderline
or critical status.
Overall server status is determined from the above parameters as follows:
1. Normal – all components and cameras are normal.
2. Borderline – possible problems with the status of at least one component or camera.
3. Critical – at least one component or camera is in critical condition.
Server information is updated every ten seconds.
If the connection to a server is lost, a corresponding icon is used to depict it.

If all servers are in normal condition, the bottom of the board displays a status bar with information about the number of
monitored and distressed servers.

If the status of any server worsens, the status bar is replaced by a message. When the message is clicked, the server status is
displayed (if the board is currently displaying camera status).

The message then closes and the status bar again appears.

Note
If the status of several servers worsens, a message is shown for the last one.

8.3.5.2 Viewing camera status

Information about the status of cameras can be displayed in three ways, chosen via the buttons in the upper-left corner of the
board:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  632

     User Guide

1. as diagrams

2. as diagrams with text

3. as a table

Note
Disconnected cameras are displayed at the end of the list with dimmed brightness.

Tables can be sorted by any column in any direction.

The following information is displayed for each camera:  
1. The percentage rate of actual video fps to the camera's high definition stream fps setting (see The Video Camera Object).
2. Status of detection tools (loss of quality, position change, motion)
3. Depth refers to the number of hours or days from the start of the earliest video stored in any archive to the end of the
most recent video (if archive recording is not configured for the camera, this section is colored gray on the diagram).
4. Average recording time, in hours per day, is the ratio of the total recording time  to the age of the archive  / retention time
(time from the earliest stored video to now). 

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  633

     User Guide

Note
For constant recording, this parameter value is equal to 24 hours. If the recording takes 50 percent of total time,
the value is 12 hours.

5. Remaining time for replication of the archive.

The camera status is measured based on the signal from the camera and stream rate:
1. Normal – camera signal present, frame rate & to max from 70% to 100% The camera is colored green on the diagram and
in the table.
2. Borderline – camera signal present, frame rate & to max from 20% to 70% The camera is colored yellow on the diagram
and in the table.
3. Critical – no camera signal or frame rate & to max is less than 20% The camera is colored red on the diagram and in the
table.
Information is updated every ten seconds.
If there is no signal from a camera, the appearance of the diagram changes accordingly.

Information about detection tools is received in real time. Depending on the status of detection tools, the corresponding icons
change color:
• Green – detection tool status is normal
• Red – detection tool activated
• Gray – detection tool disabled

8.3.6 Working with Statistics Boards

The Statistics Board is a graph of the number of events of a certain type for a specified timeframe. The type of events and amount
of time between the points of the graph are configured in the board settings (see Configuring a Statistics Board).
The points of the graph change over time and depend on the current time and interval specified in the settings.
The points are calculated every minute/hour/day/etc. based on the selected unit of measurement (if the interval is specified in
minutes, then every minute; if specified in hours, then every hour, and so forth) and is performed as follows:
1. The current time (last point on the graph) is rounded to the nearest whole unit of time (if the interval in the settings is
specified in minutes, then the nearest whole minute; if specified in hours, then the nearest whole hour, and so forth).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  634

     User Guide

2. This rounded time is used as the next-to-last point.

3. The formula for the other points is as follows: the adjacent point to the right, minus the interval of time specified in the
settings.
For example, the interval is set to 10 minutes on this sample graph here. The current time (1:07:33 p.m.) is the last point on the
graph, so after rounding this to the next whole minute we get the value for the next-to-last point: 1:07:00 p.m. Correspondingly,
the points before it are 12:57:00 p.m., 12:47:00 p.m., etc.

When the current time becomes 1:08:00 p.m., the points will be updated to 12:58:00 p.m., 12:48:00 p.m., etc.
The graph displays the current number of events. The number of events is recalculated every minute and does not depend on the
interval chosen.
For example, for this graph with a time interval of 2 hours and a current time of 1:48:23 p.m., the current number of events
equals 413, for the period from 11:48:00 a.m. to 1:48:00 p.m.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  635

     User Guide

To scroll through the graph, use the arrows  on the graph edges. To jump to the last point on the graph, click the 
button.
Clicking anywhere on the graph jumps to the nearest point and the relevant value is indicated.

8.3.7 Working with Web Boards

Web Board allows users to view a selected web page in the camera window.
In Web Board, you can view web sites in Internet Explorer.
If the web page does not fit the board, vertical and horizontal scroll bars are displayed. In this case, the upper-left corner of the
web page is displayed.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  636

     User Guide

Note
If there is no network connection, no access to the requested page or if there are other problems, Web Board displays
standard Internet Explorer browser error messages.

8.3.8 Working with Dialog Board

Configure the Dialog Board

Dialog Board works in three modes:

1. Automated Responses to Events. 
2. View and Evaluate Alarm.
3. View Video (Active camera).
In Automated Responses to Events, the board shows:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  637

     User Guide

1. The last-in event matching the board filtering settings (1, see Configure the Dialog Board).

Note
All of the above mentioned elements of the board are optional. You configure the board to show them.

2. Text message as configured (2).

3. Comments filed (3).  Comments input can be optional or mandatory (as configured). Comments are logged to System
Log,  when you click a response button.
4. Response Buttons (4). If you click a response button, the macro starts,  and the board auto-hides (if configured, see Hiding
information boards). 
If the pane has a history of events (see Configure the Dialog Board), you can use browse it with arrows in top-right corner. Event
history is erased after you switch to another layout.

In the second mode, the panel will display an alarm event from the selected or linked camera, depending on the panel setting
and the event evaluation buttons.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  638

     User Guide

In the third mode, the panel shows video:

1. from the selected camera;
2. from the stand-by camera for the selected camera.
3. from the stand-by camera for the linked camera.
You can select a camera if you click on its tile on a layout, in the Objects panel (see Objects Panel) or on the map (see Working
with the Interactive Map).

The panel can also display a selected still image.

8.4 Layouts Management

The Axxon Next user can run the following commands here:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  639

     User Guide

1. Select a layout for display on screen.

2. Start and stop slideshows of layouts. Slideshow is rotation through all available layouts according to an assigned
frequency (dwell-time).
3. Create temporary layouts. 
You can work with layouts done on the Layouts ribbon (see The Layouts panel).

8.4.1 Changing cameras within a layout

You can change cameras within your current layout. These changes are non-permanent and will persist until you switch to
another layout.
You can change:
• any single camera;
• all cameras within the layout.
To change a single camera, drag and drop its icon from the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel) or Camera Search Panel (see
Camera Search Panel) to the layout cell of your choice.
The change all cameras within the current layout, select the required number of cameras on the object panel, and drag&drop it
to the layout.

Note
To select multiple cameras, use Ctrl or Shift key.

After you drag and drop a group of cameras, the layout will include all cameras from this group; when you drag and drop an
Axxon domain, all cameras from this domain will be displayed.

Note
Currently disabled cameras will not be included.

8.4.2 Selection and Slideshow of Layouts

To display a layout, click it with the left mouse button.

If the client is connected to multiple Axxon domains, layouts for the main Axxon domain are listed by default. To view the layouts
of other Axxon domains, select the desired domain on the camera search panel.
If another user has shared the layout, you will see the following icon:

Note
If you hover the mouse cursor over such a layout, you will see the name of the user that has shared it.

To launch a slideshow, click the   button, and select Start slideshow in the context menu of the layout panel.        

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  640

     User Guide

Note
If you have only one layout in VMS, you do not have StartSlideshow in the context menu.

This will launch a carousel of all available layouts according to the assigned dwell-time (see Configuring Slideshow parameters).
To launch a user-defined slide show, select the required one from the list.

Note
To launch a slide show on a video wall (see Monitor Management), select the required monitor in the Video Wall
Management Panel (see Monitor Panel).

To turn off slideshow mode, select Stop slideshow in the context menu of the layouts panel or left-click any viewing tile.

8.4.3 Working with Special layouts

Configuring special layouts

Alerted Cameras layout

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  641

     User Guide

The first 10 seconds after the alert appears in the special layout, it is highlighted. 

Cameras disappear from the Alerted Cameras layout  in 2 cases:

1. After the alert is classified and the next camera is on (see Processing an Alarm).
2. After the timeout expires (see Configuring Alarm Management Mode).

Note
The alarm sticks to  the layout while the Alarm Management window is open and before the timeout expires. If
you select a different camera without classifying the alarm, the alarm evaluation timeout resets

New alerted cameras will populate the layout as follows:

1. If there are any free cells on the layouts after you have classified or missed the alert, the first free cell is taken.
2. If there are no free cells on the layout, the new alerted cameras takes the next free cell. If there are no free cells, the
alerted camera is added to the waiting list
Selected Cameras layout
All selected cameras are displayed on this layout.
Dynamic Layout
By default, Dynamic Layout is empty. You can add cameras from the object panel (see Objects Panel) one by one or several at
once (a group, all video cameras of the Server or Axxon Domains).
To do this, select the target unit on the object panel and drag&drop it to the layout. The grid of cells will be displayed on the
layout while you are moving the unit.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  642

     User Guide

All changes to the Dynamic Layout are preserved until you exit the Client.  After you launch the Client, the Dynamic Layout is
always empty.
However, you can back up your Dynamic Layout at any given time (see Layout copying).

8.5 Monitor Management

8.5.1 Managing monitors on a local Client

You can display layout on any hardware monitor of a Client. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Click anywhere on the local Client's monitor layout diagram (see the Monitor Panel section).

Note.
Client monitor management falls under user rights (see the Creating and configuring roles section).

Monitors' expanded views open.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  643

     User Guide

Note

Each monitor has its unique ID number. To display the ID number of a monitor, click .

The thumbnails may appear differently, depending on the status of the monitors in Axxon Next.
Thumbnail Monitor status

Active main monitor

Inactive main monitor

Unassigned additional monitor

Inactive additional monitor (video wall)

Active additional monitor (video wall)

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  644

     User Guide

Note.
The image of the monitors shows the currently open layout.

2. To display the layout on the monitor, you have to:

a. Click the + button on the non-distributed additional video monitor's thumbnail. The additional monitor becomes
active, and the layout of the main monitor is duplicated to it.
b. Set up a layout on an additional monitor (see the Configuring layouts section). You can configure the layout of the
additional monitor through the main monitor (the additional monitor must be active). Changes affect only the
additional monitor; the layout of the main monitor is not changed.
c. Click the main monitor's thumbnail. The additional monitor becomes inactive, and the original layout is displayed
on the main monitor. If the additional monitor becomes inactive, editing of the layout does not affect it.
3. To display a currently selected camera on the main monitor, do the following:

a. Click the  button on the non-distributed additional video monitor. 

b. Selecting a camera on the primary monitor makes its video feed visible on the additional monitor.
The additional monitors are now configured.
To edit a layout on an additional monitor, do the following:
1. Activate the additional monitor (by clicking its thumbnail).
2. Edit the layout.
3. Make the additional monitor inactive.
You can change the set of cameras to be displayed on the main or additional monitor using the Objects Panel; these changes are
not saved, and the initial layout is restored after rebooting the Client. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Open and lock the Monitor panel (see Monitor Panel).
2. Open the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel).
3. Using the Ctrl or Shift keys, select one or several cameras on the panel.
4. Left-click on any selected camera.
5. Drag the camera icon onto a desired cell on the main or additional monitor's layout diagram.
6. Release the mouse button
Another way to put a camera into a desired cell on the main or secondary monitor layout diagram is to capture the camera's icon
on the interactive Map (see Working with the Interactive Map).

You can close main and additional monitor views separately. To close an additional monitor in Axxon Next, click the  button
on its thumbnail.

8.5.2 Managing monitors on remote Clients within the Axxon domain

Having appropriate user rights, you can remotely manage monitors on remote Clients connected to a Server within the Axxon
domain (see the Creating and configuring roles section).
The following actions are possible:
1. Add a layout to an additional monitor of a remote Client.
2. Select another layout or a camera on the additional monitor.
3. Edit a layout on the main or additional monitor.
4. Shut down the additional monitor.
To display a layout on the additional monitor of a remote Client, click anywhere on the required Client's monitor layout diagram,
and select a non-distributed video monitor (see Monitor Panel).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  645

     User Guide

Note
You can add a layout to the additional monitor of a remote Client the same way as you do it for a local Client (see
Managing monitors on a local Client).

To select another layout on a remote Client's monitor, do the following:

1. Select the desired layout on the local Client (see Selection and Slideshow of Layouts).
2. Click anywhere on the remote Client's monitor layout diagram, and then on the required monitor's view.
The selected layout will be displayed on a selected monitor of the remote Client.
If a single camera is displayed on the remote Client's additional monitor, you can switch to another camera by selecting it
through the local Client.
To edit the remote Client's main or additional monitor layout, do the following:
1. Select (see The Layouts panel) or configure (see Creating and deleting layouts) the desired layout on the local Client.
2. Click anywhere on the remote Client's monitor layout diagram.

3. Click the   on the main or secondary monitor layout diagram.

The remote Client's layout is saved, and will be available after rebooting the Client.
You can change the set of cameras to be displayed on the main or additional monitor using the Objects Panel; these changes are
not saved, and the initial layout is restored after rebooting the Client. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Open and lock the Monitor panel (see Monitor Panel).
2. Open the Objects Panel (see Objects Panel).
3. Using the Ctrl or Shift keys, select one or several cameras on the panel.
4. Left-click on any selected camera.
5. Drag the camera icon onto a desired cell on the main or additional monitor's layout diagram.
6. Release the mouse button. 
Another way to put a camera into a desired cell on the main or secondary monitor layout diagram is to capture the camera's icon
on the interactive Map (see Working with the Interactive Map).

To close an additional monitor on a remote Client, click the  button on the monitor's thumbnail.

8.6 Audio Monitoring

8.6.1 General Information

Audio monitoring of a situation is carried out using the microphones that correspond to a video camera surveying the situation.
In different viewing tile modes, different audio monitoring functions are accessible:
1. Live playback mode – listening to sound from a microphone in real time; playing back sound from Client microphone on
camera speakers.
2. Archive mode, Alarm Management mode, Archive Search mode– playback of sound recorded from a microphone.

Note
In Archive mode and Archive Search mode, an audio recording can be played back only from the microphone
corresponding to the currently selected video camera, and only in forward playback mode at a speed of 1x.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  646

     User Guide

8.6.2 Listening on the Client to sound from a camera microphone

Attention!
The Microphone object must be enabled (see the section titled The Microphone Object).

To listen on the Client to sound from the microphone of a camera, left-click to activate the speaker icon in the viewing tile.

Note
Audio from only one camera can be played back at a time

The speaker icon now becomes active and a volume slider appears.

Volume is controlled using the volume adjuster.

The far left position of the adjuster represents the minimum volume, and the far right position represents the maximum volume.

Note
The Axxon Next VMS has an embedded sound booster.

To turn off audio playback, click the speaker icon again.

If a camera has several microphones connected, use the following procedure to select the audio source:
1. Open the camera's context menu.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  647

     User Guide

2. Select Sound.

3. Select the microphone you need.

Note
The currently selected microphone is marked as On. If you select a 8.0 microphone, the 3,1.0 microphone is set
to off, and 8.0 microphone to on.

Note
If a currently specified loudspeaker goes offline, the system automatically switches to another available one.
After the first loudspeaker goes back online, no automatic switching will occur. 
To automatically activate the first loudspeaker in such a case, you have to create a NGP_PORTSOUND_HOSTAPI system
variable and set it to DS (see Appendix 10. Creating system variable).

8.6.3 Playing back sound from Client microphone on camera speakers

Audio transmission from the Client's microphone behind NAT to the Server's or camera's loudspeaker

Sound from the Client microphone can be broadcast both on a single camera and on all cameras in a layout.

Attention!
To use this option:
1. Configuration of audio on the Client is now completed (see Configuring audio on the Client).
2. Speaker objects are activated for the corresponding cameras (see The Speaker Object).

To broadcast sound on the speaker of a single camera, left-click the microphone icon in the viewing tile.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  648

     User Guide

The microphone icon now becomes active.

To turn off broadcasting of sound on a camera speaker, click the microphone icon again.
To broadcast sound on speakers on all cameras in a layout, in the context menu of the layouts ribbon, select Enable audio for
all.

The microphone icon is then activated for all cameras that have an activated Speaker object.
To turn off sound broadcasting on all cameras, select Disable audio for all.

8.7 Working with the Interactive Map

You can use the interactive map in three modes;
1. 3D mode, in which both the map and layout are available
2. 2D mode, in which only the map is available
3. immersion mode, in which video is overlaid on the map
The map can contain icons for cameras, inputs, and outputs. The area in which live video is displayed and field of view are
indicated for each camera.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  649

     User Guide

8.7.1 Opening and closing the map

You can switch to Map View from all modes of operation except for Archive Search.

To go Map View, click the Map button in the bottom right corner .
The Map will open in a 3 D view while the current layout contracts to fit the screen area over the map.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  650

     User Guide

To switch to 2D map view and close the layout, click the  button to the left of the Map button.
If you expand a tile to full screen, the map auto-hides (see Scaling the Viewing Tile).

Note
When you minimize the tile, the map appears again.

8.7.2 Geo map search

Using the OpenStreetMap web service, you can search for sites or streets within a pre-defined city/town (see Setting keywords for
geo map search, refer to the provider's website for details).
To do so, enter the street name in the corresponding field, and press Enter.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  651

     User Guide

8.7.3 Changing the map tilt

You can change the tilt of the map by adjusting the border between the map and the layout areas.

To switch to 2D map view and close the layout, click the  button to the left of the Map button.

Note
You can also switch to 2D when the map is hidden.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  652

     User Guide

To return to 3D, click the Map button. To close the map, clcik the  button.

8.7.4 Scaling and focusing of map

Map scale and focus can be changed both manually and automatically.

Note
The map is automatically resized and refocused if this function is activated in the settings (see Configuring map
autozoom).

Automatic adjustment of map scale and focus occurs when a video camera alarm occurs, if no video camera icon is selected on
the map.
In this case, the map is scaled and refocused to center the icon for the alarm camera on the map.
If alarms occur for several video cameras simultaneously, the map scale and position are adjusted to show all icons for the
relevant video cameras.
After a video camera alarm ends and there are no alarms for other video cameras, the map scale and position return to their
initial status.
Automatic scaling and focusing of the map stops during the following actions:
When the user clicks to select the icon of a video camera on the map or viewing tile
To manually adjust the map scale, use the mouse scroll wheel (the cursor must be above the map) or use the map scale slider.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  653

     User Guide

After increasing the scale, you can refocus the map with the mouse (by clicking and holding the left mouse button) in the
direction of your choice.

8.7.5 Customizing an Interactive Map

You can change some of the map settings in Live Video. Use the controls in the bottom right corner of the screen.

You can adjust transparency of video display in the Map View using a dedicated slider in the bottom right corner.

The leftmost position corresponds to no video, the rightmost makes the video opaque.
Use the 

 
button to toggle the display of devices' names and their IDs.
To enable/disable camera icon fluttering on alarm, use the 

/ 

 button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  654

     User Guide

To change the action when you click on the video camera icon on the map, use (takes you to the layout with the camera) /
(switches to immersion mode (see Immersive mode)).

To change map view, use the button  (3D view) /  (flat view).
Video in 3D view:

Video in flat view:

8.7.6 Immersive mode

In immersion mode, video from a selected camera is overlaid on the map display.
If links have been created between video and the map (see Configuring cameras in immersion mode), an angle will be chosen so
that objects in the video match the objects as depicted on the map.
If links have not been created, the map is shown so that the video is located in the field of view specified for the camera on the
map. The field of view is oriented upwards.

To switch to immersion mode, click the  button on the left border of the viewing tile or, on the map, left-click a video icon,
field of view, or video display area.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  655

     User Guide

Note

The second method is possible if the button is not pressed   (see Customizing an Interactive Map).

In immersive mode you can view video from only one video camera at a time.
To select another video camera, do one of the following:
1. Click the video camera icon or its field of view on the map, if possible.
2. Exit immersive mode and select the necessary video camera on the map.
To exit immersive mode, do one of the following:

1. Click the  button.

2. Minimize the viewing tile by clicking the  button.

3. Click a part of the map that does not contain the camera field of view.

Note
Actions 2 and 3 do not apply if a fisheye camera is in immersive mode (see Fisheye cameras in immersive mode)

8.7.7 Switching between maps

In any mode, you can switch between the maps that have been created in the system.
You can switch between maps in two ways:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  656

     User Guide

1. In the lower-left corner of the screen, select the corresponding tab

Note

If many maps have been created, some tabs may not fit on the screen. If this happens, click the  button. In
the drop-down menu that opens, select a map.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  657

     User Guide

2. By left-clicking a map icon for switching, if it has been created (see Adding switches to another map).
The icon header shows the name of the destination map.

8.7.8 Controlling devices from the map

You can manage devices on the map (video cameras, Outputs) by using the context menus of the corresponding icons. You can
control devices in all modes.
Commands for controlling video cameras are given in the table below.

Command (context menu item) Condition Icon status after the command is performed

Arm The camera is disarmed

Private Arm The camera is disarmed

Arming and Disarming a Video Camera

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  658

     User Guide

Disarm Camera armed

Commands for controlling outputs are given in the table below.

Command (context menu item) Condition Icon status after the command is performed

Turns the output on Output in normal status

Disable output Output is activated

 

Note
From within the map, you cannot switch the status of the Output if there are macros with the corresponding action
running in the system

8.7.9 Displaying device status

The icons on the map indicate the current status of the corresponding devices.
The table below possible status states of the video camera icon are described in the following list.

Map icon Camera status

Camera disarmed, no archive recording

Camera disarmed, archive recording active

Camera armed, no archive recording

Camera armed, archive recording active

Camera alarm, archive recording active

Camera connection lost

The table below possible status states of the Output icon are described in the following list.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  659

     User Guide

Map icon Output status

Output is activated

Output in normal status

 

Note
When a macro changes  the Output status, the Output icon on the map  does not change.

The table below possible status states of the Input icon are described in the following list.

Map icon Input status

Video camera is armed, Input is in normal status

Video camera is armed, Input is in alarm status

 

Video camera is disarmed, Input is in normal status

 

Video camera is disarmed, Input is in alarm status

 

Inputs (sensors) connected to Tibbo boards also show temperature/humidity values on the map.

8.7.10 Selecting Cameras for a Temporary Layout

You can use the Map to select cameras for viewing their video feeds on a temporary layout.
Do the following:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  660

     User Guide

1. Press and hold Ctrl, and left-click camera icons.

2. Click the Show Layout button.

The selected cameras' views appear on the temporary layout which is not preserved after you switch to any other layout. 

8.8 Exporting Frames and Video Recordings

Users with the corresponding rights can export snapshots and video. if a Client is connected to multiple Axxon-domains, export
of snapshots and video is available only for cameras on the Axxon-domains on which the user has the corresponding rights.
Still frames can be exported to JPG and PDF, videos can be exported to AVI, MP4, MKV and EXE formats.
Exported videos will contain synchro audio. 
The name of the exported file contains the following information: name of camera, export date, and export duration.

Note.
The date and time of the event in the file name are given based on the Windows locale settings.

Note.
The file name can be up to 70 characters long.

When exporting a snapshot to PDF, you can also print the document immediately.
A digital watermark is added to exported snapshots and video. Watermark authentication is available in the corresponding
bundled utility (see the Digital Signature Verification Utility section).

Note
Exported videos and snapchots are digitally signed with the SHA-256 algorithm.

Titles containing a date and time stamp will be superimposed on exported video.

Note.
Captions are stored in a separate video track and, if necessary, are disabled in the player through software.

8.8.1 Frame export

You can export snapshots at any time when working with a camera in Axxon Next.
To export a snapshot:
1. If exporting from archive mode or archive analysis mode, specify an export area and mask if necessary (see
the Configuring export area and masks section).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  661

     User Guide

2. In the viewing tile, in the upper-right corner, click the  button. 

Attention!

 To instantly export a frame with standard settings, right-click the button.

3. Specify the folder to which you want to export the snapshot (1).

Note.
By default, snapshots are exported to the folder specified in the export settings (see the Configuring export
section).
If you change this folder, the new path to exported files will be kept in memory until the Client restarts.

4. Select the date and time for a snapshot (2). The default setting is the frame currently displayed in the viewing tile. If you
are watching recorded video, then the snapshot with the frame displayed at the time when you hit the button

Note.
If you are watching live video, then the snapshot with the frame displayed at the time when you hit the
button. Date and time fields are not displayed.

5. Select the snapshot format: PDF or JPG (3).

6. If you want to export a snapshot to an encrypted zip archive, set a password (4).

Attention!
This setting may be overridden by the user role settings (see Creating and configuring roles).

7. If exporting a snapshot to PDF format, you can add comments (5).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  662

     User Guide

8. To export unmasked frames from the Video Footage, the user must have appropriate access rights. To perform such an
export, check the View Masked Video box (6).
9. Enter the credentials of the supervisor who confirms the launch of export (7).

Note
The supervisor enters their password only if it is required by user rights settings. If no export confirmation is
required, these fields will not be displayed.

10. If exporting to PDF, you can immediately send the file to print (8). In this case, the snapshot is not saved to disk.
11. To export the snapshot, click the corresponding button (9).
Export begins. Progress is shown in the export panel (see the Viewing export progress section).
Export of the frame is now complete. The frame exported to JPG  will also be placed on the Clipboard.

8.8.2 Exporting Video Recordings

8.8.2.1 Standard video export

Standard export of video takes place as follows:
1. An export range (timeframe) is set.
Set the export interval on the primary or secondary timeline. You can do it later by entering the date and time (see item 3c
below):
a. on the main timeline, move the bar to the beginning of the range that you want to export. Click the  button.
Move the bar to the end of the range that you want to export. Click the  button. You can also select the export
interval by using the right mouse button. To clear the interval, click the  button;

b. you can specify the range on the additional navigation panel in the same way, by clicking the  buttons.
You cannot use the mouse to set the export range on the additional navigation panel.
2. Setting export area and masks (see the Configuring export area and masks).
3. Setting an export format, specifying where to save exported files, and adding comments.

a. On the timeline or in a viewing tile, click the  button.

The export window opens.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  663

     User Guide

b. If necessary, change the export path (1). By default, the file is exported to the folder specified in the settings (see
the Configuring export section). If you change this folder, the new path to exported files will be kept in memory
until the Client restarts.
c. You can set the start and end time of the exported  episode in the calendar (2).

d. If necessary, specify a different file format for exporting the video (3). Videos can be exported into the following 4
formats:  MP4, MKV, EXE and AVI.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  664

     User Guide

Note.
Video is exported in MKV format without recompression.
Video is exported in AVI format with recompression in the selected codec (see point 4). Export to AVI files
may take longer time because of recompression. 
In addition, AVI export increases CPU load, especially when you export several files at once (see
Simultaneous export of video from multiple cameras, Exporting all event videos).
When video is exported in EXE format, a self-contained executable file is generated, containing video,
playback tools, and necessary codecs.
When exporting to EXE format, please note that Windows does not allow launching executable files of
more than 4 Gb.

e. If you want to export to an encrypted zip archive, set a password (4). If you are exporting an .exe file, you will need
to enter a password when you open the file. 

Attention!
This setting may be overridden by the user role settings (see Creating and configuring roles).

f. If necessary, add comments for the export. The comments will be shown as captions when the exported video is
played (5).
g. If you export a video to MKW or AVI format, and you need to copy the Axxon Player utility (see The Axxon Player
User Guide) to the same folder, check the corresponding box (6). 
h. To export unmasked videos from the Video Footage, the user must have appropriate access rights. To perform
such an export, check the View Masked Video box (7).
i. Enter the credentials of the supervisor who confirms the launch of export (8).

Note
The supervisor enters their password only if it is required by user rights settings. If no export confirmation
is required, these fields will not be displayed.

j. Click the Export button (9).

The export process begins. Progress is shown on the export panel (see the Viewing export progress section).

Note.
You can stop export at any time by clicking the Stop button.

Note.
The duration of the exported file can be longer than the specified one, because the keyframe is not always at the
beginning of the export interval.

8.8.2.2 Instant video export

You can instantly export video without needing to specify an export range. To do so, click the  button in a viewing tile at any
time.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  665

     User Guide

Note.
Then specify export settings, as described in the Standard video export section.

If export is performed from Live Video mode, the first frame of the exported video will be the moment when the button was
clicked. Export will continue for 10 minutes or until the Stop button on the export panel is clicked (see the Viewing export
progress section).
If export is performed from archive mode or archive analysis mode, the first frame of the exported video will be the position of

the bar on the timeline when the button was clicked. Export will continue for 10 minutes or until the Stop button on the
export panel is clicked (see the Viewing export progress section).
The length of the exported video clip will depend on the time of export and resources of the Server.

Note.
If export is performed from archive mode or archive analysis mode, you can pre-configure an export area and masks
(see the Configuring export area and masks section).

8.8.2.3 Simultaneous export of video from multiple cameras

If multiple cameras in a layout have been switched to archive mode, you can simultaneously export video from all of them.
To do this, select the export interval on the primary timeline or in the calendar and start exporting (see the Standard video
export section).
By default, the video is exported to a single file. To export video from different video cameras to separate files, deselect the
Export as single file check box in the export window.

Note.
When you export to one file, the streams are written in parallel. To view exported video, use a player that allows allows
playing multiple instances and different streams in each  (for example, VLС).

Video from each camera is exported to a separate file. Comments made during export are added to each exported video.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  666

     User Guide

Note.
For each video you can pre-set an export area and masks (se the Configuring export area and masks section).

8.8.2.4 Exporting all event videos

You can use the Story board (see Story board) for one-click export of an event video from multiple cameras' Video Footage. 
To do so, follow the steps below:
1. Click on the thumbnail of interest. 
2. Set a time interval on the timeline for export.
This will add the thumbnail of the selected video clip to the Story board.

  
3. Click the + button in the middle of the thumbnail. The video clip will be added to the export batch. 

Note

To remove it from the batch, click the   button.

4. Repeat these steps for all videos of interest.  

5. Click the   button to export all selected clips. 
By default, the video is exported to a single file. To export video from different video cameras to separate files, deselect the
Export as single file check box in the export window.

Note.
When you export to one file, the streams are written in parallel. To view exported video, use a player that allows allows
playing multiple instances and different streams in each  (for example, VLС).

This opens the Export window. Follow the same steps as with the standard export procedure (see Standard video export). 

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  667

     User Guide

Note
We recommend you to export to the EXE format.

8.8.3 Configuring export area and masks

If you are exporting a snapsnot or video from archive mode or archive analysis mode, you can specify an export area and masks.
You can specify an export area and masks at the same time.
By specifying an export area, you export only the portion of the frame that is of interest, while omitting the remainder.
To specify an export area:

1. In a viewing tile, click the button.

A rectangular area with four corner points is displayed.

2. Reposition the corner points to specify the area that you want to export. To reposition the corner points, left-click a corner
point and drag it.
Configuration of the export area is now complete.
Masking allows you to hide complex or irrelevant areas of the frame so that they do not appear in an exported file. You can set an
unlimited number of masks.
To specify a mask:

1. In a viewing tile, click the button.

2. Use the corner points to enclose the area that you want to mask. To add a corner point, left-click the video. You can add
an unlimited number of corner points.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  668

     User Guide

After you add a mask, you can perform the following actions:
• Move corner points (left-click a corner point and drag it).
• Delete corner points (right-click a corner point).
• Delete a mask (click the button).
• Add a new mask.
Mask creation is now complete.
In the exported snapshot or video, the masked area is filled in with black.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  669

     User Guide

8.8.4 Viewing export progress

After export is started, the export progress is displayed on the export panel. The export panel is displayed near the top of the
monitor after the export process is started, and is hidden after all messages are closed.

To stop the export process, click the Stop button. In this case the file will be saved. The length of the exported fragment will
depend on the export time and resources of the Server.
To cancel export, click the Cancel button. In this case, the file is not saved.

If several export processes are active, you can switch between them by clicking the  buttons. The following information
is displayed between them: number of the current export operation / total number of export operations (export progress for all
operations).

To close the export progress message, click the  button.

Note.
If export is active, you cannot close the message.

If an error occurs during export, it will be indicated on the dynamic error panel (see Control in Live Video Mode).

8.9 Macros control

A macro may include settings (see Create Macros) to display the  control menu in the upper panel.

Those macros that are currently active (enabled as Always or within a time schedule, see Create Macros), are marked as (On).
To enable or disable macros you need to select them in the list. When you disable a macro, the mode is changed to Never.

Note
If you disable a macro, which is active within the time schedule, then this mode will be restored after reactivation.

Note
The status of the macro in the menu changes only a few seconds after a command is completed.

Event-driven macros can be triggered by using the corresponding buttons on the Dialog board (see Working with Dialog Board) or
by using hotkeys.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  670

     User Guide

8.10 Event Control

Event control in the Axxon Next software package can be conducted in three ways:
1. In Live Video mode
2. Using the system log
3. By logging events in external logs

Note
Configuration of logging to external files is carried out through the log management utility (see the section Log
Management Utility).

8.10.1 Control in Live Video Mode

Messages about system errors which have occurred are displayed in real time on a dynamic error panel. When there are no
unaccepted errors, this panel is not displayed; when there are such errors, it is displayed in Axxon Next's Layouts tab.

Note
This feature is configured on the Permissions tab (see the section Creating and configuring roles).

To accept an error and delete it from the error panel, click the cross.
To accept all errors and close the error panel, click the cross on the right-hand side of the panel.

To switch between error messages, click the  buttons.

To jump to System Log (see The System Log), and open error messages, click the  button.

8.10.2 The System Log

Information about events which have occurred in the system is stored in the system log.
To access the system log, select Settings -> System log .

When you do this, a window appears which can be used to search, view, and export system log events.

8.10.2.1 Setting Event Search Filters

To view and/or export system log events, first you need to perform a search for them.
To search for system log events, you need to set one or more filters:
1. Time period during which the events were recorded.
2. Event type:
a. Information;
b. Alarm;
c. Error;
d. Debug;
e. Audit - user actions log.
3. A key phrase contained in the system event descriptions.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  671

     User Guide

Note
The time period is a mandatory filter, while the event type and key phrase are optional.

Search filters can be set as follows:

1. In the To and From fields (1) you can enter the date and time of the beginning and end of the period during which the
events you are searching for were recorded.

Note
The date format is DD-MM-YYYY and the time format is HH:MM:SS.XXX.

Note
By default, the event search period is defined as the past 24 hours.

2. Selecting event types for search (2). 

3. Select the Axxon domain where you need to search for events (3).
4. If user actions search was selected (the Audit type), choose a particular system user (4). If no user is selected, the search
function will return actions of all system users.
5. Enter the text that matches the events you want to find in the Search Text field (5). To find license plate numbers, enter
the full or partial number.  Use ? (any one character) and *  (any number of any characters). For example, a search query ?
20* shows all vehicles with a license plate containing 2 and 0 in the second and third position respectively. The total
number of characters in number plates can be arbitrary.

Attention!
You can use OR and AND logical operators when searching data in the system log.
- to search with the OR logical operator, separate the words with the symbol "|";
- to search with the AND logical operator, use a space.

The event search filters have been set.

Next you must start the event search (see the section titled Event search procedure).

8.10.2.2 Event search procedure

To start a search for system log events which satisfy the filters which have been set (see the section Setting Event Search Filters),
click the Search button (1).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  672

     User Guide

When you do that, a search results table appears (2).

To accept all errors and close the error panel, click the Clear button (3).

8.10.2.3 Refreshing Event Search Results

You can automatically refresh the event search results table, i.e., add events to it which happened after the search was started
(see the section Event search procedure). To do this, select the Add new events to the results of the search check box.

Note
Select this check box to update events automatically with no need to search again.

8.10.2.4 Viewing Event Search Results

System log event search results are displayed in a table (1).

Note
Events in the table are sorted by the date they were registered, beginning with the most recent one.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  673

     User Guide

Table column Contents of column

Switching to archive video of specific events

 

Date & time Date and time the event was recorded in the
system in the format DD.MM.YYYY HH:MM:SS

Event type Event type (information, alarm, debug, error)

Description System description of the event

The search results table may be more than one page. To navigate through a table which is more than one page, use the following
buttons (2):
1. Back Goes back to the previous page of the table.
2. Next Goes to the next page of the table.

Note
Once the Axxon Next VMS is installed, the  log may show a Table end violation error. This is part of the installation
routine and not a bug.

Once the Axxon Next VMS is installed, the  log may show a Table end violation error. This is part of the installation routine and
not a bug.

8.10.2.5 Exporting Event Search Results

To export the system log event search results, click the Export button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  674

     User Guide

When you do this, the standard Windows “Save as” dialog box appears, using which you can save the search results as a file with
a .txt (text) extension or .csv (comma-separated).

8.10.2.6 Switching to archive video of specific events

To switch to archive video of specific events, click the  icon next to the event or double-click the relevant row.

Note
Archive viewing can be triggered by events coming from cameras, inputs (sensors) and outputs (relays). To make it
work, I/O must be linked to a particular camera (see The Input Object, The Output Object).

The system will now switch to archive mode and fetch the video of the selected event.

8.11 Working with Axxon Next Through the Web Client

8.11.1 Web client overview

The web client offers the following options:
1. Viewing live videos.
2. Controlling PTZ cameras.
3. Viewing Archive.
4. Archive search.
5. Listening to a camera's microphone.
6. Exporting still frames and videos.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  675

     User Guide

7. Digital zooming.
8. Working with bookmarks.
9. Viewing Camera and Archive Statistics.

8.11.2 Hardware and software requirements for the Web Client operation
The Web Client operates correctly with the latest versions of Google Chrome, Firefox and Microsoft Edge browsers. 

Note
Since no 3rd party technologies are used in the Web Client, it may operate with other browsers; in this case, we cannot
guarantee its stable operation.

Attention!
No support for Safari and Internet Explorer is provided in the current version.

To monitor 16 FullHD* camera videos on a single browser tab, you need at least an Intel Core i3 CPU and 1Gb of RAM.
* conditions are:

dual stream cameras, 

•
each stream's frame rate is 25 FPS, 
•
the second stream's resolution is 360p,
•
if the layout includes more than one camera, the browser shows streams with lower bitrates.
•

8.11.3 Starting the web client

Use of Axxon Next through a web client takes place remotely, through a web browser and the TCP/IP protocol. Remote video
surveillance via a web browser does not require installation of Axxon Next.

Attention!
Opera browser supports Web-client starting from version 15.
In the Windows OS, the Web-client for Safari browser is not supported.

To start the web client:

1. Start a web browser.
2. In the address bar, type the address of the Axxon Next server in the following format: <web server IP address>:<Port>/
<Prefix>.

Connecting the web and mobile Clients to the Server behind NAT

Attention!
The Server URL is case-sensitive. You have to type in the URL using the exact case of characters specified in
settings(see Configuring the web server).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  676

     User Guide

Attention!
If the web server is properly configured (see Configuring the web server), then a secure HTPPS connection is
automatically established. 

3. Enter a user name and password for connecting to the Axxon Next web server.

Attention!
After 5 successive failed authorization attempts, the user is blocked for 10 minutes.

The web client interface is then displayed.

To switch between users, press the Change User link in the upper-right corner; another authentication will follow.

Note
The name of the current user is indicated near this point.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  677

     User Guide

8.11.4 Web client's GUI

The upper panel of a web client contains the following elements:
• camera pane,
• surveillance mode selection buttons,
• available layouts,

Attention!
The web client offers layouts available to each particular user.
You can create and edit layouts using the Axxon Next Client (see Configuring Layouts).
The number of cameras within a layout is not limited.

• full screen mode button , 

• Additional menu button  .

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  678

     User Guide

To display the list of available layouts, hover the mouse over the layouts panel.

You can also search layouts. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Hover the mouse cursor over the Layouts panel.
2. Enter a layout name or its fragment. 
A search bar appears, and the panel displays layouts matching your search criteria.

8.11.5 Web Client Configuration

To configure the Web Client, you need to:

1. Click  in the top-right corner and select Preferences.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  679

     User Guide

2. By default, switching to another tab or collapsing the browser window stops the transmission of video streams. To
preserve the transmission, you can clear the corresponding parameter (1).

Attention!
This setting is common for all Web Client users in a particular browser.

3. If your layout contains several camera windows, only I-frames (key frames) will be displayed for H.264 cameras by default.
Selecting a particular camera sets its window to display all frames. If you need to display all frames in H.264 video
regardless of the camera status, activate the Show all frames option (2).  This setting is common for all Web Client users
in a particular browser.
4. By default, fast archive playback uses the H.264 codec. If required, you can use MJPEG codec by setting the Use MGPEG
for fast archive playback parameter (3).  This setting is common for all Web Client users in a particular browser.
5. If you need to position the retrieved video in the center of the screen, activate the Scroll Selected search result to the
center option (4).  This setting is common for all Web Client users in a particular browser.
6. Set the default interval for Time Slice (5, see Types of Archive search available via the Web Client).
7. By default, the Cameras panel does not hide itself after you select a device. If you need to hide the panel, deselect the
Manually open and close checkbox (6).  This setting is common for all Web Client users in a particular browser.
8. When you select a camera in  Cameras Panel, the layout featuring this camera's window opens. If there are several such
layouts, then the one with fewer cells is selected. To expand camera view to full screen, disable  Open selected cam in
the layout (7). 

9.  Click the  button.

8.11.6 Searching for video cameras in the web client

When you start the Web client, the cameras panel opens on the left. It shows a list of all connected devices.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  680

     User Guide

The Cameras panel shows cameras as:

• A list .

• Thumbnails .

By default, the panel includes all available cameras. You can create a list of selected cameras. Do the following:
1. Hover the mouse cursor over the camera icon.
2. Click  to add the camera to the list. The asterisk becomes filled . Another click on the asterisk excludes the camera
from the list.

Attention!
The list of selected cameras is common for all web client users in a particular browser.

Click Favorites to show selected cameras only. Click the same button once more to show all available cameras.
Additionally, you can bookmark cameras by preparing a list in an Excel file. To do it, follow the steps below:
1. Create an Excel file containing two columns: id for camera IDs and name for camera names.

2. Click  and select the file.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  681

     User Guide

Attention!
After successful loading, only cameras listed in the file will remain bookmarked.

Click  to sort the camera list by ID or  to sort by name.

To search for a camera, enter the full or partial device name in the Camera name box.  
 The Cameras panel will display only the cameras that meet your search criteria. All matching items will be highlighted.

Note
When you add new cameras to your server configuration, they automatically appear in the Web client (no page
reloading needed).

To set a group of cameras to be displayed, click the Default button and select the required group.

A newly selected camera window displays live video by default.

Each camera window upper right corner contains:

• time display (see Time Display in the main Client);
• video stream parameters;
• footage recording indicator.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  682

     User Guide

8.11.7 Working with layouts in Web Client

8.11.7.1 Summary of how to work with layouts in Web Client

Configuring Layouts

To create and edit layouts in Web Client click  to access the corresponding menu.

There are a number of things you need to consider when dealing with layouts in Web Client:
1. In Web Client, you cannot edit/share/delete layouts created in the main Client. You can only copy layouts.
2. Layouts created in Web Client will not be available in the main Client.

8.11.7.2 Selecting and searching for a layout

To go to the layout, click it on the panel.

If the panel does not fit all layouts, then to display a list of all available layouts, in the upper right corner click .

To close the layout list, you need to press a button .

You can also search layouts in the search bar for video cameras. To do this, enter the layout name in part or in full. This will show
only those layouts that meet the search conditions.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  683

     User Guide

8.11.7.3 Creating a new layout in Web Client

To create a new layout in Web Client, do as follows:

1. Click  and choose one of the standard layout types.

An empty layout will be created.

2. You can add new columns or rows of cells using arrows on the layout boundaries (similar to the main Client, see Adding
new cells to a layout).

Note
To delete a column or a row of empty cells, click Clean Up.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  684

     User Guide

Note

When editing a layout, the buttons to undo and redo the last action are available .

3. You can resize the cells using arrows on the cell boundaries ((similar to the main Client, see Resizing cells).
4. Adding video cameras to the cells. To do this, drag & drop a camera from the Cameras panel (see Searching for video
cameras in the web client).
5. Select the default stream for each video camera from the Quality list.  Use the buttons at the top of the screen to select
quality for all camera layouts.

6. Click Save.

Note
To undo the layout creation, click Cancel.

You have created your layouts.

8.11.7.4 Editing and deleting layouts in Web Client

To edit a layout in Web Client, do as follows:
1. Select the layout.
2. Click  and select Edit Layout.
3. Make changes.
4. Click Save.
To rename a layout, do as follows:
1. Double left-click and enter a new name.
2. Click Save.
To rearrange the layouts, do as follows:

1. Click  and select Delete/Reorder Layouts.

2. Drag & drop layouts wherever you want.
3. Click Save.
To delete a layout, do as follows:

1. Click  and select Delete/Reorder Layouts.

2. Click to the right of the layout .

8.11.7.5 Selecting the default layout in Web Client

You can select the individual default layout for each user to be displayed after they launch Web Client.
If you don't set this layout, they'll see a blank screen.
To set the default layout, do as follows:
1. Go to the desired layout.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  685

     User Guide

2. Click   and select Use by Default.

After that, the layout icon will look like this:

To remove the default layout, click  and select Do not use by default.

8.11.7.6 Copying layouts in Web Client

Layout copying

To copy a layout in Web Client, do as follows:

1. Select the layout.
2. Click  and select Copy Layout.

3. You can make changes to the layout.

4. Click Save.

8.11.7.7 Sharing layouts in Web Client

Share Layouts

To share a layout in Web Client, do as follows:

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  686

     User Guide

1. Select the layout.

2. Click  and select Edit Layout.
3. Click    and in Share With, select one or several target roles to share layout with.
4. Click Save.
Shared layouts are sealed with the following sign:

8.11.8 Real-time video surveillance via the web client

To view a video, you have to select either a camera from a panel, or one of available layouts (see Searching for video cameras in
the web client).  

The Web Client supports playback of the following video formats:  MJPEG, H.264, H.265. Any other formats are re-coded to
MJPEG by the Server. 

Attention!
H.265 playback is possible only in the Edge browser with hardware acceleration.

You can play back a video in the web client with any of the 2 players: jpeg and mp4. If your browser supports mp4 format, the
mp4 player is used. Otherwise, your videos will be played back via the jpeg player.

Attention!
If your layout contains several camera windows, only I-frames (key frames) may be displayed in H.264 streams,
depending on settings (see Web Client Configuration). For the selected camera, each frame is displayed.
In MPEG videos, each frame is displayed.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  687

     User Guide

Note
When you use Internet Explorer to toggle frames reception mode between 'I-frames only' and 'each frame' in the
camera window, short video dropouts may occur.  In such a case, other browsers will show the most recent I-frame.

 If your camera is capable of multi-streaming, the lowest resolution stream will be displayed by default.
To select a stream in the web client, do as follows:
1. Click the parameters of the current stream.

2. Select a stream to be displayed.

Note
Video stream settings are not memorized while switching between layouts.

Click  or double click the image for full screen view. To exit full screen mode, click again the  button, or press Esc. 

8.11.9 Controlling PTZ cameras through the web client

A PTZ video camera is controlled through the PTZ device control panel.

The following actions can be performed using the PTZ device control panel:
1. Use presets.
2. Adjust optical zoom and positioning speed of the video camera.
3. Modify the horizontal and vertical tilt angle of the video camera.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  688

     User Guide

8.11.9.1 Controlling a PTZ camera through the web client by using presets
To go to a preset, select the relevant line in the list of presets.

8.11.9.2 Changing the optical zoom of a PTZ camera in the web client
To change the optical zoom of a PTZ unit, use the buttons in the zoom group.

 – increase image

– reduce image

 – field for displaying speed at which the camera changes the zoom scale

8.11.9.3 Changing the positioning speed of a PTZ camera in the web client
To change the positioning speed of a PTZ camera, use the buttons in the Speed group.

– increase positioning speed

 – reduce positioning speed

 – field displaying the current positioning speed

8.11.9.4 Changing the tilt of a PTZ camera in the web client

To change the tilt of a PTZ camera, use the arrows in the PTZ Control group.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  689

     User Guide

The arrow direction indicates the direction in which the camera lens will be moved when the arrow is clicked.

8.11.10 Viewing video archives through the web client

To view a camera's Archive, do as follows:
1. Pick a camera on the camera panel or on the layout.
2. Click the 

button.

Note
Video Footage opened by default is specified as Default Archive in settings (see Binding a camera to an archive).

3. The archive navigation panel is then displayed, with the following interface features:
a. Timeline. Archive navigation via the timeline in the web client is the same as when working in the Axxon Next client
(see Navigating Using the Timeline).

Attention!
You cannot resize the timeline in the web client. By default, the timeline displays the current date's
recordings. You can switch to another date using the position selection panel (see 3c).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  690

     User Guide

Note
Similarly to the regular Client (see The Timeline), alarms are indicated on the timeline as flags, and
comments as icons.

b. Playback control panel. Archive navigation via the playback panel in the web client is the same as when working in
the Axxon Next client (see Navigating Using the Playback Panel).

Attention!
Fast reverse playback in H.264 format will be not smooth because of the use of I-frames.

c. Archive position selection panel. The archive position selection panel is opened by left-clicking the date above the
timeline.
4. To select an Archive, do as follows:
a. click the name of the current Archive;

b. pick the Archive of interest.

8.11.11 Archive position selection panel for the web client

To choose a time position in the archive by using the archive position selection panel:
1. Click the date above the timeline to open the position selection panel (1).

2. To set the playback position to the current time and date, click the Today button and go to step 6 (4).

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  691

     User Guide

3. Use the and  buttons to select a month (2).

4. Click the necessary date on the calendar to select a day (3).

Note
The days, for which there is video footage are in light shade.

5. Use the Hours, Minutes, and Seconds sliders to set the time.

6. To set the playback position, click the Set button (5).

The time position in the archive is now chosen.

8.11.12 Archive search through the web client

You can perform searches in Video Footage from the web client. To initiate a search, do the following:
1. Pick a camera on the camera panel or layout.

2. Click the  button.

You can resize camera windows with  buttons.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  692

     User Guide

Attention!
If you select an item from Cameras panel, the search conditions will not be reset (see Searching for video cameras in the
web client).

If a search was run more than once, and the user did not exit Archive Search mode during that time, it is possible to switch
between search results.

8.11.12.1 Types of Archive search available via the Web Client

The web client interface offers the following types of search:
1. Motion in an area
2. Line crossing.
3. Motion between areas.
4. Large Number of Objects detection tool.
5. Loitering.
6. Face search.

Attention!
You can load only JPEG images.

7. LPN search.
8. TimeSlice.

Note
The default interval is set in the Web client's settings (see Web Client Configuration).

9. Events search.
Archive search interface and search parameters pane are identical to those in the standalone Client software (see Video
surveillance in Archive Search mode).
You can also build a Heat Map with the Web Client (see Building a Heat Map).

8.11.12.2 Building a Heat Map

Attention!
To build a Heat Map, you need at least one source of metadata (for example, an Object Tracker).

Heat Maps are useful for evaluation of motion intensity within the scene and determining common trajectories of moving
objects.
How to build a Heat Map:
1. Proceed to the Archive search.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  693

     User Guide

2. Specify time period to build the Heat Map for (1).

3. Click the + button and select Heat Map.

4. Select the source of metadata (2).
5. Click the Search button (3).
The Heat Map appears in the search results window.

Use the dedicated slider to adjust the transparency of the heat map.

Click   to download the heat map.

You can build a report based on the received data.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  694

     User Guide

8.11.12.3 Simultaneous search in multiple camera Video Footage via the web Client
You can use the Web Client for multiple camera Video Footage searching by:
• facial recognition events;
• ANPR events;
• detection tool triggering events;
• TimeSlice.
To simultaneously search multiple cameras' Video Footage, do the following:
1. Proceed to the Video Footage search (see Archive search through the web client).
2. Set the search criteria.
3. Open Cameras panel and select the required devices (see Searching for video cameras in the web client).

Note
To select all cameras, select the appropriate box on the bottom of the page.

4. Click the Search button.

8.11.12.4 Reporting the search results

The Web Client also includes the Stimulsoft report editor for building reports on retrieved video fragments.

To build a report after you finished searching, click   in the bottom part of the screen.

Attention!
The report is limited to first 60 retrieved videos.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  695

     User Guide

There are 3 types of reports available:

1. Retrieved fragments (1).
2. Retrieved fragments (number / per hour)  (2).
3. Retrieved fragments (number / per minute)  (3).
Click Print (4) to hardcopy a report, or Save (5) to export into an appropriate format.

8.11.13 Alarm Monitoring via the Web Client

You can use the Web client to monitor active alarms across the entire Axxon domain. 
To make the web client display active alarms, select any camera or layout (see Searching for video cameras in the web client,
Web client's GUI).

Note
You cannot monitor alarms that went off before you selected the camera/layout.

When an alarms goes off, an alarm panel appears (like in the standalone client software, see Alarms Panel).

Click Alarm Panel to open the panel.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  696

     User Guide

The system will now switch to Archive (video footage) viewing mode and show the video of the selected event.

8.11.14 Listening to a camera's microphone via the web client

Attention!
You can play back audio in mp4 format only.

To listen to a camera's microphone, click the 

 button in the camera window.

Note
Audio playback in web browsers is supported in Windows 8 and higher OS versions.

After you complete this action, a volume slider appears.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  697

     User Guide

Note
You cannot play back audio from multiple cameras simultaneously.

The higher is the slider position, the higher is the volume.

To mute audio, click the 

 button.

8.11.15 Digital video zoom in the web client

Digital zoom of video occurs in a viewing tile during viewing of live video as well as when viewing archive video. To increase the
zoom level, use the mouse scroll wheel.
The image cannot be made smaller than the source size. The maximum video zoom is 16x.
To select the viewed portion of the frame at a changed scale, drag the mouse outside of the video viewing area.

Note
For PTZ units, you can zoom in by using the buttons in the zoom group

8.11.16 Export in Web Client

To export a snapshot / frame, click the  button while viewing video. A JPG file will be exported to a folder specified in the
Server settings.
To export video, do as follows:
1. Switch to Archive mode (see Viewing video archives through the web client).
2. On the timeline, set the timeline indicator to the location that matches the beginning of the export interval. Click the
 button. Set the indicator to the location that matches the end of the export interval. Click the  button.
3. Click the  button.

Note

To delete the export interval click the button.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  698

     User Guide

4. Select the video format (1). You can export videos to avi, mkv, mp4 and exe formats.

5. If you are exporting a video in .avi format, select the compression level (2). 
4 – minimum compression, maximum file size; 
6 – maximum compression, minimum file size.
6. If necessary, add comments for the export (3). The comments will be shown as captions when the exported video is
played.
7. Click the Export button (4).
The progress bar is displayed on the drop-down panel as in the Client (see Viewing export progress).

When the export is complete, the panel color changes to green.

To download an exported file, click its name on the panel.

8.11.17 Viewing Camera and Archive Statistics

To view camera statistics, click  in the top right corner, and select Statistics Panel.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  699

     User Guide

Note
 Loading statistics from large number of cameras may take some time. The loading process is visualized by a progress
indicator.

On the Cameras tab, the following parameters are displayed for each video stream of each camera:
• resolution;
• frame rate;
• bit rate;
• compression format.
If the bitrate exceeds the expected value, and there is more than 1Mbit per megapixel, the stream is marked with "

".
If the bitrate exceeds the expected value, and there is more than 2Mbit per megapixel, the stream is marked with "

".
On the Archives tab, the following information is displayed for each Archive:

• name;
• number of linked cameras;
• cumulative bit rate of linked cameras.

Note
 The indicator in the upper right corner displays the AxxonNext Web Client and Server version numbers.

To return to the previous page, click Back in the left upper corner of the screen.

8.11.18 Working with bookmarks in the Web Client

A bookmark represents either a comment to Video Footage (see Operator comments), or a protected video (see Protecting video
footage from FIFO overwriting).

To work with bookmarks, click the  button in the top right corner of the Web client window, and select the Archive
Bookmarks option.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  700

     User Guide

Attention!
You can access only the bookmarks on the visible part of the footage archive (see Configuring access restrictions to
older footage).
The system does not display bookmarks related to currently re-recorded part of the archive.

You can:
1. Edit a bookmark.
2. Delete a bookmark.
3. Un-protect a protected video.
4. Delete a protected video.
Use the search bar to locate a necessary bookmark.

To proceed to a particular video, click the  button in the Video column.

Click Back to return to the main page.

8.11.18.1 Editing a bookmark

 To edit a bookmark, do as follows:
1. Select the required bookmark from the list.
2. Click the Edit bookmark button.

3. If necessary, you can alter the time interval and/or a text comment.
4. Click Save Bookmark.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  701

     User Guide

8.11.18.2 Deleting a bookmark

To delete a bookmark, select it from the list and click Delete Bookmark.
Hold Ctrl key to select multiple bookmarks.

8.11.18.3 Un-protecting a video

To un-protect a video, clear the Protected checkbox beside the bookmark.

8.11.18.4 Deleting a protected video

To delete a protected video, select a protected bookmark and click the Delete Video button.

8.12 Working with Axxon Next Through the Mobile Clients

Axxon Next clients are available on the iOS, Android and Windows Mobile operating systems.
For more information on configuring and using the mobile client apps, refer to the corresponding documentation.

Working with the Axxon Next Software Package  –  702

     User Guide

9 Description of utilities

9.1 Axxon Next Tray Tool

The Axxon Next Tray Tool launches automatically during system startup and displays an icon in the Microsoft Windows taskbar
notification area.

Note.
The executable TrayTool.exe is located at <Axxon Next installation folder>\AxxonNext\bin.

With the Axxon Next Tray Tool utility, you can quickly start the following applications from the notification area:
• Client,
• Activation Utility,
• Axxon Support Tool,
• Configuration Backup and Restore utility,
• Self-checking Service,
• Server rebooting.

9.2 Activation Utility

License activation for the Axxon Next software package is carried out through the product activation utility.
The activation utility is accessible at Start -> All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Utilities -> Program Activation, or from the tray
menu (see the Axxon Next Tray Tool section).

Note
The product activation utility program file LicenseTool.exe is located in the folder <Directory where Axxon Next is
installed>\AxxonSoft\AxxonSmart\bin\

Then you must select the name of one of the Axxon Domain servers to which the license file will be applied (the file is applied to
all Axxon Domain servers launched at the moment of activation) and connect to the system, under an administrator's user name
and password, to continue the activation process.

Description of utilities  –  703

     User Guide

When the utility has loaded, its main  will be displayed.

Note
To activate Axxon Next, connect  to a Server in the Axxon domain. Otherwise, an error message appears.

Description of utilities  –  704

     User Guide

To activate Axxon Next, please refer to the document titled Activation Guide,  which presents step-by-step instructions on 
activating, updating and upgrading Axxon Next .
It is also recommended that you use the prompts displayed in the product activation utility's dialog boxes.

9.3 Axxon Support Tool

9.3.1 Purpose of the Support.exe Utility

The Support.exe utility is designed to collect information about the configuration and operating status of hardware, the Windows
operating system, and the Axxon Next software. The utility generates an archive that can be used by the company’s technical
support department. In case of malfunctions or errors in the Axxon Next software package, please visit our technical support
server at https://support.axxonsoft.com/ and compose a message containing a description of the problem and attach the archive
that was generated by the Support.exe utility.

9.3.2 Launching and Closing the Utility

The Support.exe utility is launched using the Start menu, which is intended for launching user programs in Windows. Go to
Start → All Programs → Axxon Next → Gathering system information.

Note
The Support.exe utility is located in the folder <Axxon Next installation directory>\AxxonNext\Support

Note
The Support.exe utility requires administrator rights to run.

The Support.exe utility dialog box will then be displayed.

Description of utilities  –  705

     User Guide

To close the Support.exe utility, click the Cancel button or  .

9.3.3 Description of the Support.exe utility interface

The Support.exe user interface includes the following elements:
1. Summary of installed software (1).
2. Short instructions on how to use the Support.exe utility (2).
3. Check boxes for configuring data collection (3).
4. A button for launching the Processes service, which offers an in-depth situation analysis (4).
5. A button for starting the information gathering process (5).

Description of utilities  –  706

     User Guide

9.3.4 The Processes Service

The Processes service is used for detailed analysis of a situation. To launch it, click the Open Processes window button; the
Processes window will then appear, displaying information about processes running on the computer initiated by the
Support.exe utility.

A list of all possible Axxon Next processes is given in the table.

Process Description

AXXON.Discovery Process that searches for peripheral devices

(video cameras, analog video cards, devices connected to a serial port, etc.)

AXXON.VMDA Process responsible for the metadata database. Writes metadata and searches the archive.

AXXON.MMSS Web server process

AXXON.Notification Process for managing events in the system and creating a database of these events

AXXON.AxxonNext GUI process

AXXON.Bootstrap Main process responsible for configuration, licensing, storing settings,

and starting other processes

AXXON.FileBrowser Process that provides access to the file system and information about server files

AXXON.NVR Logic module responsible for alarms and automatic rules

AXXON.InfraServer Process responsible for interaction between Axxon Next modules

Description of utilities  –  707

     User Guide

AXXON.Decoder Process that performs decoding of multimedia streams

AXXON.Detector Process that performs detection

AXXON.Proxy Process that performs buffering and grooming of multimedia streams

AXXON.NVR_Archive Process that writes multimedia data to the archive

AXXON.Ipint Process that interfaces with the Drivers Pack

AXXON.MiscMMSS Process that plays back audio on the server audio card

Note
Selecting the  Show info on all system's processes check box enables viewing of all processes running on the
computer.

Click the  button to close the Processes window.

9.3.5 Collecting Data on the Configuration of Servers and Clients Using the Support
To collect data using the Support.exe utility, perform the following:
1. Launch the Support.exe utility (see the section Launching and Closing the Utility).

Description of utilities  –  708

     User Guide

2. By default, a report includes data about already launched Axxon Next processes. To exclude this data from reports,
deselect the checkbox (1).
3. Select the corresponding checkbox to include a backup copy of events database in reports (2).
4. By default, a report includes information about Windows security system. To exclude this data from reports, deselect the
checkbox (3).
5. Select the corresponding checkbox to include a self-diagnostic service (see Self-diagnostics service) information in
reports (4).
6. Click the Next button (5).
The data collection process will begin. The table that displays the progress of data collection includes two columns: Step
and Status. In the Step column, a brief description of the stage of information collection is displayed. In the Status
column, a progress indicator and the time spent on executing the stage are displayed.

Description of utilities  –  709

     User Guide

7. When information collection is complete, click the Next button.

8. A window containing information about the generated archive support_[date]_[time].7z will then appear. You can
access the folder containing this archive by clicking the Open directory with file button.

Note
The archive is located in the folder <System disk>:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My Documents if
you're using Windows XP, or in the folder <System disk>:\Users\<Current User>\Documents if you're using
Windows Vista

9. Send an email with the attached support_[date]_[time].7z archive to the ITV technical support department.

Description of utilities  –  710

     User Guide

9.4 Log Management Utility

By default, information about all system events is recorded in the Axxon Next system log, which is stored in a local database of
the server. It is possible to record information about desired events in external logs, which are log files stored in local directories
of a server. Log data is archived at set intervals and moved to the log archive. Configuration of these capabilities is carried out
through the log management utility.

Axxon Next component Log storage directory

Server <Axxon Next installation folder Axxon Next>\logs

Client <Letter of system disk>:\Users\<User>\Appdata\Local\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\logs (for Windows 7 and

Windows Vista)

<Letter of system disk>:\

<Letter of system disk>:\Documents and Settings\User\Local Settings\Application Data\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\Logs (for Windows
XP)

The log management utility is used to configure the following parameters:

1. Parameters for the archive of external logs containing information about system events.
2. Loging levels for the Axxon Next client and server.

9.4.1 Starting and closing the utility

The log management utility can be launched using the Start menu, which is intended for launching user programs in Windows.
Start → All Programs → Axxon Next → Utilities → Logs Archiving

Note
The log management utility is located in the folder <System disk>:\Program Files\Common Files\AxxonSoft\LogRotate

The log management utility dialog box will then appear.

To close the log management utility, click the Cancel button or  (accessible in both tabs of the utility).

9.4.2 Configuring a Log Archive

Configuring a log archive is carried out in the Settings tab of the log management utility.
To configure a log archive, you must perform the following steps:

Description of utilities  –  711

     User Guide

1. In the Archive location field (1), enter the complete path to the directory to which the event logs should be moved after
archiving.

Note

To set the path using standard Windows methods, click

2. In the Archive logs every...hours field (2), enter the interval for event log archiving, in hours.
3. In the Log archive depth group, set the following parameters:
a. In the Storage time field (3), indicate the maximum retention time in days of a log in the archive, after which the
log is deleted.
b. In the Size field (4), indicate the maximum size of the archive, above which the oldest logs are deleted from the
archive.

Note
Archive disk space restrictions take priority over log retention time restrictions. For example, the oldest logs will
be automatically deleted even if their retention time has not expired, if the archive size has exceeded the
maximum value

Note
If it is not necessary to impose any limitations on log retention period and/or size, clear the corresponding check
boxes in the Log archive depth (3-4)

4. Click OK (5) to save changes.

Configuration of the log archive is now complete.

9.4.3 Configuring Logging Levels

logging levels differ in the list of events to be recorded in external logs, as well as the level of event specification (low, medium,
high). Configuration of levels is carried out in the logging levels tab of the log management utility.
To configure the logging level, you must perform the following steps:

Description of utilities  –  712

     User Guide

1. Select the desired logging level of the client (Axxon Next Client) and the server (Axxon Next Server) (1).

Note
If you change the logging level of a Server, the server will be restarted.

Note
If the Axxon Next VMS is installed in the Failover Server and Client configuration, you can log in as either a
Client or a Supervisor.

logging level logging level description

None Event logging disabled

Error Low specification level – only system errors are logged

Warning Low level of detail - only system warnings and system errors are logged

Info Low level of detail - logs informational messages, system warnings, and system errors

Debug Medium level of detail - logs debugging events, informational messages, system warnings, and system errors

Trace High specification level – all system events are logged

2. If you need to include GUI exceptions into the logs, select the corresponding check box (2).
3. Click OK (3) to save changes.
Configuration of logging levels is complete.

9.4.4 Set the size and maximum number of logs

To adjust the size and maximum number of logs:

Description of utilities  –  713

     User Guide

1. Switch to the Rolling tab.

2. Set the maximum number of logs (1).

3. Set the maximum size of the log in megabytes (2). When the specified size is reached, a new log is created.
4. Click OK to save changes.

9.4.5 Configuring Client RAM usage logging

You can log Client RAM usage at specified intervals (AxxonNext.exe process). To do this:
1. Quit Client (see Shutting down an Axxon Next Client).
2. Open the AxxonNext.exe.config configuration file, located in the <Installation Directory PC Axxon Next> \ bin., in a text
editor.  
3. Find the MemoryUsageDumpIntervalSeconds option and set a value for it, corresponding to the period of adding the
information to the log in seconds. 

Note
Value 0 - no information is logged.

4. Save the changes to the file.

5. Run client (see Starting an Axxon Next Client).

Description of utilities  –  714

     User Guide

Here is an example of the client RAM usage information  in the log:

*** Memory usage: ***

Private size 425 MB
Working set 404 MB

Private size - the amount of reserved memory.

Working set - memory footprint.

9.5 Digital Signature Verification Utility

This utility verifies the digital signature that is added during export of video and snapshots from Axxon Next.
To start the utility, open the standard Start menu in Windows: Start > Programs > Axxon Next > Utilities > Watermark
checker.

Note
The utility executable file WatermarkCheck.exe is also located in the folder <Directory where Axxon Next is
installed>\Axxon Next\bin\.

To check a digital signature, click the Open file button and select the file of the exported snapshot or video.

If the digital signature is valid, the utility will show the message: Signature check: OK!

Description of utilities  –  715

     User Guide

If it is not valid, the utility will show the message: Signature check: Invalid signature!

Note
During verification of a digital signature, the thumbnail of a snapshot is shown in the utility window. Videos cannot be
previewed during the verification process

Digital signature verification is now complete.

To quit the utility, click the  button.

Description of utilities  –  716

     User Guide

9.6 Backup and Restore Utility

9.6.1 Purpose of BackupTool.exe

BackupTool.exe allows system users to save a copy of the system configuration, roll back the configuration to a previous version,
and restore the system configuration from a previously created copy.

Attention!
The backup and restore utility may be applied to both the local configuration of a selected Server (including video
cameras, archives, detection tools, event sources, logging levels) and the global configuration of the Axxon domain
(users, maps, layouts, etc.).

This utility can also be used to change the name of the local Server. 

9.6.2 Starting and quitting BackupTool.exe

Start BackupTool.exe from Start -> All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Utilities -> Backupand Restore, or from the tray menu (see
the Axxon Next Tray Tool section).

Note.
The BackupTool.exe executable is located at <Axxon Next installation folder>\AxxonNext\bin\.

After you perform this action, BackupTool.exe displays a dialog box.

Then select the name of an Axxon-domain Server whose configuration you want to use and log in to it, using the name and
password of an Axxon Next administrator.

A progress indicator is displayed.

Description of utilities  –  717

     User Guide

After loading is complete, the main page of the Backup and Restore Utility is shown.

To quit BackupTool.exe, click the  button.

9.6.3 Roll back the local configuration to a selected restore point

The system creates a restore point when the local configuration of the Server is changed (creation / deletion / changing settings
of any objects, linking cameras to different archives, etc.). You can roll back your configuration to any available restore point at
any time.
To roll back, on the main page of the Backup andRestore Utility, set the switch to the Revert position (1). To continue, click the
Next >> button (2).

Description of utilities  –  718

     User Guide

A window then opens, displaying a list of available restore points and their respective creation times, with a description of what
was changed.

Note.
If multiple changes were made in a configuration but the Apply button was clicked only once, only one restore point is
created in the list.

In the list, select the restore point to which you want to roll back. To continue, click the Next button (2).

Note.
Empty configuration corresponds to when the system was first created.

Description of utilities  –  719

     User Guide

Rollback of the configuration now begins.

After the operation is completed, a message is shown to notify of successful rollback.

To close the window, click the Close button.

9.6.4 Roll back the global configuration to a selected restore point

The system creates a restore point when the global configuration of the Axxon domain is changed (creation / deletion of roles,
users, maps, layouts, etc.). You can roll back your configuration to any available restore point at any time. To launch the roll back
process, go to the main page of Backup and Restore Utility (1) and set the switch to the Revert (SharedDB) position. To
continue, click Next >> (2).

Description of utilities  –  720

     User Guide

Further steps are the same as for rolling back the local configuration (see Roll back the local configuration to a selected restore
point).

9.6.5 Backing up a configuration

Backing up a configuration involves creating and saving copies of the license key, domain structure, all created objects along
with their parameters and relationships with history of changes, as well as database containing users, groups, passwords, and
layouts.

Attention!
We recommend you to back up your configuration after any major change in system configuration.

To create a backup of the system configuration:

Description of utilities  –  721

     User Guide

1. On the main page of the Backup and Restore Utility, set the switch to the Backup position.

A window then opens for configuring backup options.

2. In the field (1), specify a folder for saving the backup. The default folder is C:
\users\username\documents\axxonsoft\backups\. To switch to a different folder, click Browse and select a folder in the
dialog box.

Note
For each copy of the backup configuration, a separate folder is created. The folder name contains the date and
time of the backup copy and has the following format: YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. The default time zone is UTC + 0

3. In the other field (2), select servers for creating the backup. You can select multiple servers. To select all servers, click the
Select all button. Start the backup process by clicking the Next button.

Description of utilities  –  722

     User Guide

Progress information is shown in the following window.

4. When the backup is complete, a window notifies of successful copying.

5. To close the window, click the Close button.

A backup of the configuration has now been created.

Description of utilities  –  723

     User Guide

9.6.6 Restoring a configuration

Attention!
We can guarantee that your configuration will be fully recovered if:
• the backup was created on the same software version (including the build number);
• the backup was created on the same PC (for licensing without the Guardant key).
The information about the product version and the PC's HID can be found in a JSON file in the saved configuration
folder.

Attention!
To successfully restore a configuration, please ensure that the current Server name is exactly the same as the Server
name in the backup configuration.

To restore a configuration:
1. On the main page of the Backup and Restore Utility, set the switch to the Restore position.

A window then opens for configuring restoration of the configuration.

Description of utilities  –  724

     User Guide

2. In the field (1), specify the file containing the configuration backup.

3. After the file is opened, the servers on the current domain are displayed in the other field (2). You can select a server in the
list only if it is on the domain and the open file contains the corresponding backup. To start restoration, click the Next
button. 
Progress information is shown in the following window.

Description of utilities  –  725

     User Guide

4. When restoration is complete, a message informs of successful completion.

5. To close the window, click the Close button.

Restoration of the configuration is now complete.

9.6.7 Changing the Server Name

To change the local Server name using the Backup and Restore Utility, perform the following steps:

Attention!
After this command is completed, the server is excluded from Axxon domain. You cannot access recorded video
(Archive). All custom layouts, maps, automatic rules and macros are deleted.

1. Connect to the Server that requires a name change (see Starting and quitting BackupTool.exe).

Description of utilities  –  726

     User Guide

2. Select Rename and click Next on the utility main page.

3. Enter the new Server name and click Next.

The Server name change process will start.

Description of utilities  –  727

     User Guide

If the operation completes successfully, a notification message will appear.

Server name change is complete.

9.7 POS-terminal log collection utility

Follow these steps to gather required information about POS terminal using a special utility:
1. If the POS-terminal supports data transmission over Ethernet or via the COM port, download the POS Terminal Data
Collection Utility at the AxxonSoft web-site.
2. Extract downloaded archive into any folder.
3. Connect the POS terminal to the computer.

Description of utilities  –  728

     User Guide

4. Run the ProtocolLicenser.exe executable file. The Read protocol from service window opens.

5. In the Log file name field specify a full path to the folder where the file with gathered info is to be saved. By default, the
file is stored in the folder to which the archive with the utility is unpacked.
6. If the POS-terminal is connected to the computer via COM-port, specify connection parameters in the COM tab.
7. If the POS-terminal is connected to the computer via Ethernet, specify connection parameters for TCP or UDP protocol in
the corresponding tab.
8. Click Start to run log collection.
9. Start using the POS-terminal, i.e. issuing receipts. It is highly recommended to do all the operations including Cancel,
Return, etc.
Process of gathering info is displayed via the Status progress bar.

To finish log collection click Stop.

After doing all the operations on the POS-terminal, send the log file with copies of receipts to AxxonSoft.

Important!
If the log file of POS-terminal is to be processed in software, then provide AxxonSoft with protocol description. POS-
terminal manufacturer can give this information.

9.8 Console utility for working with archives

vfs_format.exe is a console utility for working with Axxon Next archives.

Description of utilities  –  729

     User Guide

Attention!
For correct operation of the application, you have to remove the corresponding archive volume in Axxon Next without
removing the archive files (see Deleting and formatting archive volumes).

The utility is located in < Axxon Next installation folder > \bin>. 

Attention!
Run the command line as Administrator.

Note
To launch the utility on Linux OS, run the following command:
ngprun start_app vfs_tools + arguments.
To open the argument list, run the vfs_tools --help command.

The utility contains the following options:

Parameter Description

--help Help window

--volume Archive path. The basic parameter must always be present in the query.
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAntiqueWhite.afs
(for the archive volume as a file) or
vfs_format.exe --volume D:\
(for the archive volume as a disk)

--fill Populating an archive with multiple copies of video footage from another archive.
The system fills up a destination archive with multiple copies of a source archive; for easier timeline handling, each new copy is written
with 1 minute offset. 
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume S:\FILEONE.afs --fill G:\ 

--cache-to- Copying an archive to RAM and further copying to a destination archive. Use with the --fill parameter.
memory
This parameter is valid only for archives that could fit to RAM.
For instance, vfs_format.exe --volume S:\FILEONE.afs --fill G:\  --cache-to-memory

--dump Collect service information about the archive volume in a TXT or XML file.
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAntiqueWhite.afs --dump C:\DumpArc.txt

--expand Specify the new size of the archive volume in sectors. By default, the size of one sector is 4MB, if the -format parameter was not applied.
This option is relevant only for the archive volume as a file.
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAntiqueWhite.afs --expand 128

--size Specify the new size of the archive volume in megabytes. This option is relevant only for the archive volume as a file.
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAntiqueWhite.afs --size 4096

--format Split the volume of the archive into sectors of the specified size (in megabytes).
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAntiqueWhite.afs --format 16

Description of utilities  –  730

     User Guide

Parameter Description

--copy Copying archive volumes. Specify the path and name of the new archive file. If the archive volume is copied as a disk, create a partition,
large enough. If you have a smaller partition, then only the most recent entries are copied.
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAntiqueWhite.afs --copy C:\NewArc.afs

--skip-bad- Skip the bad sectors when copying the archive volume. This parameter is used only together with --copy .
block 
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAliceBlue.afs --copy C:\NewArc.afs --skip-bad-block

--modify- Enable / disable re-indexing of the archive volume. 1 - enable reindexing, 0 - disable.
corrupted-flag 
For example: vfs_format.exe --volume D:\archiveAliceBlue.afs --modify-corrupted-flag 1

--build-meta Launch the process of metadata generation for an archive volume (including timeline markers and video footage size per channel).
For example,  vfs-format.exe --volume D:\ --build-meta
Important! Processing large archives may take significant amounts of time.

--clear-meta Deleting metadata of archive volume.

For example,  vfs-format.exe --volume D:\ --clear-meta

--log-level Sets the logging level for this action. Available values:
0 - OFF
10 - ERROR
20 - WARN
40 - INFO
50 - DEBUG
60 - TRACE
100 - ALL

To log error messages, you must add a path for the log file at the end of each query.
For example:  vfs_format.exe --volume S:\FILEONE.afs --fill G:\ --log-level=100 > S:\log.txt

9.9 Network settings utility

You can launch the network setup utility from the Windows Start menu: Start -> All  Programs -> Axxon Next -> Utilities ->
Network settings.

The utility allows you to:

Description of utilities  –  731

     User Guide

1. Set the external IP address or DNS name of the router if the Server is located behind the NAT (1). 

Note
You may set multiple interfaces using a comma separated list, such as: "IP Address1 or DNS Name1, IP address2
or DNS Name2".
For example: 88.78.12.33, ExampleAxxon.ddns.net.

Т
2. Set the port range for operation of the Axxon Next Server (2-3). To do this, specify the beginning of the range and the
number of ports. The number of ports should not be lower than 20. 

Attention!
Within an Axxon Domain, the port ranges of Servers should not overlap.

Note
The number of ports that you select affects the scalability of the system. Keep the following in mind when
specifying the number of ports:
- 6 ports  is a minimum system requirement for machines with Axxon Next.
- In a 32-bit configuration, for every 32 cameras, 6 ports are required (for multistreaming cameras). In a 64-bit
configuration, for any number of cameras, 6 ports are required.
- 2 ports are required to write to the archive.
- To use the Object Tracking database (track recording), 1 port is required.
- To use basic detection tools, 2 ports are required.
- To use Scene Analytics, 2 ports are required.
- To use E-mail- (through SMTP), SMS or server audio notification 1 port is required .

3. Restrict the visibility of Servers from various networks in the Servers list during the Axxon Next setup (4). Possible values:
a. "0.0.0.0/0" -  Servers from all networks will be visible.
b. "10.0.1.23/32,192.168.0.7/32" - Only Servers from specified networks will be visible.
c. "127.0.0.1" - Only Servers from the local network will be visible.
After you save the settings, the Server will be restarted.

Description of utilities  –  732

     User Guide

10 Appendices

10.1 Appendix 1. Glossary

Active viewing tile - viewing tile currently in use by the user.
AWS (automated workstation) – security system user workstation, a minimally equipped personal computer with Axxon Next
software installed.
Archive – all audio/video files stored on a hard disk that can be played and exported to supported formats.
Default archive of a video camera – the archive to which images from a given video camera are recorded during user-initiated
alarms.
Audio detection tool – a detection tool is triggered used to analyze the audio signal from a microphone.
Audio recording – 1. the process of recording a digitized audio signal on a hard disk.
2. audio data stored in a specific format on a hard disk.
The audio subsystem encompasses all the tools that provide for the collection of audio data, its processing, and its storage on
media.
Video detection tool – a detection tool is triggered used to analyze the video image from a video camera.
Video recording – 1. the process of recording a digitized video signal on a hard disk.
2. video information stored in a specific format on a hard disk.
Video camera – 1. source of a video signal.
2. a system object displaying the properties of an installed video camera and controlling its operation.
The video subsystem encompasses all the tools that provide for the acquisition of video data, its processing, and its storage on
media.
Timeline – an interface object used to search for video recordings and navigate an archive.
Input – 1. a physical device intended for receiving information on the status of an object.
2. a system object that displays the properties of an installed Input.
Situation analysis detection – a detection tool is triggered used to analyze the situation in a camera's field of view according to
set criteria.
Audio signal detection– a detection tool is triggered which is triggered by an increase in the signal/noise ratio above a set level.
Loss of quality detection– a detection tool is triggered which is triggered by a loss of quality in the video image from a camera.
Position change detection– a detection tool is triggered by a substantial change in the background of a video image indicating a
change in the position of the camera in space.
Object disappearance detection– a detection tool is triggered by the disappearance of an object in a set area of a video camera's
field of view.
Abandoned object detection– a detection tool is triggered when an object remains motionless in a detection zone for a
prolonged period.
No Signal detection– a detection tool is triggered that is triggered by the absence of an audio signal from an audio device.
Line Crossing detection– a detection tool is triggered which is triggered when the trajectory of an object crosses a virtual line in a
video camera's field of view.
Object appearance detection– a detection tool is triggered by the appearance of an object in a set area of a video camera's field
of view.
Stopping detection– a detection tool is triggered by the cessation of motion in a set area of a video camera's field of view.
Noise detection– a detection tool which is triggered by an decrease in the signal/noise ratio below a set level.
Axxon Domain – a selected group of computers on which the server configuration of the Axxon Next software package is installed.
Linking the servers in a group makes it possible to set up interaction between them, thus organizing a distributed system.

Appendices  –  733

     User Guide

Detection zone – the area of a video image processed by a detection tool is triggered.
Interface cable - cable used to connect two or more devices together for data transfer.
Interface object - a system object used for interaction between the user and software (data input/output).
Client - designation for a personal computer on which Axxon Next software is installed (or will be installed) as a Client.
Designation for the graphical shell of the Axxon Next software package.
Slideshow – automatic switching of user layouts, or of viewing tiles in a single layout if working with standard layouts.
Licensing - regulating and setting the terms for usage of AxxonSoft software modules.
Detection zone –  1. the area of a video image processed by a detection tool is triggered.
2. a tool which allows the user to mark out an area of the video image which is not to be processed by a detection tool is
triggered.
Microphone – 1. a source of audio signals.
2. a system object used to manage the parameters of audio signal reception.
Video surveillance monitor – an interface object used to manage the user interfaces of the Axxon Next software, e.g., layouts,
viewing tiles, various panels and context menus, etc.
Viewing tile - interface object displaying the video stream coming from a certain video camera and enabling control of that video
camera.
Dial panel – panel (part of the PTZ control panel) used to dial a preset.
Archive navigation panel – all interface objects used to work with an archive, e.g., timeline, list of alarm events, etc.
Control panel – panel made up of tabs accessible to the user, used to navigate from one group of interface objects to another.
Playback control panel – panel containing buttons to control playback of video recordings: Play, Pause, Go to next video
recording, etc.
PTZ control panel – all interface objects used to control a certain PTZ device.
Layout control ribbon – panel containing tools to create, edit, and manage layouts.
PTZ device – a system object displaying the properties of an installed PTZ camera device.

Note
Also used to designate a physical device

The PTZ subsystem encompasses all the tools that provide for remote control of a PTZ device and the lens of a video camera.
The analytics subsystem encompasses all the tools that provide for automatic analysis of incoming video and audio data.
The Forensic Search in archive subsystem is a set of tools for searching video recordings in the archive by using video image
metadata.
The Output subsystem encompasses all the tools that provide for the triggering of an execution device connected to the
embedded Output port of a video camera or IP server when a detection tool is triggered (including one which processes the
embedded Input of a video camera or IP server) is triggered.
The notification subsystem encompasses all the tools that provide for notification of the user about events which have occurred
in the system.
Event registration subsystem – all the tools that provide for the collection of data about system events, processing, and its
storage on media.
Pre-alarm recording is the period of pre-event recording that will be added to the beginning of an alarm event recording.
Preset – preprogrammed positioning of a PTZ device.
Software package – all software and hardware tools used together to build a security system.
Software module – a program or functionally complete component of a program used to perform a specific functional task
(perform a user function).

Appendices  –  734

     User Guide

Layout – preserved positioning of viewing tiles relative to each other.

Distributed system – a group consisting of several interacting Axxon Next servers (up to four) and clients (unlimited number).
Axxon Next servers are linked within an Axxon Domain.
Output – 1 a physical device/electromechanical switch.
2. a system object that displays the properties of an installed Output.
Server – designation for a personal computer on which the Server configuration of Axxon Next software is installed (or will be
installed).
Security system – a set of devices used for video surveillance, audio surveillance, and object recognition, all controlled by the
Axxon Next software system.
The system log is a log containing system information on events, including system error entries.
Object tracking – a function which allows an operator to visually track the movement of objects in a camera's field of view.
Alarm flag – the flag symbol designating either the moment an alarm event began or a certain moment before the beginning of
an alarm event.
Color coding - software-based graphical notification to a security system operator about the current status or operating mode of
system objects (equipment, software modules).
Facial vector - mathematical representation of a facial image created upon face capture.
 Captured faces - images detected on video by the facial detection tool.  
Recognized faces - captured faces that reach a pre-defined degree of similarity against reference facial images. 
Reference faces - pre-defined facial images to compare captured faces to.

10.2 Appendix 2. Known issues in the Axxon Next Software Package

10.2.1 Possible Errors During Installation

On page:

• Error starting NGP Host Service

• Errors Connecting to the Postgres Database
• Error installing Drivers Pack
• Error installing DetectorPack
• Window OS 10 installation error
• An error occurred while installing on Windows with the language pack Norsk (bokmål)
• Error uninstalling Axxon Next on systems with Videoinspector installed

10.2.1.1 Error starting NGP Host Service

If port 20111 is busy during installation of Axxon Next (for example, because of nethost.exe processes that have not been
unloaded since removal of the previous version), an error message regarding the launch of NGP Host Service appears.
To continue installation, free up port 20111 and try again.

10.2.1.2 Errors Connecting to the Postgres Database

After installation of the Postgres database, the Axxon Next installer may quit prematurely. This situation may be associated with
the inability of the installer to connect to the Postgres database, if the firewall is enabled. To prevent this, disable your firewall
during installation.

Appendices  –  735

     User Guide

Note
Disabling the firewall during installation can cause another problem: see No signal from video cameras and failure to
connect to other servers.

10.2.1.3 Error installing Drivers Pack

In some cases, you may encounter errors while installing Drivers Pack:

Installation failed because the Universal C Runtime is not installed. Please run
Windows Update and install all required Windows updates(KB2999226). You can download
the UCRT separately from here: 'https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/2999226'

This can be solved by installing the Windows update KB2999226.

10.2.1.4 Error installing DetectorPack

In some cases, you may encounter V2C Error while installing Detectorpack: HASP LM is not running Status Code: 37 0 4832 33.
To resolve it, do as follows:
Start the command line (Run as administrator).
1. Run the following sequence of commands: 1) bcdedit -set LOADOPTIONS DISABLE_INTEGRITY_CHECKS 2) bcdedit -set
TESTSIGNING ON.
2. Reboot and make sure that the hasplms service is running. 
3. Reinstall the driver Sentinel HASP LDK - Windows GUI Run-time Installer.
4. Reinstall Axxon Next.

10.2.1.5 Window OS 10 installation error

When you install Axxon Next on Windows 10.0.17763 and up you may see the Create Recovery Archive error message.
To fix the error, do as follows:
1. Go to Control Panel  → Clock and Region → Region → Administrative tab  → Change System Locale
2. Deselect the checkbox Beta: Use Unicode UTF-8 for worldwide language support.

3. Reinstall Axxon Next.

Appendices  –  736

     User Guide

10.2.1.6 An error occurred while installing on Windows with the language pack Norsk (bokmål)
Installing the Axxon Next server on Windows with the language pack Norsk (bokmål) is not possible due to incompatibility with
PostgreSQL.
You must install Norsk Language Pack (Nynorsk).

10.2.1.7 Error uninstalling Axxon Next on systems with Videoinspector installed

In some cases, uninstalling Axxon Next may be impossible if Videoinspector is used.
For Axxon Next to work correctly, you are advised to first uninstall Videoinspector.

10.2.2 Possible Errors During Start-Up

10.2.2.1 The Client cannot be connected to the Server

If a "Cannot find Server" message appears after you connect to a Server, do the following:
1. Go to Control Panel -> Regional Settings -> More.
2. Change current language of non-Unicode applications to the one that is present in keyboard settings, and may appear in
user name and folders.
3. Reboot the PC.
If a Connection Error message appears after you connect to a Server, do the following:
1. Go to Local Security Policy interface.
2. Select Local Policies -> Security Settings.
3. Turn off the following parameter: System cryptography: use FIPS compliant algorithms for encryption, hashing, and
signing.

Launching the Axxon Next software program with client logging enabled can take a long time when the ESET NOD32 Antivirus 4
Real-time file system protection mode is on.
To solve this problem, add the Axxon Next installation folder and the folder with the client logs (<Letter of system disk>:
\Users\<User>\Appdata\Local\AxxonSoft\AxxonNext\logs) to the list of exceptions in ESET NOD32 Antivirus 4.

10.2.3 Possible Errors During Operation

On page:

• All video cameras or archives stop working once the license maximum is reached
• No signal from video cameras and failure to connect to other servers
• Incorrect display of Client interface elements
• Server error on Windows Server 2012
• Emergency shutdown of the Client on Windows 8.1
• Error creating new archives even when license restriction on total size is observed
• The Axxon Next VMS operation along with Windows Defender software
• Upper panel display problem
• High CPU load during OpenGL software emulation
• Performance of Axxon Next when working with NetLimiter 2
• Exported videos' playback in Movies and TV application

Appendices  –  737

     User Guide

10.2.3.1 All video cameras or archives stop working once the license maximum is reached
If the activation key allows the use of a smaller number of video cameras than the amount used at the moment on the system, all
of the video cameras will cease to function with the system. To resume operation, remove the objects corresponding to the
excess number of video cameras and restart the server.

Note
Restart the Server through the Start menu as follows:
1. All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Shut Down Server
2. All Programs -> Axxon Next -> Start Server

Similarly, if an activation key allows using archives with a total size of an amount less than the current one, you are advised to
correct the archive size to the required amount and then restart the server.

10.2.3.2 No signal from video cameras and failure to connect to other servers
If the Windows Firewall (or firewall of other manufacturers) was disabled during installation of Axxon Next, Axxon Next services
and applications will not be automatically added to the list of firewall exceptions.
After you turn on the firewall, you may see no signal from cameras in both main and web Client, and no possibility to connect to
other Servers.
To solve this problem, add the following applications to the firewall exceptions: Apphost.exe, NetHost.exe, AxxonNext.exe, and
LicenceTool.exe.

Note
If ESET NOD32 Smart Security 6 anti-virus software is used, disable Personal firewall

10.2.3.3 Incorrect display of Client interface elements

Client interface elements may be distorted on systems with some versions of GeForce drivers (such as 327.23, 337.88) installed.
In some cases this problem is solved by disabling stream optimization for the axxonnext.exe process:
1. Run Control panel -> NVIDIA control panel-> 3D parameters-> Software settings.
2. Click the Add button and select the axxonnext.exe file (<Axxon Next installation directory >/bin).
3. Set the Off parameter for the Threaded optimisation function.
4. Click the Apply button.
If this solution does not eliminate the problem, then install an older driver for the graphics card.

10.2.3.4 Server error on Windows Server 2012

You may experience errors when running the server on Windows Server 2012. To fix the errors:
1. Open the registry path HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager\SubSystems\.
2. Find the Windows parameter and change its value as follows: in the string "SharedSection = 1024,20480, 768 ", replace
768 with 4096. 
3. Save the changes and restart the computer.

10.2.3.5 Emergency shutdown of the Client on Windows 8.1

You may see the Client shutting down on Windows 8.1 with an error: " The name of the failed module: KERNELBASE.dll Exception
code: 0xe0434352 ".
In this case, please contact Microsoft support.

Appendices  –  738

     User Guide

10.2.3.6 Error creating new archives even when license restriction on total size is observed
If the user creates archives at the same time (in other words, without applying changes) while deleting some existing archives,
creation of archives may be forbidden even if the total archive size does not exceed the amount of the license restriction.

Note
This happens because when verifying the license restrictions, the size of created archives is calculated based on the
total size the last time when changes were applied

To regain the ability to create new archives in such situations, the user must first delete unnecessary archives and apply changes.

10.2.3.7 The Axxon Next VMS operation along with Windows Defender software
If you have Windows Defender software installed in your system, some problems may occur while accessing and saving data to
Archive files, as well as significant slowing down of MomentQuest searches.
As a workaround, you can either disable Windows Defender or add AppHost.exe, AppHostSvc.exe and vfs_format.exe to the
exceptions list.

10.2.3.8 Upper panel display problem

In some cases, the Client may display the upper panel erratically, 
If you encounter such a problem, please install the most recent version of Intel graphics subsystem drivers. 

10.2.3.9 High CPU load during OpenGL software emulation

If your computer's graphics card does not meet OpenGL requirements (see Limitations of the Axxon Next Software Package),
OpenGL can be emulated in software.
But this may place a high load on the CPU.

10.2.3.10 Performance of Axxon Next when working with NetLimiter 2

If NetLimiter 2 is installed in the system, there may be a significantly increased load on the processor when working with Axxon
Next.
This problem is resolved by removing NetLimiter 2.

10.2.3.11 Exported videos' playback in Movies and TV application

Due to the lack of G.711 and G.726 codecs support in Windows 10's "Movies and TV" app, exported footage playback is video only.
You can use alternative video viewer applications to obtain the full playback.

10.3 Appendix 3. Assigning of the domain takes place when the Axxon Next server is
installed
The Windows OS will create two accounts when the Axxon Next software package is installed using a Client and Server type of
configuration.
1. An account with administrator rights which is used by the Axxon Next file browser. The name of this account is set during
installation of Axxon Next (see Installation).
For Axxon Next to function correctly, this account must have Windows administrator rights. If the account is a domain
user account, you must also add the account to the Users and Power Users groups.

Appendices  –  739

     User Guide

Note
The file browser helps to navigate through the Server's file system (such as when choosing disks for log volumes)

The account can also be used for configuring access rights to the hard disk.
2. Axxonpostgres – an account under which the log data database service is started.

Note
 A log database (Postgres) is used for storing system events

10.4 Appendix 4. Using Axxon Next with anti-virus software

On page:

• NOD32
• ESET Smart Security
• AVG
• DrWeb
• McAfee SAAS

Depending on the anti-virus software that you use, when you install, start, and use Axxon Next, your anti-virus software may ask
for permission for the software components to perform Internet access.
It is recommended that you allow these components to do so for proper functioning of the application.
Recommendations for specific anti-virus programs are given below.

10.4.1 NOD32
When using NOD32 Antivirus, it is strongly recommended to either disable the Web Access Protection service or to add the IP
addresses of IP cameras to the list of exceptions for anti-virus scanning.
See also section Possible Errors During Start-Up.

10.4.2 ESET Smart Security

If you use ESET Smart Security, select automatic mode with Firewall exceptions and add the remote servers to the exceptions by
creating network rules (for help with creating these rules, refer to the official user guide for the anti-virus software).

10.4.3 AVG
When using AVG on a configuration with many video cameras, it is strongly recommended to add the IP addresses of IP cameras
to the list of exceptions. Otherwise, the avgsa.exe process may severely slow down the CPU.
This action can be performed only in the paid version of AVG.
When installing Axxon Next, allow the NetHost.exe and ngpsh.exe processes to run.

10.4.4 DrWeb
If you use DrWeb anti-virus software, perform the following actions before installing Axxon Next:
1. Disable automatic start of the DrWeb firewall.
2. In the proactive protection settings, select the option to use custom settings and enable the following options:

Appendices  –  740

     User Guide

a. Allow low-level disk access

b. Allow system services
c. Allow loading drivers
d. Allow user drivers
e. Allow Winlogon shell parameters
3. In the SpiDer Gate settings, add the apphost.exe and AxxonNext.exe processes to the list of exceptions for scanning of
incoming traffic. If possible, it is recommended to disable scanning of incoming and outgoing traffic.

10.4.5 McAfee SAAS

For correct functioning of Axxon Next distributed configurations and remote clients, you must disable the Firewall Protection
component in McAfee SAAS.

Note
It is not necessary to disable this component if your configuration contains a single server and a local client.

10.5 Appendix 5. Using CH VM-Desktop USB multifunction controllers with Axxon Next
CH VM-Desktop USB multifunction controllers offer a range of input controls:
• Three-axis joystick for PTZ and digital zoom control (J1 and J2)
• Jog/shuttle dial (J3 and J4)
• 27 keys
• 10 number keys
• * key
• # key
• Programmable keys C1 to C13 (keys cannot be remapped in Axxon Next)
• Two additional keys (B1 and B2)

The multifunction controller can be used to operate Axxon Next on the active monitor.

Appendices  –  741

     User Guide

Note
The active monitor is either the main one (if all additional monitors are inactive or not connected) or an additional one,
if the additional monitor is active (see Configuring Interfaces on a Multi-Monitor Computer).
The active monitor can be selected only by using the mouse. If no mouse is present, the multifunction controller will
work on the main monitor only.

A description of key functions is given in the table.

Key When available Function

J1 Always PTZ control for the selected camera.

If the selected camera does not support PTZ control, the action is ignored.

J2 Always Optical zoom control for the selected camera.

If the selected camera does not support PTZ control, the action is ignored.

J3 (rotate Archive mode Go to previous frame.

counterclockwise)
If playback is active, the action is ignored.

J3 (rotate clockwise) Archive mode Go to next frame.

If playback is active, the action is ignored.

J4 (rotate Archive mode Go to previous video fragment.

counterclockwise)

J4 (rotate clockwise) Archive mode Go to next video fragment.

 J4 Live Video mode Iris control for the selected camera.

1 Live Video mode Start/stop patrol mode.

2.3 Live Video mode Focus control for the selected camera.

*n# Always Select a camera in a layout.

n is the number of the camera to be activated via the number keys.
If the camera with the relevant number is not in the current layout, a search is performed for
the minimum layout containing the camera; the minimum layout is then displayed.
If no such layout exists, a layout with one camera is created.

#n# Always Go to layout.

n is  the layout to be activated via the number keys;  the number corresponds to the order in which
the layout appears in the list.

C10 Always Clear number.

If the operator did not finish typing the number of a camera or layout (the # key was not pressed),
pressing the C10 key clears the previously entered number.

C1 Alarm Management Accept alarm with False Alarm resolution.

mode

Appendices  –  742

     User Guide

C2 Alarm Management Accept alarm with Non-Critical Alarm resolution.

mode

C3 Alarm Management Accept alarm with Critical Alarm resolution.

mode

C4 Always Manually initiate an alarm and go to Alarm Management mode.

Go to Alarm Management mode if an alarm has been previously initiated.

C5 Always Increase size of layout cell

C6 Always Reduce size of layout cell

C7 Always Go to previous layout in the list

C8 Always Go to next layout in the list

C11 Archive mode Slow down playback

C12 Archive mode Start/pause video playback

C13 Archive mode Speed up playback

B2 Archive mode, Alarm Go to Live Video mode (without alarm classification)

Management mode

B2 Live Video mode Go to Archive Mode

C9 Archive mode Open/hide calendar

B1, B2 Open calendar Cycle through calendar elements (equivalent to pressing the tab key)
days of month - hours - minutes - seconds - am/pm (B2 key) and in reverse (by pressing the B1 key)

J3 Open calendar Navigate by days and set hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM

J4 Open calendar Navigate by months

10.6 Appendix 6. Hotkeys in Axxon Next

Axxon Next comes with the following default hotkeys:

Function Hot key

Global
General

Activate panel of cameras F4

Activate panel of configuration F5

Activate panel of layouts F2

Appendices  –  743

     User Guide

Activate panel of video walls F3

Select item of menu and panels, click Save, Apply, OK Enter

Navigation. Down Down

Navigation. Left Left

Navigation. Right Right

Navigation. Up Up

Open menu of current layout F1

Open panel with list of devices F7

Open alarm panel F6

Hide menu/panel, click Cancel Esc

Lock application Ctrl + Alt + L

Remove current value Delete

DIgit 1 D1

Digit 9 D9

Layouts

Camera selection in current layout Ctrl + N

Select monitor by number Shift + N

Select layout by number Alt + N

Select the previous* camera in current layout cell

Select the next* camera in current layout cell

Navigation the cameras, upward shift Alt + Up

Navigation the cameras, left shift Alt + Left

Navigation the cameras, downward shift Alt + Down

Navigation the cameras, right shift Alt + Right

Move to the previous layout Shift + Left

Move to the next layout Shift + Right

Increase layout cell Ctrl + Add (+)

Decrease layout cell Ctrl + Subtract (-)

* by ID

Live Video display mode

Videocamera

Appendices  –  744

     User Guide

Open menu of selected camera and select item F9

Switch to archive mode Ctrl + Tab

Switch to alarm classification mode Ctrl + R

Switch to search in archive mode Ctrl + F

Arm Ctrl + A

Disarm Ctrl + D

PTZ

Move up NumPad8

Move left NumPad4

Move down NumPad2

Move right NumPad6

Close iris Next

Focus far End

Open iris PageUp

Patrolling Multiply (*)

Focus near Home

Zoom in NumPad9

Zoom out NumPad3

Archive

Open menu of selected camera and select item Ctrl + E

Pause / Play Ctrl + Space

Switch to Time Compressor mode Ctrl + T

Go to the previous video clip Ctrl + Shift + Left

Go to the previous frame Ctrl + Left

Go to the next video clip Ctrl + Shift + Right

Go to the next frame Ctrl + Right

Show calendar F8

Increase playback speed Ctrl + Up

Reduce playback speed Ctrl + Down

TimeCompressor

Pause / Play Ctrl + Space

Move home Ctrl + B

Appendices  –  745

     User Guide

Increase number of objects Ctrl + Up

Decrease number of objects Ctrl + Down

Alarms

Go to the previous frame Ctrl + Left

Go to the next frame Ctrl + Right

Resolution False alarm Ctrl + D3

Resolution Non-critical alarm Ctrl + D2

Resolution Critical alarm Ctrl + D1

Increase playback speed Ctrl + Up

Reduce playback speed Ctrl + Down

10.7 Appendix 7. Automated configuration backup and restore

You can use the ngpsh.exe utility and json commands to back up and restore your system configuration.

Attention!
These configuration backups are incompatible with those created with the Backup and Configuration Recovery utility,
and vice versa.

To create a configuration backup:

1. Use Windows command line to access the <Axxon Next installation directory>\AxxonNext\binfolder.
2. Execute the following command:

ngpsh.exe backup backupJson [path_to_backup_folder] [node_name] [local] [shared]

[license] [tickets]

Where

Parameter Description

path_to_backup_folder Required parameter. 

Specify a folder to save the configuration backup to. You have to use two "\" characters in the
path.

node_name Required parameter. 

Name of a Server whose configuration you want to save.

local Add it, if you need to save the local configuration for this Server: all created objects along with
their parameters, links and changes' histories.

shared Add it, if you need to save the global configuration for an Axxon domain: users, layouts, etc.

license Add it, if you need to save a license.

Appendices  –  746

     User Guide

Parameter Description

tickets Add it, if you need to save the Axxon domain structure.

An example:

ngpsh.exe backup backupJson c:\\backups Server1 local

To restore a configuration from a backup:

ngpsh.exe backup restoreJson [path_to_backup_file] [node_name] [local] [shared]

[license] [tickets] [deleteLocal] [deleteShared]

Where

Parameter Description

deleteLocal Add it, if you need to clear the local configuration from objects not present in the backup copy.

deleteShared Add it, if you need to clear the global configuration from objects not present in the backup copy.

An example:

ngpsh.exe backup restoreJson c:\\backups\Server1.json local

10.8 Appendix 8. Configuring and operating the Axxon Next in Linux OS

10.8.1 Linux OS supported versions

Axxon Next supports all 64-bit installation packages based on Debian 9 and Debian 10.

Note
It is recommended to use Ubuntu 18.

10.8.2 Axxon Next limitations in Linux OS

The following features are currently not available in Axxon Next operating on Linux OS:
1. Immersive mode (see Immersive mode).
2. POS devices (see Configuring POS devices).
3. Intel Quick Sync Video (see Hardware-based decoding with Intel Quick Sync Video).
4. Adaptive video stream (see Configuring an Adaptive Video Stream).
5. Upgrading Servers within a cluster via the supervisor web interface (see Upgrading Servers within a cluster).
6. Upgrading remote Clients on any OS via Server on Linux OS (see Automatic update of a remote Client).
7. POS devices (see Configuring POS devices).

Appendices  –  747

     User Guide

8. Axxon Next Tray Tool.

10.8.3 Installing sudo

The sudo software is used for installing and configuring Axxon Next.
If it is not included in the OS distribution package, then to install it and add the user, it is necessary to run the following
commands in the root mode:

apt-get install sudo

usermod -aG sudo user
reboot

10.8.4 Installing the Axxon Next in Linux OS

10.8.4.1 Installing the Axxon Next Server in Linux OS

10.8.4.1.1 Installing from repository

Installation from the repository is performed automatically including all the system components.
For this purpose, do the following:
1. Consequently execute the commands:

echo 'deb http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository stretch main' | sudo tee -a /

etc/apt/sources.list.d/axxonsoft.list

echo 'deb http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository stretch backports/main' | sudo

tee -a /etc/apt/sources.list.d/axxonsoft.list

wget --quiet -O - "http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository/

info@axxonsoft.com.gpg.key" | sudo apt-key --keyring /etc/apt/trusted.gpg.d/axxonsoft.gpg
add - && sudo apt-get update

Note
If the distributives based on Debian 10 are used, it may be necessary to install additional packages:
apt-get install wget
apt-get install gnupg

2. To install a Server, run the following command:

sudo apt-get install axxon-next

To install a FailOver Server, run the following command:

apt-get install axxon-next-raft

Appendices  –  748

     User Guide

Attention!
It is not allowed to simultaneously install a regular Server and a FailOver Server.

During the installation, the installer will request the name of the Axxon-domain for the Axxon Next server. If you leave this
field blank, you can specify it on the client at the first connection.

10.8.4.1.2 Manual installation

To install the Axxon Next Server manually, do the following:
1. Add the repositories by sequentially executing the following commands:

echo 'deb [arch=amd64] http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository stretch main' |

sudo tee -a /etc/apt/sources.list.d/axxonsoft.list
echo 'deb [arch=amd64] http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository stretch backports/
main' | sudo tee -a /etc/apt/sources.list.d/axxonsoft.list
wget --quiet -O - "http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository/
info@axxonsoft.com.gpg.key" | sudo apt-key --keyring /etc/apt/trusted.gpg.d/axxonsoft.gpg
add - && sudo apt-get update

2. To download the packages, run one of the following commands:

a. Server only:

sudo apt-get install -d axxon-next

b. Server and Client:

sudo apt-get install -d axxon-next-client

By default, the files are downloaded to the /var/cache/apt/archives folder. If it is necessary to download the files to
another folder, run the following command:

apt-get install -d axxon-next -o=dir::cache=/home/user/Downloads/

In this case, the packages will be downloaded to the /home/user/Downloads folder.

Attention!
If you plan to install the downloaded packages on another computer with no Internet, then the OS
version on that computer should match the OS version on which the packages were downloaded.

3. To install the previously downloaded packages, execute the command:

Appendices  –  749

     User Guide

sudo dpkg -i /home/user/Downloads/*.deb || sudo apt-get install -f -y

where
user - user name;
Downloads - folder with downloaded packages.
Package examples...
Example of packages required to install the server side:

axxon-drivers-pack_3.46_amd64.deb
axxon-detector-pack_3.1_amd64.deb
axxon-next-core_4.5.0_amd64.deb
axxon-next_4.5.0_all.deb

Example of packages required to install the Server in the Failover mode:

axxon-drivers-pack_3.46_amd64.deb
axxon-detector-pack_3.1_amd64.deb
axxon-next-core_4.5.0_amd64.deb
axxon-next-raft_4.5.0_amd64.deb

Example of packages required for the Server and Client installation type:

axxon-drivers-pack_3.46_amd64.deb
axxon-detector-pack_3.1_amd64.deb
axxon-next_4.5.0_all.deb
axxon-next-core_4.5.0_amd64.deb
axxon-next-client-bin_4.5.0_amd64.deb
axxon-next-client_4.5.0_all.deb

Attention!
The folder should not contain other packages.
It is not allowed to simultaneously install the normal Server and the Failover Server.

During the installation, the installer will request the name of the Axxon-domain for the Axxon Next server. If you leave this
field blank, you can later specify it on the Client at the first connection.

4. If necessary, you can change the Server configuration after installation (see Axxon Next Server configuration change).  
Installation is complete.
You can install the Detector Pack and Driver Pack from the repository. To do this, sequentially execute the following commands:

Appendices  –  750

     User Guide

sudo apt-get install axxon-drivers-pack

sudo apt-get install axxon-detector-pack

Attention!
The Detector Pack and Driver Pack must be installed from the repository before installing the main part of Axxon Next.
If the Detector Pack and Driver Pack were installed from the repository, it is necessary to remove them from the folder
with downloaded installation packages.

10.8.4.2 Installing the Axxon Next Client in Linux OS

To install the Axxon Next Client in Linux OS, do the following:

Attention!
The Client installation is possible only after getting the same Server version installed (see Installing the Axxon Next
Server in Linux OS).

1. For the automatical installation from the repository:

a. Add the repositories by sequentially executing the following commands:

echo 'deb [arch=amd64] http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository stretch main'

| sudo tee -a /etc/apt/sources.list.d/axxonsoft.list
echo 'deb [arch=amd64] http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository stretch
backports/main' | sudo tee -a /etc/apt/sources.list.d/axxonsoft.list
wget --quiet -O - "http://download.axxonsoft.com/debian-repository/
info@axxonsoft.com.gpg.key" | sudo apt-key --keyring /etc/apt/trusted.gpg.d/
axxonsoft.gpg add - && sudo apt-get update

b. If you use Ubuntu 20.04, then install the mono-complete from the stretch repository:

apt-get install mono-complete -t stretch

c. Run the command:

sudo apt-get install axxon-next-client

d. During installation, it will be necessary to specify the maximum size of log files in megabytes and log level.

Appendices  –  751

     User Guide

Note
The specified value can be changed (see Configuring the Axxon Next Client logging parameters on Linux
OS). To do this, execute the command:
sudo dpkg-reconfigure axxon-next-client

2. For the manual installation:

a. Go to the downloaded deb-packages folder.
b. Execute the following commands:

sudo dpkg -i axxon-next-client-bin_4.5.1.9763_amd64.deb

sudo dpkg -i axxon-next-client_4.5.1.9763_all.deb

where 4.5.1.9763 is the version and build number.

After the installation is complete, the Client icon will be displayed in the application menu.

Attention!
It is not recommended to run the Client as root user or with root permissions.

By default, at the first Client start, the OS interface language will be used. To change the language of the Client's interface at the
first start, do the following:
1. Run the following command.

sudo dpkg-reconfigure axxon-next-client

Appendices  –  752

     User Guide

2. Select the required language.

Note
This should be configured separately for each OS user.

Attention!
After you run the Client, select the interface language for the next launches in the settings (see Selecting the
interface language).

10.8.4.3 Configuration and log folders

The following folders are being used by default:
1. Logs and Client configuration:

/home/USER/.local/share/AxxonSoft/

2. Server configuration:

/opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/

Appendices  –  753

     User Guide

10.8.4.4 Axxon Next Server launch using Docker

To run the Axxon Next Server using Docker, do the following:
1. Install Docker (see Docker installation and Specifics of Docker installation on Ubuntu).
2. Create the Axxon Next container (see Creating the Axxon Next container).
Minimum requirements to run Axxon Next using Docker on Ubuntu:
• Dual core processor;
• 4 GB RAM;
• 200 GB HDD.

10.8.4.4.1 Docker installation

To install the Docker, do the following:
1. Execute the command in the root mode.

sudo apt-get install \

apt-transport-https \
ca-certificates \
curl \
gnupg2 \
software-properties-common

2. Add CPG key and fingerprints.

curl -fsSL https://download.docker.com/linux/debian/gpg | sudo apt-key add -

sudo apt-key fingerprint 0EBFCD88

3. . Add the official repository to the source.list.

sudo add-apt-repository \
"deb [arch=amd64] https://download.docker.com/linux/debian \
$(lsb_release -cs) \
stable"

sudo apt-get update

4. Install the Docker-ce and docker-compose (see https://github.com/docker/compose/releases).

sudo apt-get install docker-ce docker-compose

5. Add the system user to the docker group.

sudo adduser user docker

6. Log in the system under this user.

7. Install Mercurial.

sudo apt-get install mercurial

8. Add string to the hgrc file.

Appendices  –  754

     User Guide

sudo nano ~/.hgrc

[ui]
tls = False

9. Clone the repository.

hg clone https://bitbucket.org/Axxonsoft/axxonnext.docker /home/user/axxonnext.docker

Update the repository, if necessary.

cd axxonnext.docker
hg pull -u

10.8.4.4.2 Specifics of Docker installation on Ubuntu

To install Docker on Ubuntu, do the following:
1. Update the lists.

sudo apt-get update

2. Install the packages to use the repository via HTTPS

$ sudo apt-get install \

apt-transport-https \
ca-certificates \
curl \
software-properties-common

3. Add the official Docker GPG key.

$ curl -fsSL https://download.docker.com/linux/ubuntu/gpg | sudo apt-key add

4. Set up the repository:

a. for x86_64 / amd64 architecture:

$ sudo add-apt-repository \
"deb [arch=amd64] https://download.docker.com/linux/ubuntu \
$(lsb_release -cs) \
stable"

b. for armhf architecture:

$ sudo add-apt-repository \
"deb [arch=armhf] https://download.docker.com/linux/ubuntu \
$(lsb_release -cs) \
stable"

Appendices  –  755

     User Guide

5. Update the lists.

sudo apt-get update

6. Install the docker-ce.

sudo apt-get install docker-ce

7. Check the current version of docker-compose and upgrade it to the latest version, if necessary.

sudo curl -L https://github.com/docker/compose/releases/download/1.21.2/docker-compose-

`uname -s`-`uname -m` -o /usr/local/bin/docker-compose

8. Set the access permissions.

sudo chmod +x /usr/local/bin/docker-compose

9. Check the installation and version of docker-compose.

docker-compose --version

10. Add the user to Docker.

sudo usermod -aG docker user

11. Install the Mercurial.

sudo apt-get install mercurial

12. Add to the hgrc file

sudo nano ~/.hgrc

the following:

[ui]
tls = False

13. Clone the repository.

hg clone https://bitbucket.org/Axxonsoft/axxonnext.docker /home/pc/axxonnext.docker

14. Update the repository if necessary.

cd axxonnext.docker
hg pull -u

15. Restart the OS.

Appendices  –  756

     User Guide

sudo reboot

10.8.4.4.3 Creating the Axxon Next container

To create the Axxon Next container, do the following:
1. Copy the Axxon Next, Detector Pack and Driver Pack deb-packages into the folder ~~/axxonnext.docker/next/build/.
2. Go to the folder ~/axxonnext.docker/next

cd ~/axxonnext.docker/next

3. Execute the command.

./axxon-next.sh build

The Axxon Next container build is going to start.

4. To view the list of the built-up containers, execute the following command after the operation is complete.

./axxon-next.sh list

10.8.4.4.4 Working with the Axxon Next container

• The list of containers.

./axxon-next.sh list

• Launching the container.

./axxon-next.sh start 4.3.2.37

• Viewing the container status.

./axxon-next.sh status

• Stopping the container.

./axxon-next.sh stop

• Collecting the system data.

./axxon-next.sh support

The file will be saved in the '~/axxonnext.docker/next/data/' directory.

• Viewing the installed packages version.

./axxon-next.sh versions

Appendices  –  757

     User Guide

10.8.4.5 Updating the Axxon Next software in Linux OS

To update the Axxon Next software from the repository, it is necessary to execute the following commands in the root mode:

sudo apt-get update

sudo apt-get upgrade

To update the Axxon Next software from the folder, do the following:
1. Go to the folder with the downloaded packages.
2. Execute the following command:

sudo dpkg -i *

Attention!
After the update is completed, it is necessary to check the access rights of the archive file and the folder where it is
stored.
The ngp user should be specified as the owner of both the file and the folder.

10.8.4.6 Uninstalling the Axxon Next software in Linux OS

To uninstall the Axxon Next but save the configuration, run the following command:

sudo apt-get remove axxon-next*

To completely remove the Axxon Next, run the following command:

sudo apt-get --purge --auto-remove remove axxon-next*

10.8.5 Moving the Axxon Next configuration from Windows OS to Linux OS

To transfer Axxon Next configuration from Windows OS to Linux OS, do the following:
1. Create the backup configuration in Windows OS (see Backing up a configuration).
2. Execute the following command in Linux OS:

sudo dpkg-reconfigure axxon-next

Attention!
The Server in Linux OS must belong to some Axxon-domain.

Appendices  –  758

     User Guide

The following window will be displayed.

3. Press the Enter button several times until the Server node name change window is displayed.

4. Enter the Server node name which is used in Windows OS.

5. Run the backup and configuration recovery utility (see Backup and restore utility) and select the specified Server on its
launch.  
6. Restore the configuration by selecting the saved backup.
7. Deactivate the license (see Deactivating a license) and distribute the license file again (see Activation by applying license
file).

10.8.6 Starting and stopping the Axxon Next Server in Linux OS

Server start:

sudo service axxon-next start

Server stop:

sudo service axxon-next stop

Server restart:

sudo service axxon-next restart

Server status check:

sudo service axxon-next status

10.8.7 Archive creation features in Linux OS

10.8.7.1 Archive as a disk creation features in Linux OS

To allocate the disk for recording, execute the command in the root mode.

Appendices  –  759

     User Guide

sudo su

fdisk -l

where
• /dev/sda - the first physical disk;
• /dev/sda1 - the first section of the first physical disk;
• /dev/sda2 - the second section of the first physical disk;
• dev/sdb - the second physical disk.
To delete the disk section, do the following:
1. Go to the disk where it is necessary to delete a section.

fdisk /dev/sdb

2. Delete the section.

3. Specify the section number.

4. Save the changes.

To create a section, do the following:

1. Go to the disk where it is necessary to create a section.

fdisk /dev/sdb

2. Create the section.

3. Specify the section: primary (p) or extended (e).

4. Specify the section number.

5. Specify the section size. G - gigabytes, M - megabytes, K - kilobytes.

Appendices  –  760

     User Guide

+5G

6. . Save the changes.

To create the archive as a disk, do the following:

1. Create a new archive in the Axxon Next Client (see Creating a local archive).
2. Select the archive volume.
3. Specify the path to section in the address window. For example: /dev/sdb1.  If it is required to use the whole disk as an
archive, specify the /dev/sdc, /dev/sdd and so on.
4. Set the Format checkbox and click the Apply button.

Attention!
At this point you cannot change the archive size.

10.8.7.2 Archive as a file creation features in Linux OS

By default, in Linux OS the ngp user has rights to record only in the /opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/ directory.
To create an archive in another directory, do the following:
1. Create a folder with write permissions.

sudo mkdir -m755 /home/archive

2. Change the folder owner to npg user.

sudo chown -R ngp:ngp /home/archive/

3. Check the permissions on created folder.

ls -lt /home/

If there is a string with the ngp user permissions in the result, it is now possible to create an archive as a file in this
directory.

drw-r--r-- 2 ngp ngp 4096 aug. 8 15:18 archive

10.8.7.3 Features of archives with ext and xfs file systems

When you work with archives (both local and network) on ext and xfs file systems, take into account the following features:
1. When you create an archive (see Creating Archive), the displayed free disk space is calculated based on the actual used
space.

Appendices  –  761

     User Guide

Note
For example, the disk size is 60 GB, and a 10 GB archive is created on it, but it is only 1 GB full.
When you try to create a second archive on this disk, 59 GB of free space will be displayed, not 50 GB.

2. Availability of the entire archive file size is not guaranteed in cases when other files run out of available space.

Note
Due to the ext and xfs file systems features, it is possible to create archives whose total size exceeds the free disk
space.

Attention!
In such cases, it is necessary for the system administrator to control the free disk space.

10.8.8 Axxon Next Server configuration change

To change the Server configuration, do the following:
1. Execute the following command.

sudo dpkg-reconfigure axxon-next

2. Enter the Axxon-domain ID to which the Server should be added.  To skip this step, press the Enter button.

3. Change the Server node name. 

4. Specify the port range beginning for Server operation.

5. Specify the number of ports for Server operation.

Appendices  –  762

     User Guide

6. Specify the database operation port.

7. Restrict the visibility of Servers from various networks in the Servers list during the Axxon Next setup. Possible values:
a. "0.0.0.0/0" -  Servers from all networks will be visible.
b. "10.0.1.23/32,192.168.0.7/32" - Only Servers from specified networks will be visible.
c. "127.0.0.1" - Only Servers from the local network will be visible.

8. Set the external address of the switch if the Server is located behind the NAT (1). Use the following settings format: "IP
Address 1 or DNS Name 1, IP Address 2 or DNS Name 2"

9. Select the Server log level (see Configuring Logging Levels).

10.8.9 Configuring the metadata storage in NAS on Linux OS

To store the metadata in a network attached storage (NAS), do the following:
1. Create a shared network folder.
2. On the Server in Linux OS, create the netdir folder. For example, in the /media folder:

sudo mkdir /media/netdir

3. Install the cifs-utils utility.

sudo apt-get install cifs-utils

4. Attach the shared network folder to the created netdir folder.

Appendices  –  763

     User Guide

sudo mount -t cifs //IP-address/common /media/netdir -o

user=User,password=123,uid=1001,gid=1002,vers=2.0

where,
a. IP-address - NAS address,
b. common - shared network folder,
c. user, password - NAS access credentials,
d. uid, gid - id of the user and ngp group; they can be obtained using the following command:

id ngp

5. In the Axxon Next metadata storage settings, specify the /media/netdir path (see Configuring storage of the system log
and metadata).
After you restart Linux OS, the attached folder will be deleted. To configure the network folder to be attached on the OS loading,
do the following:
1. Open the /etc/fstab file.

sudo nano /etc/fstab

2. Add the following string to the file:

//IP-address/common /media/netdir cifs user=User,password=123,uid=1001,gid=1002,vers=2.0 0

0

3. Save file.

10.8.10 Configuring the Axxon Next Client logging parameters on Linux OS

To change the Axxon Next Client logging parameters, do the following:
1. Execute the following command.

sudo dpkg-reconfigure axxon-next-client

2. Select the Client log level (see Configuring Logging Levels).

Appendices  –  764

     User Guide

3. Set the maximum size of the log in megabytes. When the specified size is reached, a new log is created.

10.8.11 License activation for the LP recognition detection in Linux OS

To activate the License Plate (LP) recognition detection (see Configuring License plate recognition (VT)), do the following:
1. Download the Sentinel LDK Run-time Environment:

sudo wget --no-check-certificate http://downloads.vitcompany.com/release/Sentinel/8.1/

aksusbd-8.13.1.tar.gz

2. Unpack the archive:

sudo tar zxvf aksusbd-8.13.1.tar.gz -C ~

3. Get the AxxonArchiveSearchll.v2c key file from the technical support department.
4. Move the received file to the folder with the unpacked archive.
5. Go to the folder with the unpacked archive and run the following script:

cd aksusbd-8.13.1
sudo ./dinst

As a result, the installed key will be displayed at the http://127.0.0.1:1947/ address in the Sentinel Admin Control Center web-
application.

10.8.12 System data collection in Linux OS

To collect the system data in Linux OS, execute the following command:

Appendices  –  765

     User Guide

sudo /opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/bin/support /home/user

where
• /opt/AxxonSoft/AxxonNext/bin/support - the utility location directory;
• /home/user - the user’s home directory.

10.9 Appendix 9. Using Axxon Next with NAT

10.9.1 Consolidating the Servers from different networks into Axxon domain
To consolidate the Servers from different networks separated by routers into Axxon domain, do the following:
1. Set the port range for operation and the router's public IP address on each Server that is to be included in the Axxon
domain (see Network settings utility).

Attention!
The Server port ranges of Axxon Domain should not overlap within the same network.
By default, the base port is 20111, and the port range is 20111-20210. Hence, it is necessary to set and forward
the port range 20211-20310 for the second Server, the port range 20311-20410 for the third Server, and so on.

Attention!
The router's public IP address should be static.

2. For each router, forward the specified ports of the Server, which is located behind this switch.
3. Connect the Client to the Server from any network (see Starting an Axxon Next Client, Connecting the Client to the Server
behind NAT).
4. Manually add other Servers to the Axxon domain using the public IP address of the corresponding router and the external
base port of the Server (see Adding a Server to an existing Axxon Domain).

Example:

Appendices  –  766

     User Guide

To combine Servers into one Axxon domain in this configuration, do the following:
1. On Server 1, set the port range 20111-20210 and the public IP address of router 1.
2. On Server 2, set the port range 20211-20310 and the public IP address of router 1.
3. On Server 3, set the port range 20111-20210 and the public IP address of router 2.
4. On Server 4, set the port range 20211-20310 and the public IP address of router 2.
5. On router 1, configure the forwarding of:
a. the router ports 20111-20210 to the internal IP address of Server 1 and ports 20111-20210;
b. the router ports 20211-20310 to the internal IP address of Server 2 and ports 20211-20310.
6. On router 2, configure the forwarding of:
a. the router ports 20111-20210 to the internal IP address of Server 3 and ports 20111-20210;
b. the router ports 20211-20310 to the internal IP address of Server 4 and ports 20211-20310.
7. Connect to Server 1.
8. Manually add Server 2 to the Axxon domain using the local IP address of Server 2 and port 20211.
9. Manually add Server 3 to the Axxon domain using the public IP address of router 2 and port 20111.
10. Manually add Server 4 to the Axxon domain using the public IP address of router 2 and port 20211.

Appendices  –  767

     User Guide

10.9.2 Connecting the Client to the Server behind NAT

To connect the Client to the Server behind NAT, do the following:
1. On the Server, set the port range of ports for operation and the router's public IP address (see NTServiceOpts utility). By
default, the base port is 20111, and the port range is 20111-20210.

Attention!
The router's public IP address should be static.

2. On the router, forward the specified Server ports and the NativeBL 20109 port.
3. Launch the Client and specify the router's external IP address and the Server's external base port in the connection
settings (see Starting an Axxon Next Client).

Appendices  –  768

     User Guide

Attention!
When connecting the Client from an external network, only those Servers that have access to the external
network will be available in the Axxon domain configuration (see Consolidating the Servers from different
networks into Axxon domain).

Attention!
In some cases, in security systems with a complex architecture (NAT, VPN), the Client may not receive events
from the Server. To fix this, it is necessary to create the system variable NGP_POLL_EVENTS and set the 1 value
to it (see Appendix 10. Creating system variable).

Attention!
In a failover system, it is not possible to connect to the node that is behind NAT (see Connecting to a Node and
Configuring of an Axxon domain).

Example:

To connect the Client to the Servers behind NAT, do the following:

1. On Server 1, set the port range 20111-20210 and the public IP address of the router.
2. On Server 2, set the port range 20211-20310 and the public IP address of the router.

Appendices  –  769

     User Guide

3. On Server 3, set the port range 20311-20410 and the public IP address of the router.
4. On the router, configure the forwarding of:
a. the router ports 20111-20210 to the internal IP address of Server 1 and ports 20111-20210;
b. the router ports 20211-20310 to the internal IP address of Server 2 and ports 20211-20310;
c. the router ports 20311-20410 to the internal IP address of Server 3 and ports 20311-20410.
5. When connecting the Client, enter the router's public IP address and port: 20111 to connect to Server 1; port 20211 to
connect to Server 2; port 20311 to connect to Server 3.

10.9.3 Connecting the web and mobile Clients to the Server behind NAT
To connect web and mobile Clients to the Server behind NAT, do the following:
1. On the router, forward the specified port of the web server (see Configuring the web server). The default port is 80.

Note
To access all Servers of the Axxon domain, it is enough to forward any single port of the web server.

2. When connecting using a web browser or mobile Client, use the Server's public IP address and the forwarded port of the
web server (see Starting the web client).
Example:

Appendices  –  770

     User Guide

To connect the web Client to the Axxon domain in this configuration, do the following:
1. On the router, forward the port 80 to the internal IP address of Server 1 and port 80.
2. When starting the web Client, use the router's public IP address and port 80.

10.9.4 Audio transmission from the Client's microphone behind NAT to the Server's or
camera's loudspeaker
Playing back sound from Client microphone on camera speakers

To transmit audio from the Client's microphone behind NAT to the Server's or camera's loudspeaker, do the following:
1. On the Client, specify a unique port range and an external router's public IP address. Follow the steps below:
a. Add an NGP_CLIENT_PORT_BASE environmental variable and set its value to the first port number in the range
(see Appendix 10. Creating system variable).
b. Add an NGP_CLIENT_PORT_SPAN environmental variable and set its value to the number of ports in the range.

Attention!
We recommend you to use no less than 100 ports. 

Appendices  –  771

     User Guide

Attention!
If you have multiple Clients within your network, their port ranges must not overlap. 

c. Add an NGP_ALT_ADDR environmental variable and set its value to the public IP address of the externa router.
2. Configure forwarding of the specified ports on both external and internal router.
Example. 

To transmit audio from microphones connected to Client 1 and Client 2 to the Server's or camera's loudspeaker, do the
following:
1. On Client 1, set port range to 20555-21554, and the public IP address of your Internet provider's router.
2. On Client 2, set port range to 21555-22554, and the public IP address of your Internet provider's router.
3. Configure port forwarding on the internal router:
a. ports 20555-21554 to the internal IP address of Client 1 and ports 20555-21554;
b. ports 21555-22554 to the internal IP address of Client 2 and ports 21555-22554;
4. Configure port forwarding on the provider's router:
a. router ports 20555-21554 to the IP address of the internal router and ports 20555-21554;
b. router ports 21555-22554 to the IP address of the internal router and ports 21555-22554;

10.10 Appendix 10. Creating system variable

To add a new system variable:
1. Go to Control panel → System → Advanced system settings.
2. Click the Environment Variables... button.

Appendices  –  772

     User Guide

3. Under System variables group, click the New ... button.

4. Specify the name and value of variable.

5. Click the OK button.

Appendices  –  773